9 - Sharp

Version 2.3
Produced in July. 2002
R
SCompact
image sensor camera
Model name
IV-S20
User's Manual
Applied for software version 2.09 (S2.09)
Thank you for purchasing the SHARP IV-S20 compact image sensor camera. Read this user's manual carefully to thoroughly familiarize yourself with the functions and proper procedures for operation.
Store this user's manual in a safe place. We are confident that the manual will be helpful whenever you
encounter a problem.
Important
- This user's manual provides you with information about the IV-S20 softwares version 2.09.
All IV-S20 cameras with an S2.09 mark are compatible with software version 2.09. (See
page 5-1.)
- For details about the upgrade version of the software, see Appendix 2.
Notes
- This manual was written with the utmost care. However, if you have any questions or inquiries
concerning the product, please feel free to contact our dealers or us.
- Copying all or part of this booklet is prohibited.
- The contents of this manual may be revised or modified for improvement without prior notice.
Safety Precautions
Read this user's manual and the attached documents carefully before installing, operating, or performing
maintenance and checking, in order to keep the machine working correctly. Make sure you understand all of the
equipment details, safety information, and cautions before using this machine, In this user's manual, the safety
precautions are divided into "Dangers" and "Cautions" as follows.
Danger
: Improper handling is likely to lead to death or serious injury.
Caution
: Improper handling may lead to injury or damage to equipment.
Even when only a
Caution is given, serious results may occur depending on the
circumstances. In all cases, important points are described. Be sure to follow the
advice given.
The following symbols are used to prohibit or explain required action.
: This means do not do what is described. For example, prohibited disassembly is shown as
: This means an action you must take. For example, a ground connection that must be made is
.
shown as
(1) Installation
Caution
- Use only in the environment specified in the catalog, rinstruction manual, and user's manual.
Electric shock, fire or malfunction may result if used in high temperature, high humidity, dusty
or corrosive atmosphere environments, or if excessive vibration or impact occurs.
- Install only as described in the manual.
An improper installation may cause the equipment to fail, breakdown, or malfunction.
- Never leave wire cuttings or any other foreign matter lying about.
A fire, breakdown or malfunction may result from objects left near the equipment.
(2) Wiring
Caution
- Do not connect cameras, other than those specified (IV-S20C1/S30C1/S30C2), to the main
housing of the IV-S20. Connecting any other camera may damage the IV-S20 or the camera.
- Connect only to the specified power source.
Connection to the wrong power source may cause a fire.
- Wiring should be performed by a qualified electrician.
Improper wiring may lead to a fire, breakdown or electric shock.
(3) Use
Danger
- Don't touch the terminals while the power is supplied or you may receive an electric shock.
- Assemble an external emergency stop circuit and interlock circuit (outside of the IV-S20 compact image sensor camera). Otherwise a breakdown or damage to the machine may occur due
to a problem with the IV-S20.
Caution
- Take special care to follow all safety guidelines, if you are changing the parameters for the
operating conditions or performing an "enforced output," "run," or "stop" during operation.
Misoperation may damage the machine or cause an accident.
- Turn ON the power supplies in the specified sequence. Turning ON the supplies in the wrong
order may lead to a machine breakdown or cause an accident.
.
(4) Maintenance
Prohibit
- Don't disassemble or modify the camera.
Fires, breakdowns or malfunctions may occur, if the camera is disassembled.
Caution
- Turn OFF the power source before connecting or disconnecting the IV-S20.
If you don't, electric shocks, malfunctions or breakdowns may occur.
Organization of This Manual
The following chart shows the sequence of the chapters to be read for details about each operation.
(Operation)
(Contents)
1 System
design
- Review the system configuration (sysChapter 1. Overview
tem equipment, measurement items, in- Chapter 2. Precautions for Use
stallation requirements, etc.).
Chapter 4. System configuration
Chapter 6. Installation Conditions and
Method
Chapter 16. Specifications
2 Installation/
assembly
- Make connections, assemble, and
wire the system equipment (an IVS20, camera, peripheral equipment,
etc.)
(Chapters in this manual)
Chapter 5. Part Name and Function
Chapter 6. Installation Conditions and
Method
Chapter 2. Precautions for Use
3 Configuration - Run the software, and set the input/
output requirements (communication
requirements) with the externally connected equipment.
Chapter 7. Setting and Operation Outline
Chapter 11. Setting the Input/Output
Conditions
Chapter 13. Communication (General
Purpose Serial Interface)
Chapter 14. Computer link
4 Measurement - Run the software, and set the measurement requirements. (set the meascondition
urement/inspection areas, pass/fail
settings
criterie)
Chapter 7.
Chapter 8.
5 Miscellaneous - Set as necessary.
settings
Chapter 12. Other Settings and Operation
6 Test/
inspection
Chapters 3, 7 to 12, 13, 14, and
Chapter 15. Troubleshooting
- Perform an actual test using the requirements you enterd.
7 Maintenance - Procedures for performing ordinary inspections.
Setting and Operation Outline
Run Menu Conditions and
Settings
Chapter 9. Setting the Condition of Each
Object Type
Chapter 10. PC functions
Chapter 15. Troubleshooting
Chapter 1: Overview
Chapter 2: Precautions for Use
Chapter 3: Operation Examples
Chapter 4: System Configuration
Chapter 5: Part Names and Functions
Chapter 6: Installation Conditions and Method
Chapter 7: Setting and Operating Outlines
Chapter 8: Run Menu Conditions and Settings
Chapter 9: Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type
Chapter 10: PC Function
Chapter 11: Setting the Input/Output Conditions
Chapter 12: Other Settings and Operations
Chapter 13: Communication
Chapter 14: Computer Link
Chapter 15: Troubleshooting
Chapter 16: Specifications
Glossary
Appendix and Arphabetical index
Table of contents
Safety PrecautionsSafety Precautions
Organization of this manual
Chapter 1: Overview ............................................................................................. 1-1 to 7
1-1 Features 1-1
[1] Features of the CCD camera 1-1
[2] IV-S20 features 1-2
1-2 Measurement program 1-3
[1] Positional deviation/absolute position measurement 1-3
[2] Degree of match for shape and size 1-4
[3] Distance and angle measurement 1-4
[4] Lead inspection 1-5
[5] Area measurement by binary conversion 1-5
[6] Counting quantities by binary conversion 1-6
[7] Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion 1-6
[8] Existence inspection by point measurement 1-7
Chapter 2: Precautions for Use ................................................................................... 2-1
Chapter 3 : Operation Examples ........................................................................ 3-1 to 49
3-1 Area measurement by binary conversion 3-2
3-2 Position measurement 3-8
3-3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 3-15
3-4 Distance measurement 3-22
3-5 Lead inspection 3-31
3-6 Existence inspection by point measurement 3-38
3-7 Position correction (example of point measurement) 3-44
3-8 Use of numeric calculations (example of shape and size inspection) 3-45
Chapter 4: System Configuration ....................................................................... 4-1 to 7
4-1 Basic system configuration 4-1
4-2 System configuration examples 4-4
[1] System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external trigger, such as a photo
sensor 4-4
[2] System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD sensor trigger 4-5
[3] System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a personal computer
4-7
Chapter 5: Part Names and Functions ............................................................... 5-1 to 5
5-1 IV-S20 main housing 5-1
5-2 Camera section 5-2
[1] Camera 5-2
[2] Cemera lens (IV-S20L16) 5-4
[3] Camera conversion cable (IV-S20HC3) 5-4
5-3 Remote key pad 5-5
C-1
Chapter 6: Installation Conditions and Method .............................................. 6-1 to 31
6-1 Installation conditions 6-1
[1] Lighting equipment 6-1
[2] Illuminance and shutter speed 6-3
[3] Optimum lens and resolution 6-4
6-2 Connection, installation, and wiring of IV-S20 main housing 6-8
[1] Connection 6-8
[2] Installation 6-10
[3] Connecting a power supply 6-12
[4] Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F) 6-14
[5] Connection for communications with personal computer (general purpose serial I/F) 6-16
[6] Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function 6-18
6-3 Connection and installation methods of camera (IV-S20C1, IV-S30C1/C2) 6-19
[1] Connecting and installation to the IV-S20C1 6-19
[2] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1 6-23
[3] Installing and connectiong the IV-S30C2 6-27
Chapter 7: Setting and Operating Outlines ...................................................... 7-1 to 14
7-1 Setting and operating procedures 7-1
7-2 Screen specifications 7-2
[1] Operation (run) screen 7-2
[2] Menu configuration 7-4
[3] Set condition configuration 7-7
[4] Image display 7-8
7-3 Remote key pad specifications 7-9
7-4 Operation flow 7-10
[1] Processing after power is turned ON and main loop processing 7-10
[2] Operation flow after a measurement start input signal is given 7-12
7-5 When using the IV-S30SP 7-14
Chapter 8: Run Menu Conditions and Settings ................................................ 8-1 to 10
[1] Output monitor 8-1
[2] Image capture 8-3
[3] Message display 8-4
[4] Pattern display 8-5
[5] Binary image display 8-6
[6] θ angle correction image display 8-7
[7] Crosshair cursor display 8-8
[8] Manually setting the object type 8-9
[9] Image display 8-10
[10] Main operations menu lock 8-10
C-2
Chapter 9 : Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type ............................. 9-1 to 117
9-1 Outline 9-1
9-2 Shared settings 9-3
[1] Window shape selection and settings 9-3
[2] Image settings 9-6
[3] Evaluation conditions 9-13
[4] Numerical calculations 9-14
[5] Position correction 9-20
[6] Comparative calculations between images 9-24
[7] Copying (editing) 9-28
[8] Editing after initialization 9-31
[9] Title registration 9-33
9-3 Positional deviation and absolute position measurement 9-34
9-4 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9-45
9-5 Distance and angle measurement 9-57
9-6 Lead inspection 9-72
9-7 Area measurement by binary conversion 9-82
9-8 Counting quantities by binary conversion 9-90
9-9 Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion 9-98
9-10 Existence inspection by point measurement 9-107
9-11 System settings 9-115
[1] Illuminance (light level) monitor 9-115
[2] Shutter speed 9-117
Chapter 10: PC Function .................................................................................. 10-1 to 16
10-1 Operation cycle 10-1
[1] Power ON sequence 10-2
[2] PC scan clycle 10-2
[3] Measurement processing cycle 10-2
10-2 Ladder circuit program creation 10-3
[1] Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit 10-3
[2] Procedure for setting the final output conditions in a ladder circuit 10-8
10-3 Program examples (shape and positional deviation inspection) 10-14
10-4 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit 10-15
10-5 PC monitor screen 10-16
Chapter 11: Setting the Input/Output Conditions .......................................... 11-1 to 22
11-1 Outline 11-1
11-2 Measurement start input and result output settings 11-3
11-3 CCD trigger 11-17
11-4 Setting for serial communications 11-18
11-5 Computer link 11-19
11-6 Output block assignment (computer link output and general purpose serial output) 11-20
[1] Data in specified blocks 11-20
[2] Setting (operating) procedure 11-21
11-7 Gain/offset adjustment 11-22
C-3
Chapter 12: Other Settings and Operations ([SYSTEM SETUP] menu) ......... 12-1 to 8
12-1 Settings 12-1
[1] Change the Japanese or English display mode 12-1
[2] Download all parameters 12-2
[3] Total initialization 12-3
[4] Saving to flash memory 12-4
12-2 Maintenance 12-5
[1] Camera position adjustment 12-5
[2] Self-diagnosis 12-8
Chapter 13: Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface) ................. 13-1 to 25
13-1 List of processing functions 13-1
13-2 Data flow 13-3
[1] When the measurement execution processing code is 10, 11, 12 or 13 13-3
[2] When the measurement execution processing code is 18, 19, 1A or 1B 13-3
[3] Processing other than measurement execution processing 13-3
13-3 Communication format 13-4
13-4 Processing functions 13-6
[1] Measurement execution functions 13-6
[2] Result reading 13-9
[3] Setting, initialization, and diagnosis of the operation screen 13-12
13-5 Measurement data blocks 13-15
[1] Number of blocks 13-15
[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function) 13-15
Chapter 14: Computer Link .............................................................................. 14-1 to 31
14-1 Compatible models 14-1
14-2 Data flow 14-2
14-3 Register setting 14-3
[1] Number of blocks 14-5
[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function) 14-5
14-4 Interface 14-16
[1] Setting items for the IV-S20 14-16
[2] Connection with a Sharp PC 14-17
[3] Connection with a Mitsubishi PC 14-23
[4] Connection with an OMRON PC 14-26
14-5 Program examples 14-28
Chapter 15: Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 15-1 to 5
[1] Symptoms and checks 15-1
[2] Causes of termination codes (when an error occurs) and remedies 15-3
[3] Maintenance 15-5
C-4
Chapter 16: Specifications ................................................................................. 16-1 to 7
16-1 IV-S20 main housing 16-1
[1] Image processing specifications 16-1
[2] PC specifications 16-2
[3] Hardware specifications 16-2
16-2 Camera section 16-3
[1] Camera main body (IV-S20C1) 16-3
[2] Camera (IV-S30C1/C2) 16-4
[3] Camera lens (IV-S20L16) 16-5
[4] Camera conversion cable (IV-S20HC3) 16-5
[5] Camera extension cable (IV-S30EC2/EC4) 16-5
16-3 Peripheral device 16-6
[1] Monochrome monitor IV-09MT specifications 16-6
[2] LED lighting equipment IV-60LD specifications 16-7
Glossary ............................................................................................................... G-1 to 11
Appendix ................................................................................................................ A-1 to 6
Support tool available on the markert A-1
Software version information A-3
Arphabetical index ............................................................................................... I-1 to 14
C-5
Overview
Chapter 1: Overview
The IV-S20 compact image sensor camera is equiped with a CCD image sensor, which captures square
pixels in full range. Employing this state-of-art device, it can be used to pick up high contrast images at high
speed.
It is also easy to interface to a personal computer and a programmable controller, and it can be used in a
variety of production lines such as those for electrical, electronic, semi-conductor or liquid crystal parts as
well as for food, chemical, cosmetics, and other production lines.
1-1 Features
[1] Features of the CCD camera
(1) Arrangement of the square pixels
The vertical and horizontal pixel aspect ratio is 1:1, so there is no need for image correction. This
allows maximum precision and processing speed.
CCD pickup with rectangular pixels
CCD pickup with square pixels
1
Pixel
1.28
1
1
(2) Full pixel reading (progressive scan)
The IV-S20 employs a full pixel reading system which scans every horizontal lines on the CCD in
order. This system does not suffer from reduced image resolution which is caused by the
conventional NTSC interlaced system which only reads half the lines in each frame.
- Comparison of capturing moving objects image
Progressive scan system Conventional NTSC interlaced system
512
Odd line
480
Even line
Full line
Even line
Image signal
Odd line
(3) Random shutter
The IV-S20 shutter operation can be triggered by an external signal or by the CCD. It can be used
to mesure moving object.
(4) Reading full and partial images
Since the IV-S20 can be used to capture just the part of the image needed for image processing, it
can read images at very high speeds.
Full image reading
Partial image reading
480 lines
(approx. 33 ms)
120 lines
(approx. 8 ms)
(5) CCD trigger
The IV-S20 samples a part of the CCD (which can be set to any position with according to item ),
and it will starts shutter operation when value of the area being monitored exceeds 50%. With this
function, there is no need for an additional photo sensor or proximaty sensor. Since the IV-S20 can
set the CCD triggering position for each item being processed, it can shorten the time needed to
change the items being processed on a production line.
Item 1
Item 2
Moving direction
Moving direction
Window for triggering
(6) The C mount module and back plane focus can be adjusted
Since the IV-S20 uses a standerd C mount module for installing the lens, it can be used to adjust the
back plane focus and is convenient for use with a fixed focus lens or for proximaty shots.
1-1
1
Overview
1
[2] IV-S20 features
(1) Gray scale search using normalization correlation
256 gray levels
The IV-S20 processes 256 gray level images using template matching
with normalization correlation. This improves inspection and measurement precision without being affected by variations in lighting.
(2) Sub-pixel level precision
When the IV-S20 looks for the position of an object using gray scale
512 pixels
pixels
search function, it can calculate a finer position than the actual CCD 480
(horizontal)
(vertical)
pixel size by interpolation to achieve sub-pixel scale precision.
Pixel detection
Camera image
Image search with
(3) Simultaneous shutter triggering of two cameras
at sub-pixels
conventional system
When a trigger signal is input, two cameras will start
their shutter operation at the same time, and transfer
the captured image signals at the same time. This can
reduce the total processing time for taking simultaDetection point
Detection point
Pixel
neous pictures of moving objects.
(4) 8 kinds of integrated measuring programs, including measurement and inspection functions
The IV-S20 integrates the following measurement programs: Positional deviation, absolute position
measurement, matching level inspection, distance and angle measurement, lead inspection, area
measurement by binarization, counting by binarization, labeling measurements by binarization, and
point measurements. The IV-S20 can process any three measurements from 7 programs, plus positional deviation and absolute position measurements, with one scanned image.
(5) Binarization processing is effective in controlling variations in brightness
Since the binarization process employs a brightness level monitoring function, the threshold value
will follow variations in brightness.
(6) Image pre-processing and binary noise elimination function
In order to process images precisely and reliably, the binarization process uses edge emphasis,
edge extraction, and leveling operations. To eliminate noise, "binary increase _ decrease," "decrease _ increase," and "area filters" are available.
(7) Rotation correction
Rotation correction determines the angle for correction by locating two points with a gray scale
search and edge detection.
(8) Calculation between images
Calculation of difference between images captured by camera 1 and camera 2, and calculation of
differences between a stored standard image and captured images are both possible. Subtraction
and absolute difference in value can be used for calculation.
(9) Integrated PC function
The integrated calculation functions of a programmable controller are included so that the IV-S20
can directly output detection and measurement results after calculation external equipment. This
can greatly reduce the total processing time and produce cost savings when setting up a system.
(10) High speed programless communication
The IV-S20 has a computer link function and general-purpose serial communication function for
communication with external devices. It can have a user settable communication speed up to 115.2
kbps, which contributes to increased processing speed for the whole system.
The computer link function can write the measurement results to an external programmable controller register without any programing.
Using the general-purpose serial communication function, the IV-S20 can execute commands from
a host computer, and return the result to the host computer.
(11) Compact
The IV-S20 can be connected to a maximum of two cameras. It is the smallest image processing
system in the industry with the dark and light processing capabilities (as of August 1998).
(12) Simultaneous display of two screens
The screen can display two images from two cameras alternately, or simultaneously by dividing the
screen into two horizontally. When displaying multiple images, each camera image can be positioned in the upper, middle, or lower views.
(13) Crosshair cursor display
A crosshair cursor is displayed. This cursor is convenient for manual positioning.
(14) Display language changeable between Japanese and English
Menus and other messages displayed on the screen can be switched between Japanese and English.
1-2
Overview
1-2 Measurement program
The IV-S20 integrates the following eight measurement programs: Positional deviation, absolute position
measurement, matching inspection, distance and angle measurement, lead inspection, area
measurement by binary conversion, object counting by binary conversion, labeling measurements by
binary conversion, and point measurements.
You can select operating condition parameters to suit your application of the IV-S20.
[1] Positional deviation/absolute position measurement
The gray scale search function makes it possible to measure positional deviation as
Purpose well as the absolute position.
· It is also possible to detect the position of sub-pixel units with great accuracy.
Application Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates.
[Determining the location of the positioning (the fiducial mark) mark that identifies the
position of the substrate]
(1) 1 point search: Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y directions
Reference image: Center coordinates (X1,Y1)
Inspection Image: Center coordinates (X2,Y2)
[Measured result]
Center coordinates: (X2,Y2)
Amount of deviation: X2-X1, Y2-Y1
Y2-Y1
Search area
X2-X1
(2) 2 point search: Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well
as rotational deviation
Reference image a: Center coordinates (Xa1,Ya1)
Inspection image a: Center coordinates (Xa2,Ya2)
Reference image b: Center coordinates (Xb1,Yb1)
Example
Ya2-Ya1
Inspection image b: Center coordinates (Xb2,Yb2)
θ
Search area
(image a)
Yb2-Yb1
Xa2-Xa1
Anglar deviation: (θ)
Xb2-Xb1 Search area (image b)
[Measured result]
· Center coordinates of image a: (Xa2,Ya2)
· Amount of deviation of image a: Xa2-Xa1, Ya2-Ya1
· Center coordinates of image b: (Xb2,Yb2)
· Amount of deviation of image b: Xb2-Xb1, Yb2-Yb1
· Deviation angle: (θ)
· The deviation angle (θ), determined in the 2 point search, is used to readjust the
rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 3.
Detailed
instruction
・Operating instruction example _ See “3-2 Position measurement.”
・Setting measurement program _ See “9-3 Positional deviation/absolute position
measurement.”
1-3
1
Overview
Search area
for positioning
Criterion image
for positioning
Criterion image
for positioning
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S20
Example
Search area
for positioning
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S20
1
[2] Degree of match for shape and size
Compare a good criterion image to an objective image by inspecting matching levels
Purusing the garay scale seach function. (Determine whether the port is acceptable or NG by
pose checking similarities between the criterion image and the workpiece image.)
A matching level comparison using binary images is also possible.
Detect positional deviation of labels , detect contamination of different parts, inspect the mounting
Appli- of electronic parts on PC boards, detect mis-print, inspect for missing electric parts such as
cation
terminals, and simple letter inspection.
[Detecting label deviations on packages]
Criterion image
for measuring object
Criterion image
for measuring object
▲Good label
▲NG label
・Inspection procedure
1 Conduct a gray scale search of the criterion image position
2 Correct the position of the object being measured from the coordinates for the
criterion image obtained in item 1 above.
3 If the matching level of the object image is low, the IV-S20 can determine that the
label position is NG.
Detailed ・Operating instruction example _ See “3-3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size”
instruc- ・Setting measurement program _ See “9-4 Degree of match inspection for shape and size”
tion
[3] Distance and angle measurement
Purpose
Measure the distance and angle of two point using the center detection function in a gray
scale search and the edge detection function, as well as center of gravity detection by
Application
Measurement of mounted electronic parts
[Measuring IC packages]
Criterion image a
Search area
(criterion image b)
Example
Search area
(criterion image a)
Criterion image b
Register criterion image a and b by matching edges of the IC package.
・Measurement procedure
1 Find the center points of criterion images a and b using a two point gray scale search.
2 Determine the distance between the two center points.
Detailed ・Operating instruction example _ See “3-4 Distance measurement”
instruc・Setting measurement program _ See “9-5 Distance and angle measurement”
tion
1-4
Overview
[4] Lead inspection
PurBased on positional information obtained from the gray scale search function, inspect the
pose condition of IC leads and connector pins. (No. of detected lead pins: Max. 128 pieces)
Application
1
Inspect IC leads or connector pins
[Inspect the layout of the IC leads or connector pins]
P1
P2
P3
K4
Inspection line
Example
L4
K3
L3
K2
L2
K1
L1
Lead
［Lead inspection］
· P1 to P3: Distance between
leads
· K1 to K4: Mid point of each
lead
· L1 to L4: Lead length
· Number of leads
· Detect missing or incorrectly
spaced leads
· Inspection procedure
1 Calculate the mid points (K1 to K4) of the leads along the inspection line.
2 Look for bent leads by comparing the difference between the maximum and
minimum distances of P1 to P3 .
3 Check the maximum and minimum length of the leads (L1 to L4).
Detailed · Operating instruction example _ See “3-5 Lead inspection”
instruc· Setting measurement program _ See “9-6 Lead inspection”
tion
[5] Area measurement by binary conversion
Purpose
Detect the existence/absence and size of a workpiece when “the workpiece is one point” or
“measurement position is fixed.”
· Convert the specified pixel area to binary values and measure the size of the white area.
Check for the existence of bearings inserted by a bearing insert machine, prevent contamAppli- ination of different parts in automobile production lines, determine the type of water-proof
cation caps, check for the existence/absence of bottle labels, inspect the cuircuit traces on
PWBs, check for the presence of grease, check for existence of frozen foods.
[Measured result]
• Workpiece area
Workpiece
Example
• Inspection procedure
Capture image
Convert to binary values
Measure (area)
Detailed · Operating instruction example _ See “3-1 Area measurement by binary conversion”
instruc· Setting measurement program _ See “9-7 Area measurement by binary conversion”
tion
1-5
Overview
[6] Counting quantities by binary conversion
1
Purpose
Application
Example
Checks the number of objects (max. 3000 pcs.) when there is more than one object in an
image. Measurement of the object’s position is optional.
- When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image, the white areas
are measured or identified as separate objects and counted.
Counting pieces of food or parts
[Measured result]
Æ Number of workpieces/total area siz
Workpiece
- Inspection procedure
Capture image
Convert to binary values
Measure (quantity, total area size)
Detailed
instruc- - Setting measurement program _See "9-8 Counting quantities by binary conversion"
tion
[7] Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Purpose
When there are several objects and the measuring position is arbitrary, the presence or
absence of objects and the size of the objects can be determined.
- The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image. The number of objects, total
size of the white area (the objects) and the area, center of gravity, main axis angle, fillet
diameter, and circumference of each white area can be measured.
Application
Counting the number of food products or parts, measuring the sloped angle or center of
gravity of parts, and measuring the size of food products.
[Measurement of 6 objects]
No.1
No.2
No.3
Objects
No.4
No.5
No.6
Example
[Measured result]
Æ Object identification (labeling and
numbering), number of objects
present, total area
Æ Area, center of gravity, main axis
angle, fillet diameter, and circumference of each object (No.1 to
No.6).
- Inspection procedure
Image capture
Convert to binary values
Label (with serial numbers)
Measurement (area, gravity center, spindle axis angle,
fillet diameter, and circumference )
Detailed
instruc- - Setting measurement program _ See "9-9 Object identification by binary conversion"
tion
1-6
Overview
[8] Existence inspection by point measurement
Purpose
The presence or absence of target objects is examined.
· A simple black or white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of binary
images.
· The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged, and a decision is made
whether or not it is within the specified lightness range in gray scale images.
Checking the presence or absence of packed parts, inspecting the working
Applications condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes, and sorting household
electric appliances
[Inspection at 6 points]
Number of points (max.)
: 128 points at average light levels
256 points in binary images
Point size: 2 m x 2n pixels
(m, n = 1 to 16)
Example
· Inspection sequence
Image capture
Detailed
instruction
Binary image
conversion
Black/white evaluation
of points
Average light
level
Light level evaluation
of points
• Operating instruction example
_ See “3-6 Existance inspection by point measurement”
• Setting measurement program
_ See “9-10 Existance inspection by point measuremet”
1-7
1
使用上のご注意
Chapter 2: Precautions for use
Pay attention to the points below when handling the IV-S20.
(1) Installation
- Each device in the IV-S20 system must be installed in an environment as specified in this manual.
(Operating ambient temperature: 0 to 45˚C, operating ambient humidity: 35 to 85%RH (noncondensing.))
- Do not install the devices in the following locations. Installation in any of these locations may cause
electrical shock, fire, or malfunction of the devices.
1. Places exposed to direct sunlight
2. Places with exposed to corrosive gases
3. Places with excessive amounts of dust, salt, or metal powder in the air.
4. Places exposed to water
(2) Installation
- Make sure to tighten the mounting and terminal screws securely and check everything before
supplying power. A loose screw may cause faulty operation.
(3) Power source
- Do not use the IV-S20 (power supply for the IV-S20 main housing) power supply with any other
equipment.
- Do not turn OFF the power while the menu is displayed or while communicating with external
equipment. Turning OFF the power may erase the data settings.
(4) Data saving
- The data set by using the remote setting key is temporarily stored in the memory (RAM) of the IVS20. However, it is not stored in the flash memory yet. Therefore, make sure to save the data
settings before returning to the operation screen from the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu by pressing the
SET key. If you do not save the data, the data will disappear if you turn OFF the power to the IV-S20
main unit or if you change the item numbers to be processed.
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING: (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM: EXEC
0OPERATIONS
Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM or 0 OPERATIONS menu line and
press the SET key. The message below will appear on the upper part of the
screen. Press the SET key at this point. All of the image data and data settings
will be stored in the flash memory.
DATA SAVE? (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
- We recommend that you save the data settings and reference images on a floppy diskette using the
data backup tool.
(5) Storing the devices
- Do not put any object on top of any of the devices, or the device may malfunction.
(6) Maintenance
- Be careful not to get any dirt or stains on the CCD surface or camera lens. This may cause mis
measurement.
2-1
2
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Chapter 3 : Operation Examples
This chapter explains how to operate each measurement program. Be sure you understand the general
operation procedures described in this chapter.
Item
Page
3-1 Area measurement by binary conversion
3·2 to 7
3-2 Position measurement
3·8 to 14
3-3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size
3·15 to 21
3-4 Distance measurement
3·22 to 30
3-5 Lead inspection
3·31 to 37
3-6 Existence inspection by point measurement
3·38 to 43
3-7 Position correction (example of point measurement)
3·44
3-8 Use of numeric caluculations (example of shape and size inspection)
3·45 to 49
[Preparation for operation]
(1) Connection
Before turning ON the power, connect the IV-S20 main housing, the camera, monitor, remote key
pad and power supply (24 VDC). Connect the camera to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA 1) on
the main housing.
See Chapter 6 "Installation Conditions and Method" for connecting procedures.
Camera 1
Monitor
Remote setting key pad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
(2) Turning ON the power
Turn ON the monitor and the 24 VDC power supply.
The monitor displays the MAIN OPS MENU. (It does not show any images.)
[Procedure for complete initialization]
In sections 3-1 to 3-6, the programs are discussed in their initial configuration.
Before starting any program, perform the following "total initialization" operation.
1. On the MAIN OPS MENU (see the following page), move the cursor to SET-SCRN item using
the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will appear.
2
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
2. Move the cursor to 7INIT ALL PARMS (total initialization) using the up and down keys, and
press the SET key.
- The INITIALIZE DATA? message will be displayed on the upper area of the screen.
3. Press the SET key. -The system will be initialized.
4. Press the ESC key. -The display will return to the MAIN OPS MENU without initialization.
3-1
3
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
3-1 Area measurement by binary conversion
An example of area measurement is given using the following object. The area will be measured by
counting the number of pixels after binary conversion.
Object to be measured (white)
3
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all conditions)
MAIN OPS MENU
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
(TYPE00)
MEAS.
ms
MEAS0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to SET-SCRN item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
-The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of object type) using the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
-The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-2
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
1
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
3
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to 0MEASUREMENT 1 and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu
［TYPE00-MEAS1］
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
1
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
3
3SELECT CAMERA
4COPY
5INITIALIZATION
6MEAS.PROG. COND
7EVALUATION COND
8NUMERIC CALC COND
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
0UPPER MENU
2
CAM1 CAM2
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1. Move the cursor to 1MEAS SELECTION (select measurement) and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to MEASR-BIN-AREA (area measurement by binary conversion) and press
the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6MEAS.PROG. COND (conditions of measurement program) and press
the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
(5) Operation on the [MEASURING COND] menu
1. Move the cursor to 1REGST NO. (register number) and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES, and press the SET key.
-Item 2will be highlighted.
1
3
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
00(0~15) REG.NO YES
1REGST NO.
2BINARY AREA COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3UPPER MENU
2
3. Move the cursor to 2BINARY AREA COND (condition for measurement window) with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [BIN.AREA SET] (binary zone setting) menu and a measurement window will be
displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-3
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the preceding page
3
(6) Image adjustment
1
F C1 H
Press the TRG/BRT key on the
remote key pad, and the level
(brightness of the screen) will be
switched between H and L.
Indicates Camera 1.
Measurement window
3
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of
the screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) of the camera lens (see page 5·1), so that the object to be
measured is clear and easily distinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To set a threshold value during the following binary zone setting procedure, the screen
must be in the freeze image mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for details
about the through/freeze mode.)
(7) Operation on the [BIN.AREA SET] menu screen (setting a measurement window)
1. Press the ESC key, and all the menus used for [BIN.AREA SET] will be displayed.
2
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208)LO.R(287,271)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLER ELLIPSE
3
5THRESHOLD VALUE
6INVERT B/W
7BINARY PROCESS
8IMAGE PRE-PROCESS
9BINARY NOIS FILTR
0NUM. OF FILTR PASS
qUPPER MENU
U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
NO YES
FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ
OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
NO EXP.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXP.
EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR.0(0~5)
- If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered,
press the ESC key. Only item 1will be displayed.
- A binary image will be displayed in the window.
2. Move the cursor to 2MEAS WINDOW POSIT with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
3. Surround the image to be measured with a window (rectangle, solid line).
- Move the cursor to MOVE, UP.L, or LO.R, and press the SET key. Then, position the window.
When the position is correct, press the SET key.
MOVE
The white rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
Measurement window
Object to be measured (white)
- After the window position has been defined, press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
3-4
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the preceding page
(8) Operation on the [BIN.AREA SET] menu screen (setting an image for binary conversion)
1
5THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
2
1. Move the cursor to 5THRESHOLD VALUE (threshold value) and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to L.LM (lower limit) with the left and right keys, and adjust the lower limit
threshold value with the up and down keys.
Lower limit threshold
(Adjustment of threshold value)
An example of adjustment is shown below, using a white object on a black background. When
the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image, if the lower limit is set higher, the
black part in the binary image will become larger. If the lower limit is set lower, the white part
will become larger. Increase and decrease the lower limit value, find the value at which the
white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts
growing. Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points. This will ensure
reliable operation.
The size of the white area changes
White
Black
depending on the threshold value setting.
255
As the value increases,
the black part grows larger.
Inspection image
0
White
Stable range *
As the value decreases,
the white part grows larger.
Horizontal coordinate
of the dotted line
Changing the lower limit threshold value
* If the stable range in the lower limit threshold
value is less than 20, (actual measurement)
measurement errors may occur.
3. After setting the lower limit, press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to qUPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
5. On the [MEASURING COND] menu, move the cursor to 3UPPER MENU and press the
SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
Continued on the following page
3-5
3
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the preceding page
(9) Setting the evaluation conditions and results output
1. On the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu, move the cursor to 7
EVALUATION COND (evaluation conditions) and press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
2
3
3
6
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15)
[OUT]
2AREA
000000~245760
NO
3MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
5
4UPPER MENU
4
2. Move the cursor to 1REGST NO. (register number) and press the SET key. Select the
desired number, in this case 00, using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 2AREA (size) and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to the upper limit value with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit you want to change with the left and right keys, and enter the value 002000
with the up and down keys.
2AREA
000000~002000 - After defining the upper limit, press the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to OUT (output) with the left and right keys.
· Select Y0 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
［OUT］
Y0
- After completing the settings, press the ESC key.
6. Move the cursor to 4UPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type :00, measurement: 1) menu.
(10) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
2. Press the ESC key, again.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data ?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■□□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change
from "SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE"
Note:
- If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
3. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
- If the cursor was moved to 0OPERATIONS in step 2 above, the screen will
automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page
3-6
Operation Examples (Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the preceding page
(11) Measuring the area
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the size of the object in the image in the window will be displayed as
a pixel count.
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 MEAS-BIN-AREA
[Display of the measured result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
Measuring time
3
REGST NO. 00(0~15)
AREA 001884 OK
Area (pixel count) and
evaluation result
*2
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*1
*2
The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when
all of the items have been evaluated acceptable.
If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
When measuring an object area with the binary image, only the size of the object is measured.
If the object meets to the conditions specified in step (9) (within the range between the upper
and lower limit values), "OK" will be displayed.
When the judgment result is OK, Y0 will be turned ON because we set it that way in step (9),
and a filled box will be displayed in the Y0 position at the bottom of the screen. (If the result
is NG, an empty box will be displayed in the Y0 position at the bottom of the screen.)
3-7
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
3-2 Position measurement
An example of the operation for measuring the deviation (from an absolute position) of a positioning mark
is shown below.
Positioning mark
3
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all condetions)
MAIN OPS MENU
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS.
ms
MEAS0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to SET-SCRN item and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of object type) and press the SET
key.
- [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-8
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu
1
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to 4MEAS.0, CAMERA1 (measurement 0 (camera 1)) and press the SET
key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS0] (type: 00, measurement: 0) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on [TYPE00-MEAS0] menu
2
［TYPE00-MEAS0］
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE
1
2COPY
EXEC←TYPE00-CAM1NO
3INITIALIZATION
EXEC
4MEAS.PROG.COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3
5EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8UPPER MENU
1. Move the cursor to 1SELECT MEAS. TYPE (selection of measurement) and press the SET
key.
2. Move the cursor to MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE (measurement of positional deviation) and
press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 4MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions of measurement program) and press
the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
(5) Operation on the [MEASURING COND] menu
1. Move the cursor to 1REGST NO. (register number) and press the SET key.
Move the cursor to YES and press the SET key.
- Items 2to 4will be displayed.
［MEASURING COND］(TYPE00-MEAS0-POS-DEVIATION)
1
1REGST NO.
0(0~7) REG.NO YES
2SELECT MODE
1P-SCH 2P-SCH 1P-EDGE
2
2P-EDGE 1P-SCH＋1P-EDGE
3GRAY-SCALE COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3
4EDGE DETECT COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5UPPER MENU
1
2. Move the cursor to 2SELECT MODE and press the SET key. Move the cursor to 1P-SCH (1
point search) and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 3 GRAY-SCALE COND (gray scale search condition) and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window, and search window will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-9
3
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
3
(6) Image adjustment
F C1 H
Image window
1
Press the TRG/BRT key on the
remote key pad, and the level
(brightness of the screen) will be
switched between H and L.
Indicates camera 1.
Search window
3
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0) RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of
the screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) of the camera lens (see page 5·1), so that the object to be
measured is clear and easily distinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations, the
screen must be in the freeze image mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for
details about the through/freeze mode.)
(7) Operation for gray scale search matching setting
1. Press the ESC key, and all menus to be used for gray scale search matching setting will be
displayed.
2
4
1MES.WINDOW(MDL0) RECTANGLE XLINE YLINE
2REF IMAGE(MDL0)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0) CNTR FREE(256,240)
5CONTR.PIXEL(MDL0) 1 2 3
4
3
qDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH
wUPPER MENU
6
- If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered,
press the ESC key. Only item 1will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 2REF IMAGE (MDL0) (reference image) and press the SET key.
3. Surround the image to be measured with a window (solid line).
- Move the cursor to MOVE, UP.L, or LO.R and press the SET key. Then, position the window.
MOVE
The white rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
When the position is correct, press the SET key.
Image window
Positioning mark
- After the image window position has been defined, move the cursor to REG. (register) with
left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to DISP (display) with the left and right keys and press the SET key. Then,
the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After checking the
image, press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
3-10
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
4. Press the ESC key, move the cursor to 3SEARCH AREA (search window) and press the
SET key.
5. Create a search window (dotted line) to be used as the search area.
- The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with
the image stored in step 3. The gray scale search function performs the search operation
(see the "Glossary").
- The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3.
Search window
3
- After defining the search window size and position, press the ESC key.
6. Move the cursor to wUPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
7. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] (type: 00, measurement: 0) menu.
(8) Operation on the [EVALUATION COND] (evaluation condition) menu
1. Move the cursor to 5EVALUATION COND and press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
［EVALUATION COND］ (TYPE00-MEAS0-POS-DEVIATION)
①REGST NO.
0(0∼7)
［OUT］
2
②X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0∼511.0
NO
③Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0∼479.0
NO
④X DEVIAT(MDL0)
000.0∼511.0
NO
⑤Y DEVIAT(MDL0)
000.0∼479.0
NO
⑥MATCH(MDL0)
−10000∼＋10000
NO
3
4
5
⑬MAKE A TEST RUN
⑭UPPER MENU
(SET KEY)
2. Move the cursor to 1REGST NO. (register number) and press the SET key. Move the
number to 0 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6MATCH (MDL0) and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to +09000 with
the up and down keys.
(Criteria for a successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
6MATCH(MDL0）
：
+09000~+10000
- After defining the lower limit, press the SET key.
5. Press the ESC key, move the cursor to r
UPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] (type: 00, measurement: 0) menu.
6. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
Continued on the following page
3-11
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(9) Setting the final evaluation output condition
3
This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally (see page 3-14).
- The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112. When the final
evaluation result is OK, C112 is ON, and when the result is NG, it is OFF. The result of final
evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112.
1. On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu, move the cursor to r
FINAL OUTPUT COND (final output conditions) and press the SET key.
- The RESULTS OUTPUT (final evaluation conditions) menu will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 1PAGE.NO. (register number) and press the SET key. Move the cursor
to YES and press the SET key.
- Items 2to 5will be displayed.
［RESULTS OUTPUT］
1PAGE.NO.
2SET POSITION
3
3INPUT SIGNAL
4
(TYPE00)
2
(0~7) REG.NO YES
4
MOVE
AUXRLY C112(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~6)
TMR TM0(0~7) CNT CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15) OUT Y00(0~15)
2
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
DEL.
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUT Y00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL.
5
6UPPER MENU
6
[PAGE 0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
3
3. Move the cursor to 2SET POSITION (position to set) and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the 0th column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up, down, left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 3INPUT SIGNAL and press the SET key.
- Select AUXRLY C000 (0 to 127) with the left and right keys, change the setting to "C112"
with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- A logic symbol will be displayed in the 0 column of INPUT 0.
[PAGE0]
0
INPUT0
LOGIC
C112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
5. Move the cursor to 5OUTPUT SIGNAL and press the SET key.
- Select OUT.Y00 (0 to 15) with the left and right keys. Specify Y00 with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- A symbol indicating an output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
C112
6
7
OUT
Y00
6. Move the cursor to 6UPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
Continued on the following page
3-12
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(10) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data ?) (YES=[MOVE]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change
from "SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE."
Note:
· If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
2. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
- If the cursor was moved to 0OPERATIONS in step 1 above, the screen will
automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page
3-13
3
Operation Examples (Position measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(11) Measuring the positional deviation
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the result of measuring the positional deviation (absolute position)
from the stored positioning mark image will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
3
REGST NO.0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0)X= 379.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0)Y= 214.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL0) X= -001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL0) Y= +000.0OK
MATCH (MDL0) +09735 OK
[Display of measured result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
Measuring time
Center coordinates of new image
window, and judgment result
Deviation of the new object in the
window and final evaluation
Degree of match (*2)
Search window
Positioning mark
Image window
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*3
*1
The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when
all of the items have been evaluated acceptable.
If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
*2
"MATCH:+09735" means that the degree of match (percentage of pixels that match) between
pixels in the new image and the stored image is 97.35%.
[The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match]
In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match, first an image of a good
specimen is stored for reference. Then, an image of defective specimen is compared for
degree of match. Finally an image of another good specimen is compared. These
comparisons establish the degree of match to be used for setting the limits used for working
comparisons.
For example, the degree of match for a non-defective object is 90% or more and that for a
defective object is 70% or less, then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to
approx. 85%. This allows the evaluation acceptability to be made.
*3 When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When
the result is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in
step (9) for final evaluation output.
3-14
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
3-3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Below is an example of an operation to determine the degree of match of the images 0 and 1, and the
coordinates of the detection points with respect to the following object.
Image 0
Image 1
Detection point 0
Detection point 1
Object to be measured
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all conditions)
MAIN OPS MENU
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS.
ms
MEAS0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to [SET-SCRN] item and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of object type) and press the SET
key.
- The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-15
3
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
3
1
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to 0 MEASUREMENT 1 and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu
［TYPE00-MEAS1］
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
1
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
3
3SELECT CAMERA
4COPY
5INITIALIZATION
6MEAS.PROG. COND
7EVALUATION COND
8NUMERIC CALC COND
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
0UPPER MENU
2
CAM1 CAM2
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1. Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION (selection of measurement) and press the SET
key.
2. Move the cursor to CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH (degree of match inspection) and press the
SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6 MEAS.PROG. COND (conditions of measurement program) and press
the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-16
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(5) Operation on the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu
1. Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO. (register number) and press the SET key. Move the
cursor to YES and press the SET key.
- Items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
1
2
3
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15) REG.NO YES
2MODE
GRAY-IMG-PROC BINARY-IMG-PROC
3MODEL 0 POSITION NO-SEARCH SEARCH
4MODEL 1 MEAS.OBJ NO YES(NO-SEARCH) YES(SEARCH)
5EVALUATE CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6UPPER MENU
1
2
3
2. Move the cursor to 3 MODEL 0 POSITION (model 0, positioning) and press the SET key.
Move the cursor to SEARCH and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA (criteria condition) and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window, and search window will be
displayed.
(6) Image adjustment
3
1
F C1 H
Image window
Press the TRG/BRT key on
the remote key pad, and the
brightness of the screen will
be switched between H and L.
Search window
Indicates camera 1.
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0) RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of
the screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) of the camera lens (see page 5-1), so that the object to be
measured is clear and easily distinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations, the
screen must be in the freeze image mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for
details about the through/freeze mode.)
Continued on the following page
3-17
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(7) Operation for the gray scale search matching setting (setting the reference image 0)
1. Press the ESC key, and all menus to be used for setting the gray scale search conditions will
be displayed.
3
2
5
6
1MES.WINDOW(MDL0) RECTANGLE XLINE YLINE
2REF IMAGE(MDL0)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0) CNTR FREE(256,240)
5CONTR.PIXEL(MDL0) 1 2 3
4
3
qDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH
wUPPER MENU
7
- If the menu overlaps the image to be measured, so that further image setting is hindered,
press the ESC key. Only item 1 will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 2 REF IMAGE (MDL0) (reference image) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
3. Create an image window (solid line) for use as the reference image.
- Move the cursor to MOVE, UP.L or LO.R with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
Then, position the window.
MOVE
The white rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
When the position is correct, press the SET key.
Image window (for setting the range where the
degree of match will be evaluated)
Image 0
Object to be measured
- After the image window position has been defined, move the cursor to REG. (register) with
the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to DISP (display) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Then,
the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After checking the
image, press the ESC key.
4. Press the ESC key and move the cursor to 3 SEARCH AREA (search window). Then, press
the SET key.
5. Create a search window (dotted line) to be used as the search area.
- The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with
the image stored in step 2 and 3. The gray scale search function performes the search
operation. (see "Glossary").
- The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3.
Search window (dotted line)
Object to be measured
- After defining the search window size and position, press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
3-18
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
6. Move the cursor to 4 DTECT COORD with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. (If
the crosshair cursor does not need to be moved, proceed to step 9.)
- Move the cursor to "FREE" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Move the
crosshair cursor to the detection point 0 with the up, down, left and right keys (in units of 1 pixel).
Move the crosshair cursor in the image
window to set detection point 0.
Object to be measured
- After defining the crosshair cursor position, press the SET key and ESC key.
7. Move the cursor to w UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu.
(8) Operation for gray scale search matching setting (setting the image 1)
1. On the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu, move the cursor to 1 REGST
NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Enter the number "01" with the up and down keys, move the cursor to YES with the left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 3 MODEL 0 POSITION (model 0, positioning) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key. Move the cursor to SEARCH (enable search) with the left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA (criteria conditions) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window, and search window, will be
displayed.
5. Create a reference image, search area and detection point 1 for image 1, the same as you did
when creating them in item (7).
Image 1
Image window (solid line)
Search window (dotted line)
Detection point 1
Object to be measured
6. Move the cursor to w UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
7. On the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu, move the cursor to 6
UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
(9) Operation on the [EVALUATION COND] menu
1. Move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation condition) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
［EVALUATION COND］ (TYPE00-MEAS1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15)
［OUT］
2
2MATCH.(MDL 0)
−10000~ +10000
NO
3
3X COORD.(MDL 0)
000.0~511.0
NO
4Y COORD.(MDL 0)
000.0~479.0
NO
5LIGT LVL(MDL 0)
000.0~255.0
NO
4
7
0MAKE A TEST RUN
qUPPER MENU
(SET KEY)
2. Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Enter the number 00 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 2 MATCH.(MDL0) (degree of match, model 0) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
Continued on the following page
3-19
3
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
4. Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select a digit with the left and right keys, and then set the value to +09000 with the up and
down keys. (Criteria for a successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
2MATCH (MDL 0)
3
+09000~+10000
- After defining the lower limit, press the SET key and ESC key.
5. Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Enter the number "01" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
6. Move the criteria for a successful match (90.00% to 100.00%) for registration No.01, the
same as you did in steps 3 and 4.
7. Move the cursor to q UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
8. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
(10) Setting the final evaluation output condition
This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally (see the following page).
- The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112. When the final
evaluation result is OK, C112 is ON, and when the result is NG, it is OFF. The result of final
evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112.
- The setting procedures are the same as described in item (9) in section 3-2 "Position
measurement."
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
C112
7
OUT
Y00
(11) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save the data ?) (YES=[MOVE]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE"
Note:
· If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main husing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
2. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
- If the cursor was moved to 0 OPERATIONS in step 1, the screen will automatically
return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page
3-20
Operation Examples (Degree of match inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(12) Degree of match inspection
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the inspection result for image 0 (registration No. 00) will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
[Display of inspection result]
Final evaluation result (*2)
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH
Measuring time
REGST NO. 00(0~15)
MATCH (MDL 0)
+ 09735 OK
X COORD. (MDL 0) X=090.0 OK
Y COORD. (MDL 0) Y=092.0 OK
LIGT LVL (MDL 0) 018.4 OK
Registration No.
Degree of match to reference image (*3)
X-Y coordinates (pixels) of
detection point
Average light level in image window
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*1
*4
*1
Move the cursor to "REG-CHNG" (registration change) with the left and right keys, and press
the up or down key. The result of evaluating image 1 (registration No. 01) will be displayed.
*2
The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when
all of the items have been evaluated as acceptable. If there is a single unacceptable item,
"NG" will be displayed.
*3
"MATCH:+09735" means that the degree of match (percentage of pixels that match) between
an object image and the reference image is 97.35%.
[The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match]
In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match, first an image of a good
specimen is stored for reference. Then, an image of defective specimen is compared for
degree of match. Finally an image of another good specimen is compared. These
comparisons establish the degree of match to be used for setting the limits used for working
comparisons.
For example, the degree of match for a non-defective object is 90% or more and that for a
defective object is 70% or less, then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to
approx. 85%. This allows the evaluation acceptability to be made.
*4
When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When
the result is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in
step (10) for final evaluation output.
3-21
3
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
3-4 Distance measurement
Below is an example of the operation for determining the length L of a target object.
Object to be measured (rectangle)
Length L
3
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all conditions)
MAIN OPS MENU
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS.
ms
MEAS0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to [SET-SCRN] with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of object type) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-22
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu
1
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
3
1. Move the cursor to 0MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu
1
3
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
3SELECT CAMERA
4COPY
5INITIALIZATION
6MEAS.PROG. COND
7EVALUATION COND
8NUMERIC CALC COND
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
0UPPER MENU
2
CAM1 CAM2
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1. Move the cursor to 1MEAS SELECTION (select measurement) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE) (distance and angle measurement, gray
scale and adge) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6MES.PRG.COND (conditions of measurement program) with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-23
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(5) Operation on [MEASURING COND] menu
1. Move the cursor to 1START POINT NO. (starting point number) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key. Enter the number "00," set the cursor to YES with the left and right
keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 2to 6will be displayed.
3
1 ［MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-DST.&ANGL MEAS)1
1START POINT NO. 00(0~15) REG.NO YES
2START POINT MODE GRAY-SEARH EDGE-DETECT
2
3START POINT COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3
4AUX.CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5DSTANCE COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6ANGLE CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7UPPER MENU
2
2. Move the cursor to 2START POINT MODE (starting point mode) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key. Move the cursor to GRAY-SEARH (gray scale search) with the
left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 3START POINT COND (start point conditions) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window, and search window will be
displayed.
(6) Image adjustment
3
1
F C1 H
Image window
Press the TRG/BRT key on
the remote key pad, and the
brightness of the screen will
be switched between H and L.
Search window
Indicates camera 1.
1MEASURE WINDOW
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of
the screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) of the camera lens (see page 5-1), so that the object to be
measured is clear and easily distinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations, the
screen must be in the freeze image mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for
details about the through/freeze mode.)
Continued on the following page
3-24
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(7) Operation for the gray scale search matching setting (setting the starting point 00)
1. Press the ESC key, and all menus used for the gray scale searh matching setting) will be
displayed.
2
4
6
1MEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
2REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP.L(224,208）LO.R(287,271）REG. DISP
3SEARCH AREA
MOVE UP.L(216,200）LO.R(295,279)
4DETECTED COORD CNTR FREE(256,240)
5CONTRACT PIXELS 1 2 3
3
qDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH
wUPPER MENU
7
- If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image settings is hindered,
press the ESC key. Only item 1will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 2REFERENCE IMAGE (reference image) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
3. Create an image window (solid line) for reference image.
- Move the cursor to MOVE, UP.L, or LO.R with the left and right keys, and press the SET
key. Then, position the window.
When the position is correct, press the SET key.
MOVE
The white rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (4 pixels at a time).
Move the image window crosshair
cursor close the vertical line.
Image window
(solid line)
- After the image window position has been defined, move the cursor to REG. (registration)
with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to DISP (display) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Then,
the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After checking the
image, press the ESC key.
4. Press the ESC key, move the cursor to 3SEARCH AREA (search window) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
5. Set a search window (dotted line) to be used as a search area.
- The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with
the image stored in step 3. (see "Glossary").
- The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3.
Search window
(dotted line)
Image window
(solid line)
Create a search window with the same height as that of the image window registered in step
3 (because the image window will be moved only in the X-axis direction).
- After defining the search window size and position, press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
3-25
3
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
6. Move the cursor to 4DETECTED COORD (position to detect) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key. (If the crosshair cursor does not need to be moved, proceed to step
7.)
- Move the cursor to FREE with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Move the
crosshair cursor to detection point 0 with the up, down, left and right keys (in units of 1
pixel).
3
Detection point 0
(= start point 00)
Move the image window crosshair
cursor to detection point 0.
- After defining the crosshair cursor position, press the SET key and ESC key.
7. Move the cursor to wUPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu.
(8) Operation for gray scale search matching setting (setting the starting point 01)
1. On the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu, move the cursor to 1START
POINT NO. (start point number) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the number to "01" with the up and down keys, move the cursor to YES with the left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 3START POINT COND (start point condition) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window and search window will be
displayed.
4. Move a reference image and search area for the detection point 1 to be registered as the start
point 01 in the same manner as in steps (7)-2 to 6.
Image window
Detection point 1
(= start point 01)
Set the image window crosshair
cursor to the detection point 1.
Search window
Set the detection point 1 on the same level as the detection point 0 (start point 00) on the Y
axis to measure the horizontal distance. The coordinates are displayed on the screen.
5. Move the cursor to wUPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Continued on the following page
3-26
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(9) Operation on the DISTANCE SETTINGS (distance conditions) menu (setting the distance No.00)
1. On the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu, move the cursor to 5
DSTANCE COND (distance selection) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [DISTANCE SETTINGS] menu will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 2DISTANCE TYPE (distance selection) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Move the cursor to DISTANCE-BETWEEN-2PNTS (between two points)
with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 3and 4will be displayed.
2
3
4
5
[DISTANCE SETTINGS] (TYPE00-MEAS1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
2
1DISTANCE NUMBER 00(0~15)
2DISTANCE TYPE NO DIST-BETW-2PT DIST-BETW-X DIST-BETW-Y
3POINT NO.1
MEAS-ST-PTNO
3
4POINT NO.2
MEAS-ST-PTNO
5UPPER MENU
4
3. Move the cursor to 3POINT NO.1 (point 1) with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key. Change the measurement start point to "00" with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 4POINT NO.2 (point 2) with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key. Change the measurement start point to "01" with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
5. Move the cursor to 5UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
6. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (measurement conditions) menu.
(10) Operation on the [EVALUATION CONDITION] (evaluation conditions) menu
1. Move the cursor to 7EVALUATION CONDITION with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The EVALUATION CONDITION menu will be displayed.
2
3
4
5
［EVALUATION CONDITION］(TYPE00-MEAS1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
［OUT］
1OBJECT
ST-PNT AUX-PNT DIST
ANGLE 2REGST NO.
00(0~15) CENTER(GRAY SEARCH)
3X START PNT COORD 000.0~511.0
NO
4Y START PNT COORD 000.0~479.0
5DEGREE OF MATCH -10000~+10000
NO
6MAKE A TEST RUN
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
2. Move the cursor to 1OBJECT with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Move the
cursor to ST-PNT (starting point) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 2REGST NO. (registration) with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key. Enter the number "00," and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 5DEGREE OF MATCH with the up and down keys and press the SET
key.
5. Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to +09000 with
the up and down keys.
(Criteria for a successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
5 DEGREE OF MATCH. : +09000 ~ +10000
- After defining the lower limit, press the SET key and ESC key.
6. Move the cursor to 2REGST NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Enter the number "01" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
7. Move the criteria for successfull match (90.00% to 100.00%) for the registration No.01 in the
same manner as in steps 4 and 5.
Continued on the following page
3-27
3
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
8. Move the cursor to 1OBJECT with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Move the
cursor to DIST (display) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
[EVALUATION COND]
1OBJECT
8
3
9
10
11
2REGST NO.
3DISTANCE
6MAKE A TEST RUN
7UPPER MENU
(TYPE00-MEAS1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
［OUT］
ST-PNT AUX-PNT DIST
ANGLE 00(0~15) DIST-BETWEEN-2PT
000.0~702.0.OPIXEL NO
(SET KEY)
12
9. Move the cursor to 2REGST NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Enter the number "00," and press the SET key.
10. Move the cursor to 3DISTANCE (distance selection) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
11. Move the cursor to the lower limit or upper limit, and press the SET key.
- Select the digits with the left and right keys, and enter the value 280.0 to 300.0 with the up
and down keys.
(Criteria for distance judgement: 280.0 to 300.0 pixels)
3DISTANCE : 280.0~300.0.OPIXEL
- After defining the lower and upper limits, press the SET key and ESC key.
12. Move the cursor to 7UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
13. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
(11) Setting the final evaluation output condition
This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally (see page 3-30).
- The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112. When the final
evaluation result is OK, C112 is ON, and when the result is NG, it is OFF. The result of final
evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112.
- The setting procedures are the same as described in item (9) in section 3-2 "Position
measurement."
[PAGE0]
0
INPUT0
LOGIC
C112
1
2
3
4
5
6
Continued on the following page
3-28
7
OUT
Y00
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(12) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data ?) (YES=[MOVE]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE."
Note:
· If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
2. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [MAIN OPS NENU].
- If the cursor is moved to 0OPERATIONS in step 1 above, the screen will automatically
return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page
3-29
3
Operation Examples (Distance measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(13) Measuring the distance
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the distance between the specified detection point 0 (start point 00)
and detection point 1 (start point 01) and the coordinates of these points will be displayed in pixel.
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
Final evaluation result (*2)
Measuring time
Measurement No. and details of
measurement
Distance No.00
Measured distance in pixels and
judgment result
X-Y coordinates of start point 00
and point 01
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DST&AGL：GRAYｰ
3
[Display of measured result]
DIST00［BETWN.SPT］
228.0.OPIXEL OK
ST-PNT 00(132.0, 298.0)
ST-PNT 01(360.0, 298.0)
DIST01
［NO］
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*1
*1
*3
Move the cursor to REG-CHNG (registration change) with the left and right keys, and press
the up or down key. The coordinates of the start point 00 and point 01 and the degree of match
with the reference image will be displayed.
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DST&AGL : GRAY
ST-PT00 [GRAY SEARCH]
(132.0, 298.0) OK
MATCH ＋09944 OK
Start point No. 00
Coordinates of start point 00
Degree of match with reference image
ST-PT 01[GRAY SEARCH]
(360.0, 298.0) OK
MATCH ＋09949 OK
Start point No. 01
Coordinates of start point 01
Degree of match with reference image
- MATCH:+09944 means that the degree of match (percentage of pixels that match)
measurement image and the reference image is 99.44%.
*2
The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when
all of the items have been evaluated as acceptable. If there is a single unacceptable item,
"NG" will be displayed.
*3
When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When
the result is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in
step (11) for final evaluation output.
3-30
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
3-5 Lead inspection
An example of the operations used to inspect IC lead pitches is given below.
Lead pitch
Lead length
Lead
Line to be inspected
IC
3
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all conditions)
MAIN OPS MENU
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MESR.
ms
MESR0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to [SET-SCRN] with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of object type) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-31
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu
3
1
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to 0 MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu
1
2
3
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
3SELECT CAMERA
4COPY
5INITIALIZATION
6MEAS.PROG. COND
7EVALUATION COND
8NUMERIC CALC COND
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
0UPPER MENU
CAM1 CAM2
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1. Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION (selection of measurement) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to INSPECT-LEAD (lead inspection) with the right and left keys, and press the
SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6 MES.PRG.COND (conditions of measurement program) with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
(5) Operation on the [MEASURING COND] menu
1. Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO. (registration number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Move the cursor to YES with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
- The item 2 will be displayed.
1
2
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-INSPECT LEAD)
1REGST NO.
0(0~3) REG.NO YES
2SEARCH CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3OBJ NO. FOR MEAS CRT.0-0(0~7) REG.NO YES
1
6UPPER MENU
2. Move the cursor to 2 SEARCH CRITERIA (criteria search condition) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The gray scale search matching setting menu, image window, and search window will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-32
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
3
1
(6) Image adjustment
F C1 H
Image window
Search window
1MEASURE WINDOW
Press the TRG/BRT key on
the remote key pad, and the
level (brightness of the
screen) will be switched
between H and L.
Indicates camera 1.
3
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of
the screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) of the camera lens (see p.5-1), so that the object to be
measured is clear and easily distinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations, the
screen must be in the freeze image mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for
details about the through/freeze mode.)
(7) Operation for the gray scale search matching setting
1. Press the ESC key, and all of the menus used for setting the gray scale search conditions will
be displayed.
2
5
1MEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
2REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP.L(224,208）LO.R(287,271）REG. DISP
3SEARCH AREA
MOVE UP.L(216,200）LO.R(295,279)
4DETECTED COORD CNTR FREE(256,240)
5CONTRACT PIXELS 1 2 3
4
qDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH
wUPPER MENU
8
· If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered,
press the ESC key. Only item 1 will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 2 REFERENCE IMAGE using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
3. Surround the image for correction of detection line in the image window (solid line).
- Move the cursor to MOVE, UP.L or LO.R with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
Then, position the window.
When the position is correct, press the SET key.
MOVE
The white rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left key (4 pixels at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left key (4 pixels at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left key (4 pixels at a time).
Image window
Image for correcting
the detection line
4. After the image window position has been defined, move the cursor to REG. (registration)
with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to DISP (display) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Then,
the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After checking the
image, press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
3-33
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
5. Press the ESC key, move the cursor to 3 SEARCH AREA (search window) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
6. Create a search window (dotted line) to be used as the search area.
- The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with
the image stored in step 3. The gray scale search function performs the search operation
(see "Glossary").
- The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3.
Search window
3
7. After defining the search window size and position, press the ESC key.
8. Move the cursor to w UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu.
9. On the [MEASURING COND] menu, move the cursor to 3 OBJ NO.FOR MEAS with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key. Move the cursor to "YES" with the right and left keys,
and press the SET key.
- The items 4 and 5 will be displayed.
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-INSPECT LEAD)
9
10
1REGST.NO.
0(0~3) REG.NO YES
2SEARCH CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3OBJ NO. FOR MEAS CRT.0-0(0~7) REG.NO YES
4LEAD LENGTH MEAS NO YES
5OBJ CONDFOR MEAS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6UPPER MENU
9
10. Move the cursor to 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS (object conditions) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- The object condition setting menu and a horizontal line will be displayed.
Horizontal line
1DETECT MODE
CNTR(BRT DRK)
Continued on the following page
3-34
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(8) Operation for setting the object conditions
1. Press the ESC key, and all of the menus used for setting the edge detection condition will be
displayed.
2
3
4
1DETECT MODE
2DETECT DIRECTION
3DETECT AREA
4THRESHOLD
CNTR(BRT DRK)
HORI (→ ←) VERT (↓ ↑)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
GRYS.050(0~255) EDGE.W 2(1~8)
FLAT. W04(1~16)
5PROC. PROJECTION NO YES
qUPPER MENU
2. Move the cursor to 1 DETECT MODE (detection mode) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Move the cursor to CNTR (DRK) (center, dark) with the left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 2 DETECT DIRECTION (detection direction) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key. Move the cursor to HORI (horizontal) (_) with the left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 3 DETECT AREA (detection window) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Move the cursor to MOVE with the left and right keys, and press the SET
key.
- Move the detection line to the left of the lead to be measured with the up, down, left and right
keys.
Detection line
- When the position of the line is correct, press the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to LO.R (lower right) with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Extend the detection line to the right lead with the right key.
Detection line
- When the position is correct, press the SET key and ESC key.
6. Move the cursor to qUPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
7. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
3-35
Continued on the following page
3
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(9) Operation on the [EVALUATION CONDITION] (evaluation condition) menu
1. Move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION CONDITION with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [EVALUATION CONDITION] menu will be displayed.
2
3
3
4
5
6
[EVALUATION CONDITION] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-INSPECT LEAD)
1REGST NO.
0(0~3)
[OUT]
2X COORD
000.0~511.0
NO
3Y COORD
000.0~479.0
NO
4MATCH
-10000~ +10000
NO
5MEAS OBJ
CRT.0-0(0~7)
6NUMBER
000~128
NO
7DISTANCE
000.0~702.0
NO
9MAKE A TEST RUN
0UPPER MENU
(SET KEY)
2. Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO. (registration number) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Enter the number "0" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 4 MATCH (degree of match) with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
4. Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
- Select a digit with the right and left keys, and then set the value to +09000 with the up and
down keys.
(Criteria for successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
4MATCH : +09000~ +10000
- After defining the lower limit, press the SET key and ESC key.
5. Move the cursor to 6 NUMBER with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the right and left keys, and enter the value to
"005" with the up and down keys.
- Move the cursor to the upper limit position with the right and left keys, and enter the value to
"005" with the up and down keys.
6NUMBER : 005~005
- After defining the lower and upper limit, press the SET key.
6. Move the cursor to 0 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
7. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
(10) Setting the final evaluation output condition
This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally (see the following page).
- The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112. When the final
evaluation result is OK, C112 is ON, and when the result is NG, it is OFF. The result of final
evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112.
- The setting procedures are the same as described in item (9) in section 3-2 "Position
measurement."
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
C112
Continued on the following page
3-36
7
OUT
Y00
Operation Examples (Lead inspection)
Continued from the preceding page
(11) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data ?) (YES=[MOVE]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE."
Note:
· If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
2. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
- If the cursor was moved to 0 OPERATIONS in step (11) above, the screen will
automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
(12) Inspecting the lead
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the number of leads, lead pitches (max. and min. distances), the
center coordinates and the degree of match with the reference image will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
OK
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 INSPECT LEAD
REGST NO. 0(0~3)
X COORD 202.0 OK
Y COORD 281.0 OK
MATCH +09957 OK
MEAS OBJ 0-0(0~7)
NUMBER 005
OK
DISTANCE 040.0 OK
039.0
[Display of inspection result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
Measuring time
Center coordinates of reference
image and judgment results
Degree of match with the
reference image
Number of leads
Lead pitches
Upper: Max. distance (pixel count)
Lower: Min. distance (pixel count)
*2
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*1
*2
The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when
all of the items have been evaluated acceptable. If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG"
will be displayed.
When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When
the result is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in
step (10) for final evaluation output.
3-37
3
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
3-6 Existence inspection by point measurement
Shown below is an example of an operation for checking the existence of an object by detecting whether
the points are white or not.
Point setting
Decimal point
3
(7-segment display)
(1) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (after initialize all conditions)
MAIN OPS MENU
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS.
ms
MEAS0 CAM1 NO
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1
1. Move the cursor to [SET-SCRN] with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
F C1 H
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (condition of object type) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-38
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
1
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to 0 MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu will be displayed.
(4) Operation on the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu
1
2
3
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
3SELECT CAMERA
4COPY
5INITIALIZATION
6MEAS.PROG. COND
7EVALUATION COND
8NUMERIC CALC COND
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
0UPPER MENU
CAM1 CAM2
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1. Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION (select measurement) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to POINT MEAS (point measurement) with the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to 6 MES.PRG.COND (conditions of measurement program) with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-39
3
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(5) Operation on the [MEASURING COND] menu (image adjustment)
3
1
Press the TRG/BRT key on the
remote key pad, and the level
(brightness of the screen) will be
switched between H and L.
Indicates camera 1.
5
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce the
brightness of the image. Then, the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the
screen will change from H to L.
2. Adjust the focus and aperture (iris) opening of the camera lens (see page 5-1), so that the
object to be measured is clear and easily destinguished.
3. Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T (through) to F
(freeze).
- To store a threshold value in the following step, the screen must enter the free image
mode. (See section 7-2 "Screen specifications" for the through/freeze mode.)
4. Move the cursor to 3 THRESHOLD VALUE (threshold value) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- An binary image of the reference object will be displayed.
5. Move the cursor to the lower limit with the left and right keys, and adjust the lower limit
threshold value with the up and down keys.
(Adjustment of threshold)
An example of adjustment is shown below, using a white object on a black background. When
the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image, if the lower limit is set higher, the
black part in the binary image will become larger. If the lower limit is set lower, the white part
will become larger. Increase and decrease the lower limit value, find the value at which the
white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts
growing. Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points.This will ensure
reliable operation.
The size of the white area changes
White
Black
depending on the threshold setting.
255
As the value increases,
the black part grows larger.
Lower limit threshold
3
4
7
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-POINT-MEAS) F C1 H
1PROCESSING MODE BIN-CONV AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
2BINARY CONV COND FIXED THRESHOLD-ADJ
3THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
4SET POINT
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5UPPER MENU
Inspection image
White
Stable range *
As the value decreases,
the white part grows larger.
0
Horizontal coordinate
of the dotted line
Changing the lower limit threshold
* If the stable range in the lower limit threshold
is less than 20, (actual measurement)
measurement errors may occur.
6. After setting the lower limit, press the SET key.
7. Move the cursor to 4 SET POINT (setting point) and press the SET key.
- The point setting menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-40
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(6) Operation for point setting
1. Press the ESC key, and all of the menus to be used for point setting will be displayed.
(Point No. registration)
1POINT SIZE
Y-08×X-08(2~32)
2STO PNT POSITIONS 000(0~255) REG.NO YES
3START POINT POS
MOVE( , )
4BLOCK LAYOUT
001×001
5BLOCK SPACING
X-004 Y-004
6STORE BLOCK COND EXEC
7DELETE BLOCK COND EXEC
8UPPER MENU
2
3
6
P000
P001
2
4
P002
P003
P004
P005
P006
2. Move the cursor to 2 STO PNT POSITIONS (point registration, individual) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key. Move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys, and
press the SET key.
- The window (8 pixels x 8 pixels) for point No. 000 will start blinking.
3. Move the cursor to 3 START POINT POS (point position, starting) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the window for point No. P000 to the desired position in the object and press the SET
key.
- The binary image will be displayed in the window according to the conditions set in item (5).
5. Move the cursor to 2 STO PNT POSITIONS (point registration, individual) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key. Enter the number "001" with the up key. Move the cursor
to "YES" with the right key, and press the SET key.
- Move the window for point No. P001 the same as in steps 3 and 4, and press the SET key.
- Create windows for point Nos. P002 to P006 the same way.
6. Move the cursor to 8 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu.
7. On the [MEASURING COND] menu, move the cursor to 5 UPPER MENU with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
8. On the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu, move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation
condition) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
(7) Operation on the [EVALUATION COND] (evaluation condition) menu
1
3
4
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS1-POINT MEAS)
[OUT]
1CHG PAGE TEST RUN [TEST RESULT ]
2P000 :
WH
OK
NO
2
3P001 :
WH
OK
NO
4P002 :
WH
OK
NO
5P003 :
WH
OK
NO
6P004 :
WH
OK
NO
7P005 :
WH
OK
NO
8P006 :
WH
OK
NO
9P007 :
0MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
qUPPER MENU
3
1. Move the cursor to 2 P000 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Select WH (white) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Specify WH (white) for point No. P001 to P006 the same as in steps 1 and 2.
- In this operation, the images (binary images) in the windows at point No. P000 to P006 are
checked to see if they are white or black. If they are all white, the program can decide that
the object exists.
3. Move the cursor to 0 MAKE A TEST RUN with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key. A test will be executed, and the test result (OK/NG) will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-41
5
3
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
4. Move the cursor to q UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1] (type: 00, measurement: 1) menu.
5. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
(8) Setting the final evaluation output condition
3
This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally (see the following page).
- The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112. When the final
evaluation result is OK, C112 is ON, and when the result is NG, it is OFF. The result of final
evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112.
- The setting procedures are the same as described in item (9) in section 3-2 "position
measurement."
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
C112
7
OUT
Y00
(9) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
- Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper corner of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data ?) (YES=[MOVE]/NO=[ESC])
- Press the SET key.
- The data saving operation will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
MEAS CONDITIONS □
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "SAVING COMPLETE."
Note:
· If the ESC key is pressed, the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV-S20
flash memory. In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or
if the type No. is changed, the settings will be deleted.
2. Press the ESC key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
- If the cursor was moved to 0 OPERATIONS in step 1, the screen will automatically
return to the [MAIN OPS MENU].
Continued on the following page
3-42
Operation Examples (Point measurement)
Continued from the preceding page
(10) Existence inspection
Press the TRG/BRT key, and "OK" or "NG" will be displayed to indicate the result of the evaluation
of the color (white or black according to the setting in step (7)-2) at each point from P000 to P006.
(TYPE00)
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
[Display of inspection result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS
Measuring time
Presence/absence of each point
P000:○ OK
P002:○ OK
P004:○ OK
P006:○ OK
P008:
P010:
P012:
P014:
P001:○ OK
P003:○ OK
P005:○ OK
P007:
P009:
P011:
P013:
P015:
*2
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
"○OK" is shown the points P000 to P006 to indicate that
the inspected object is white and the result is OK.
Expected condition
(OK) White Black
Object color
White (display o)
OK
NG
Black (display o)
NG
OK
OK/NG evaluation result
*1
The result of the final evaluation will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen
when all of the points have been judged acceptable. If a single point has been judged
unacceptable, "NG" will be displayed.
*2
When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When
the result is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in
step (8) for final evaluation output .
3-43
3
Operation Examples (Position correction)
3-7 Position correction (example of point measurement)
In the setting example shown in section 3-6 "Existence inspection by point measurement," points were set
on the segment of number display (the object to be measured), and the each of the points was checked for
the correct condition.
Point setting
Decimal point
3
However, the object to be measured is not always located exactly at the preset points. To deal with this
problem, use the position correction function. Then, the preset coordinates of the points are corrected
according to positional deviation of the actual object, and the measurement can be carried out correctly.
(1) Set the points using item (1) to (10) in section 3-6 "Existence inspection by point measurement"
(2) Using the decimal point in a 7-segment display as a positioning mark
Search window
Decimal point (positioning mark)
Image window
- Move the reference point as described in items (1) to (10), in section 3-2 "Position
measurement."
After the setting, move the cursor to [SET-SCRN] on the MAIN OPS MENU, and press the
SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed. Move the cursor to 2OBJECT TYPE
COND (conditions of object type) and press the SET key.
- The [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu will be displayed.
(3) Operation on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu
1
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
F C1 H
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
2
1. Move the cursor to 5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1 (position correction) with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to REG.0-1PNTSXY (registration: 0-1, first point: XY) with the right, left, up
and down keys, and press the SET key. (Correction of X-Y coordinates).
3. Move the cursor to uUPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed. Move the cursor to 0OPERATIONS with
the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The MAIN OPS MENU will be displayed.
This completes the settings for position correction using a deviation measurement. Run the
program, and the preset point coordinates will be moved according to the actual position of the
decimal point. Then the point inspection will be conducted.
3-44
Operation Examples (Numeric calculation)
3-8 Use of numeric calculations (example of shape and size inspection)
Shown below is an example of the operation for evaluating and outputting the differences in the X-Y
coordinates between the points in images 1 and 2, based on the result of numeric calculations. This
example uses the example from section 3-3 "Degree of match inspection for shape and size."
Image 1
Detection point of image 1
Image 2
Difference between
X coordinates
Detection point of image 2
Object to be measured
Difference between Y coordinates
(1) Create the images following the instructions of items (1) to (8), in 3-3 “Degree of match inspection for shape and size”
- After creating the images, move the cursor to 3 NUMERIC CALC COND on the matching
level inspection menu, and press the SET key.
- The [NUMERIC CALC] (numeric calculation) menu will be displayed.
(2) Operation on the [NUMERIC CALC] (numeric calculation) menu
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1
2
1CALC. RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH [M] CORD[X Y] LEVL[G]
NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
2
3FORMULA
3
4
6
7
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~ +00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
N01
N02
N03
1. Move the cursor to 1 CALC. RESULT (calculation result) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Enter "N00" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
Move the cursor to CORD [X] (coordinate [X]) with the left and right keys, and press the SET
key.
- The details of item 3 FORMULA will be displayed.
3FORMULA :
Continued on the following page
REG.00(0~15) MDL0(0~1) N00(0~15)
+ - `/ ← → DEL. END
3-45
3
Operation Examples (Numeric calculation)
Continued from the preceding page
3. Move the cursor to 3 FORMULA with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to REG.00 (0 ~ 15) with the left and right keys, and enter "01" with the up
and down keys.
- Move the cursor to MDL0 (0 ~ 1) with the left and right keys, enter "0" with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
- 01X0 will be displayed in the formula field.
N00
3
[X]
01X0
+00000000.0~ +00000000.0
01X0 means model registration No.01 (image 1), and X coordinate of the detection point
and model.
- Move the cursor to "-" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- A dash - will be displayed in the formula field.
- Move the cursor to REG.01 (0 ~15) and enter "00."
- Move the cursor to MDL0 (0 ~ 1) and press the SET key.
- 00X0 will be displayed in the formula field.
N00
[X]
01X0 - 00X0
+00000000.0 ~ +00000000.0
00X0 means registration No.00 (image 0), X coordinate of the detection point and model.
- Press the ESC key.
4. Move the cursor to 4 UPPER&LOWER LIMIT with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- Move the cursor to the upper limit with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Select
a digit with the left and right keys. Enter the number +0160.0 with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT : +00000000.0~ +00000160.0
Upper limit
- Move the cursor to the lower limit with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Select
a digit with the left and right keys. Enter the number +0140.0 with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT : +00000140.0~ +00000160.0
Lower limit
- Press the ESC key.
- +00000140.0 to +00000160.0 will be displayed in the upper and lower limit fields.
5. Move the cursor to 1 CALC.RESULT with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
Enter "N01" and press the SET key.
· As described in steps 2 to 4, enter 01Y0-00Y0 in the formula field, and enter +00000090.0
to +00000095.0 in the upper and lower limit fields.
N00
[X]
N01
[Y]
01X0 - 00X0
+00000140.0~ +00000160.0
01Y0 - 00Y0
+00000090.0~ +00000095.0
6. Move the cursor to 6 RUN A TEST with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Press the SET key once more. Then, the settings will be stored, and the test will be executed
- The results of the evaluation (OK/NG) based on the calculation formulas will be
displayed.
N00
[X]
N01
[Y]
01X0 - 00X0
+00000140.0~ +00000160.0 +00000147.0 OK
01Y0 - 00Y0
+00000090.0~ +00000095.0 +00000091.0 OK
OK: When the test result based on the formula is within the specified range
NG: When the test result based on the formula is out of the specified range
7. Move the cursor to 7 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu will be displayed.
Continued on the following page
3-46
Operation Examples (Numeric calculation)
Continued from the preceding page
(3) Operation on the [OUTPUT CONDITIONS] menu
1. On the [TYPE00-MEAS1] menu, move the cursor to 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS (output
conditions) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [OUTPUT CONDITIONS] menu will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 1 REGIST.NO. (register number) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key. Move the cursor to "YES" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 2 to 6 will be displayed.
2
3
4
5
7
8
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGIST.NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
2
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.00(0~15)
MATCH M0(0~1) CRD-X0(0~1) CRD-Y0(0~1)
LVL 0(0~1)
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE 0]
INPUT0
0
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
Column No.
1
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
3
3. Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the 0th column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up, down, left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to CAL N00 (0 to 15) with the left and right keys, enter CAL N00 with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to 4 LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- Move the cursor to "-||-" and press the SET key.
- The logical condition will be displayed in the 0th column of INPUT 0.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
00N00
- 00N00 means the results of the calculation N00, entered on the [NUMERIC CALC] menu,
for registration No.00.
6. Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION (setting position) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key. Move the cursor to the 1st column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the
left and right keys, and press the SET key.
· Enter CAL. N01 as an input signal, as described in steps 4 and 5.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
00N00 00N01
7. Move the cursor to 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Specify C000 for the auxiliary relay number with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
00N00 00N01
5
6
7
OUT
C000
8. Move the cursor to 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
Continued on the following page
3-47
Operation Examples (Numeric calculation)
Continued from the preceding page
(4) Operation for item, r RESULTS OUTPUT (final output conditions), on the [OBJECT TYPE COND]
menu
1. On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to r RESULTS OUTPUT with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The RESULTS OUTPUT (final evaluation output condition) menu will be displayed.
3
2. Move the cursor to 1 PAGE NO. with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Move
the cursor to "YES" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
2
3
4
[RESULTS OUTPUT]
TYPE(00)
2
0(0~7) REG.NO YES
4
MOVE
AUXRLY C000(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~6)
TMR TM0(0~7) CNT CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15) OUT Y00(0~15)
DEL.
1PAGE NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUTY00(0~15) AUXRLY C 000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL 000(000~999)
DEL.
5
6UPPER MENU
6
[PAGE 0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
3. Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the 0th column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up, down, left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to AUXRLY C000 (0 ~ 127) (auxiliary relay C000) with the left and right
keys, specify C000 with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The logic symbol will be displayed in the 0th column of INPUT 0.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
C000
LOGIC
5. Move the cursor to 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Select "OUTY00(0 to 15)" with the left and right keys, enter "00" with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0]
0
INPUT0
LOGIC
C000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
Y00
6. Move the cursor to 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Continued on the following page
3-48
Operation Examples (Numeric calculation)
Continued from the preceding page
(5) Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU
1. Press the ESC key.
- The [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will be displayed.
2. Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM (save data in flash memory) or 0
OPERATIONS with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Press the SET key once
more.
- The set data will be saved in the IV-S20 flash memory, and the screen will return to the
MAIN OPS MENU.
3
(6) Degree of match inspection
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the difference in the X-Y coordinates of the detection points in images
1 and 2 will be calculated. The results will be evaluated and output.
(TYPE00)
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH
REGST NO. 00(0~15)
MATCH (MDL 0)
+09735 OK
X COORD. (MDL 0) X=090.0 OK
Y COORD. (MDL 0) Y=092.0 OK
LIGT LVL (MDL 0) 018.4 OK
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
*
If the difference between X/Y coordinates is within the range set on
the numeric calculation menu, Y0 will be turned ON, and a filled
box ■ will be displayed. If the difference is not within the range, Y0
is turned OFF, and an empty box ■ will be displayed.
C000
00N00 00N01
Output condition
Y00
C000
Final output condition
· If the result is within the range,
00N00 and 00N01 are turned
ON (OK), the auxiliary relay
C000 will be turned ON, and
output Y00 will be turned ON.
* Move the cursor to REG-CHNG (registration change), and press the up or down key. Then,
the results of the numeric calculation will be displayed.
3-49
System Configuration
Chapter 4: System Configuration
4-1 Basic system configuration
1 IV-S20L16
camera lens
2 IV-S20C1
camera body
5 Camera angle bracket
1
Monitor
9 IV-S30C1 camera
IV-60LD
LED lighting
equipment
4
*1
Lens
(commercially
0 IV-S30C2 micro camera
available)
q IV-S20HC3 camera
conversion cable
*1 The cable length can be extended using
the IV-S20EC2 (2 m) or IV-S20EC4 (4 m).
Personal
computer
General purpose
serial I/F
IV-09MT, IV-10MT etc.
With either an
EIA or NTSC
compatible
video input terminals
6 Conversion
connector
*2
*2 Parameter setting support software IV-S30SP
can be used by IBM PC/AT.
Programmable
controller
Computer link
7 Monitor cable
(2 m long)
4 IV-S20 main
housing
8 Housing bracket
3 Remote key pad
Power
supply
(24 VDC)
- Programmable controller
Input/output - Limit switch
- Warning lamp, etc.
Parallel I/F
- The IV-S20 series includes the IV-S20, IV-S20N, IV-S20M, IV-S20C1, IV-S30C1/C2, IV-S20L16,
and IV-S20EC2/EC4. Configurations varies with each model (see the following page). Place your
order according to your system configuration.
Ex.: When two cameras are connected (the IV-S20L16 lense is used), 1 set each of the IV-S20,
IV-S20C1 and IV-S20L16 are needed.
- Up to two cameras can be connected to the IV-S20 main housing (camera 1 and camera 2).
However, it is possible to connect only one camera. In this case, the camera must be connected
in the camera 1 position.
- The numbers in circles correspond to the component numbers shown on the following page.
4-1
System Configuration
Product configuration
The product configurations of IV-S20, IV-S20N, IV-S20M etc., are listed below.
(The numbers in circles correspond to the component numbers shown in the previous page.)
Model (type)
Components
· IV-S20 main housing (4) 1 set
· Camera body (2: IV-S20C1) 1 set
IV-S20
4
Camera lens (1: IV-S20L16) 1 pc.
Remote key pad (3) 1 pc.
Camera angle bracket (5) 1 pc.
Housing bracket (8) 2 pcs.
Monitor cable (7) 1 pc.
Conversion connector (6)1 pc.
D-sub connector 1 pc.
(9-pin D-sub, male, rock screw M2.6 : communication
connector for the IV-S20 main housing)
· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing angle bracket) 6 pcs.
· Instruction manual 1 set
·
·
·
·
·
Access·
ories
·
· IV-S20 main housing (4) 1 set
· Camera body (2: IV-S20C1) 1 set
IV-S20N
Remote key pad (3) 1 set.
Camera angle bracket (5) 1 pc.
Housing bracket (8) 2 pcs.
Monitor cable (7) 1 pc.
Conversion connector (6) 1 pc.
D-sub connector 1 pc.
(9-pin D-sub, male, rock screw M2.6 : communication
connector for the IV-S20 main housing)
· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing angle bracket) 6 pcs.
· Instruction manual 1 set
·
·
·
·
Access- ·
ories
·
· IV-S20 main housing (4) 1 set
IV-S20M
· Housing bracket (8) 2 pcs.
· Monitor cable (7) 1 pc.
· Conversion connector (6) 1 pc.
Access- · D-sub connector 1 pc.
ories
(9-pin D-sub, male, rock screw M2.6 : communication
connector for the IV-S20 main housing)
· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing angle bracket) 6 pcs.
· Instruction manual 1 set
· Camera body (2) 1 set
IV-S20C1
Access- · Camera angle bracket 1 pc.
ories
· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing angle bracket) 2 pcs.
· Camera (9) 1 set
IV-S30C1
Access- · Camera angle bracket 1 pc.
ories
· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing angle bracket) 2 pcs.
· Micro camera (0) 1 set
IV-S30C2
· Camera angle bracket 1 pc.
Access- · Camera head angle bracket 1 pc.
ories
· Screw (M 3 x 6) 3 pcs.
· Instruction manual 1 set
4-2
System Configuration
Model (type)
Components
IV-S20L16
Camera lens (1) 1 pc.
IV-S20EC2
Extension camera cable (2 m) 1 pc.
IV-S20EC4
Extension camera cable (4 m) 1 pc.
IV-S20HC3
Camera conversion cable (q: 3 m ) 1 pc.
Monochrome monitor (9 type) 1 pc.
IV-09MT *1
IV-10MT
/10MTV
/10MTK
*2
AccessInstruction manual 1 set
ory
1 LCD monitor
IV-10MT: Pair chassis type
IV-10MTV: With a mounting frame
IV-10MTK: With a remote keypad integrating frame
· AC adapter (with the IV-10MT/10MTV/10MTK) 1 pc.
Access- · Installation brackets (with the IV-10MTV/10MTK) 4 pcs.
ories
· Cable (with the IV-10MTK) 1 pc.
· Instruction manual (with the IV-10MT/10MTV/10MTK) 1 set
· LED lighting equipment (main body ) 1 set
IV-60LD *3
· Camera angle bracket 1 pc.
Access· Screw (M 3 x 6, for securing camera/angle bracket) 6 pcs.
ories
· Instruction manual 1 set
· Parameter setting support software for IV series (CD-ROM) 1 pc.
· RS-232C communication cable (1.5 m) 1 pc.
IV-S30SP *4 Access- · USB cable (3 m) 1 pc.
ories
· User registration card 1 sheet
· Instruction manual 1 set
*1 An explanation of the monochrome monitor IV-09MT in detail is shown in page 16-6 of IV-09MT
instruction manual.
*2 An explanation of the LCD monitor IV-10MT/10MTV/10MTK in detail is shown in IV-10MT/10MTV/
10MTK instruction manual.
*3 An explanation of the LED lighting equipment IV-60LD in detail is shown in pages 6-2 and 16-7 of IV60LD instruction manual.
*4 An explanation of the parameter setting support software IV-S30SP in detail is shown in page 7-14 of
IV-S30SP instruction manual.
4-3
4
System Configuration
4-2 System configuration examples
This section outlines the system configurations for measurement using an external trigger, such as measurement using a photo sensor, measurement using CCD trigger, and measurement triggered by a command from a personal computer.
See Chapter 11 "Setting the Input/Output Conditions" for the details about the settings.
4
[1] System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external trigger, such as a
photo sensor
(1) When IV-S20 is used in a stand-alone mode
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor), and the
measurement result is output externally (warning lamp). The object type number is selected by
an external switch.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
Warning lamp etc.
External
output
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor, etc.)
Type selection switch
(2) When a programmable controller is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor), and the
measurement data is output to a programmable controller. The object type number is selected
by the programmable controller.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
Data (computer link)
Programmable
controller
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Type selection
(parallel I/F)
4-4
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor, etc.)
System Configuration
(3) When a personal computer is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc.), and the
measurement data is output to a personal computer. The object type number is selected by the
personal computer.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Personal computer
Type selection, data
4
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor etc.)
[2] System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD sensor trigger
The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1, but with camera 2.
(1) When IV-S20 is used in a stand-alone mode
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger, and the measurement result is output externally
(warning lamp etc.). In this case, sampling operation is automatically started.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
Warning lamp etc.
4-5
External
output
System Configuration
(2) When a programmable controller is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger (sampling start input: a photo sensor etc.), and the
measurement data is output to a programmable controller. The object type number is selected
by the programmable controller.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Remote key pad
Monitor
Data (computer link)
4
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Programmable
controller
Type switching (parallel I/F)
Start sampling input
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor etc.)
(3) When a personal computer is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger (sampling start input: personal computer), and the
measurement data is output to a personal computer. The object type number is selected by the
personal computer.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Remote key pad
Programmable
controller
Monitor
Data (computer link)
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Type switching (parallel I/F)
4-6
Start sampling input
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor etc.)
System Configuration
[3] System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a personal
computer
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a trigger from a personal computer, and the measurement data is
output to the personal computer. The object type number is selected by the personal computer.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Personal computer
Command, response
Monitor
Remote key pad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
4-7
4
Part Names and Functions
Chapter 5: Part Names and Functions
This section describes the names and functions of the IV-S20 main housing, the camera (camera lens ,
camera body, and camera cable), and the remote key pad which comprise the IV-S20 system. See
section 6-2 and 6-3 for details about the housing brackets, camera angle bracket, and conversion
connector.
5-1 IV-S20 main housing
9 Frame ground terminal
2 Power terminal block
1 I/O terminal block
S2.09 mark
(software version 2.09)
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
IV-S20 main housing (front)
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2
▼
▼
5
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-z)
OUTPUT
3 Power lamp (POWER)
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
IV-S20 main housing (side)
8 Remote key pad connector
(REMOTE)
4 Monitor connector (VIDEO)
5 Camera 1 connector
(CAMERA1)
7 Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422)
6 Camera 2 connector
(CAMERA2)
Name
Function
The block has 7 input terminals and 9 output terminals.
I/O terminal block
- External devices are connected to these terminals for input
1 INPUT: X0 to X6, C (+)
and output (parallel I/F).
OUTPUT: Y0 to Y7, BUSY, C (—) _ See page 6-14.
Commercially available constant-voltage power supply (24 V
Power terminal block
DC ± 10%, 350 mA or more) is connected here.
2 (POWER: ＋24V, 0V)
_ See page 6-12.
When the power is applied to the IV-S20 main housing, the
3 Power lamp (POWER)
green lamp will light.
A monitor is connected here.
Monitor connector
4
- The monitor connector is an RCA jack.
(VIDEO)
The camera cable connector is connected here.
5 Camera 1 connector (CAMERA1) - The camera connected to the CAMERA 1 position is
camera 1, and the camera connected to the CAMERA 2
6 Camera 2 connector (CAMERA2)
position is camera 2.
Communication connector
7 (RS232C/RS422: 9-pin, D-sub,
female, rock screw M2.6)
8
Remote key pad connector
(REMOTE)
9 Frame ground terminal
This connector is used to connect a personal computer for
communications (general purpose serial I/F) or to connect a
programmable controller for a computer link.
_ See page 6-16.
The remote key pad connector is used to make selections
from the menues on the screen (to set parameters). It is
connected here.
Be sure to ground the housing frame ground terminal
together with the frame ground of the constant-voltage
power supply in accordance with class 3 grounding
procedures. _ See page 6-12.
5-1
Part Names and Functions
5-2 Camera section
[1] Camera
(1) Camera body (IV-S20C1)
Lock screw (for securing the lens holder)
CCD section
Connector
(connected to the
IV-S20 main housing)
A
Front view (view A) of the CCD
1
Plug
1 Lens holder
2 Camera cable
(3 m long)
Name
Function
Lens holder
The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance (back plane focus) between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens.
(The distance has been adjusted before shipment. Usually, it does not
need to be adjusted.)
- To adjust it, loosen the upper lock screw, and turn the lens holder counter-clockwise. The maximum allowable distance is 1.5 mm.
5
The cable is 3 m long.
2 Camera cable - Extension camera cables (IV-S20EC2 : 2 m and IV-S20EC4 : 4 m) are
available.
(2) Camera (IV-S30C1)
Lock screw (for securing the lens holder)
2 Cable connector
CCD section
⇒A
1 Lens holder
Front view (view A) of the CCD
Name
Function
1
Lens holder
The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance (back plane focus) between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens.
(The distance has been adjusted before shipment. Usually, it does not
need to be adjusted.)
- To adjust it, loosen the upper lock screw, and turn the lens holder counter-clockwise. The maximum allowable distance is 1.5 mm.
2
Cable
connector
Connect this connector to the camera conversion cable (IV-S20H3).
5-2
Part Names and Functions
(3) Micro camera (IV-S30C2)
2 Camera body
1 Camera head
Head cable
CCD section
φ
17
m
Cable connector
Cable length: 1 m
Camera head
installation section
Name
m
Lens mount section
(M 15.5 x 0.5 mm)
Function
Install a lens (commercially available).
1 Camera head - The maximum outside diameter of the camera head is ø17 mm. The
lens mount bracket is M15.5 x 0.5 mm.
2 Camera body Connect the camera using the IV-S20H3 camera conversion cable.
5-3
5
Part Names and Functions
[2] Camera lens : IV-S20L16
1 Focus
C
0.05m
Lock knob 2 (for fixing the focus)
1. 6
focus
∞
TV LENS 1:1.6 16mm
Lock knob 1 (for fixing the iris)
2 Iris
5.5 mm
(Movable range for focus adjustment)
Name
5
1
Focus
2
Iris
Function
To focus an image.
- The focal length (distance from an object) is 50 mm to infinity (from the
front of lens).
To adjust the image brightness.
- The iris aperture can be set from 1.6 to closed.
[3] Camera conversion cable: IV-S20HC3
1 Camera connector
(Threaded type)
2 Controller connector
(Quick-connect type)
Cable length: 3 m
Name
Function
1
Camera
connector
Connect to a connector of camera cable (IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4).
2
Controller
connector
Connect to camera 1 connector or camera 2 connector of the IV-S20
main body.
5-4
Part Names and Functions
5-3 Remote key pad
Connector
(connected to the IV-S20 main housing)
Cable length 3 m
4 Image change key (SEL)
1 Direction keys
(up, down, left and right)
5 Measurement start/brightness
select key (TRG/BRT)
2 Set (select) key (SET)
Dimensions (mm)
130 (W) × 61 (D) × 22.5 (H)
Key name
3 Cancel key (ESC)
Function
Selecting an item on a menu
screen
Setting a window
Setting a value
Set (select) key Determine a highlighted item
2 (SET)
Determine the setting value
Returning a setting to its origiCancel key
nal state before being changed
3
(ESC)
Returning to the previous menu
Switching the image mode
Image change between the through mode
4 key (SEL)
and the freeze mode
(see page 7-8)
Measurement Start measurement input
start/brightness
5
Switching the brightness
select key
level (H and L)
(TRG/BRT)
Contents
Direction keys
1 (up, down,
left and right)
5-5
See section 7-9
5
Installation Conditions and Method
Chapter 6: Installation Conditions and Method
6-1 Installation conditions
[1] Lighting equipment
Lighting for the workpieces is an important factor in image processing. The lighting conditions affect
the measurement results. Select the proper lighting equipment.
- Make sure there is uniform illumination of the whole measurement field where object images will be
taken.
- Use flicker-free lighting equipment, such as a high frequency fluorescent lamps or halogen lamps.
- Consult us about the right lighting equipment for your application.
[Backlighting]
Light should uniformly illuminate the field behind an object, so that the IV-S20 measure the object with
it's shadow. Since the shadow picture will be converted to binary values, reliable measurements can
be executed.
Example:
Backlighting equipment
IV-S20
Light
6
Conveyor
Inspection of a processed part
Light
IV-S20
Miss-processed
product
Linear feeder
Hole inspection
Backlighting using
surface illuminance LED
[Reflective lighting]
A light shone on the front of an object with angle will be reflected, and the IV-S20 will pick up the
reflected light. If too much light is reflected, such as from a metallic surface or similar materials, a
proper image may not be obtained.
Example:
IV-S20
Label
Light beam
Light beam
IV-S20
Light beam
Measurement of the center
coordinates of a hole
Label detection
6-1
Installation Conditions and Method
Ë When using the IV-60LD
This paragraph describes how to use Sharp IV-60LD LED lighting equipment. For details about the
installation and wiring of the IV-60LD, see the instruction manual.
The distance between the IV-60LD and an object (distance at which to install lighting equipment) should be
approximately 150mm, and the lit area is approximately 50mm × 50mm.
If the lighting distance is reduced approximately 60mm, the lighting may be uneven.
77.3mm
IV-S20 camera
87mm
Camera angle bracket
IV-60LD body
(Lighting section)
Lighting distance : 150mm
∫ View A
Light area
Camera center
50mm
6
Camera center
A
Workpieces
(Object to be
50mm
measured)
When the light is projected from above the object and if reflection off the object influences the image
processing, try the following countermeasures.
1Tilt the camera center axis (within a range that does not affect the image processing) to move away
from the light reflected from the object.
IV-S20 camera
IV-60LD body
yyy
;;;
Reflected light
Workpieces
(Object to be
measured)
2Separate the camera from the lighting equipment. Install the IV-60LD lighting equipment so that it will
shines from an angle that prevents creation of the reflection.
- One light
- Two lights
IV-S20 camera
IV-S20 camera
yy
;;
IV-60LD body
yy
;;
IV-60LD body
6-2
IV-60LD body
Installation Conditions and Method
[2] Illuminance and shutter speed
The illuminance provided by the lighting equipment and the shutter speed must be set within the
proper range.
- The following graph shows the relation between illuminance and shutter speed for the IV-S20L16
camera lens (focal length 16 mm) with an aperture setting of f = 1.6.
Determine the proper amount of illuminance and the correct shutter speed, by referring to this
graph. Adjust the aperture as necessary.
- To measure a moving object, or to increase the image processing speed, set the shutter speed to 1/
1000 sec. or 1/2000 sec. or faster. However, an extremely high shutter speed will require intense
lighting, thereby increasing the cost.
Relation between illuminance and shutter speed [IV-S20L16 camera lens
(focal length 16 mm) with an aperture setting of f = 1.6]
Illuminance (lux)
32000
6
16000
Proper range
(shaded zone)
8000
4000
2000
1000
500
250
125
1/30
1/60
1/125
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000 1/10000
Shutter speed sec.
Note
- The standard relationship between illuminance and shutter speed is given above for
reference. When actually installing the equipment, make sure the proper combination is used
for the actual system.
6-3
Installation Conditions and Method
[3] Optimum lens and resolution
The optimum lens for your system can be selected, based on the camera installation distance and the
field of view (workpiece size).
Vertical direction
Rounded surface of camera body
View (mm)
Horizontal direction
6
Workpieces
(Horiz
on
directio tal
n)
Vertical direction
Workpieces
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Lens holder
Lens
Close-up shot ring
There is a relationships as shown on page 6-6 and 6-7, among the camera installation distance, the
field of view (in the vertical/horizontal direction), the lens focal length f, the aperture setting, the focal
length, and the resolution.
[Example]
When the camera installation distance is 500 mm and the field of view (in the horizontal
direction) is 110 mm, the optimum lens can be selected as described in the following
procedure. The required information is taken from the table on page 6-6.
Camera
installation
distance
(mm)
Lens focal length f=16mm
View
(mm)
Vertical
Focal Resolength lution
Hori- (mm)
zontal
1
(µm)
2
450
96.3
102.8
16.6 200.7
500
107.4
114.6
16.5 223.9
600
129.6
138.3
16.4 270.1
3
1 Selecting the lens focal length, and aperture (f - stp setting)
Follow the line for a camera installation distance of 500 mm for the view (in the horizontal
direction) that is closest to 110 mm, which is 114.6 mm. A 114.6 mm field of view is shown in
the column for a lens focal length, f, of 16 mm. Therefore, a lens with focal length of 16 mm is
considered to be optimum.
6-4
Installation Conditions and Method
2 Considering the focal length
The actual focal length, 16.5 mm, is longer than the lens focal length, f = 16 mm, by 0.5 mm.
However, if the camera installation distance of 500 mm is within the focal range (distance from
an object) of the actual lens (f = 16 mm), you can use it.
1. The focus range of the IV-S20L16 camera lens (f = 16 mm) built into the IV-S20 is from 50
mm to infinity. Therefore, the camera installation distance of 500 mm is within the focal
range, and the IV-S20L16 lens can be used.
2. When another lens (with a focal range of 16 mm) is used, if its focal range exceeds 500 mm,
install a commercially available C mount close-up shot ring. Use a ring that is 0.5 mm thick
(16.5 - 16 = 0.5 mm).
3 Resolution
When the displayed image fills the whole monitor screen, and the view (in the horizontal
direction) is 114.6 mm wide, the resolution is 223.9 µm.
114.6mm
223.9 µm
512(pixelcount)
See "Glossary" for the diefinition of resolution.
Notes
6
- The values shown in the tables on page 6-5 and 6-6 are only reference data for installation.
These values may vary, according to the characteristics of lenses you are using. When using
any lens, check the data using the actual equipment.
- If you want to use a camera lens other than the IV-S20L16, buy a lens with a C type lens base.
(The IV-S20L16 has a C type lens base.)
- A lens with too short focal length (f = 4.2 mm or 8 mm) will distort the edges of the field of view.
The spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element used in the CCD camera are listed
below.
- Spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element
1.0
0.9
0.8
Relative response
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
400
500
600
700
Wave length [nm]
6-5
800
900
1000
Installation Conditions and Method
6
Focal length
Focal length
Lens focal length f=16mm
Lens focal length f=25mm
29.6
4.8
91.6
16.4
17.5 9.7
34.2
9.8
10.4 21.8
20.4
5.0
5.3 42.9
10.4
4.7
109.2
20.9
22.3 9.4
43.5
12.0
12.8 20.7
25.0
6.4
6.8 38.9
13.3
65.0
4.7
126.9
25.3
27.0 9.1
52.7
14.2
15.2 20.0
29.6
7.8
8.3 36.4
16.3
74.0
4.6
144.5
29.7
31.7 9.0
62.0
16.4
17.5 19.5
34.2
9.2
9.9 34.6
19.2
71.2
18.6
19.9 19.0
38.9
10.7
11.4 33.3
22.2
Resolution
15.2 10.0
View
(mm)
Focal length
14.2
View
(mm)
Resolution
82.8
View
(mm)
Resolution
4.9
View
(mm)
Vertical
Lens focal length f=8mm
Resolution
Lens focal length f=4.2mm
Focal length
Camera
installation
distance (mm)
· Relation among the camera installation distance, the field of view, and the focal length
−
−
HoriHoriHoriHoriVertical
Vertical
zontal (mm) (µm)
zontal (mm) (µm)
zontal (mm) (µm) Vertical zontal (mm) (µm)
55
39.7
42.4
60
44.0
46.9
70
52.4
55.9
80
60.9
90
69.3
100
77.8
83.0
4.6
162.1
34.2
36.5 8.8
120
−
−
−
−
−
−
94.7 101.0
4.5
197.3
43.1
45.9 8.7
89.7
23.1
24.6 18.5
48.1
13.5
14.4 31.6
28.1
140 111.6 119.1
4.5
232.6
51.9
55.4 8.5
108.2
27.5
29.4 18.1
57.4
16.3
17.4 30.4
34.0
160 128.5 137.1
4.4
267.8
60.8
64.9 8.5
126.7
32.0
34.1 17.8
66.6
19.2
20.5 29.6
40.0
180 145.5 155.2
4.4
303.1
69.7
74.4 8.4
145.2
36.4
38.8 17.6
75.9
22.0
23.5 29.0
45.9
200 162.4 173.2
4.4
338.3
78.6
83.8 8.4
163.7
40.8
43.6 17.4
85.1
24.9
26.5 28.6
51.8
250 204.7 218.3
4.3
426.4
100.8 107.5 8.3
210.0
51.9
55.4 17.1
108.2
32.0
34.1 27.8
66.6
300 246.9 263.4
4.3
514.5
123.0 131.2 8.2
256.2
63.0
67.3 16.9
131.4
39.1
41.7 27.3
81.4
350 289.2 308.5
4.3
602.6
145.2 154.9 8.2
302.5
74.1
79.1 16.8
154.5
46.2
49.3 26.9
96.2
400 331.5 353.6
4.3
690.7
167.4 178.6 8.2
348.7
85.2
90.9 16.7
177.6
53.3
56.8 26.7
111.0
450 373.8 398.7
4.3
778.8
189.6 202.2 8.1
395.0
96.3 102.8 16.6
200.7
60.4
64.4 26.5
125.8
500 416.1 443.9
4.3
866.9
211.8 225.9 8.1
441.2
107.4 114.6 16.5
223.9
67.5
72.0 26.3
140.6
600 500.7 534.1
4.3 1043.1
256.2 273.3 8.1
533.8
129.6 138.3 16.4
270.1
81.7
87.1 26.1
170.2
700 585.2 624.3
4.2 1219.3
300.6 320.6 8.1
626.3
151.8 162.0 16.4
316.4
95.9 102.3 25.9
199.8
800 669.8 714.5
4.2 1395.5
345.0 368.0 8.1
718.8
174.0 185.7 16.3
362.6 110.1 117.5 25.8
229.4
900 754.4 804.7
4.2 1571.7
389.4 415.4 8.1
811.3
196.2 209.3 16.3
408.9 124.3 132.6 25.7
259.0
455.1 138.5 147.8 25.6
288.6
1000 838.9 894.9
4.2 1747.9
433.8 462.7 8.1
903.8
218.4 233.0 16.3
1100 923.5 985.1
4.2 1924.1
478.2 510.1 8.1
996.3
240.6 256.7 16.2
501.4 152.7 162.9 25.6
318.2
1200 1008.1 1075.4
4.2 2100.3
522.6 557.5 8.1 1088.8
262.8 280.4 16.2
547.6 166.9 178.1 25.5
347.8
1300 1092.7 1165.6
4.2 2276.5
567.0 604.8 8.1 1181.3
285.0 304.1 16.2
593.9 181.2 193.2 25.5
377.4
1400 1177.2 1255.8
4.2 2452.7
611.4 652.2 8.0 1273.8
307.2 327.7 16.2
640.1 195.4 208.4 25.5
407.0
1500 1261.8 1346.0
4.2 2628.9
655.8 699.5 8.0 1366.3
329.4 351.4 16.2
686.4 209.6 223.6 25.4
436.6
1600 1346.4 1436.2
4.2 2805.1
700.2 746.9 8.0 1458.8
351.6 375.1 16.2
732.6 223.8 238.7 25.4
466.2
1700 1430.9 1526.4
4.2 2981.3
744.6 794.3 8.0 1551.3
373.8 398.8 16.2
778.9 238.0 253.9 25.4
495.8
1800 1515.5 1616.6
4.2 3157.5
789.0 841.6 8.0 1643.8
396.0 422.5 16.1
825.1 252.2 269.0 25.4
525.4
1900 1600.1 1706.9
4.2 3333.7
833.4 889.0 8.0 1736.3
418.2 446.2 16.1
871.4 266.4 284.2 25.3
555.0
2000 1684.7 1797.1
4.2 3509.9
877.8 936.4 8.0 1828.8
440.4 469.8 16.1
917.6 280.6 299.3 25.3
584.6
732.6
880.6
2500 2107.5 2248.1
4.2 4390.9 1099.8 1173.2 8.0 2291.3
551.4 588.2 16.1 1148.9 351.6 375.1 25.3
3000 2530.4 2699.2
4.2 5271.9 1321.8 1410.0 8.0 2753.9
662.4 706.6 16.1 1380.2 422.7 450.9 25.2
3500 2953.2 3150.3
4.2 6152.9 1543.8 1646.8 8.0 3216.4
773.4 825.1 16.1 1611.4 493.7 526.7 25.2 1028.7
4000 3376.1 3601.4
4.2 7033.9 1765.8 1883.6 8.0 3678.9
884.4 943.5 16.1 1842.7 564.8 602.5 25.2 1176.7
4500 3798.9 4052.4
4.2 7914.9 1987.8 2120.4 8.0 4141.4
995.4 1061.9 16.1 2074.0 635.8 678.2 25.1 1324.7
5000 4221.8 4503.5
4.2 8795.9 2209.8 2357.2 8.0 4604.0 1106.4 1180.3 16.1 2305.2 706.8 754.0 25.1 1472.7
5500 4644.7 4954.6
4.2 9676.9 2431.8 2594.0 8.0 5066.5 1217.4 1298.7 16.0 2536.5 777.9 829.8 25.1 1620.7
6000 5067.5 5405.6
4.2 10557.9 2653.8 2830.9 8.0 5529.0 1328.4 1417.1 16.0 2767.7 848.9 905.6 25.1 1768.7
6500 5490.4 5856.7
4.2 11438.9 2875.8 3067.7 8.0 5991.5 1439.4 1535.5 16.0 2999.0 920.0 981.4 25.1 1916.7
7000 5913.2 6307.8
4.2 12319.9 3097.8 3304.5 8.0 6454.1 1550.4 1653.9 16.0 3230.3 991.0 1057.1 25.1 2064.7
7500 6336.1 6758.9
4.2 13200.9 3319.8 3541.3 8.0 6916.6 1661.4 1772.3 16.0 3461.5 1062.0 1132.9 25.1 2212.7
6-6
Focal
length
View
(mm)
HoriHori- (mm)
Vertical zontal (mm) (µm) Vertical zontal
Lens focal length f=75mm
Focal
length
View
(mm)
Hori- (mm)
(µm) Vertical
zontal
Resolution
Focal
length
View
(mm)
Lens focal length f=50mm
Resolution
Lens focal length f=35mm
Resolution
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Installation Conditions and Method
(µm)
55
60
−
−
−
−
70
−
−
−
−
80
4.6
4.9
62.2
9.5
90
5.6
6.0
57.3
11.6
100
6.6
7.0
53.8
13.7
120
8.6
9.2
49.4
18.0
3.3
3.6 103.2
140
10.7
11.4
46.7
22.2
4.8
5.1
87.3
9.9
160
12.7
13.5
44.8
26.4
6.2
6.6
78.7
12.9
180
14.7
15.7
43.4
30.7
7.6
8.1
73.4
15.8
200
16.7
17.9
42.4
34.9
9.0
9.6
69.7
18.8
250
21.8
23.3
40.7
45.5
12.6
13.4
64.1
26.2
300
26.9
28.7
39.6
56.0
16.1
17.2
61.0
33.6
8.8
350
32.0
34.1
38.9
66.6
19.7
21.0
59.0
41.0
11.1
11.9
98.9 23.2
400
37.0
39.5
38.4
77.2
23.2
24.8
57.6
48.4
13.5
14.4
94.7 28.1
450
42.1
44.9
38.0
87.7
26.8
28.6
56.6
55.8
15.9
16.9
91.8 33.1
500
47.2
50.3
37.6
98.3
30.3
32.4
55.9
63.2
18.2
19.5
89.6 38.0
600
57.3
61.2
37.2 119.5
37.4
39.9
54.7
78.0
23.0
24.5
86.6 47.9
700
67.5
72.0
36.8 140.6
44.5
47.5
54.0
92.8
27.7
29.6
84.6 57.7
800
77.6
82.8
36.6 161.8
51.6
55.1
53.4 107.6
32.4
34.6
83.2 67.6
900
87.8
93.6
36.4 182.9
58.8
62.7
53.0 122.4
37.2
39.7
82.2 77.5
70.2
52.7 137.2
7.0
−
−
−
−
9.3 105.4 18.3
1000
97.9 104.5
36.3 204.0
65.9
41.9
44.7
81.4 87.3
1100
108.1 115.3
36.2 225.2
73.0
77.8
52.4 152.0
46.6
49.8
80.7 97.2
1200
118.2 126.1
36.1 246.3
80.1
85.4
52.2 166.8
51.4
54.8
80.2 107.1
1300
128.4 136.9
36.0 267.5
87.2
93.0
52.0 181.6
56.1
59.9
79.7 116.9
1400
138.5 147.8
35.9 288.6
94.3 100.6
51.9 196.4
60.9
64.9
79.4 126.8
1500
148.7 158.6
35.8 309.8
101.4 108.1
51.8 211.2
65.6
70.0
79.1 136.7
1600
158.8 169.4
35.8 330.9
108.5 115.7
51.6 226.0
70.3
75.0
78.8 146.5
1700
169.0 180.2
35.7 352.0
115.6 123.3
51.5 240.8
75.1
80.1
78.5 156.4
1800
179.1 191.1
35.7 373.2
122.7 130.9
51.4 255.6
79.8
85.1
78.3 166.3
1900
189.3 201.9
35.7 394.3
129.8 138.5
51.4 270.4
84.5
90.2
78.2 176.1
2000
199.4 212.7
35.6 415.5
136.9 146.0
51.3 285.2
89.3
95.2
78.0 186.0
2500
250.2 266.9
35.5 521.2
172.4 183.9
51.0 359.2 113.0
120.5
77.4 235.3
3000
300.9 321.0
35.4 626.9
207.9 221.8
50.9 433.2 136.6
145.8
76.9 284.7
3500
351.6 375.1
35.4 732.6
243.5 259.7
50.7 507.2 160.3
171.0
76.7 334.0
4000
402.4 429.2
35.3 838.4
279.0 297.6
50.6 581.2 184.0
196.3
76.4 383.3
4500
453.1 483.4
35.3 944.1
314.5 335.5
50.6 655.2 207.7
221.5
76.3 432.7
50.5 729.2 231.4
5000
503.9 537.5
35.2 1049.8
350.0 373.4
246.8
76.2 482.0
5500
554.6 591.6
35.2 1155.5
385.5 411.3
50.5 803.2 255.0
272.1
76.0 531.3
6000
605.4 645.8
35.2 1261.2
421.1 449.1
50.4 877.2 278.7
297.3
76.0 580.7
6500
656.1 699.9
35.2 1367.0
456.6 487.0
50.4 951.2 302.4
322.6
75.9 630.0
7000
706.8 754.0
35.2 1472.7
492.1 524.9
50.4 1025.3 326.1
347.8
75.8 679.4
7500
757.6 808.1
35.2 1578.4
527.6 562.8
50.3 1099.3 349.8
373.1
75.8 728.7
6-7
6
Installation Conditions and Method
6-2 Connection, installation, and wiring of IV-S20 main housing
[1] Connection
Connect the cameras (up to 2 cameras), remote key pad, and monitor to the IV-S20 main housing.
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
Y6
POWER
C(＋) ＋24V 0V
Y7 BUSY C(−)
IV-S20 main
housing
(plan view)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Camera 2 connector (CAMERA2)
Remote key pad
connector (REMOTE)
Camera 1 connector (CAMERA1)
Monitor connector (VIDEO)
IV-S20 main
housing
(side view)
3
6
Monitor
1
1
4
Camera 1
4
Camera 2
2
Remote key pad
1 Connect the camera cable connectors to the camera 1 (CAMERA1) and camera 2 (CAMERA2)
connectors on the IV-S20 main housing. => See page 6-19, 6-23, and 6-27.
Note: Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF.
- Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector. When the
connector is all the way on, it clicks.
- To disconnect the connector, hold the plug of the connector, and pull it straight out.
- A camera connected to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA1) is treated as camera 1 by this
system, and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector (CAMERA2) is treated as camera
2.
Note: You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector.
- The camera cable length is 3m. If you need a longer cable, order extension camera cable IVS20EC2 (cable length 2m) or IV-S20EC4 (cable length 4m).
Extension camera cable IV-S20EC2/4
Camera connector of
IV-S20 main housing
6-8
Installation Conditions and Method
2 Plug the remote key pad connector into the connector (REMOTE) on the IV-S20 main housing.
3 Connect the monitor to the monitor connector (VIDEO: RCA jack) on the IV-S20 main housing
using the monitor cable (supplied with the IV-S20, IV-S20N, and IV-S20M) and a conversion connector (supplied with IV-S20, IV-S20N, and IV-S20M). If the monitor has an RCA jack, the conversion connector is not required.
- Use a monitor with either an EIA or NTSC compatible video input terminal.
- Gently push the monitor connector straight in.
BNC connector
IV-S20 main
housing Monitor
Monitor connector (VIDEO)
Conversion
connector
Monitor cable
(Cable length 2 m)
RCA jack
Monitor
- If you need a monitor cable longer than 2 m, you can purchase a one at a video store.
4 For details about connecting and installing the camera, see page 6-19 and after.
Leave enough space around the IV-S20
In order to connect camera cables, the remote key pad cable, monitor cable and D-sub connector to
the IV-S20, the following space (min.) is required.
148mm
130mm
9mm
9mm
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
92mm
Y0
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
100mm
(minimum)
▼
Camera cable
6-9
· Do not bend the camera cables repeatedly.
· Make sure the installation location allows
enough space for the input/output wires going to
the I/O terminal block and the power terminal
block on the IV-S20.
6
Installation Conditions and Method
[2] Installation
To install the IV-S20 main housing, secure the bottom of the housing on the mounting surface with the
two main housing brackets (supplied with the IV-S20, IV-S20N.)
IV-S20 main housing
Housing bracket
Mounting surface
Mounting procedure
1 Attach the two housing brackets on the bottom of the IV-S20 main housing.
Four screws (M 3 x 6) are supplied with the IV-S20, IV-S20N, and IV-S20M to attach the
brackets.
Housing bracket (2 pcs.)
6
Bottom view
Screw position (4 places)
2 Secure the housing on the mounting surface with the brackets.
5
5
138
11
(Unit: mm)
IV-S20
4.5
Mounting position
(4 places)
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
92
70
OUTPUT
11
Housing bracket
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
148
The external dimensions of the housing brackets and the IV-S20 main housing are shown on the
following page.
6-10
Installation Conditions and Method
External dimensions of IV-S20 main housing
(Unit: mm)
130
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
92
92
92
OUTPUT
REMOTE
30
30
30
130
6
92
2 tapped holes M3
(for attaching the
housing bracket)
2 tapped holes M3
(for attaching the
housing bracket)
130
External dimensions of housing bracket
(Unit: mm)
2 holes 3.2 mm in diameter
(for attaching the bracket to the IV-S20)
10
5
10
23
1.6
4.5
5.7
10.5
70
91
Mounting position
(2 places: for securing the bracket to the mounting surface)
6-11
10.5
Installation Conditions and Method
[3] Connecting a power supply
Connect a commercially available constant-voltage power supply to the power terminals (POWER:
+24 V, 0 V) on the IV-S20 main housing.
Use a 24 VDC ± 10%, 350 mA or more constant-voltage power supply.
- Use an individual power supply to supply power to the IV-S20 main housing. If the power supply is
used to power other equipment, measurement errors may occur.
- Check the polarity of the power supply terminals, +24 V and 0 V. If power is supplied with the polarity
inverted, the IV-S20 main housing may be damaged.
- Only connect or disconnect the camera cable and other equipment while the power is OFF.
Frame ground
terminal
Constant-voltage
power supply
24 VDC
(+)
(-)
Fuse
(1A)
6
Power supply terminal
(POWER: + 24V)
Frame ground
terminal
Power supply terminal
(POWER : 0V)
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
X3
Y1
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
This distance must be
as short as possible.
(Recommended distance:
less than 30 cm)
IV-S20 main housing
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Note
To improve the noise resistance of the constant-voltage power supply connected to the
IV-S20 main housing, observe the following precautions.
- Ground the FG terminal of the constant-voltage power supply according to the class 3
grounding.
- The power line between the IV-S20 main housing and the constant-voltage power supply
must be as short as possible. (Recommended distance: less than 30 cm)
Do not run the power supply line near any noise generating sources, such as electric
motor lines.
- Use twisted-pair wire for the power supply line.
6-12
Installation Conditions and Method
Note
The constant voltage power supply (24VDC) connected to the IV-S20 main housing should
not be ground its positive terminal.
- If the positive terminal of the constant voltage power supply is grounded while using
external equipment connected to the SG or FG terminals, the short circuit shown below will
be created. This circuit will let a large current flow through the SG line inside the IV-S20,
and may destroy the circuit, or cause smoke or a fire.
External equipment
(monitor or the like)
IV-S20 main
Constant voltage power
housing
supply (24 VDC)
for the IV-S20
RS-232C／RS-422
SG
SG
FG
(-)
(+)
6
FG
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
When the SG or FG conduct current
inside the external equipment
Grounded positive line
Installation floor
Wraparound current
- If the positive terminal of the 24 VDC power supply must be grounded for facility
construction reasons, make sure to provide an independent power supply (exclusively for
use with the IV-S20) which does not ground either the positive or negative terminals.
6- 13
Installation Conditions and Method
[4] Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F)
7 input terminals and 9 output terminals are available on the input/output terminal block on the IV-S20
main housing.
The input terminal block has INPUT terminals X0 to X6 and C (+), and the output terminal block has
OUTPUT terminals Y0 to Y7, BUSY and C (-).
Input/output terminal block on the IV-S20 main housing
Input terminals (INPUT)
C(+)
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
IV-S20
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 BUSY C(–)
Output terminals (OUTPUT)
6
INPUT
X0
X1
X2
Y0
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
IV-S20 main housing
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7
BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
(1) Input terminals (INPUT) X0 to X4
- Measurement start input/output setting condition *1 - External input
- Measurement start input/output setting condition *2 - Measurement start input
X0
- Measurement start input/output setting condition *1 - External input
- Measurement start input/output setting condition *2 - Object type input (0 to 15)
X1 to 4
Object type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X4 X3 X2 X1
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF
OFF ON ON ON
Object type
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
X4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
X3 X2 X1
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF
ON ON ON
Input/output condition setting (See Chapter 11.)
Measurement start input I/F = General purpose serial interface signal
*1 Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = General purpose serial interface signal or auto detect (edge or level)
*2
Measurement start input I/F = Parallel
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger, CCD sampling start = Parallel interface
6-14
Installation Conditions and Method
(2) Input terminals (INPUT) X5 and X6
Parallel selection input
[When X5 and X6 are used to
(External input/reference image registration etc. and specify a measurement number]
X5 measurement number specification (lower bits))
Measurement
X6 X5
Specify in item 5PARALLEL INPUTX5 on the [I/O
to be executed
SETTINGS] menu.
Measurement 0
OFF OFF
Parallel selection input
Measurement 0&1 OFF ON
(External input/image change etc. and measurement
X6
Measurement 0&2 ON OFF
number specification (upper bits))
Measurement 0&3 ON ON
Specify in item 6PARALLEL INPUTX6 on the [I/O
SETTINGS] menu.
(See page 11-1 and 11-2.)
(3) Output terminals (OUTPUT) Y0 to Y7 and BUSY
Result of logical calculation output
Y0
- Specify in item rFINAL OUTPUT COND on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
to Y7 => See page 10-8 to 13.
When "BUSY" is active, this terminal outputs an ON signal while the IV-S20 is
executing the measurement and opening the all set menu.
BUSY When "READY" is active, this terminal outputs an ON signal while the IV-S20 is
waiting for a trigger.
- To specify "BUSY" or "READY," go to item 7OUTPUT STATUS in the "I/O
SETTINGS" menu. Seetings => See page 11-1. Time chart, etc. => See page 114 to 11-15.
6
(4) Input/output port
The input/output terminals are isolated by photocouplers, to prevent malfunctions due to noise.
Use them within the rated range. The specifications of the input/output ports are listed below.
Item
Rating
Rated input voltage
12/24 VDC
Input voltage range
10.5 to 26.4 VDC
Input Input voltage level
Input current level
ON: 3 mA or less OFF: 1.5 mA or more
Input impedance
3.3 k ohm
Rated output voltage
12/24 VDC
Load voltage range
10.5 to 27 VDC
Rated max. output current 20 mA DC
Output type
NPN transistor, open collector
ON voltage drop
1.2 V or less (20 mA)
Isolation method
Isolated by photocoupler
Response time
1 ms or less (OFF to ON, ON to OFF)
Input
Output
+
Power
supply
-
L
L
L
+
X6
IV-S20
X0
6- 15
C(+)
Y0
Y7
BUSY
Power
supply
(5) Wiring to IV-S20 main housing
Load
Output
ON: 10.5 V or less OFF: 5 V or more
- Fuse
(0.5A)
C(-)
Installation Conditions and Method
[5] Connection for communications with personal computer (general purpose serial I/F)
Connect a personal computer to the communication connector (RS232C/RS422) on the IV-S20 main
housing.
A 9-pin D-sub, male connector is included with the IV-S20, IV-S20N, and IV-S20M.
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
IV-S20 main housing
(plan view)
OUTPUT
Personal
computer
VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2
▼
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
IV-S20 main housing
(side view)
RS-232C/RS-422
Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422 : 9-pin D-sub female,
rock screw M2.6)
6
(1) When communicating through the RS-232C port
- IV-S20 pin arrangement of the communication connector (for RS-232C)
5
1
(9-pin D-sub, female)
9
6
Communication Pin No. Signal
standard
name
RS-232C
2
RD
3
5
SD
SG
FG
Connector shield
Direction
Details
Received data
Input
(personal computer - IV-S20)
Transmitted data
(IV-S20 - personal computer) Output
Signal ground
−
−
Frame ground
Personal computer
DOS/V, IBM-PC
Communication connector on the IV-S20
(RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub)
Signal
Pin No.
Function
name
Connector
Frame ground
FG
case
RD
Received data
2
SD
Transmitted data
3
Signal ground
SG
5
PC98 series
9-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub
Signal
name
Pin No. Pin No.
Connector Connector
FG
case
case
3
2
SD
2
3
RD
5
7
SG
7
4
RS
8
5
CS
6
6
DSR
1
8
CD
4
20
DTR
1
6
FL1
FL2
Memory protection 1
Memory protection 1
*(RS-232C)
*The maximum length of the communication cable depends on the communication speed.
Communication speed (kbps) Cable length · Conduct a communication
9.6, 19.2
15 m or less test before using the devices for
measurements.
2 to 3 m
38.4, 57.6, 115.2
6-16
Installation Conditions and Method
(2) When communicating through the RS-422
Specify the 4-wire or 2-wire RS-422 system on the [SERIAL COMM.] menu (see page 11-17).
5
1
(9-pin D-sub female)
9
6
Communication Pin No.
standard
4
7
RS-422
8
9
Connector field
Signal
Details
name
TA
Transmitted data
TB (IV-S20 - Personal computer)
Received data
RA
RB (Personal computer - IV-S20)
FG
Frame ground
Direction
Output
Input
−
1 4-wire system
Personal
computer RS-232C/422 converter
Z-101HE
Signal
name
1 FG SHIELD
FG
2 TD
RD(+)
TD
3 RD
RD(–)
RD
7 SG
TD(+)
SG
TD(–)
15 m
or less
(RS-232C)
Shielded twisted-pair cable
IV-S20 (9-pin D-sub)
Pin No. Signal
name
Connector
case
Function
Connector frame ground
4
7
8
9
FG
TA
TB
RA
RB
1
6
FL1 Memory protection 1
FL2 Memory protection 2
Transmitted data
(IV-S20 - Personal computer)
Received data
(Personal computer -IV-S20)
1 km or less
(RS-422)
2 2-wire system
Personal
computer RS-232C/422 converter
Z-101HE
Signal
name
1 FG SHIELD
FG
2 TD
TD
RD(+)
3 RD
RD
4 RS
RS
RD(—)
7 SG
SG
15 m
or less
(RS-232C)
Shielded twisted-pair cable
IV-S20 (9-pin D-sub)
Signal
Pin No. name
Connector
case
1 km or less
(RS-422)
6- 17
Function
Connector frame ground
4
7
8
9
FG
TA
TB
RA
RB
1
6
FL1 Memory protection 1
FL2 Memory protection 2
Transmitted data
(IV-S20 - Personal computer)
Received data
(Personal computer -IV-S20)
6
Installation Conditions and Method
[6] Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function
Connect a programmable controller to the communication connector (RS232C/RS422) and the input/
output terminals on the IV-S20 main housing.
Input/output terminals
IV-S20
INPUT
O/I
Communication port
Programmable controller
X0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
2
6
X1
Y0
IV-S20 main
housing
(plan view)
1
VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2
▼
▼
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
IV-S20 main
housing
(side view)
RS-232C/RS-422
Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422)
1Connect the computer link connector (RS-232C/RS-411) of a programmable controller to the
communication connector (RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub, female) on the IV-S20 main housing.
- See Chapter 14 "Computer Link" for details about the procedure for connecting to specific
manufacturers' controllers.
(The pin arrangement of the communication connector on the IV-S20 main housing is
shown on page 6-16 to 6-17.)
- In the case of RS-232C, the maximum communication cable length depends on the c o m munication speed.
Communication speed
9.6, 19.2
38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Cable length
15 m or less
2 to 3 m
Conduct a communication test before using the devices for measurements.
2Connect the input/output terminals of the programmable controller to the input/output terminals
on the IV-S20 main housing.
- See item [4] "Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F)" for details about wiring
procedure.
6-18
Installation Conditions and Method
6-3 Connection and installation methods of camera (IV-S20C1, IV-S30C1/
C2)
[1] Connecting and installation to the IV-S20C1
(1) Connection
Connect the cameras (up to 2 cameras), remote key pad, and monitor to the IV-S20 main housing.
Camera 2 connector
Camera 1 connector
Monitor connector
IV-S20 main
housing
(side view)
3
Monitor
4
1
Camera 1
6
Camera cable
Plug
Connector
1
Camera 2
1 Connect the camera cable connectors to the camera 1 (CAMERA1) and camera 2 (CAMERA2)
connectors on the IV-S20 main housing.
Note: Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF.
- Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector. When the
connector is all the way on, it clicks.
- To disconnect the connector, hold the plug of the connector, and pull it straight out.
- A camera connected to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA1) is treated as camera 1 by this
system, and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector (CAMERA2) is treated as camera
2.
Note: You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector.
- The camera cable length is 3m. If you need a longer cable, order extension camera cable IVS20EC2 (cable length 2m) or IV-S20EC4 (cable length 4m).
Extension camera cable IV-S20EC2/4
Camera connector of
IV-S20 main housing
2 Screw and the IV-S20L16 camera lens on the lens holder of the camera body, and secure it in
place.
Camera lens
Lens holder
（IV-S20L16, etc.）
IV-S20C1
6- 19
Installation Conditions and Method
(2) Installing the camera body
Attach the IV-S20C1 camera body on the mounting surface with the camera angle bracket (supplied
with the IV-S20, IV-S20N and IV-S20C1).
· Installation example 1
Camera side view
Camera front view
Camera angle bracket
Camera
Mounting
surface
6
· Installation example 2
Camera angle bracket
Camera
Mounting
surface
· Installation example 3
Camera
Camera angle bracket
Mounting
surface
Installation procedure
1 Attach the camera angle bracket to the tapped M3 hole on the camera body (20 mm mounting
pitch: one of three holes). Two screws (M 3 x 6) are supplied with the IV-S20, IV-S20N and IVS20C1 for attaching the angle.
2 Attach the camera controller angle to the mounting surface with the slotted holes 3.2 mm wide (20
mm mounting pitch) or 1/4-20 UNC threaded hole.
The external dimensions of the camera angle bracket , camera body, and extension camera cable are
shown on the following page.
6-20
Installation Conditions and Method
External dimensions of camera body (IV-S20C1) and camera lens (IV-S20L16)
28.5∼34
37
(Unit: mm)
3
37
25
2863
52.2
2 M3 tapped holes
2 M3 tapped holes
φ16.9
φ7
※
5 20
32
32
※
5 20
30
32
7
7
37
7
2 M3 tapped holes
※
5 20 5
30
※ Attach the camera angle bracket to
one of the tapped M3 holes 20 mm
mounting pitch (3 places).
6
External dimensions of camera angle bracket
4 slotted holes wide
(for securing on the camera body)
10°
10°
(Unit: mm)
25
39
20
5.5
2 slotted holes 3.2 mm wide
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
22.5
28
31
17
1/4-20 UNC threaded hole
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
3.2
28
20
60°
6- 21
Installation Conditions and Method
External dimensions of extension camera cable (IV-S20EC2/4)
(Unit: mm)
4000 (IV-S20EC4)
2000 (IV-S20EC2)
52.2
φ16.9
φ7
φ16.9
49.1
Note
6
- When the camera cable and extension camera cable (IV-S20EC2/4), leading to the camera
body (IV-S20C1), is bent, its bending radius should be longer than 40 mm.
If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation, design the cable layout so that
the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million
times.
Camera cable
Bending radius: Min. 40 mm
6-22
Installation Conditions and Method
[2] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1
(1) Connections
Up to two IV-S30C1 cameras can be connected to the IV-S20 main housing using the IV-S20HC3
camera conversion cable.
IV-S20 main housing
(side view)
Camera 2 connector: CAMERA2
Camera 1 connector: CAMERA 1
3
2
1
Camera 1
Camera conversion
Camera
(IV-S30C1) cable (IV-S20HC3)
Connector
Plug
1
Camera 2
1 Connect the IV-S20HC3 camera cable(s) to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the
IV-S20 main housing.
Note: Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF.
- Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector. When the
connector is all the way on, it clicks.
- To disconnect the connector, hold the plug of the connector, and pull it straight out.
- A camera connected to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA1) is treated as camera 1 by IV-S20
system, and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector (CAMERA2) is treated as camera
2.
Note: You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector.
- The IV-S20HC3 camera cable is 3m long. If you need a longer cable, order extension camera
cable IV-S20EC2 (cable length 2m) or IV-S20EC4 (cable length 4m).
Extension camera cable IV-S20EC2/4
Camera connector of
IV-S20 main housing
2 Plug the other end of the IV-S20HC3 camera conversion cable into the IV-S30C1, and tighten the
securing ring on the plug housing.
3 Screw the IV-S20L16 camera lens (or similar) into the lens holder on the IV-S30C1until it is
secure.
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16 or similar)
Lens holder
IV-S30C1
-
6- 23
6
Installation Conditions and Method
(2) Installation
Attach the IV-S30C1 camera on the mounting surface with the camera angle bracket (supplied with
the camera).
- Installation example 1
Camera front view
Camera side view
Camera angle bracket
IV-S30C1
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16 or similar)
Mounting
surface
- Installation example 2
6
Camera angle bracket
IV-S30C1
Mounting
surface
- Installation example 3
IV-S30C1
Camera angle bracket
Mounting
surface
Installation procedure
1 Attach the camera angle bracket to the tapped M3 hole on the camera body (20 mm mounting
pitch: one of three holes). Two screws (M 3 x 6) are supplied with the camera for attaching the
angle.
2 Attach the camera controller angle to the mounting surface with the slotted holes 3.2 mm wide (20
mm mounting pitch) or 1/4-20 UNC threaded hole.
The external dimensions of the camera angle bracket and camera body are shown on the following
page.
6-24
Installation Conditions and Method
- External dimensions when the IV-S20L16 camera lens and IV-S30C1 camera are
connected to the IV-S20HC3 camera conversion cable.
(Unit: mm)
37
28.5 to 34
7
3
37
43
3000
52.2
30
2 M3 tapped holes
2 M3 tapped holes
φ16.9
φ7
*
5 20
32
32
*
5 20
32
7
37
7
2 M3 tapped holes
*1
5 20 5
30
* Attach the camera angle bracket to one of the
tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting pitch (3
places).
6
- External dimensions of camera angle bracket
4 slotted holes wide
(for securing on the camera body)
10°
10°
(Unit: mm)
25
39
20
5.5
2 slotted holes 3.2 mm wide
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
22.5
28
31
17
1/4-20 UNC threaded hole
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
3.2
28
20
60°
6- 25
Installation Conditions and Method
Note
- When the IV-S20HC3 camera conversion cable is bent, its bending radius should be larger
than 40 mm. If the IV-S20HC3 camera conversion cable will be bent repeatedly during
operation, design the cable layout so that the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use
components that can be flexed up to 2 million times.
IV-S20HC3
Bending radius: Min. 40 mm
6
6-26
Installation Conditions and Method
[3] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C2
(1) Connections
Up to two IV-S30C2 micro cameras can be connected to the IV-S20 main housing using the IVS20HC3 camera conversion cables.
Camera 2 connector: CAMERA 2
IV-S20 main housing
(side view)
Camera 1 connector: CAMERA 1
3
2
1
Camera 1
IV-S20HC3 camera Connector
IV-S30C2
Micro camera conversion cable
Plug
Camera 2
1 Connect the camera cable(s) to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the controller.
Note 1: Make sure to turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the cameras.
- To connect them, match the keyed portion of the connectors and press in. When they are firmly
connected, you will hear a click.
- To unplug a connector, hold the plug housing and pull it straight out.
- Any camera plugged into the CAMERA 1 connector will be system camera 1 and any camera
plugged into the CAMERA 2 connector will be system camera 2 in the IV-S20 system.
Note 2: Make sure to connect a camera to CAMERA 1.
- The camera cable is 3 m long. If you need a longer cable, purchase the IV-S20EC2 camera
extension cable (2 m) or the IV-S20EC4 camera extension cable (4 m).
2 Plug the camera connector on the IV-S20HC3 camera conversion cable into the cable connector
on the IV-S30C2 camera and screw it down to secure the connection.
6- 27
6
Installation Conditions and Method
3 Screw a commercially available lens into the camera head of the IV-S30C2.
Lens
(commercially available)
Camera head
1. Screw the lens in until the camera image is focused.
2. Secure the lens using the lens locking ring on the camera head
Lens locking ring
6
M15.5x0.5
7
φ1
φ16
• External dimensions of the IV-S30C2 camera head
8±0.1
*
3 22±0.1
35.6
*6.8
6-28
(Unit: mm)
Installation Conditions and Method
(2) Installation of the camera head
1 Put the camera head through the bracket (supplied with the IV-S30C2) from the cable side and
slide the camera head into position.
Camera head bracket
(accessory)
Installed position of
the camera head
Camera head
Lens
(commercially available)
2 Secure the camera head bracket using the M3x6 screws that come with the IV-S30C2.
Screws
(M3 x 6:
accessory)
6
Mounting hole
(φ3.4: For securing the
camera assembly in place)
3 Secure the camera head assembly in place using the mounting hole (ø3.4) on the camera head
bracket.
Front view
Side view
Installation surface
Installation surface
Note: The camera head bracket supplied with the camera is for simple installations and is not
vibration-damping. To meet specific needs, the user may have to make a specialized bracket.
M3 hole
4
φ 3.
φ3
.4
φ3
.4
0.4
7 to10
(Shape before installation)
6- 29
(Unit: mm)
20.8
27.9
31.4
• External dimensions of the camera head bracket
9
5.
φ1
6.5
Installation Conditions and Method
(3) Installation of the camera body
1 Attach the camera mounting bracket (comes with the IV-S30C2 to the three M3 tapped holes
(spacing: 20 mm) on the camera body using the M3×6 installation screws that come with the IVS30C2.
2 Secure the camera mounting bracket on the installation surface using a 3.2mm long, 20 mm
difference screw or a 1/4-20 UNC screw hole.
[Installation example]
Front view
Side view
Camera body
Camera mounting bracket
(accessory)
Camera body
Installation
surface
Camera mounting bracket
6
(Unit: mm)
- External dimensions of the camera (IV-S30C2)
32
*
20
5
30
44.7
6.5
2 M3 tapped holes
*
5 20
28.5
28.5
44.7
*
5 20 5
28.5
44.7
2 M3 tapped holes
* Attach the camera angle bracket to one of
the tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting
pitch (3 places).
2 M3 tapped holes
6-30
Installation Conditions and Method
- External dimensions of camera angle bracket
4 slotted holes wide
(for securing on the camera body)
10°
10°
(Unit: mm)
25
39
20
5.5
2 slotted holes 3.2 mm wide
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
22.5
28
31
20
1/4-20 UNC threaded hole
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
17
3.2
28
6
60°
Note
- When the camera head cable is bent, its bending radius should be larger than 40 mm.
If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation, design the cable layout so that
the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million
times.
Head cable
* Bending radius: Min. 40 mm
*
*
6- 31
Setting and Operating Outlines
Chapter 7: Setting and Operating Outlines
7-1 Setting and operating procedures
The setting and operating procedures are outlined below.
1 System design
· Measurement program (positional deviation
measurement, degree of match inspection, etc.)
· Number of cameras, externally connected devices,
system components
· Input/output (measurement start input, result
output, object type change, etc.)
· Lighting equipment, illumination, shutter speed, lens, etc.
(Ref. section)
1-2 Measurement programs
4-1 Basic system configuration
4-2 System configuration examples
Chapter 11 Input/Output Conditions and Settings
6-1 Installation conditions
2 Installation/assembly
· Connection of cameras and monitor to the IV-S20 main
housing
· Installation of the IV-S20 main housing and camera body
· Connection of a power supply, input/output terminals
and external devices
6-2 Connection and installation
methods
6-3 Equipment connections
3 Turning ON the power supply (the IV-S20 main housing and monitor)
4 Environment settings
· Input/output conditions related to external devices
(Communication conditions, shutter speed, lighting
monitor, output monitor)
5 Setting the conditions for each object type
Chapter 7 Setting and Operating
Outlines
Chapter 11 Input/Output Conditions and Settings
Chapter 11 Input/Output Condi tions and Settings
Chapter 14 Computer Link
See the setting procedures starting on page 9·1.
Chapter 8 Run Menu Conditions and Settings
Chapter 9 Setting the Conditions for Each
Object Type
Chapter 10 PC Functions
· Object type No. specification
· Edit (copy and initialization)
· Setting measurement program conditions
(measurement 0 to 3)
· Setting positional correction “YES/NO”
· Setting system total numerical calculations
· Setting final output conditions
· Setting system/input/output
6 Other settings
· Japanese/English display switching, all parameter receiving, total initialization, saving to flash memory, etc
12-1 Settings
7 Operation
8 Test/inspection
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
(Chapters 3, 7 to
12, 13 and 14)
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
9 Maintenance
7-1
7
Setting and Operating Outlines
7-2 Screen specifications
[1] Operation (run) screen
Supply power to the IV-S20 main housing, and the MAIN OPS MENU (startup screen) will be
displayed on the monitor.
- Before applying the power, make sure that the power cable, monitor cable, camera cables, and
remote key pad have been connected to the IV-S20 main housing.
①
(TYPE00)AREA1
②
OK
⑧
⑥
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
F L C1ALLC2NO ●
LOCK VX.X ■
C1=002.2 OK
C2=100.0 OK
⑨
Select BUSY or READY on
the [I/O CONDITIONS]
menu.
X0∼6:
⑦
7
③
④
⑤
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
① Object type No. (00 to 15) and the name assigned by the user for each object type
② Display of the results of the programmable output (auxiliary relay C116)
If C116 has not been set, the results of C112 are output. (See page 10·7)
Display
Description
OK
NG
"OK" is displayed when all of the individual evaluation results are acceptable.
"NG" is displayed if any single evaluation result is unacceptable.
(Error
message)
An error code and the measurement number that caused the error are
displayed on the upper line. The error message is displayed on the lower line.
③ FL C1 ALL C2NO ●
Operation status display: ● flashing = running, ⃝ flashing = CCD trigger
sampling
Output monitor status
Camera 1 (C1)/camera 2 (C2) = All/upper/middle/lower/none
Image brightness: H = Original brightness of captured image
L = Brightness reduced to half that in the captured image
Image display mode: F = Freeze mode N = No camera input
④ LOCK VX.X ■
Flashes during communications
System program version number
Run menu lock ("LOCK" is not displayed while the screen is unlocked.)
⑤ C1＝002.2 OK
Average density during measurement, and judgment (OK/NG)
Camera No. (C1 = camera 1, C2 = camera 2)
· This item is displayed when the illuminance monitor MONITOR LIGHT LVL on the
[OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu has been set to "YES." (See page. 9·115.)
⑥ Measurement No. (0 to 3), camera No. (1 or 2) and measurement program name
7-2
Setting and Operating Outlines
⑦ Menu bar
Menu bar
Description
The
display
of
evaluation
results
can be cycled through in the order of the
MSR-CHNG
measurement
numbers
using
the
up
and down keys.
(measure(Measurement
0
camera
1
→Measurement
0 camera 2 → Measurement 1
ment change
→ Measurement 2 → Measurement 3)
REG-CHNG The display of the measurement results/numerical calculation results can be
(registration cycled through in the order of the registration numbers in the measurement
program using the up and down keys.
change)
The PC monitor screen is displayed by pressing the SET key. → See section
PC-MONTR
10-5 “PC monitor screen.”
(PC monitor)
(X input, Y input, auxiliary relay, timer/counter, final numerical calculation result)
Press the SET key, and the screen will change to the next [SYSTEM SETUP]
SET-SCRN menu.
(setting
· When the screen is returned from the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu to the MAIN
screen)
OPS MENU, if CAPTURE AN IMAGE has been set to “NO,” the image will not
be cleared.
The object type number (00 to 15) can be changed using the up and dow keys.
MANL-TYP · The object type number can be changed manually by setting the OBJ. NO.
MANL MODE item to “YES.” (See page 8·9)
-CHG
· Every time the object type is changed, the image will be cleared. (However,
(manual
type change) the image will not be cleared when CAPTURE AN IMAGE has been set to
“NO.”)
⑧ The screen shows the measuring time determined by the following time
(from measurement start to measurement end).
Actual measured time
(Only at changing type)
Image
Measurement result
Type change CCD exposure time CCD image
(Shutter speed)
capture time processing time
display time
time
Input I/F = Monitor display measurement time
with serial/CCD trigger
Input I/F = Monitor display measurement time with parallel input
To decrease the measuring time:
1. Increase the shutter speed (page 9·117),
2. Change the CCD image capture mode (CAPTURE AN IMAGE) to PARTIAL-IMAGE
(see page 8·3), and
3. Set the result displays (MESSAGE DISPLAY and PATTERN DISPLAY) to “NO”
(see page 8·4 and 8·5).
⑨ Display the measured results for each mesurement program
· The IV-S20 can store the setting conditions*. “Measured result screen” and “Image brightness:
H/L” on the MAIN OPS MENU (operation screen) will be latched, even after reapplying the power.
* To store the data, select ⑨ SAVE IN FLASH MEM, or ⑩ OPERATIONS, on the
[SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
[Image display area]
The size of the area (in pixels) where the image is displayed on the monitor is 512 (horizontal) ×
480 (vertical).
512
Y axis
480
X axis
Origin (0, 0)
(Unit: pixels)
(511, 479)
7-3
7
Setting and Operating Outlines
[2] Menu configuration
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item on the menu bar at the bottom of the
screen with the right and left keys, and press the SET key. Then, the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu will
be displayed. Select an item, and the corresponding sub-menu will be displayed.
[MAIN OPS MENU]
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
[SYSTEM SETUP]
①OPS MENU SETTING
②OBJECT TYPE COND
③I/O CONDITIONS
④ADJ. CAM POSITION (12·6)
⑤DISPLAY MODE (12·1)
⑥RECEIVING PARMS (12·2)
⑦INIT ALL PARMS (12·3)
⑧SELF DIAGNOSTICS (12·8)
⑨SAVE IN FLASH MEM (12·4)
⑩OPERATIONS
7
[RUN MENU SETTINGS] (8·1 to 10) · The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages
describing the operations in detail.
［OBJECT TYPE COND］(9·1)
①OBJECT TYPE NO. (7·7, 9·1)
②EDIT (9·28, 9·32)
③TITLE REGISTRATION (9·33)
④MEAS. 0, CAMERA 1
⑤POS. ADJ. CAMERA 1 (9·21)
⑥MEAS. 0, CAMERA 2
⑦POS. ADJ. CAMERA 2 (9·21)
⑧SELECT CAMERA IMG (9·25)
⑨COMPARE IMAGES (9·25)
⑩MESUREMENT 1
⑪MESUREMENT 2
⑫MESUREMENT 3
⑬FINAL CALC RESULT
⑭FINAL OUTPU COND
⑮SYSTEM-IN/OUT
⑯HALT MEAS ON NG (9·2)
⑰UPPER MENU
［TYPE00-MEAS0］(9·36)
①SELECT MEAS. TYPE(9·36)
②COPY (9･29)
③INITIALIZATION (9·31)
④MEAS. PROG. COND
*1 (Go to the next page)
⑤EVALUATION COND.
⑥NUMERIC CALC COND
[EVALUATION
⑦OUTPUT CONDITIONS
COND] (9·41)
⑧UPPER MENU
[NUMERIC
CALC] (9·42)
[OUTPUT
CONDITIONS] (9·43)
［TYPE00-MEAS1］(9·47 etc.)
①MEAS SELECTION (9·47 etc.)
②COMPARE IMAGES (9･27)
③SELECT CAMERA(9･47 etc)
④COPY (9･30)
⑤INITIALIZATION (9･31)
⑥MES. PRG. COND
⑦EVALUATION COND
*2
⑧NUMERIC CAL COND
(Go to the next page)
⑨OUTPUT CONDITIONS
⑩UPPER MENU
［TYPE00-MEAS2］
(The same as TYPE00-MEAS1)
［TYPE00-MEAS3］
(The same as TYPE00-MEAS1)
［NUMERIC CALC］(9·18)
［RESULTS OUTPUT］(10·8)
［OBJECT TYPE I/O］(11·17)
［IN/OUT SETTINGS］(11·1)
①MEAS TRIG INP I/F(11·2)
②START CCD SAMPLE (11·2)
③SERIAL OUTPUT (11·2)
④CHG MEAS NO. X5, X6(11·2)
⑤PARALLEL INPUT X5 (11·1)
⑥PARALLEL INPUT 6 (11·1)
⑦OUTPUT STATUS (11·1)
⑧SERIAL CONDITIONS
⑨COMPUTER LINK
⑩GAIN OFFSET
⑪UPPER MENU
7-4
①MONITOR LIGHT LVL (9·115)
②LIGHT LEVEL COND
[LIGHT
③TRIGGER CCD START (11·16) MONITOR] (9·115)
④CCD TRIGGER COND
[CCD
⑤COMPUTER LINK OUT
TRIGGER] (11·17)
&SERIAL OUTPUT (11·20)
⑥SHUTTER SPEED (9·117)
⑦STORE REF IMAGE (9·26)
⑧UPPER MENU
［SERIAL COMM.］(11·18)
［COMPUTER LINK］(11·19) ［ADJUST GAIN & OFFSET］(11·22)
Setting and Operating Outlines
· The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages
describing the operations in detail.
*1 (from the preceding page)
[MEASURING COND] (9·36)
1REGST NO.
2SELECT MODE
3GRAY-SCALE COND
4EDGE DETECT COND
5UPPER MENU
<Gray scale search matching conditions> (9·37)
<Edge detection conditions> (9·39)
*2 (from the preceding page)
MEAS SELECTION
Degree of
match inspection
[MEASURING COND] (9·47) 1REGST NO.
2MODE : GRAY-IMG-PROC BINRY-IMG-PROC
3MODEL 0 POSITION
4MODEL 1 MEAS. OBJ
5EVALUATE CRITERIA
Mode: In gray scale image processing mode
6UPPER MENU
<Gray scale search matching conditions>
[EVALUATION COND] (9·53)
(9·48)
Mode: In binary conversion processing mode
<Binary image matching conditions>
(9·51)
[NUMERIC CALC COND.] (9·54)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·55)
Distance and
angle measurement
[MEASURING COND]
In GRAY & EDGE
[MEASURING COND] (9·59)
1START POINT NO.
2START POINT MODE：GRY SRH EDG DET
3START POINT COND
In gray scale search mode
4AUX CONDITIONS
<Gray scale search
5DISTANCE COND.
matching condition> (9·60)
6ANGLE CONDITIONS
In
edge
detection mode
7UPPER MENU
<Binary image matching conditions> (9·61)
In label center of gravity
measurement mode
[MEASURING COND] (9·62)
1START POINT MODE
2AUX. CONDITIONS
3DISTANCE CONDITIONS
4ANGLE CONDITIONS
5UPPER MENU
[EVALUATION COND] (9·67)
[NUMERIC CALC] (9·68)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·69)
Continued on the following page
7-5
[AUX CONDITIONS] (9·64)
[DISTANCE SETTINGS] (9·65)
[ANGLE SETTINGS] (9·66)
<BINARY AREA COND: with
labels> (9·62)
[AUX. CONDITIONS] (9·64)
[DISTANCE SETTINGS] (9·65)
[ANGLE SETTINGS] (9·66)
7
Setting and Operating Outlines
· The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages
describing the operations in detail.
From the preceding page
Lead inspection
[MEASURING COND] (9·74)
1REGST NO.
2SEARCH CRITERIA
3OBJ NO. FOR MEAS
4LEAD LENGTH MEAS
5OBJ CONDFOR MEAS
6UPPER MENU
<Gray scale search
matching condition> (9·75)
<Edge detection conditions> (9·76)
[EVALUATION COND] (9·78)
[NUMERIC CALC] (9·79)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·80)
Area measurement by
binary conversion
[MEASURING COND] (9·84)
1REGST NO.
2BINARY AREA COND
<BINARY AREA COND> (9·85)
3UPPER MENU
[EVALUATION COND] (9·86)
[NUMERIC CALC] (9·87)
7
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·88)
Counting quantities by binary
conversion
[MEASURING COND] (9·92)
1REGST NO.
2BINARY AREA COND <BINARY AREA COND> (9·93)
3UPPER MENU
[EVALUATION COND] (9·94)
[NUMERIC CALC] (9·95)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·96)
Label measurement by binary
conversion
[MEASURING COND] (9·100)
1REGST NO.
2BINARY AREA COND
3FIND CENT/GRAVITY
4MAIN AXIS ANGLE
5FILLET DIAMETER
6PERIMETER LENGTH
7UPPER MENU
<BINARY AREA COND> (9·101)
[EVALUATION COND] (9·103)
[NUMERIC CALC] (9·104)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·105)
Point measurement
[MEASURING COND] (9·109)
1PROCESSING MODE: BIN-CONV, AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
2BINARY CONV COND
3THRESHOLD VALUE
4SET POINT
[SET POINT] (9·110)
5UPPERMENU
[EVALUATION COND] (9·111, 112)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (9·113)
7-6
Setting and Operating Outlines
[3] Set condition configuration
The chapters to refer to are shown in square brackets.
Run screen
conditions
Monitor output, image capture, message display, pattern display, binary image display, θ angle correction image display,
crosshair cursor display, object type manual set
[Chapter 8]
Conditions for each type
Title registration, position correction, calculation using two
[Chapters 9
images (camera selection), final numerical calculation, final
output conditions, system I/O setting, halt on NG measurement and 11]
Type 00
Measurement 0
MeasureMeasurement 1
ment
programs Measurement 2
Measurement 3
Type 01
Positional deviation measurement
Degree of match inspection, distance and
angle measurement, lead inspection, area
measurement after binary conversion,
counting the number of objects after
binary conversion, label measurement
after binary conversion, point measurement
The same as Type 00
7
Type 15
Input/output
conditions
Others
Input/output I/F, measurement number switching (X5, X6),
[Chapters 11]
parallel input (X5, X6), status output (BUSY/READY),
serial communication conditions, computer link, gain/offset
Camera position adjustment, display mode, all parameter
[Chapters 12]
receiving, all initialization, self-diagnosis, saving to flash
memory
7-7
Setting and Operating Outlines
[4] Image display
(1) Image display modes
There are two image display modes, i.e. through (moving images) and freeze (still image).
Display
Description
mode
· A single image taken by a camera is displayed.
Through · This mode is used for adjusting the camera focus, adjusting an image, and moving
a workpiece during testing.
· When a measurement trigger is input, and an image is captured, the still image is
displayed.
Freeze
· This mode is used for setting measurement conditions, while looking at the still
image, and for performing settings on the MAIN OPS MENU.
The operation (run) screen is only displayed in the FREEZE MODE, and the "ADJUST GAIN &
OFFSET" screen is only displayed in the through mode.
- Status display
At the upper right of the screen, "T" is displayed in the through mode, and "F" is displayed in the
freeze mode. (On the MAIN OPS MENU only, the word FREEZE is displayed.)
[Run screen]
(TYPE00)
OK
[Setting screen]
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 MEAS-BIN-AREA
7
［OBJECT TYPE COND］
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
②EDIT
③TITLE REGISTRATION
④MEAS.0, CAMERA1
⑤POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
Shown in freeze mode
F C1 H
00(0∼15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
In freeze mode
(“T” in through mode)
Notes
- To register a reference image for gray scale searches, and to test evaluation conditions
If these operations are started in the through mode, the message CHANGE TO FREEZE
MODE will be displayed. Before starting these operations, change to the image F (freeze
display mode.)
- Displaying binary images
In the through mode, the image captured when the freeze mode is invoked while be
displayed after binary conversion.
(2) Adjustment of image brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted on any setting screen (other than the run screen) output on
the monitor.
- Purpose
This function is used when the image is so bright that the characters and pattern display are
difficult to see.
- Status display
The brightness level, "H" or "L," is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
Level
Description
display
The image captured by the camera is displayed at the original brightness of the image.
H
The image captured by the camera is displayed at half the brightness of the original.
L
- Examples of brightness displays
(At H level)
(At L level)
7-8
Setting and Operating Outlines
7-3 Remote key pad specifications
4 Image change key (SEL)
1 Direction keys
(up, down,
left and right)
5 Measurement start/brightness select key
(TRG/BRT)
2 Set (select) key (SET)
3 Cancel key (ESC)
Key name
*
1
Direction keys
(up, down, left
and right)
Function
Description
Selecting an item on a
menu screen
Setting a window
Select an item with the up, down, left and right
keys.
Set each coordinate.
· Select a digit or an item with the left and right
keys, and then specify a value with the up and
down keys.
· Specify a value with the up, down, right and left
keys.
Setting a value
Determine a highlighted
item
Set
(select)
key
2
(SET)
Determine the setting
value
Returning a setting to its
original state before beCancel key
ing changed
3
(ESC)
Returning to the previous
menu
Switch the image mode between through and
freeze on a setting screen. (See the preceding
Switching the image
page.) When the mode is switched from
Image change mode between the
through to freeze, a new image is captured.
4 key (SEL)
through mode and freeze Note: The run screen is only displayed in the
mode
freeze mode, and the “ADJUST GAIN &
OFFSET” screen is only displayed
in the through mode.
Start measurement input
Measurement
start/brightness
5
select key
Switching the brightness
(TRG/BRT)
level (H and L)
Press this key on the run screen, and a new
measurement is triggered.
Change the displayed image brightness. (See
the preceding page.)
· Use this key when the image is so bright that
characters are difficult to see.
· The brightness can be changed on any
screen other than the run screen.
* The direction keys have an auto-repeat function (holding them down is the same as pressing
them repeatedly).
7-9
7
Setting and Operating Outlines
7-4 Operation flow
[1] Processing after power is turned ON and main loop processing
(Power ON)
Start up
Initializing (CPU, gate array)
Memory check
· System program
· Conditions other than
the conditions for each
object type
Transmitting from flash memory to RAM
Data setting
· CPU, variables
· Gate array
OK
Checksum checking
7
Processing after the
power is turned ON
NG
Initializing NG type conditions
No
Settings for all types completed
Yes
Transmitting from flash memory to RAM
Measurement conditions for
each object type
Obtaining images capturing
specific lines of an image
ESC key
OFF
ON
Setting the MAIN OPS MENU
in the locked state
To the next page
7-10
Setting and Operating Outlines
From the preceding page
Display of results.
When they have been set to “YES”
Message display
Pattern display
Crosshair cursor display
(Communication processing)
Data received
(System) Display “YES”
No
Yes
Communication processing
Receiving a measurement
start input signal
Measurement start
Parallel/general-purpose serial/CCD
trigger
OFF
Main loop
processing
ON
See item [2].
Executing measurements
Measurement result output processing
Key input
7
PC calculation
PC calculation
Parallel/general-purpose serial
No
Yes
Process key strokes
Processing on sub-menu
(See page 7·4 to 7·7 for the menu
configuration.)
7-11
Setting and Operating Outlines
[2] Operation flow after a measurement start input signal is given
Start (measurement start input ON)
PC calculation
Parallel output (Y0 to Y15), "BUSY" ON
External interface inhibit
(key, communications, parallel)
Measurement timer start
Reading the object type No.
Image capturing (camera 1/2)
No
The range of the lines to be captured,
as set in the measurement conditions,
is fetched.
Illuminance monitor set
Yes
Executing illuminance monitoring
Executing measurement 0 using
camera 1
7
Yes
[Measurement program to be
selected]
· Positional diviation measurement
An error was detected
No
Executing measurement 0 using
camera 2
Yes
An error was detected
No
No
Positional correction
Yes
Setting the coordinate correction
value (X, Y, θ)
Executing measurement 1
Yes
An error was detected
No
Executing measurement 2
Yes
An error was detected
Executing measurement 3
An error was detected
No
② (To the next page)
[Measurement programs to select]
· Matching inspection for shape
and size
· Distance and angle measurement
· Lead inspection
· Area measurement after binary
conversion
· Counting by quantities by binary
conversion
· Label measurement by binary
conversion
· Detect existence using point
measurements
The window coordinates are
corrected within the range set for
each type of measurement,
based on the correction value
determined in the steps marked
with an (*)
No
Yes
(*)
① (To the next page)
7-12
Setting and Operating Outlines
2 (From the preceding page)
No
PC calculation
Message display
Yes
1 (From the preceding page)
No
Error display
Message display
Yes
Displaying the measurement result
(value, decision etc.)
No
Pattern display
Yes
No
Positional correction “yes”
Yes
Pattern display after correction Pattern display during setting
7
Determining the measuring time (timer stop)
Parallel output (Y0 to Y15), “BUSY” OFF
External interface enabled (communications)
No
Computer link
Serial output
General purpose
General purpose serial output
Computer link output
External interface enabled (key, parallel)
Waiting for a measurement start input signal or key input
- If HALT MEAS ON NG (halt operation on NG measurement) has been set to "YES" (page 9-2),
measurement will be interrupted at any point in the process if an NG measurement occurs the
same as when an error occurs.
7-13
Setting and Operating Outlines
7-5 When using the IV-S30SP
The IV-S30SP is support software used to design the IV-S20/S30 system configuration. It will run
on Windows 95,98, or NT 4.0 computers. You can easily set the various measuring conditions for
the IV-S20 using your personal computer. It also facilitates the setting, uploading, and downloading
the IV-S20 parameters, saves the displayed image and messages, and can test the commands,
upgrade the software.
It can create and point documents such as the set of parameters, using the tools common of the
Window environment.
IV-S20
INPUT
X0
X1
Y0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
POWER
X4
Y3
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
POWER
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1
▼
CAMERA2
▼
RS232C/RS422
IV-S20 main housing
(plan view)
REMOTE
Personal computer
IBM PC/AT(converter)
Communication connector
（RS232C/RS422）
IV-S20 main housing
(side view)
IV-S30SP
*RS-232C
communication cable
7
* An RS-232C communication cable is an accessory that comes with the IV-S30SP.
- Cable length ----- 1.5m
- Connector -------- 9 pin D-sub male (IV-S20 side) + 9 pin D-sub female (personal
computer side)
The IV-S30SP software can be used on any personal computer that has the operating environment
described below :
Item
Specifications
Personal computer IBM PC/AT (compatible machine))
CPU
Pentium 90MHz or more (Pentium 133MHz or more
is recommended)
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98 Japanese version
Microsoft Windows NT4.0 Japanese version
Memory
At least 32M-bytes RAM memory
(48M-bytes or more is recommended)
Hardware diskette
Vacant area of 30M bytes
Monitor
SVGA or better monitor (resolution: 800 x 600 pixels,
256 colors minimum.)
CD-ROM drive
1 set
RS-232C port
1 port or more
Mouse
Microsoft Mouse or equivalent pointing device
Printer
A printer compatible with the Window95, 98, or NT
environment.
USB port
1 port is recommended (supporting USB port only with Windows98)
- Windows is a registered trade mark of the Microsoft Corporation, USA.
- Pentium is a registered trade mark of the Intel Corporation, USA.
For details about the IV-S30SP, see the IV-S30SP instruction manual.
7-14
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
Chapter 8: Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[1] Output monitor
When two cameras have been connected to IV-S20, you can switch back and forth between the image
from the cameras on one monitor. Also, the monitor screen can be divided into two parts to display the
two images simultaneously.
- Purpose of the setting
To set the conditions in which an image captured during measurement will be displayed on the run
menu.
- Output monitor switching
The monitor can be switched by two methods, i.e. key pressing or parallel input.
(1) Output monitor switching by key presses
To specify a monitor, select the 1 MONITOR OUTPUT and 2 CAMERA1&2 options you want on
the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING
and press the SET key.
F C1 L
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
Indicates camera 1.
When CAM2 is selected for 1
MONITOR OUTPUT, C2 will be
dis-played, and when CAM1&2
is selected, “1&2” will be displayed.
8
· Item 2 will be displayed if CAM1&2 has been selected in item 1.
MAIN OPS MENU condition
1 MONITOR OUTPUT
2 CAMERA1&2
Description of setting (selection)
Select the camera whose image will be displayed on the screen.
· If CAM1&2 is selected, the picture taken by camera 1 will be
displayed on the upper half of the screen, and the picture taken
by camera 2 will be displayed on the lower half of the screen.
Each images taken by cameras 1 and 2 is divided into three
parts, i.e. the upper, middle and lower parts. Select the part you
want displayed on the screen. (When CAM1&2 has been specified in 1 MONITOR OUTPUT.)
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu (shown above), move the cursor to item 1 MONITOR
OUTPUT with up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to CAM1, CAM2, or CAM1&2 with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
(If CAM1&2 is specified, continue with steps 3 and 4.)
3. Move the cursor to 2 CAME1&2, with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
4. Select CAM1 or CAM2 with the left and right keys, the select UP, MD or LO for each camera with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
[Display examples on the MAIN OPS MENU]
· Camera 1 on the whole screen
(When CAM1 has been specified in item
1 MONITOR OUTPUT)
· Camera 2 on the whole screen
(When CAM2 has been specified in item
1 MONITOR OUTPUT)
C1ALL C2NO
C1NO C2ALL
8-1
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
· Simultaneous display on a divided screen
(When CAM1&2 has been specified in item 1
MONITOR OUTPUT.)
When item 2 CAMERA1&2, has been
set to CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
C1UP
When CAM1 has been set to LO
C1LO
Screen for
camera 1
Screen for
camera 2
C1MD
C2MD
When CAM1 has been set to UP
When CAM2 has been set to UP
C2UP
When CAM2 has been set to LO
C2LO
8
(2) Output monitor switching by parallel input
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
⇒ Move the cursor to 3 I/O CONDITIONS (input/output conditions) on the [SYSTEM SETUP]
menu, and press the SET key.
[IN/OUT SETTINGS]
1MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRG
3SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT-PARALLEL)
4CHG MEAS NO.X5,X6 NO YES
5PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT-INP. REG-REF-IMG(MSR0)
6PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT-INP. CHG-IMG-OUT-CAM CAM-MEAS
7OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY
8SERIAL CONDITIONS(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0GAIN-OFFSET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
qUPPER MENU
· Item 2 is displayed when CCD-TRG. (CCD trigger) has been specified in item 1.
· Set PARALLEL INPUT X6 to CHG-IMG-OUT-CAM.
· Every time the signal X6 is turned ON from OFF, camera display will be switched.
Camera 1 on
the whole screen
Camera 2 on
the whole screen
Cameras 1 and 2
on a divided screen
Note: You can change the display part of the image from the CAM1 & 2 to the
UP, MD or LO by key input or by using a general-purpose serial interface command.
· An the example of the display on the MAIN OPS MENU is the same as that shown in
Item (1) above “Output monitor switching by key input.”
8-2
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[2] Image capture
In item 3 CAPTURE AN IMAGE, on the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, specify the range of lines
which will be captured during operation.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 1 OPS MENU SETTING and
press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
3 CAPTURE AN IMAGE
PARTIAL-IMAGE
(partial image)
WHOLE-IMAGE
(whole image)
NO
(no image)
Description
· An image of the specified lines, required for inspection or
measurement, will be captured.
· The processing time is shorter than in the WHOLE-IMAGE mode.
· A whole image will be captured, irrespective of the window
settings for inspection or measurement.
· This mode is used to monitor portions of an image outside the
window set up for inspection or measurement.
· No image will be captured during operation. Measurements will
be carried out with an image being displayed.
· This mode only used to carry out measurements on an image
transmitted from a personal computer to the IV-S20.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu (shown above), move the cursor to item 3 CAPTURE AN
IMAGE with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to PARTIAL-IMAGE, WHOLE-IMAGE or NO with the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
[Example of a comparison of the capture times]
If the number of lines required has been set to 120:
When PARTIAL-IMAGE is specified: Approx. 8 ms
When WHOLE-IMAGE is specified: Approx. 33 ms (regardless of the number of lines)
Whole image reading
Partial image reading
480 lines
(approx. 33 ms)
120 lines
(approx. 8 ms)
8-3
8
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[3] Message display
Select "YES" or "NO" to display messages on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING
and press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
4 MESSAGE
Description
DISPLAY
YES (RESULT.OK) All data will be displayed.
YES (RESULT.NO) Data other than the numerical result will not be displayed.
No messages will be displayed.
NO
8
Setting to "NO" reduces the processing time.
YES (RESULT.OK) > YES (RESULT.NO) < NO
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 4 MESSAGE DISPLAY with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES (RESULT.OK), YES (RESULT.NO) or NO with the left and right keys, and
press the SET key.
[Display examples]
· When the display mode has been
· When the display mode has been
set to YES (RESULT.OK)
set to YES (RESULT.NO)
(TYPE00)
OK
（TYPE00）
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS DEVIATION
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS DEVIATION
REGST NO.0(0∼7)
X COORD(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL0)X=＋000.0OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL0)Y=＋000.0OK
MATCH (MDL0) ＋10000 OK
ANGLAR DEVIT ＋001.7゜ OK
X COORD(MDL1) X=534.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL1) Y=480.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL1)X=＋001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL1)Y=＋001.0 OK
MATCH (MDL1) ＋09999 OK
X0∼6:
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-M0NTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
X0∼6:
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-M0NTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
Press the SEL key to delete.
· When the display mode has been
set to NO
Press the SET
key.
Press the ESC
key.
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-M0NTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
The menu bar will be displayed.
8-4
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[4] Pattern display
Select MEAS-RESULT-OUT or NO, to determine whether to display (windows and other marking)
over an image displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and
press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
5 PATTERN
DISPLAY
Description
When correction registration has been set to YES in items 6
and 7 on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, the pattern
MEAS-RESULT display will be corrected on the MAIN OPS MENU.
Note: When the monitor camera mode has been set to the 2-OUT
screen divided display mode (cameras 1 and 2), the
patterns will not be displayed even if MEAS-RESULTOUT is specified.
NO
Patterns will not be displayed on the [MAIN OPS MENU.]
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 5 PATTERN DISPLAY, with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to MEAS-RESULT-OUT or NO with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
[Display examples]
· When the display mode has been set
to MEAS-RESULT-OUT.
(TYPE00)
OK
· When the display mode has been set
to NO”
（TYPE00）
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS DEVIATION
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS DEVIATION
REGST NO.0(0∼7)
X COORD(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL0) X=＋000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL0) Y=＋000.0 OK
＋10000 OK
MATCH (MDL0)
＋001.7゜ OK
ANGL-DEV
X COORD(MDL1) X=534.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL1) Y=480.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL1) X=＋001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL1) Y=＋001.0 OK
＋09999 OK
MATCH (MDL1)
REGST NO.0(0∼7)
X COORD(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL0) X=＋000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL0) Y=＋000.0 OK
＋10000 OK
MATCH (MDL0)
＋001.7゜ OK
ANGL-DEV
X COORD(MDL1) X=534.0 OK
Y COORD(MDL1) Y=480.0 OK
X DEVIAT(MDL1) X=＋001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT(MDL1) Y=＋001.0 OK
＋09999 OK
MATCH (MDL1)
X0∼6:
X0∼6:
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
8-5
8
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[5] Binary image display
Select "YES" or "NO" to display a binary image on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the [MAIN OPS MENU,] move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU
SETTING and press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
6 SHOW BINARY
IMAGE
YES
8
NO
Description
A binary image will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
Note: When the monitor camera mode has been set to the 2screen divided display mode (cameras 1 and 2), the
binary image will not be displayed even if "YES" is
selected.
A binary image will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 6 SHOW BINARY IMAGE with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
[Display examples]
· When the display mode has been set
to YES
(TYPE00)
OK
· When the display mode has been set
to NO
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
(TYPE00)
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 CNT-BIN-OBJ
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 CNT-BIN-OBJ
REGST NO. 00(0∼3)
NUMBER 00006 OK
TOTAL ARA 004434 OK
REGST NO. 00(0∼3)
NUMBER 00006 OK
TOTAL ARA 004434 OK
X0∼6:
X0∼6:
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-M0NTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
Y0∼7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-M0NTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
8-6
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[6] θ angle correction image display
Select "YES" or "NO" to display a θ angle corrected image on the [MAIN OPS MENU.]
On the [MAIN OPS MENU,] move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu item, move the cursor to item 1,
OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
7SHOW
CORRECT IMG
YES
NO
Description
A θ angle corrected image will be
displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
A θ angle corrected image will not be
displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 7 SHOW CORRECT IMG, with
the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
[Display examples]
(Reference image)
(Measured image)
Position of
reference image
· When the θ
angle correction
image display
mode has been
set to YES
· When the θ
angle correction
image display
mode has been
set to NO
See “Positional correction” (page 9·20) for details about θ angle correction.
8-7
8
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[7] Crosshair cursor display
A crosshair cursor can be displayed at any point on the MAIN OPS MENU item and used to manually
position a workpiece.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING
and press the SET key.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
8 DISPLAY
+CURSOR
8
Description
YES
A crosshair cursor can be displayed at any point on the
MAIN OPS MENU.
- The initial coordinates of the crosshair cursor position are
(255, 240).
NO
A crosshair cursor will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
MANL-MESR
The distance, X coordinate distance, and Y coordinate distance
of the two points that were manually designated on the MAIN
OPS MENU can be measured.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 8 DISPLAY + CURSOR, with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
When the cursor has been set to YES, the crosshair cursor can be moved with the direction keys.
After defining the position, press the SET key.
When "YES" is selected
1. Move the crosshair cursor using the up/down and left/right keys.
2. When the position is correct, press the SET key.
When MANL-MESR
1. Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
2. Display [MANL-MESR] using the SEL key.
F L C1ALL C2NO
VX.X
(TYPE00)
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
Manual
measurement
[MANL-MESR]
DTC. CORD0 (248, 240)
DTC. CORD1 (264, 240)
DIST-BETWE 016. 0
DIST-BETW-X 016. 0
DIST-BETW-Y 000. 0
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
NO.0 CHG NO.1CHGNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
3
Detect point 0 (NO.0) Detect point 1 (NO.1)
8-8
- Automatically enter the initial values
When measurement 1 is a distance and
angle measurement, a degree of match
inspection, or a lead inspection, the
points for register numbers 0 and 1 are
set automatically to the initial values for
inspection points 0 and 1.
Output point for register 0
Detect point 0 for manual
measurement
Output point for register 1
Detect point 1 for manual
measurement
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
3. Select NO.0 CHG using the left and right keys
- When NO.0 CHG is selected, you can move designated point 0. (When you select NO.1 CHG,
you can move designated point 1.
4. Move designated point 0 using the up/down and left/right keys. When it reaches the desired
position, press SEL to confirm the position.
5. Designate point 1 by repeating steps 2 to 4 above.
- Now the distance between designated points 0 and 1, designated manually above, and X
coordinate distance, and Y coordinate distance can be displayed.
Coordinates of
designate point 0
Coordinates of
designate point 1
［[MANL-MESR]
DTC. CORD0 (192, 191)
DTC. CORD1 (410, 256)
DIST-BETWE 227. 4
DIST-BETW-X 218. 0
DIST-BETW-Y 000. 0
[8] Manually setting the object type
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], the object type (00 to 15) can be changed manually (using the remote key
pad).
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
9 OBJ. NO.
MANL MODE
Description
YES
The type can be manually changed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
Note: If OBJ. NO. MANL MODE is set to YES, the type cannot
be changed with an external interface (parallel I/O or
general purpose serial IF).
NO
The type cannot be manually changed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 9 OBJ. NO. MANL MODE with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
[Changing the object type on the MAIN OPS MENU]
1. Move the cursor to MANL-TYPE-CHG with the left and right keys.
2. Change the object type number (displayed in the uppermost area) with the up and down keys.
8-9
8
Run Menu Conditions and Settings
[9] Image display
Select the desired measurement image status (FREEZE or THROUGH) on the MAIN OPS MENU.
[RUN MENU SETTINGS]
1MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM2 CAM1&2
2CAMERA1&2
CAM1=MD CAM2=MD
3CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL-IMAGE WHOLE-IMAGE NO
4MESSAGE DISPLAY YES(RESULT.OK) YES(RESULT.NO) NO
5PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS-RESULT- OUT NO
6SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO
7SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO
8DISPLAY + CURSOR NO YES MANL-MESR
9OBJ.NO.MANL MODE NO YES
0IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
qUPPER MENU
0IMAGE DISPLAY
Contents
FREEZE
Measurements can be made on a frozen image.
THROUGH
Measurements can be made on a frozen image.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [RUN MENU SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 0IMAGE DISPLAY with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to FREEZE or THROUGH with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
8
[10] Main operations menu lock
To prevent accidental changes to conditions you have set, the MAIN OPS MENU can be locked so that
the screen cannot be changed to SET-SCRN. The operation is carried out on the [POWER ON
SETTINGS] menu.
[Display procedure]
Follow the procedure described below when turning ON the power to the IV-S20 main housing, and
the [POWER ON SETTINGS] menu will be displayed on the monitor.
1. Turn ON the power to the IV-S20 main housing, while holding down the ESC key.
2. Keep pressing the ESC key down for approx. 3 sec., after turning ON the power and the menu will
be displayed.
[POWER ON SETTINGS]
1MAIN OPS MENU
UNLOCK LOCK
2OPERATION
1 MAIN OPS
MENU
UNLOCK
LOCK
Description
All of the operating conditions for the
IV-S20 can be changed.
The MAIN OPS MENU is locked and
no change can be made.
[Operation procedure]
1. On the [POWER ON SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 1 MAIN OPS MENU with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to UNLOCK or LOCK with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to item 2 OPERATION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
Press the SET key once more.
- The screan returns to the MAIN OPS MENU.
[Display when the MAIN OPS MENU is locked]
(TYPE00) AREA1
F L C1ALLC2NO
LOCK VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
8-10
“LOCK” will be
displayed on the
MAIN OPS MENU.
Setting The Criteria For Each Object Type
Chapter 9 : Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type
9-1 Outline
The measuring conditions for each object type are set on the [OBJECT TYPE COND ] (conditions for object
type) menu.
[Settings screen]
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
and press the SET key.
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
9COMPARE IMAGES
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
[Setting procedure]
Items set on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Enter the object type number (0 to 15)
Editing (copying and initialization)
Selecting the difference between
images calculation
Setting the measurement program
conditions
No
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO SUB.I1−T1 DIFF.ABS｜I1−T1｜ · Unless item 8 is set to
“NO,” then item 9 will
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
also be displayed.
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
Correct the camera position?
Yes
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT: See Editing in section 9-2 [7] and [8].
8 SELECT CAMERA IMG, 9 COMPARE IMAGES
See section 9-2 [6].
4MEAS.0, CAMERA 1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA 2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
See item (1) outline of setting
the measurement program
5POS. ADJ. CAMERA 1
See section 9-2 [5]
7POS. ADJ. CAMERA 2
· Determine whether or not correct image position which will be
mesured by measurement 1 to 3 based on the measure positional
deviation by the measurement 0.
Set position correction value
Set final value numeric calculation
eFINAL CALC RESULT
Set final output condition
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
Setting the system input/output
conditions
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
Enabling/disabling a halt on an NG
measurement
yHALT MEAS ON NG
See item (2) Halting on an NG measurement
To return to [SYSTEM SETUP]
menu
uUPPER MENU
Save in flash memory
9-1
See section 9-2 [4].
See Chapter 10
See section 9-11 and Chapter 11
9
Setting The Criteria For Each Object Type
(1) Outline of setting the measurement program
4MEAS.0, CAMERA 1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA 2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
[TYPE00-MEAS0]
1SELECT MEAS.
NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE
2COPY
EXEC←TYPE00-CAM1NO
3INITIALIZATION
EXEC
4MEAS. PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6NUMERIC CAL COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8UPPER MENU
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
Displayed when
object type 00
is selected.
Displayed when object type
00 is selected and
measurement 1 is selected.
*
Select the camera.
* Will be displayed unless “NO” is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG (camera
selection) on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
9
Set the specific
conditions for each
measurement program
Set the determination
conditions (testing)
Set the output conditions (see
“Chapter 10: The PC Function”)
Set the method for
numeric calculation
(testing)
Previous menu
(2) Halting on an NG measurement
All measurements can be halted if an NG measurement occurs whilst operating the IV-S20.
This is done by selecting item y HALT MEAS ON NG on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
00(0 ~15)
(NEXT MENU)
NO YES
y HALT MEAS ON NG
(Halting on an NG
measurement)
Description
YES
Halt all measurements if an NG evaluation occurs.
NO
Allows measurements to continue when an NG evaluation occurs.
9-2
Shared settings
9-2 Shared settings
[1] Window shape selection and settings
This section describes how to select and set the window shapes used for image processing (e.g.
rectangular windows, horizontal or vertical line boundaries, round windows, and elliptical windows).
This can be done using the up, down, left, and right setting keys on the remote key pad.
(1) A rectangular window
Line type
Image processing used
Reference image gray
scale search, binary
image matching
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree
of match inspection for shape and size, distance and angle
measurement (gray scale search/locating the center of
gravity), lead inspection
Window containing a
binary image
Area measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities
by binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
Gray scale search area
detection
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search), degree
of match inspection for shape and size, distance and angle
measurement (gray scale search), lead inspection (criteria
search).
Edge of an area
detection
Positional deviation measurement (edge), distance and angle
measurement (edge).
Binary image window
mask
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity), Area
measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities by
binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
Solid lines
Dotted lines
Measurement programs
[How to set a rectangular window]
The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the mask: move, upper left,
lower right. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid-line rectangular window.
1. Moving the mask
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
2. Specifying the upper left corner
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
3. Specifying the lower right corner
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
9-3
9
Shared settings
(2) Horizontal/vertical lines
Line type
Image processing used
Gray scale search
(reference image)
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search),
degree of match inspection for shape and size, distance and
angle measurement (gray scale search), lead inspection
(criteria search).
Edge of an area
detection
Lead inspection
Gray scale search line
detection
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search),
degree of match inspection for shape and size, distance and
angle measurement (gray scale search), lead inspection
(criteria search).
Solid lines
Dotted lines
Measurement programs
[How to set horizontal lines]
The following items on the settings menu can be used to define lines: move, starting point,
ending point. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line.
1. Move
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
2. Specifying the starting point
3. Specifying the ending point
· Left key
· Left key
· Right key
(The up and down keys function the
same as in the move item)
9
· Right key
· Right key
(The up and down keys function the
same as in the move item)
[How to set vertical lines]
1. Move
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
2. Specifying the starting point
3. Specifying the ending point
· Up key
· Up key
· Down key
· Down key
(The left and right keys function the
same as in the move item)
(The left and right keys function the
same as in the move item)
9-4
Shared settings
(3) Circle window
Line type
Measurement programs
Image processing used
Solid lines
Window containing a
binary image
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity), area
measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities by
binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
Dotted lines
Binary image window
mask
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity), area
measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities by
binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
[How to set a circle window]
The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the circle window: center,
radius. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line round window.
1. Specifying the center
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
2. Specifying the radius
· Up/right key
· Down/left key
(4) Elliptical window
Line type
9
Image processing used
Measurement programs
Solid lines
Window containing a
binary image
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity), area
measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities by
binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
Dotted lines
Binary image window
mask
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity), area
measurement by binary conversion, counting quantities by
binary conversion, identifying objects by binary conversion
[How to set an elliptical window]
The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the elliptical window: center,
radius. Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line elliptical window.
1. Specifying the center
· Up key
· Down key
· Left key
· Right key
· Left key
· Right key
2. Specifying the radius
· Up key
· Down key
9-5
Shared settings
[2] Image settings
What follows is a description of how to use the image settings to control the measuring program.
(1) Gray scale processing (pixel contraction and detection precision)
[Settings menu screen]
· Positional deviation measurement
(gray scale search)
Degree of match inspection for shape
and size (gray scale processing).
· Distance and angle measurement (gray
scale search)
Lead inspection (criteria search).
5CONTR. PIXEL (MDL 0) 1 2 3
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
1 2 3
0CONTR. PIXEL (MDL 1) 1 2 3
qDETECT ACCURACY
STANDARD HI-PRC
qDETECT ACCURACY
STANDARD HI-PRC
Menu
Description
50CONTR. · 1: Search the scanned image in groups of 2 pixels.
PIXEL
· 2: Search the scanned image in groups of 4 pixels.
(pixel
contraction) · 3: Search the scanned image in groups of 8 pixels.
· STANDARD (standard): Detection precision of 1 pixel unit
level
· HI-PRC (High precision): Detection precision of 1/10 pixel
unit level
(High precision)
Search coordinates use a
sub-pixel level of precision (1/10)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
9
Reference image
2
3
4
qDETECT
ACCURACY
(detection
precision)
5
6
(Standard)
Search coordinates 7
use a 1 pixel level 8
of precision
Degree of
match
9
Degree of
match
High precision
pixel detection
Camera image
Point of detection
Pixel
Standard pixel
detection
Point of detection
· To increase the speed of your search, you must take into account the settings listed
below.
1. When using the high precision setting, a smaller image should be used.
2. Reduce the size of the scanned image.
3. After considering what the maximum out of position dimension would be, make the
search area as small as possible.
4. If the size of the object is larger than 8 pixels then set the pixel contraction to 3.
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Positional deviation measurement (gray scale search: page 9-37)
Degree of match inspection for shape and size (gray scale processing: page 9-48)
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search: page 9-60)
Lead inspection (criteria search: page 9-75)
9-6
Shared settings
(2) Threshold value setting
The IV-S20 treats the "areas darker than the lower limit value" or "brighter than the upper limit
value" as "black." It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as
"white." However, if the white-black reverse function is enabled, conversion to white/black will be
reversed. Normally, if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion, set the
upper limit value to "255." Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value
that works for our application.
(Threshold value)
255
White
Lower
limit A
Threshold valve B
Binary conversion
(upper limit 255, lower limit A)
Threshold valve A
B
Binary conversion
(upper limit 255, lower limit B)
(Captured image)
Binary conversion
(upper limit A, lower limit B)
(Threshold value)
255
Black
Upper
limit A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
Black
0
(Threshold value)
255
A
Lower
limit B
White
Black
0
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Degree of match inspection for shape and size (binary conversion: page 9-51)
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Area measurement by binary conversion (page 9-85)
Counting quantities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
Point measurement (binary images: page 9-109)
(3) Setting window boundaries (enable/disable)
This function enables and disables the labeling (object identification) of binary images located
that cross over the window frame boundary.
1
2
Window
Labeling
(enable
Binary
window
conversion
boundaries)
Labeling
(disable window boundary)
1
2
3
4
Images 1 and 3 cross over the
window frame edges and are
measured together with the
areas outside the window frame
edges.
Condition: Labeling
(in order they are
connected)
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Counting quantiities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
9-7
9
Shared settings
(4) Object identification and numbering function, (labeling)
Object identification and numbering (labeling) is a process for locating separate object and
assigning serial numbers (labels) one at a time in a binary image. By this process, multiple objects
in the same binary image can be handled separately or as a group.
1
2
Object
identification
(in order of
scanning)
Binary
conversion
3
3
Object identification
(in order of area)
2
4
Island
Island
4
1
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Counting quantities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
(5) Binary processing (fixed/threshold value correction)
By setting THESHLD. ADJ (threshold adjustment function), the IV-S20 can cope with variations
in lighting.
Variation in
lighting
9
Threshold correction value
Fixed
Note: In order to use the THESHLD.ADJ
(threshold adjustment function), the
monitor brightness functions must
be selected to measure variations
in lighting. If you don't select the
monitor brightness function, a
COMP. BIN: ILLM. MON. UNSET
(correcting binary value: monitor
illumination not selected) error will
occur.
Fails to convert the image
due to a variation in lighting
Threshold correction using either VAR-DIFF (enter variations in lighting as value) and
VAR-RATE (enter variations in lighting as a rate) can be selected the THRSHOLD-ADJ
(the threshold adjustment function).
Set (selection) item
Details of correction
Variation Correct the threshold value by adding the previously specified threshold
difference value to the light level variation difference.
Threshold value
(Measured light level – reference light level) + specified threshold value
adjustment
Variation Correct the threshold value by multiplying the previously threshold value
to the light level variation rate.
rate
(Measured light level ÷ reference light level) x specified threshold value
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Degee of match inspection for shape and size (binary conversion: page 9-51)
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Area measurement by binary conversion (page 9-85)
Counting quantities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
Point measurement (binary images: page 9-109)
9-8
Shared settings
(6) Pre-processing
Pre-processing includes various image manipulation processes that create more readable
images by removing noise and distortion in the image data. And, by extracting or emphasizing
certain image features, it is easier to evaluate or identify target objects by converting the images
into standard patterns.
In the IV-S20, you can select from "smoothing," "edge emphasis," and "edge extraction (whole,
horizontal, vertical)" pre-processing techniques
Contents
Item
· Display smooth images decreasing the noise.
Smoothing · Use to eliminated surface flaws and unevenness in the reflected light
caused by protrusions or dents.
Edge
emphasis
· Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas.
· Used to stabilize and create a binary outline of obscure objects.
Edge
extraction
· Display images after extracting and clarifying the boundaries between the
brighter and darker areas.
· Used to measure objects with low contrast.
· Horizontal edge extraction: Display only the with horizontal boundaries o
an object.
· Vertical edge extraction: Display only the vertical boundaries of an object.
[Example of an image]
- OFF
- Smoothing
9
- Edge emphasis
- Edge extraction (All)
- Edge extraction (horizontal)
- Edge extraction (vertical)
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Area measurement by binary conversion (page 9-85)
Counting quantities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
9-9
Shared settings
Contraction
Expansion
Binary
conversion
(7) The expansion/contraction method of eliminating noise in binary images
When converting an image to binary values, it is often the case that dots of noise will show up in
the converted image. This noise may be eliminated during pre-processing by using the
smoothing function. However, it can also be dealt with through the expansion/contraction noise
elimination method.
-1 Expansion
A single white dot, or small groups of white dots, in the middle of a black background can be
eliminated from the image.
2 Contraction
A single black dot, or small groups of black dots, in the middle of a white background can be
eliminated from the image.
-1 Expansion _ contraction
When isolated dots of noise are eliminated by expansion, the areas enlarged by the
expansion are returned to their original size by contracting them again.
9
Expansion
Binary
conversion
Contraction
2 Contraction _ expansion
When isolated white noise is eliminated by contraction, the areas shrunk by contraction are
returned to their original size by expanding them again.
The IV-S20 has both "contraction _ expansion" and "expansion _ contraction" functions for
eliminating binary noise.
- Number of times of expansion and number of times of contraction can be set independenly.
When the number of contraction cycles is set to 0, and the number of expansion cycles is one
or greater, then only the expansion function will be used.
On the other hand, if the number of expansion cycles is set to 0 and the number of contraction
cycles is one or greater, then only the contraction function will be used.
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Degee of match inspection for shape and size (binary conversion: page 9-51)
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity: page 9-62)
Area measurement by binary conversion (page 9-85)
Counting quantities by binary conversion (page 9-93)
Identifying object by binary conversion (page 9-101)
9-10
Shared settings
(8) Edge detection
The "edge" refers to the boundaries between the brighter (white) and darker (black) parts in an
image. The "edge detection" function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image.
[An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified
criteria]
· Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from left to right)
Detection area
A
B
B
Detection direction
Detection area
A
B
Detection direction
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
A
· Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from
bottom to top)
Edge detection
point
A
B
Detection
direction
· Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from right to left)
Detection
direction
point
Edge detection point
A
· Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from top
to bottom) Edge detection
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Direction
B
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
A
Direction
B
· Center (dark), horizontal (left and right)
Edge detection point
9
Detection area
· Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles
A: Moving right horizontally
from light to dark
B: Moving right horizontally C: Moving left horizontally
from dark to light
from dark to light
D: Moving left horizontally
from light to dark
Internal diameter (between B and C)
External diameter (between A and D)
Detection area
- The edge detection point coordinates are used as a reference point to detect an out of position
condition.
- Edge detection in binary images is much quicker than in a gray scale search. However, the
binary image detection process is less precise at detecting position.
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Positional deviation measurement (edge detection: page 9-39),
Distance and angle measurement (edge detection page 9-61)
Lead inspection (edge detection: page 9-76).
9-11
Shared settings
(9) Artifact processing
Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of
the target object when an artifact is in the line being scanned. This process can be used during
edge detection. The real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration
of the dark area in the scan line, which is much longer for a target object than for an artifact.
[Example of detection]
- An example of light to dark averaging (DETECT MODE:BRT_DRK) while scanning
horizontally (DETECT DIR.:HORI _), with artifact processing (enabled) (PRC. PROJECT:
YES).
Duration of dark area
in the line scan
Average light (vertical)
Edge detection point
(with artifact processing: enabled)
When artifact processing is disabled in the above example, the edge detection point
changes.
9
Edge detection point (with artifact processing off)
[Measurement programs which are affected by these settings]
Positional deviation measurement (edge detection: page 9-39),
Distance and angle measurement (edge detection, page 9-61)
Lead inspection (edge detection: page 9-76).
9-12
Shared settings
[3] Evaluation conditions
The setting details and procedures for setting the evaluation conditions are the same for all
measurement programs.
In this section we explain the use of the [EVALUATION COND] (evaluation conditions) menu when
counting quantities by binary conversion.
Evaluation conditions [EVALUATION COND] menu for counting quantities by binary conversion
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-CNT-BIN-OBJ)
1 REGST NO.
2 NUMBER
3 TOTAL AREA
4 MAKE A TEST RUN
5 UPPER MENU
0(0~3)
00000~59999
000000~245760
(SET KEY)
· Items in the regtangle
measuremet program.
[TEST RESULT]
00004
OK
002000
OK
are the same for each
Evaluation conditions
[OUT]
NO
NO
Using the up and down keys, you can
set the output to NO (no output), Y0
to 7 (output on these relays), or C000
to C127 (output on these secondary
relays), in the output area of the
menu.
(If the test result returns OK, then the
output is turned ON. If it is NG, then it
is turned OFF).
When carrying out a test using item ④,
MAKE A TEST RUN, on the menu, the
resulting measurement values and the
evaluation (OK or NG) will be displayed.
Settings details
1 REGST NO.
(registration number)
Set to 0 to 3 corresponds to the registration number item ① REGT.NO
(registration number) on the measurement condition menu [MEASURING
COND].
2 NUMBER
(number of objects)
Set the range for the number of objects which will produce an OK judgment.
3 TOTAL AREA
Set the range for the total surface area which will produce an OK judgment.
4 MAKE A TEST RUN
To carry out a MAKE A TEST RUN of the evaluation conditions, push the
SET key. The results will be displayed.
This will also record the details of the settings.
5 UPPER MENU
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS 0 to 3] menu.
[The setting procedure]
The setting headings from the
[EVALUATION COND] (evaluation
conditions) menu above.
Enter the registration number corresponding
to the registration number from the
[MEASURING COND] (measurements
condition) menu
Not done
1 REGST NO. (registration number)
Make the measurements
4 MAKE A TEST RUN (make a test run)
Enter the upper and lower limits for an OK
judgment.
Enter the target to output data
2 NUMBER (number of objects)
3 TOTAL AREA (total surface area)
Record evaluation conditions
4 MAKE A TEST RUN (make a stest run)
The recording is finished
Done
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS 0 to 3] menu. 5 UPPER MENU
9-13
9
Shared settings
[4] Numerical calculations
Numeric calculation fuction of the IV-S20 consisits of "numeric calculations," which is set individually
for each measurement program, and "final numeric calculations," which are set according to object
type. The N00 to N15 results of the calculations which are set individually for each measuring
program may be used according to the 2 OBJECT TYPE and 3 FORMULA (style) settings of the
final numerical calculation.
[OBJECT TYPE COND] menu
·
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
(measurement 0, camera 1)
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
(measurement 0, camera 2)
·
·
·
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
·
·
·
·
·
·
e[FINALL CALC RESULT]
(final numerical
calculations)
9
[TYPE00-MEAS. 0] menu
Positinal deviation measurement
[NUMERIC CALC]
(numeric calculation menu)
1CALC.RESULT: N00~N15
[TYPE00-MEAS 1 to 3] menu
Degree of match inspection, distances and
angles measurement, lead inspection, area
measurement by binary conversion, counting
quantities by binary conversion, identifying
object by binary conversion.
[NUMERIC CALC]
(numeric calculation menu)
1CALC.RESULT: N00~N15
[FINAL CALC RESULT]
(final numerical calculations menu)
1CALC.RESULT: N00~N15
2OBJECT TYPE : INDV-MEAS-RSLT [N]
3FORMULA
: MEAS (0 ~ 3) CMR (1~2) N(00~15)
9-14
Shared settings
(1) The individual numerical calculations for each measuring program
The setting details and procedures for numerical calculations are the same for all measurement
programs with the exception of the point measurement program. In this section we explain the
use of the numerical calculations menu [NUMERIC CALC] for out of position measurements.
- The [NUMERIC CALC] (numerical calculations) menu for positional deviation measurement.
[NUMERIC CALC]
1CALC.RESULT
2OBJECT TYPE
(TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
N00(0~15)
NO COORD[X Y] DEVIAT[x y] MATCH [M]
ANGL-DEV[B] NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.0(0~7) MDL0(0~1) N00(0~15)
＋ − ＊ ／ ← → DEL END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000650.0~+00000700.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6TEST A RUN
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU * 2
*3
N00
[C]
＋00000002.0
N01
[X]
0X0＊N00
＋00000400.0∼＋00000410.0 ＋00000406.0
*1
Y0
OK
N02
*4
*5
The display will be different for
each measurement program.
Ex.:
The coordinates [X] is multiplied
by 2 and the results is stored in
N01
1. The constant 2 is stored in
N00
2. The X1 value of the registration number and the value in
N00 are multiplied, and the
result is stored in N01.
*6
*7
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC. RESULT
(calculation results)
2OBJECT TYPE
3FORMULA
(registation number)
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6TEST A RUN
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
Setting details (selections)
You may set the location where the arithmetical operation results of the specified output data
will be stored, from locations 00 to 15.
⇒The results will be displayed 4 as one unit at position * 1 above.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of style settings are used.
· The style type is selected using the left and right keys and the numerical values are entered
using the up and down keys.
⇒The settings are displayed at N00 to N15, position * 3 above.
The first line of the display will change, according to the selection made in item ②.
Item ② selections
Coordinates X and Y, positional deviation
coordinates x and y, degree of match M
Angular deviation B
The first line of the display
Record 0 (0 to 7) Model 0 (0 to 1) N00 (0 to 15)
Record 0 (0 to 7) N00 (0 to 15)
ABS √TAN ATAN N00(0 to 15) (second line is
Numerical calculation NC
not displayed)
Constant C
+00000000.0 (second line is not displayed)
Note: Please enter a smaller number for N (00 to 15) in the formula than N (00 to 15) of item
1CALC. RESULT
Enter the upper and lower limits for making a judgment. ⇒This setting will be displayed in N00
to N15, at position * 4 above.
Setting the output of the calculation results.
The output can be set to Y0 to Y7 or C000 to C107. ⇒This setting is displayed in N00 to N15,
at position * 6 above.
Pressing the SET key will store the setting details as well as run a test. ⇒Both the numerical
results of the tests and the OK or NG judgment will be displayed at position * 5 and * 7 above.
Will return to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] menu.
· The number of styles may be set as follows, depending on the selections made in items ② and ③.
② OBJECT TYPE
Coordinates X/Y
Coordinate deviation
Degree of match M
Angular deviation B
Numerical calculation NC
Constant C
Model 0
0X0 to 7X0 / 0Y0 to 7Y0
0x0 to 7x0 / 0y0 to 7y0
0M0 to 7M0
Model 1
0X1 to 7X1 / 0Y1 to 7Y1
0x1 to 7x1 / 0y1 to 7y1
0M1 to 7M1
0B to 7B
ABS /
/ TAN / ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
9-15
The numbers from 0 to 7 in
front of the characters are
registration numbers.
9
Shared settings
[Setting procedure]
Setting the headings on the [NUMERIC CALC]
(numerical calculation) menu.
Specify the output for the
results of the calculations
1 CALC. RESULT
2 OBJECT TYPE (type)
Select the data to be calculated
Set the judgment output conditions
Carry out a calculation
Not done
Enter the upper and lower limits
4 UPPER & LOWER LIMIT
Record the measurement criteria
6 TEST A RUN
All recording is finished
Done
Previous menu
9
Note: Make sure that a test
is run using the
[EVALUATION
COND] (evaluation
5 OUTPUT (output)
condition) menu
before making any
calculations.
6 TEST A RUN
3 FORMURA
(style)
Enter the number of styles
7 UPPER MENU
[Output error]
An error will be output if there are too many digits as well as if there is an attempt to divide by
zero.
[Order of calculation]
The calculation results are produced in order, from N00 to N15.
[Parallel output based on the output conditions]
It is possible to use the parallel output for the evaluation results from the calculations by selecting
the PC function in the output conditions (the general output conditions are taken from the output
conditions set for each measurement program)
9-16
Shared settings
[Types and number of styles of entered for each measurement program]
Input types
Positional deviation
measurement
Degree of match
Model 0: 0M0 to 7M0
Model 1: 0M1 to 7M1
Coordinate X
Model 0: 0X0 to 7X0
Model 1: 0X1 to 7X1
Coordinate Y
Model 0: 0Y0 to 7Y0
Model 1: 0Y1 to 7Y1
Coordinate
deviation x
Coordinate
deviation y
Angular
deviation B
Measurement functions
Distance and angle Lead inspection
Degree of match inspection
measurement
for shape and size
Model 0 (positioning):
[Starting point]
0M0 to 15M0
0M to 3M
00M to 15M
Model 1 (object measurement):
0M0 to 15M1
Model 0 (positioning):
[Starting point]
0X0 to 15X0
0X to 3X
00X to 15X
Model 1 (object measurement):
0X0 to 15X1
Model 0 (positioning):
[Starting point]
0Y0 to 15Y0
0Y to 3Y
00Y to 15Y
Model 1 (object measurement):
0Y0 to 15Y1
Model 0: 0x0 to 7x0
Model 1: 0x1 to 7x1
Model 0: 0y0 to 7y0
Model 1: 0y1 to 7y1
0B to 7B
00B to 15B
Model 0 (positioning):
0G0 to 15G0
Model 1 (object measurement):
0G0 to 15G1
Light level G
Auxiliary points HX
Auxiliary points HY
00HX to 15HX
00HY to 15HY
0K0 to 0K7
…3K0 to 3K7
Number of objects K
Distance D
00D to 15D
0MXD0 to
0MXD7
…3MXD0 to
3MXD7
0MND0 to
0MND7
…3MND0 to
3MND7
0MXL0 to
0MXL7
…3MXL0 to
3MXL7
0MNL0 to
0MNL7
…3MNL0 to
3MNL7
Maximum distance
MXD
Minimum distance
MND
Maximum lead
length MXL
Minimum lead
length MNL
Numerical
calculation N
N00 to N15
Input types
Total area A
Number of objects K
Area with each labeling R
Center of gravity with each
labeling GX
Center of gravity with each
labeling GY
Main axis angle B with each
labeling
Fellet diameter with each
labeling FX
Fellet diameter with each
labeling FY
Circumference with each
labeling CR
Numerical calculations N
N00 to N15
N00 to N15
N00 to N15
Measurement functions
Label measurement
Area measurement by Counting quantities by
by binary conversion
binary conversion
binary conversion
0A to 3A
00A to 15A
0A to 3A
0K to 3K
0K to 3K
0R000 to 0R127…3R000 to 3R127
0GX000 to 0GX127…3GX000 to
3GX127
0GY000 to 0GY127…3GY000 to
3GY127
0GB000 to 0GB127…3GB000 to
3GB127
0FX000 to 0FX127…3FX000 to
3FX127
0FY000 to 0FY127…3FY000 to
3FY127
0CR000 to 0CR127…3CR000 to
3CR127
N00 to N15
N00 to N15
9-17
N00 to N15
9
Shared settings
(2) Final numerical calculations
Final numerical calculations can be set at item e FINAL CALC RESULT on the conditions of
object types menu [OBJECT TYPE COND].
The setting procedure, error output settings, calculation sequence and parallel output based on
the output conditions are exactly the same as those used for item (1) individual numerical
calculations for each measuring programs.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
-On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to eFINAL CALC RESULT (final
numeric calculation) and press SET key.
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00)
1CALC. RESULT AN00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO INDV-MEAS-RSLT[N] FINAL-RESULT[AN]
NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
MEAS0(0~3) CMR1(1~2) N00(0~15)
+-＊ / ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT ＋00000000.0~＋00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[N]
Example:
01N00+02N00+3N01
+00009800.0~ +00010000.0 ＋00009800.0
Y1
OK
N01
N02
9
[Results of the calculations
for measurement 0, camera
1: N00] + [Results of the
calculations for
measurement 0, camera 2:
N00] + [Results of the
calculations for
measurement 3: N01]
N03
· The display areas on the screen are in the same places as those for item (1) individual
numerical calculations for each measuring program.
Setting details
Numerical calculation
1 CALC.RESULT
The location where the rule 4 calculation result of the specified output data is
stored may be set from 00 to 15.
2 OBJECT TYPE
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of style settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
3 FORMULA
(registaration number)
The first line of the display
Calculation results for
measurements [N]
Measurement 0 (0 to 3) camera 1 (1 to 2)
N00 (0 to 15)
Final calculation results [AN]
AN00 (0 to 15)
Numerical calculations [NC]
ABS
TAN ATAN AN00 (0 to 15)
(the second line will not be displayed)
Constant [C]
+00000000.0
(the second line will not be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for entering numbers at AN (00 to 15)
than that 1 CALC. RESULT (calculations results) AN (00 to 15).
4 UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
Enter the upper and lower limits for making a decision.
5 OUTPUT
Setting the output of the calculation results.
6 RUN A TEST
Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test.
7 UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type)
9-18
Shared settings
- Based on the settings at items 2 and 3, the number of styles may be entered as follows.
2OBJECT TYPE
INDV-MEAS-RSLT [N]
(Results of the calculations
for measurements)
Number of styles
01N00 to 01N15 (Calculation result for measurement 0, camera 1:
N00 to 15)
02N00 to 02N15 (Calculation result for measurement 0, camera 2:
N00 to 15)
1N00 to 1N15 (Calculation result for measurement 1: N00 to 15)
2N00 to 2N15 (Calculation result for measurement 2: N00 to 15)
3N00 to 3N15 (Calculation result for measurement 3: N00 to 15)
FINAL-RESULT [AN]
(Results of final calculations) AN00 to AN15
NUM-CALC [NC]
(Numerical calculations)
ABS /
CNST [C]
(Constant)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
/ TAN / ATAN (00 to 15)
9
9-19
Shared settings
[5] Position correction
Based on the positional deviation data measurement 0 (positional deviation measurement), the
correction of the image coordinates is dealt with using measurements 1 to 3.
(1) Correction details
The types of position correction available are: XY correction, angular correction (standard) and
angular correction (high precision)
Type
XY correction
Angular correction
(standard)
Angular correction
(high precision)
Details
The position is adjusted according to the amount of deviation in X and
Y at the first point (model 0) detected in measurement 0.
There are three correction directions: X axis correction, Y axis
correction and X and Y axis correction.
· X axis correction--Adjusted misalignment in the X axis
· Y axis correction--Adjusted misalignment in the Y axis
· X and Y axes correction--Adjusted misalignment in both the X and Y
axes
The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation in
rotation [2-point search/2-point edge/1-point search + 1-point edge]
from measurement 0.
The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation in
rotation [2-point search/2-point edge/1-point search + 1-point edge]
from measurement 0.
The high precision angular correction settings allows the IV-S20 to
display a very precisely corrected image. But, this selection lowers
rotation processing speed.
[Example of a comparison between standard and high precision angular correction]
Scanned image
9
Scanned image
An image with smooth edges
will be created.
An image with a jagged edge
will be created.
Image after correction
(Standard) (High precision)
θ image after angular correction
9-20
Shared settings
(2) Operation setting details
Setting takes place at camera (1/2) in items 5 and 6 on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions
of object type) menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
1
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
3
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
4
2
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
5
[Setting procedure]
1. Select item 5 POS. ADJ. CAMERA 1 for camera 1, or item 7 POS. ADJ. CAMERA 2 for
camera 2, using the up and down keys.
2. Move the cursor to [NO ADJ.] (no adjustment) using the left and right keys. Then select
either X and Y correction, angular correction (standard) or angular correction (high
precision), using the up and down keys.
3. Move the cursor to [REG. 0] (register 0) using the left and right keys and then select [0 to 7]
using the up and down keys.
- Registration No. 0 to 7 correspond to register No.0 to 7 [MEASURING COND]
(measurement condition) menu in positional deviation measurement.
4. In the case of an X and Y correction, move the cursor to 1PNTSXY (first X and Y point)
using the left and right keys and then select XY or X or Y using the up and down keys.
- In the case of angular correction, it is unnecessary to perform step 4.
5. Press the SET key. Move the cursor to item u UPPER MENU and press the SET key.
This completes the settings for positional correction.
9-21
9
Shared settings
(3) Correction example
[Example of correcting the first X and Y point]
1. Amount of correction (X2-X1, Y2-Y1) specified by measurement 0 (positional deviation
measurement)
Coordinates (X1, Y1) of object in the reference image (model 0)
Target object coordinates (X2, Y2)
[Measured results]
· Detected coordinates: (X2, Y2)
· Deviation amount: X2-X1, Y2-Y1
Y2-Y1
Search area
X2-X1
2. Measuring a point using measurement 1
Y2-Y1
Point
X2-X1
9
- If the first point is X, only the X position will be corrected. Likewise, if the first point is Y, only
the Y position will be corrected.
9-22
Shared settings
[Example of angular correction]
1. Detection of the amount of angular deviation (using measurement 0, 2 point search
(positional deviation measurement).
· Reference image
Reference image
(model 0)
Detected coordinates
(model 0)
Search area
(model 0)
Reference image
(model 1)
Detected coordinates
(model 1)
Search area
(model 1)
· Target image
Detecting the amount of angular deviation
θ
Detected coordinates
(model 0)
Position of reference image
9
Detected coordinates
(model 1)
2. Performing measurement 1 (of distance and angle measurement) on an image that has
been rotated around its center by the amount of angular diviation detected in step 1.
· Image that has been rotated around its center in step 1
9-23
Shared settings
[6] Comparative calculations between images
It is possible to run calculations on the differences between the images taken by camera 1 and
camera 2, as well as on the differences between the current image and the already stored reference
image.
(1) Type of calculation
There are two types of calculation: subtraction and the absolute value of the differences.
Subtraction
Light level in image 1 (0 to 255) - Light level in image 2 (0 to 255)
- Light level after calculation
However, a result less than 0 will give a result of 0.
The absolute value | Light level in image 1 (0 to 255) - Light level in image 2 (0 to
of the differences 255) |
- Light level after calculation (0 to 255)
[Example of comparative calculations between images]
Image A
Light
level 0
Light
level 180
9
· Subtraction
(Image A - Image B)
· Subtraction
(Image B - Image A)
· The absolute value
of the differences
( | Image A - Image B | )
9-24
Image B
Shared settings
(2) Setting details
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the curson to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE CND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
[OBJECT TYPE. COND.]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY]
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
At item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG (camera selection), select the NO, CAM1, CAM2, or
CAM1&2 with left and right keys and press the SET key. When you have specified the
camera, item 9 COMPARE IMAGES, will be displayed.
· The display seen when 8 is set to CAM1
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
9COMPARE IMAGES
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO SUB.I1−T1 DIFF.ABS｜I1−T1｜
When 8 is set, otherwise 9 will be displayed as shown below in column 9.
The list of the settings which may be selected at item 9 COMPARE IMAGES, (comparative
calculations between images) is as follows.
8
9 COMPARE IMAGES
SELECT
(calculation between
CAMERA
images)
IMG
NO (none)
CAM 1
None
(camera 1)
Subtraction I1-T1
The absolute value of the
difference between |I1-T1|
None
CAM 2
(camera 2) Subtraction I2-T2
The absolute value of the
difference between |I2-T2|
CAM 1&2 Subtraction I1-I2
(cameras Subtraction I2-I1
1 & 2)
The absolute value of the
difference between |I2-I2|
Contents
Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
The reference image T1 (* 1) is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1.
The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image
T1 (* 1) and the image taken by camera 1.
Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out.
The reference image T2 (* 1) is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2.
The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image
T2 (* 1) and the image taken by camera 2.
The image taken by camera 1 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2.
The image taken by camera 2 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1.
The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the image taken by
camera 1 and the image taken by camera 2.
* 1 The reference images T1 and T2 may be set in item 7 STZORE REF IMAGE (reference
images for comparison between images), which can be found on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O]
menu. (see the next page)
* 2 The size of the areas covered by I1 and I2 (the images taken by cameras 1 and 2) may be
set in item 7 SET IMAGE WINDOWS (setting areas for comparison between images)
which can be found in the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu. (see the next page)
Continued on the following page
9-25
9
Shared settings
From the previous page
After selecting item t SYSTEM-IN/OUT, on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
When the selected camera is either CAM1 or CAM2
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1(1~2) NO YES
3TRIGGER CCD START REG: NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
1
5COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK-00(MESR-0 CAM-1)
&SERIAL OUTPUT
6SHUTTER SPEED
1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
7STORE REF IMAGE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271）REG. DISP
8UPPER MENU
5
3
4
1.Use the up and down keys to set item 7 STORE REF IMAGE, (reference images for
comparison between images) for comparison between images.
2.Display an image by pressing the SEL key. Then focus the lens and adjust the camera’s iris to
adjust the image.
- After adjusting the image, press the SEL key to freeze the frame.
3.Creating the window for the reference image.
- Select one of the following: MOVE, UP.L, or LO.R. Then adjust the window to suit your
needs.
Decide on the position of the window for the reference image before every operation and
then press the SET key.
4.When the position of the image window has been defined, record the selection by using the left
and right keys to go to REG. (register). Then press SET key.
- Using the left and right keys, go to DISP (display) and then press SET to display the image
in the bottom right hand corner of the screen. When you have finished checking your
selection, press the ESC key to exit.
5.After pressing the ESC key, move the cursor to item 8 UPPER MENU with up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- This will return you to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
9
When the selected camera is CAM 1&2
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1(1~2) NO YES
3TRIGGER CCD START REG: NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
1
4
5COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK-00(MESR-0 CAM-1)
&SERIAL OUTPUT
6SHUTTER SPEED
1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
7STORE REF IMAGE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271）
8UPPER MENU
3
1.Use the up and down keys to set item 7 SET IMAGE WINDOWS (area setting) for
comparison between images.
2.Display an image by pressing the SEL key. Then focus the lens and adjust the camera's iris to
adjust the image.
3.Select the area of the image to be used.
- Select one of the following: MOVE/UP.L/LO.R and then define the area.
Define the position of the window to be used with the reference image and then press the
SET key.
4.Press the ESC key, move the cursor to item 8 UPPER MENU with up and down keys, and
press the SET key.
- This will return you to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
Continued on the following page
9-26
Shared settings
From the previous page
Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, q MEASUREMENT 2 or w MEASUREMENT 3, on the
[OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1
2
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
This indicates that the display is for object type
00 and measurement 1.
This indicates that the selected measurement
program is the MEASR-BIN-AREA (area measurement by binary coversion).
This refers to the camera which has been selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG (camera
selection), on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (condition of object type) menu.
1. Using the up and down keys, select item 2 COMPARE IMAGES (calculation between
images).
2. Select "YES" (enable calculation) using the left and right keys.
-This will display the results of the comparative calculations between images.
Then, item 3 SELECT CAMERA will disappear.
With this the settings concerning comparative calculations between images are complete.
9
9-27
Shared settings
[7] Copying (editing)
When there are many common parameters between measurement programs or object types, it is
most efficient to access those existing sets of parameters in order to copy and then modify them.
- There are two types of copy functions on the IV-S20: Copying between object types and copying
between measurement programs.
(1) Copying between object types
The parameters of a previously specified object type are copied into another object type, after
which they can be modified.
The source of the copy
The target of the copy
The measurement conditions of
the source object type. (The data
is copied from flash memory)
The measurement conditions of the target
object type. (The data is used to simplify
setting the target object's parameters)
[Operation procedure]
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(condition of object type) and press the SET key.
1
3
9
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
9COMPARE IMAGES
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
2
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO SUB.I1−T1 DIFF.ABS｜I1−T1｜
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
· Item 9 COMPARE IMAGES (calculation between
images) will be displayed unless item 8 SELECT
CAMERA IMG is set to NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO., using the up and down keys and press SET key.
Using the up and down keys, enter the object type number (00 to 15) for the target of the copy.
Select item 2 EDIT, using the up and down keys and press SET key.
Move the cursor to COPY (copying) using the left and right keys and enter the object type
number (00 to 15) for the source of the copy using the up and down keys. When the number
has been selected, press SET key.
- While something is being copied, the message [COPYING] will appear at the top of the
screen. This message will disappear when the copying is complete.
Notes
- Do not disconnect the power while the IV-S20 is copying.
- Once data has been corrupted it will be necessary to start after initializing the setting, all over
again. Unless this is done it will not be possible to restart the machine.
- The reference images used for the gray scale seach function are not copied with the
operation above. Make sure reset them.
9-28
Shared settings
(2) Copying between measurement programs
Copying a specific measuring program's settings from on object type number to another.
The target of the copy
The source of the copy
The specific measuring program
settings stored in a particular
object type number. (The data is
copied from flash memory)
The settings for the same measuring
program in a different object type
number. (The data is used to simplify
setting the target object's parameters)
[The procedure for copying measurement program 0]
- Example: Copying the (object type number 00, measurement 0, program settings: for
positional deviation measurements) into the settings for (object type number 01,
measurement 0, program setting no).
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions of object type) and pess the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions for object type) menu, set item 1
OBJECT TYPE NO. (object type number) to 01 and select item 4 MEAS.0,
CAMERA1.
1
[TYPE01-MEAS0]
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE
2COPY :
3INITIALIZATION
4MEAS. PROG. COND
5EVALUATION COND
6NUMERIC CALC COND
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS
8UPPER MENU
3
NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE
EXEC←TYPE00−CMR1POS-DEVIATION
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
2
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4
1.Select item 2 COPY using the up and down keys and press SET key.
2.Enter the object type number (00 to 15) for the source copy using the up and down keys. The
name of the measurement program for this object type number will also be displayed. When
the number has been entered, press the SET key.
3.Once the measurement program has been copied, the underlined entry at item 1 SELECT
MEAS.TYPE (select measurement) will now be MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE (positional
deviation measurement) whereas NO was previously underlined.
4.Move the cursor to item 8 UPPER MENU, and press SET key twice.
- This will return you to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Note
- When processing item 2 COPY, by itself, the IV-S20 will not copy to the flash memory.
To save the copied settings in flash memory go to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM, or item 0
OPERATIONS, which are both found on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
9-29
9
Shared settings
[The procedure for copying measurement programs 1 to 3]
- Example: Copying the settings from object type 00, measurement 2 (lead inspection), into
object type 01, measurement 1 (degree of match inspection).
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions of object type) and press the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, set item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO. (object
type number) to 01 and select 0 MEASUREMENT 1.
3
1
9
[TYPE01-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
2
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
1.Select item 4 COPY, using the up and down keys and press SET.
2.Select TYPE00 or MEAS1 with the left and right keys. Next enter the object type number (00 to
15) and the measurement program number 1 to 3 for the source of the copy, using the up and
down keys (the name of the measurement program for the source of the copy will also be
displayed). When the numbers have been entered, press the SET key.
- It is possible to copy a new measurement program choice to the same object type number
(i.e. specify another measurement program during the copying process). The target object
type number will be the same as originally specified. The only change is the target
measurement program number where the copy will be placed.
3.Once the measurement program has been copied, INSPECT-LEAD (lead inspection) will now
be underlined, whereas CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH (degree of match inspection) is previously
the underlined entry at item 1.
4.Move the cursor to item 8 UPPER MENU, and press SET key.
- This will return you to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type) menu.
Note
- When processing item 4 COPY, by itself, the IV-S20 will not copy to the flash memory.
To save the copied settings in flash memory go to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM, or item
0 OPERATIONS, which are both found on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
9-30
Shared settings
[8] Editing after initialization
When you first start to set all of the parameters, we recommend that you initialize the conditions first.
The contents required to initialize are as follows.
- All of the conditions
- See 12-1 [3] Total initialization
- Measurement conditions of each measurement program - (1)
- Measurement conditions of each type number
- (2)
(1) Initialize measurement conditions for each measurememt program number
The IV-S20 will always start up with the measuring program for an object type which has been
specified and stored in the memory (RAM). If the measurement 0 program was specified, then a
camera number will also have been specified.
- Any measurement conditions stored in flash memory will remain as they were before
initialization.
[Operation procedure for measurement program 0]
- This example shows the initialization of object type 01, measurement 0, camera 1:
measurement of positional deviation.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions of object type) and press the SET key.
- On the conditions for object types menu [OBJECT TYPE COND], set item 1OBJECT
TYPE NO. (object type number) to 01 and select item 4 MEAS.0, CAMERA 1
1
[TYPE00-MEAS0]
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE
2COPY :
3INITIALIZATION
4MEAS. PROG. COND
5EVALUATION COND
6NUMERIC CALC COND
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS
8UPPER MENU
NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE
EXEC←TYPE00−CMR1POS-DEVIATION
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1.Select item 3 INITIALIZATION, using the up and down keys and press the
SET key.
2.When the SET key is pressed, the initialization will begin.
[Operation procedure for measurement programs 1 to 3]
- This is an example of the initialization of object type 02, measurement 1.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and
press the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions for object type) menu, set item 1
OBJECT TYPE NO. to 02 and select 0 MEASUREMENT 1.
1
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
1.Select item 5 INITIALIZATION (initialize), using the up and down keys and
press SET key.
2.When the SET key is pressed, the initialization will begin.
9-31
9
Shared settings
(2) Initialize measurement condition of each type
The measurement conditions for a specified object type (data for the object type you are in the
process of entering) will be initialized.
[Operation procedure]
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(condition of object type) and press the SET key.
1
3
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
9COMPARE IMAGES
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
2
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO SUB.I1−T1 DIFF.ABS｜I1−T1｜
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
4
· Item 9 COMPARE IMAGES, will be displayed unless
item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG, is set to NO.
9
1.Select item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO. (object type number) using the up and down keys and press
SET key.
2.Select the object type number (00 to 15) to be initialized using the up and down keys.
3.Select item 2 EDIT, using the up and down keys and press SET key.
4.Select EXEC.INIT (start initialization) using the up and down keys and press SET key.
- While the initialization is in progress, the message "Initialization of data is in progress" will
appear at the top of the screen. When the initialization is complete, this message will
disappear.
Note
- Do not disconnect the power while IV-S20 is initializing.
The set data other than currently initializing may be corrupted. Unless all of the data is
initialized it will not be possible to restart the machine (i.e. partial initialization is not possible).
9-32
Shared settings
[9] Title registration
A title for a object type number can be entered and saved when the object type number is displayed
on the screen.
[Purpose]
The title is used to make it easier to control the details of the settings for the object type.
[Title characters]
A maximum of 16 letters and symbols may be entered.
[Operation method]
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions of object type) and press the SET key.
- [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to 3 TITLE REGISTRATION
and press the SET key.
[TITLE REGIST.] TYPE(00)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
IV-S20
STUVWXYZ
0123456789
= — ( ) < > SP
← → DEL. END
TITLE REGIST.
TYPE
Indicates that object
type 00 is selected set.
Setting details
A to Z
These characters and symbols are used to
enter the title name.
0 to 9
= to >
SP (space bar)
This is used to make spaces
←→
These are used to move the cursor
DEL. (delete)
This is used to delete the character to the
right of the cursor
END
This key is used to return to the [TYPE.COND.]
(conditions of object type) menu.
The title that has been entered will be displayed in the top left corner of the
run menu screen.
(TYPE00)IV-S20
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
9-33
9
Positional deviation measurement
9-3 Positional deviation and absolute position measurement
Purpose
The gray scale search function makes it possible to measure positional deviation as
well as the absolute position.
· It is also possible to detect the position of sub-pixel units with great accuracy.
Application Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates.
[Determining the location of the positioning (the fiducial mark) mark that identifies the
position of the substrate]
(1) 1 point search: Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y directions
Reference image: Center coordinates (X1,Y1)
Inspection Image: Center coordinates (X2,Y2)
[Measured result]
Center coordinates: (X2,Y2)
Amount of deviation: X2-X1, Y2-Y1
Y2-Y1
Search area
X2-X1
(2) 2 point search: Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well
as rotational deviation
Inspection image a: Center coordinates
(Xa2,Ya2)
Reference image a: Center coordinates
(Xa1,Ya1)
Reference image b: Center coordinates
(Xb1,Yb1)
Example
Ya2-Ya1
9
Inspection image b: Center coordinates
(Xb2,Yb2)
θ
Search area
(image a)
Yb2-Yb1
Xa2-Xa1
Anglar deviation: (θ)
Xb2-Xb1 Search area (image b)
[Measured result]
· Center coordinates of image a: (Xa2,Ya2)
· Amount of deviation of image a: Xa2-Xa1, Ya2-Ya1
· Center coordinates of image b: (Xb2,Yb2)
· Amount of deviation of image b: Xb2-Xb1, Yb2-Yb1
· Deviation angle: (θ)
· The deviation angle (θ), determined in the 2 point search, is used to readjust the
rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 3.
For details about rotational adjustments, see section 9-2, item [5] Position correction.
9-34
Positional deviation measurement
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions for object types)
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE
(Select MEAS-POSITIONDEVIATE) (positional
deviation measurement)
2COPY,
3INITIALIZATION
(copy, initialization)
(see section 9-2, [7], [8])
[OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions for
object types)]
4MEAS.0 CAMERA 1
(measurement 0, camera 1)
6MEAS.0 CAMERA 2
(measurement 0, camera 2)
4MEAS. PROG. COND
(conditions for measurement
programs)
Mode
1 or 2 point search
Conditions for gray scale search
1 or 2 point edge
Conditions for edge detection
1 point search
+ 1 point edge
Conditions for gray
scale search
5EVALUATION COND
(evaluation conditions)
Conditions for edge detection
6NUMERIC CALC COND
(conditions for numeric calculation)
[OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions for object types)]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculations)
(see 9-2 [4])
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS
(output condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions for object types)]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see "PC function" in
Chapter 10)
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS0]
(object type - measurement 0) menu
9-35
MAIN OPS MENU
9
Positional deviation measurement
[2] Setting details
An explanation of item 4 MEAS. PROG. COND (conditions for measurement programs) from the
TYPE00-MEAS0 (object type - measurement 0) menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU item, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key.
-Select item 4 MEAS.0, CAMERA 1 (measurement 0, camera 1), or 6 MEAS.0, CAMERA 2
(measurement 0, camera 2), on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions for object types) menu.
[TYPE00-MEAS0]
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE
2COPY :
3INITIALIZATION
4MEAS. PROG. COND
5EVALUATION COND
6NUMERIC CALC COND
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS
8UPPER MENU
NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE
EXEC←TYPE00−CMR1DIFF.MESURE.
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Indicates that the object type
00 is selected.
· Select MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE (measuring positional deviation) on the
① SELECT MEAS.TYPE line.
Select item 4MEAS. PROG. COND (conditions for measurement program)
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
1REGST NO.
2SELECT MODE
0(0~7) REG.NO YES
1P-SCH 2P-SCH 1P-EDGE
2P-EDGE 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE
3GRAY-SCALE COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4EDGE DETECT COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5UPPER MENU
9
· Items 2 SELECT MODE, and 4 EDGE DETECT COND are displayed when item
1 REGST NO. is set to YES.
Setting details
Measurement conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
First enter the REGST NO. (registration number) from 0 to 7, then chose
YES or NO, depending on whether you wish to record that selection.
2SELECT MODE
Select a mode.
· Enter a mode for each registration number.
When only a gray scale search is being used: 1-point search/ 2-point
search
When only edge detection is being used: 1-point edge/ 2-point edge
When edge detection is being used with a gray scale search: 1-point
search + 1-point edge
· When using edge detection, try to limit variations in the brightness at
the perimeter of the workpieces by manipulating things like the lighting.
3GRAY-SCALE COND
(conditions for a gray
scale search)
Set the conditions for a gray scale search in the next menu.
4EDGE DETECT COND
(condi-tions for edge
detection)
Set the conditions for edge detection in the next menu.
5UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] (object type - measurement
0) menu.
When you specify a 1P-EDGE (1 point edge) or a 2P-EDGE (2 point edge) in item 2 SELECT
MODE, be sure to select item 4 EDGE DETECT COND (edge detection conditions).
Go to page 9·39.
When you specify a 1P-SCH (1-point search), a 2P-SCH (2-point search), or a 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE (1point search + 1-point edge) in item 2 SELECT MODE, be sure to select item select item 3 GRAYSCALE COND (gray scale search conditions).
Continued on the following page
9-36
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
Specify a 1P-SCH (1-point search), a 2P-SCH (2-point search), or a 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1point edge) in item 2 SELECT MODE. Then select item 3 GRAY-SCALE COND (gray scale search
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
8SEARCH AREA(MDL1)
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
wUPPER MENU
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(224,512)LO.R(287,512)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
STANDARD HI-PRC
These items in the dotted
line are only displayed
when 2-point search is
selected.
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately
by using the ESC key.
Menu
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
Setting details
Select the measurement window shape for model 0.
Record a reference image for model 0
· The upper left or lower right area of the screen specified
above will change according the setting in item 1 MEAS
WINDOW(MDL0).
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference images)
The setting at
item 1
RECTANGLE (rectangle)
X-LINE (horizontal line)
Y-LINE (vertical line)
The display in the upper left and
lower right areas of the screen.
Upper left, lower right.
Starting point, end point
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0)
(search area)
Set the search area for model 0.
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement
window for model 0.
· If FREE is selected, then the position of the cursor is
optional.
Select number of pixel contractions for model 0.
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing using shared settings.
· When either X-LINE (horizontal line) or Y-LINE (vertical
line) are selected in item 1 MEAS WINDOW(MDL0), you
can select only 1 or 2 in item 5.
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
(measurement window)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
(reference images)
8SEARCH AREA(MDL1)
Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 1 to
5 above.
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
(detection coordinates)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
(pixel contraction)
qDETECT ACCURACY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
Set the level of detection precision for models 0 and 1.
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing in shared settings.
This will return you to the menu [MEASURING COND]
(measurement conditions) menu.
Continued on the following page
9-37
9
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
Specify a 1P-SCH (1-point search), a 2P-SCH (2-point search), or a 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE (1-point search +
1-point edge)
[The setting sequence for the gray scale search conditions]
· This is the sequence of events when a 1-point search or a 1-point search + 1-point edge is selected.
1MEAS WINDOW (MDL0)
(measurement window)
2REF IMAGE (MODEL0)
(reference images)
4DTECT COORD (MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
3SEARCH AREA (MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL (MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
· This is the sequence of events when a 2-point search is selected.
1MEAS WINDOW (MDL0)
(measurement window)
2REF IMAGE (MODEL1)
(reference images)
4DTECT COORD (MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
3SEARCH AREA (MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL (MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
7REF IMAGE (MODEL1)
(reference images)
8SEARCH AREA
(MDL1)
6MEAS WINDOW (MDL1)
(measurement window)
9DTECT COORD (MDL1)
(detection coordinates)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
(pixel contraction)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
[Information about the recording of a reference image]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame.
The specifications for the windows are as follows.
· In the case of a rectangular window
Line type
9
Movement
Size
Minimum
Maximum
Reference image
Solid line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32 x 32 (pixels)
X xY (X x Y=65536 pixels)
Search area
Dotted line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32 x 32 (pixels)
512 x 480 pixels
· In the case of a horizontal line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Length
Minimum length Maximum length
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 4 pixels Units of 4
pixels
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 1 pixel
8 pixels
512 pixels
· In the case of a vertical line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 1 pixel
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 4 pixels
Length
Units of 4
pixels
Minimum length Maximum length
8 pixels
480 pixels
When using either a horizontal or vertical line, please bear the following in mind.
The length of the reference image must be less than that of the search area.
[An example of recording]
· This example is of a 2-point search in a rectangular measurement window.
Model 2
Model 1
Reference image (model 2)
Reference image
(Model 1)
Search area
(Model 1)
Search area (model 2)
· For an example of a horizontal or vertical line measurement window, see page 9·50.
Returns you to the [MEASURING COND]
If you specified a 1P-SCH (1-point search) or a 2P-SCH (2-point
search), select item 5 UPPER MENU.
If you specified a 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1-point edge),
select item 4 EDGE DETECT COND (edge detection conditions).
9-38
Go to page 9·41
Continued on the
following page
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page, or from page 9·36: When you specified a 1P-EDGE (1-point edge),
2P-EDGE (2-point edge) or 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1-point edge)
1DETECT MODE(MDL0) CHANGE DRK→BRT BRT→DRK CNTR(BRT DRK)
2DETECT DIR.(MDL0) HORI (→ ←) VERT (↓ ↑)
3DETECT AREA(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
4THRESHOLD(MODEL0)GRYS.LO050(0~255) EDGE.W (1~8)
FLAT.W04(1~16)
5PRC.PROJECT(MDL0) NO YES
6DETECT MODE(MDL1) CHANGE DRK→BRT BRT→DRK CNTR(BRT DRK)
7DETECT DIR.(MDL1) HORI (→ ←) VERT (↓ ↑)
8DETECT AREA(MDL1) MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
9THRESHOLD(MODEL1)GRYS.000(0~255) EDGE.W (1~8)
FLAT.W04(1~16)
0PRC. PROJECT(MDL1) NO YES
qREG REF COORD SET KEY ( , ) ( , )
wUPPER MENU
These items in the dotted
line are only displayed
when 2-point edge is
selected.
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one
separately by using the ESC key.
Menu
1DETECT MODE (MDL0)
(detection mode)
2DETECT DIR. (MDL0)
(detection direction)
3DETECT AREA (MDL0)
(area of detection)
4THRESHOLD (MODEL0)
(threshold values)
5PRC. PROJECT (MDL0)
(artifact processing)
6DETECT MODE (MDL1)
(detection mode)
7DETECT DIR. (MDL1)
(detection direction)
8DETECT AREA (MDL1)
(area of detection)
9THRESHOLD (MODEL1)
(threshold values)
0PRC. PROJECT (MDL1)
(artifact processing)
qREG REF COORD (register
reference coodinates)
wUPPER MENU
Setting details
Select the detection mode for model 0.
(Point of change:
or
, From dark to light:
From
light to dark:
Centering (light or dark center))
Select the direction in which detection will take place for
model 0.
Set up a dotted line rectangular perimeter around the search
area for model 0.
· In order to increase the speed of the searches, make the
length of Y as small as possible.
Set the width of the edge (1 to 8) and the flat (1 to 16), as well
as the difference in the light level (0 to 255).
Select whether to employ artifact processing in model 0 or not.
-See page 9·12, artifact processing.
Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 1 to
5 above.
Register a coordinate, which is used as the reference point for
edge detection.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND]
(measurement condition) menu.
· For more information about the settings for edge detection see page 9·11, Edge detection, in
shared settings.
Continued on the following page
9-39
9
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
[Procedure for setting the conditions for edge detection]
- When you specify a 1P-EDGE (1-point edge) or a 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1point edge).
1DETECT MODE (MDL0)
(detection mode)
3DETECT AREA (MDL0)
(area of detection)
2DETECT DIR. (MDL0)
(detection direction)
4THRESHOLD (MODEL0)
(threshold values )
5PRC. PROJECT (MDL0)
(artifact processing)
qUPPER MENU
- When a 2P-EDGE (2-point edge) has been specified.
1DETECT MODE (MDL0)
(detection mode)
3DETECT AREA (MDL0)
(area of detection)
2DETECT DIR. (MDL0)
(detection direction)
4THRESHOLD (MODEL0)
(threshold values)
6DETECT MODE (MDL1)
(detection mode)
5PRC. PROJECT (MDL0)
(artifact processing)
7DETECT DIR. (MDL1)
(detection direction)
9THRESHOLD (MODEL1)
(threshold values)
8DETECT AREA (MDL1)
(area of detection)
0PRC. PROJECT (MDL1)
(artifact processing)
qUPPER MENU
[Information about the settings for edge detection]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame.
- Specifications for the area of detection
Line type
Dotted line
Movement
Units of 1 pixel
Size
Units of 1 pixel
Minimum
0 x 0 pixels
Maximum
512 x 480 pixels
[Example of an edge detection point in detection mode, shown with different directions of
detection.]
9
· Point of change/ from light
to dark, horizontal
· Point of change/ from light
to dark, vertical
Edge detection point
A
B
B
Detection direction
· Point of change/ from dark
to light, horizontal
Detection
direction
Edge detection point
A
Light
↑
Brightness
↓
Dark
Width of Width of
edge
flat
Difference
in light
A
· Point of change/ from dark
to light, vertical
A
B Edge
detection
point
Detection direction
B
Detection
direction
A
Light
↑
Brightness
↓
Dark A
Direction
B
Width of Width of
edge
flat
Difference
in light
Direction
B
- The edge detection point is used as a reference coordinates when the positional deviation is
detected.
- Compared with a gray scale search, the edge detection is quicker but the position detection is
less accurate.
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu and select item 5 UPPER MENU.
Continued on the following page
9-40
Positional deviation measurement
From page 9·38: When you specify a 1P-SCH (1-point search) or a 2P-SCH (2-point search)
From the previous page: When you specify a 1P-EDGE (1-point edge), 2P-EDGE (2-point edge) or a
1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1-point edge) for the MODE.
Select item 5 EVALUATION COND (evaluation conditions),on the [TYPE00-MEAS0] menu.
[EVALUATION COND]
1REGST NO.
2X COORD.(MDL0)
3Y COORD.(MDL0)
4X DEVIAT(MDL0)
5Y DEVIAT(MDL0)
6MATCH (MDL0)
7ANGULAR DEVIT
8X COORD.(MDL1)
9Y COORD.(MDL1)
0X DEVIAT(MDL1)
qY DEVIAT(MDL1)
wMATCH (MDL1)
eMAKE A TEST RUN
rUPPER MENU
(TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
0(0~7)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
−10000~+10000+09000
OK NO
−180.0~+180.0 +010.0° OK NO
000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
−10000~+10000+09000
OK NO
(SET KEY)
These displays can be set
using the up and down keys.
(The choices are NO, Y0 to 7,
C000 to C127)
· Items 7 ANGULAR DEVIT, to q Y DEVIAT (MDL1), are displayed when you specify a
2P-SCH (2-point search), 2P-EDGE (2-point edge) or a 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point
search + 1-point edge).
· Item 6 MATCH (MDL0), is displayed when you specify a 1P-SCH (1-point search),
2P-SCH (2-point search) or a 1P-SCH + 1P-EDGE (1-point search + 1-point edge).
· Item w MATCH (MDL1), is displayed when a 2P-SCH (2-point search) is specified.
Evaluation condition
1REGST NO. (registration number )
2X COORD. (MDL0)
(X coordinates)
3Y COORD. (MDL0)
(Y coordinates)
4X DEVIAT (MDL0)
(range of X deviation)
5Y DEVIAT (MDL0)
(range of Y deviation)
6MATCH (MDL0)
(degree of match with the reference image)
7ANGULAR DEVIT
(angular deviation)
8X COORD. (MDL1) (X coordinates)
9Y COORD. (MDL1) (Y coordinates)
qX DEVIAT (MDL1)
(range of X deviation)
wY DEVIAT (MDL1)
(range of Y deviation)
eMATCH (MDL1)
(degree of match with the reference image)
rMAKE A TEST RUN
tUPPER MENU
Setting details
Enter any number from 0 to 7.
Enter the range of X* coordinates for model 0 which will produce an
OK decision.
Enter the range of Y* coordinates for model 0 which will produce an
OK decision.
Enter the maximum amount of difference in the X direction in model
0 which will still produce an OK decision.
Enter the maximum amount of difference in the Y direction in model
0 which will still produce an OK decision.
Enter the percentage of pixels that must match the reference image
for model 0 which will still produce an OK decision.
Set the amount of angular displacement for models 0 and 1 that will
still produce an OK decision.
Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item ② to ⑥
above.
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition, display the test results.
This will return you to the [TYPE-MEAS0] menu.
* The X and Y coordinates come from either the point of detection in the reference
image or from the point at which the edge was detected in the target image.
· Verify your settings by testing the upper and lower limits for decisions that you have set.
This can be done using item e MAKE A TEST RUN (make a test run).
· For more information about evaluation condition, see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation conditions.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] and select item 6 NUMERIC
CALC COND (conditions for numerical calculations)
Continued on the following page
9-41
9
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
N00(0~15)
1CALC.RESULT
2OBJECT TYPE
NO COORD[X Y] DEVIAT[x y] MATCH [M]
ANGL-DEV[B] NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.0(0~7) MDL0(0~1) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000650.0~+00000700.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6TEST A RUN
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[X]
N01
[M]
0X0＋0X1
+00000650.0~+00000700.0 +00000660.0
N00＊0M1
+00065000.0~+00070000.0 +00064000.0
Y0
OK
Y1
NG
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE (type)
9
3FORMULA
Setting details
Set the recording and display of the results from arithmetical operation for
specified output data at any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
The coordinates [XY], the deviation
coordinates [xy], and the degree of
match with the reference image. [M]
Angular deviation [B]
Numerical calculations [NC]
Constant [C]
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6TEST A RUN
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
The first line of the display
Record 0 (0 to 7) Model (0 to 1)
N00 (0 to 15)
Record 0 (0 to 7) N00 (0 to 15)
ABS
TAN ATAN N00 (0 to 15) (the
second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the output conditions for the results of calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3
as follows.
2OBJECT TYPE
Coordinates X/Y
Coordinate deviation x/y
Degree of match M
Angular deviation B
Numerical calculation NC
Constant C
Model 1
Model 0
0X1 to 7X1/0Y1 to 7Y1
0X0 to 7X0/0Y0 to 7Y0
0x1 to 7x1/0y1 to 7y1
0x0 to 7x0/0y0 to 7y0
0M0 to 7M0
0M0 to 7M0
0B to 7B
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations.
Note: You must run a test using item 6 TEST A RUN, before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS0] menu and select item 7 OUTPUT CONDITIONS (output condition).
Continued on the following page
9-42
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.00(0~7)
MATCH M0(0~1) CRD.X0(0~1) CRD.Y0(0~1)
DEVIAT-x0(0~1) DEVIAT-y0(0~1) AGL-DV B
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGIC SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
0
1
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows.
3INPUT SIGNAL
Degree of match M
Coordinates X/Y
Coordinate deviation x/y
Angular deviation B
Calculation N
Auxiliary relay C
Model 0
Model 1
0M0 to 7M0
0X0 to 7X0/0Y0 to 7Y0
0x0 to 7x0/0y0 to 7y0
0M1 to 7M1
0X1 to 7X1/0Y1 to 7Y1
0x1 to 7x1/0y1 to 7y1
0B to 7B
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on output conditions, see the “PC Function” in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9-43
9
Positional deviation measurement
Continued from the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will display the results of a positional deviation measurement for the new
image that you have recorded.
Shown below is the display when a 2 point search has been specified.
[Display of the measured
results]
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
Registration number
Detection coordinates in the
reference image for model 0
Amount of deviation from
the reference image for model 0
Degree of match with the
reference image for model 0
Only displayed for a 2 point search
Detection coordinates in the
reference image for model 1
Amount of deviation from
the reference image for model 1
Degree of match with the
reference image for model 1
(TYPE00)
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS0 CAM1 POS-DEVIATION
REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL0) X=+000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL0) Y=+000.0 OK
MATCH (MDL0)
+10000 OK
ANGULAR DEVIT +001.7゜OK
X COORD.(MDL1) X=534.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL1) Y=480.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL1) X=+001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL1) Y=+001.0 OK
MATCH (MDL1)
+09999 OK
Model 1
Model 0
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
9
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration), and pressing the up key, it is possible to see
the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations. This is done by
scrolling through them in this order: registration numbers 0→1→2→3…7. These are followed by the
results of the numerical calculations N00 to N15. The measurements screen also has this feature.
Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll back through the results in the opposite order.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers (other than those currently on display) or if no measurement has
actually been carried out, then it will not be possible to scroll through the data.
· The displays for other modes are as follows.
(1-point search)
REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL0) X=+000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL0) Y=+000.0 OK
MATCH (MDL0)
+10000 OK
(1-point edge)
REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL0) X=+000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL0) Y=+000.0 OK
(1-point search + 1-point edge)
REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL0) X=+000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL0) Y=+000.0 OK
MATCH (MDL0)
+10000 OK
ANGULAR DEVIT +001.7゜OK
X COORD.(MDL1) X=534.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL1) Y=480.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL1) X=+001.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL1) Y=+001.0 OK
(2-point edge)
REGST NO. 0(0~7)
X COORD.(MDL0) X=176.0 OK
Y COORD.(MDL0) Y=322.0 OK
X DEVIAT (MDL0) X=+000.0 OK
Y DEVIAT (MDL0) Y=+000.0 OK
ANGULAR DEVIT
X COORD.(MDL1)
Y COORD.(MDL1)
X DEVIAT (MDL1)
Y DEVIAT (MDL1)
9-44
+001.7゜OK
X=534.0 OK
Y=480.0 OK
X=+001.0 OK
Y=+001.0 OK
Degree of match inspection
9-4 Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Purpose
The comparison requires the use of the gray scale search function for measuring
the new image against the reference image. By identifying the differences between
images, decisions can be made about the new image being tested.
(The acceptance of the workpiece (in the image being tested) is based its level of
similarity to the reference image.)
It is also possible to make matching decisions about images which have undergone
binary conversion.
Applications
Checking the positional deviation of labels, checking for the wrong part or other
foreign objects mixing in with the desired parts, checking for sufficiently high
precision in the mounting of electrical components on PC boards, checking for
misprints, check for missing electrical parts such as terminals, and simple inspection
of lettering.
[Checking for label misalignment]
Search area used to
establish the position
Image used to
establish the
position
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S20
Example
New image to
be checked
Search area used to
establish the position
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S20
Image used to
establish the
position
New image to
be checked
▲NG label
▲Good label
· Checking sequence
1 Conduct a gray scale search of the image used to establish the position.
2 Using the image coordinates obtained in step 1, first, adjust the position of
the new image and then begin the matching process.
3 If the level of match between the images is too low, then a "label NG" decision
will result.
9·45
9
Degree of match inspection
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions for object type)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
1MEAS SELECTION
Select CHECK-DEG-OFMATCH
(degree of match inspection)
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculations
between images)
(See page 9·2 [6])
3SELECT
CAMERA
(select a
camera
4COPY,
5INITIALIZATION
(initialization)
(See page 9·2,
items [7], [8])
6MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs)
Mode
Gray scale
processing
Positioning of
model 0
: Search YES/NO
The binary
conversion
processing
7EVALUATION COND
(evaluation conditions)
Measuring the objects
in model 1
: NO/YES (No search)
/YES (Do a search)
Standard
conditions
Standard
conditions
8NUMERIC CAL COND
(condition for numerical calculations)
9OUTPUT
CONDITIONS
9
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculations)
(see page 9·2 [4])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see “PC function” in Chapter 10)
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
9·46
MAIN OPS MENU
Degree of match inspection
[2] Setting details
An explanation of item 6 MEAS. PROG. COND (conditions for measurement programs) from the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] (object type measurement).
On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu item, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (condition of
object type) and press the SET key.
-Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, q MEASUREMENT 2, or w MEASUREMENT 3 on the
[OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions for object types) menu.
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
This is how the line looks
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH when the object type is set to
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV) 00 and the selected measureINSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
ment is 1.
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
- To select the CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH (degree of match with the reference image), go to item
① MEAS SELECTION.
- Item 2 COMPARE IMAGES will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT
CAMERA IMG (select camera one of two images), which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS. PROG. COND (condition for measurement programs).
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15) REG.NO YES
2MODE
GRAY-IMG-PROC BINRY-IMG-PROC
3MODEL0 POSITION NO-SEARCH SEARCH
4MODEL 1 MEAS. OBJ NO YES(NO-SEARCH) YES(SEARCH)
5EVALUATE CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6UPPER MENU
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15) REG.NO YES
2MODE
GRAY-IMG-PROC BINRY-IMG-PROC
5EVALUATE CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6UPPER MENU
The display will look like this when item 2
The display will look like this when item 2
MODE, is set to GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale MODE, is set to BINRY-IMG-PROC (binary
processing)
processing)
- Items 2 to 5 will be displayed if item 1 REGST NO. (registration) is set to YES.
However, if BINRY-IMG-PROC (binary processing) is selected in item 2, then items 3 and
4 will not be displayed (and so can not be set).
Measurement conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2MODE
3MODEL 0 POSITION
(positioning)
4MODEL 1 MEAS. OBJ
(object to be measured)
5EVALUATE CRITERIA
(criteria condition)
6UPPER MENU
Setting details
First select the REGST NO. (registration number) from 0 to 15, then chose
YES or NO, depending on whether you wish to record that selection.
Select either GRAY-IMG-PROC(gray scale processing) or BINRY-IMGPROC (binary processing).
When the GRAY-IMG-PROC( (gray scale processing) mode has been
selected, then NO-SEARCH or SEARCH (search) must be selected for the
MODEL 0 POSITION (positioning of model 0).
When the GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale processing) mode has been
selected, then NO, YES (NO-SEARCH) or YES (SEARCH) (existance/non
existance of an object, search/do not search) must be selected for the
MODEL 1 MEAS. OBJ (object to be measured in model 1).
Criteria conditions are set in the next menu.
This will return you to [TYPE00.MEAS1 to 3].
[Settings sequence]
- This is the sequence for gray scale processing
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2MODE
(set for gray scale processing)
4MODEL 1 MEAS. OBJ(object to be measured)
3MODEL0 POSITION
(positioning of model 0)
5EVALUATE CRITERIA (criteria conditions)
- This is the sequence for binary processing
1REGST NO. (registration number)
Continued on the following page
2MODE (set for binary processing)
5EVALUATE CRITERIA (criteria conditions)
9·47
9
Degree of match inspection
Continued from the previous page.
Select item 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA (criteria conditions)
This is how the display looks when the
GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale processing)
mode is selected.
To see how the display looks when the BINRYIMG-PROC (binary processing) mode is selected.
Go to page 9·51.
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
8SEARCH AREA(MDL1)
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
wUPPER MENU
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(224,512)LO.R(287,512)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
STANDARD HI-PRC
These entries are displayed
when SEARCH (search yes)
is selected for model 0.
These entries are displayed
when YES (NO-SEARCH)
(yes-search no) or YES
(SEARCH) (yes-search yes)
is selected for model 1.
This is displayed when YES
(SEARCH) (yes-search yes)
is selected for model 1.
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one
separately, using the ESC key.
Menu
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
Setting details
Select the measurement window shape for model 0 (positioning).
Record a reference image for model 0
· The upper left or lower right area of the screen specified above will
change according the setting in item 1.
9
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference images)
The selection
at item 1
RECTANGLE(rectangle)
X-LINE (horizontal line)
Y-LINE (vertical line)
The display in the upper left,
lower right areas of the screen.
Upper left, lower right.
Starting point, end point
3SEARCH AREA(MDL0)
(search area )
If model 0 is set to SEARCH (search), then enter the search area.
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window for
model 0.
· If FREE is selected, then the position of cursor is optional.
If model 0 is set to SEARCH (search yes), then enter the pixel
contraction level.
-See (page 9·6) gray scale processing, in shared settings.
· When either X-LINE (horizontal line) or Y-LINE(vertical line) are
selected in item 1, you can select only 1 or 2 in item 5.
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
(measurement window)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
(reference image)
8SEARCH AREA(MDL1)
(search area)
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
(detection coordinates)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
(pixel contraction)
The settings for these are the same for model 1 as they are for model
0, numbers 1 to 5.
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
Set the level of detection precision for models 0 and 1.
-See page 9·6 “Gray scale processing” in shared settings.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement
conditions) menu.
wUPPER MENU
Continued on the following page
9·48
Degree of match inspection
Continued from the previous page: When the GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale processing mode) is selected.
[The setting sequence for criteria condition]
- This is the sequence to follow when model 0 (positioning) is set to NO-SEARCH (do not
search) and model 1 (object to be measured) is set to NO
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference image)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
- This is the sequence to follow when model 0 (positioning) is set to SEARCH (search) and
model 1 (object to be measured) is set to NO
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference image)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
3SEARCH AREA (MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
· This is the sequence to follow when model 0 (positioning) is set to SEARCH (search) and
model 1 (object to be measured) is set to YES (NO-SEARCH) (do not search)
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference image)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
(reference images)
3SEARCH AREA (MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
(detection coordinates)
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
(measurement window)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
- This is the sequence to follow when model 0 (positioning) is set to SEARCH (search) and
model 1 (object to be measured) is set to YES (SEARCH) (do not search)
1MEAS WINDOW(MDL0)
(measurement window)
2REF IMAGE(MODEL0)
(reference image)
4DTECT COORD(MDL0)
(detection coordinates)
7REF IMAGE(MODEL1)
(reference images)
3SEARCH AREA (MDL0)
5CONTR. PIXEL(MDL0)
(pixel contraction)
9
6MEAS WINDOW(MDL1)
(measurement window)
8SEARCH AREA (MDL1)
9DTECT COORD(MDL1)
(detection coordinates)
0CONTR. PIXEL(MDL1)
(pixel contraction)
qDETECT ACCURANCY
(accuracy of detection)
wUPPER MENU
[Information about the recording of a reference image]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame.
The specifications for the windows are as follows.
- In the case of a rectangular window
Line type
Movement
Size
Minimum
Maximum
Reference image
Solid line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32 x 32 (pixels)
X x Y (X x Y=65536 pixels)
Search area
Dotted line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32 x 32 (pixels)
512 x 480 pixels
· In the case of a horizontal line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Length
Minimum length Maximum length
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 4 pixels Units of 4
pixels
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 1 pixel
8 pixels
512 pixels
- In the case of a vertical line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 1 pixel
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 4 pixels
Length
Units of 4
pixels
Minimum length Maximum length
8 pixels
When using either a horizontal or a vertical line, please bear the following in mind.
The length of the reference image must be less than that of the search area.
Continued on the following page
9·49
480 pixels
Degree of match inspection
Continued from the previous page: When the GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale processing mode) is selected.
[Example of recording]
- This example shows a recorded image when model 0 (positioning) is set to SEARCH
(search) and model 1 (object to be measured) is set to YES (SEARCH) (do not search)
The reference image for model 0 (positioning)
The detection coordinates for model 0 (positioning)
The search area for model 0 (positioning)
(Measurement window: rectangular)
The reference image for model 1 (object to be measured)
The search area for model 1 (object to be measured)
The detection coordinates for model 1 (object to be measured)
- Example of a horizontal line measurement window (SEARCH)
Crosshair cursor
(detection coordinates) Solid line (reference line) Dotted line (search line)
- Example of a vertical line measurement window (SEARCH)
Crosshair cursor
(detection coordinates) Solid line (reference line) Dotted line (search line)
9
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu and select item 6 UPPER MENU.
Go to page 9·53
9·50
Degree of match inspection
Continued from page 9·48: When the BINRY-IMG-PROC (binary processing mode) is selected.
1REFERENCE IMAGE
2DETECTED COORD
3THRESHOLD VALUE
4INVERT B/W
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
CNTR FREE(255,240)
U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
NO YES
9BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
qBINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXPD.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXPD.
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR0(0~5)
eUPPER MENU
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately
using the ESC key.
Menu
1REFERENCE IMAGE
2DETECTED COORD
(detection coordinates)
3THRESHOLD VALUE
4INVERT B/W
(black and white
inversion)
9BINARY PROCESS
(the binary conversion
process)
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS
(image pre-processing)
qBINARY NOIS FILTR
(eliminating binary
noise)
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS
(the number of binary
noise elimination
processing)
eUPPER MENU
Setting details
Record a reference image.
Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window.
· If FREE is selected, then position of cursor is optional.
Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range
of 0 to 255.
-See page 9·7 “Setting threshold values”, in “Shared settings”
Set the inversion of black and white in the image to YES or NO.
· Selecting NO means that the white area is measured after the
image has been converted to binary values.
· Selecting YES means that the black area will be measured after the
image has been converted to binary values.
Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary
conversion processing method. (VAR-DIFF or VAR-RATE).-See
page 9·8 “Methods for binary conversion” in “Shared settings”
Select a method for pre-processing the image data.
-See page 9·9, “Pre-processing” in “Shared settings”
Select a method for eliminating binary noise.
-See page 9·10, “Methods for eliminating noise from binary images,
expansion/contraction” and, “Eliminating binary noise”, in “Shared
settings”
Separately set the number of cycles that the expansion and
contraction binary noise elimination processes will be repeated (0 to
5).
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement
condition) menu.
Continued on the following page
9·51
9
Degree of match inspection
Continued from the previous page: When the BINRY-IMG-PROC (binary processing mode) is selected.
[Setting sequence for reference criteria]
- This is the sequence to follow when model 1 (object to be measured) is set to NO
1REFERENCE
IMAGE
2DETECTED COORD
(detection coordinates)
4INVERT B/W
(black and white inversion)
qBINARY NOIS FILTR
(eliminating binary noise)
3THRESHOLD VALUE
9BINARY PROCESS
(binary conversion process)
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS
(image pre-processing)
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS (the number of cycles that the
binary noise elimination process is applied)
eUPPER MENU
[Information about the recording of a reference image]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame.
The specifications for a rectangular window are as follows.
Line type
Reference image
Solid line
Movement
Units of 4 pixels
Size
Minimum
Maximum
Units of 4 pixels
32 x 32 (pixels)
X x Y (X x Y=65536 pixels)
[Example of recording]
Reference image
Object to be measured
9
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu and select item 6UPPER MENU.
Continued on the follwing page
9·52
Degree of match inspection
Continued from page 9·50: When the GRAY-IMG-PROC (gray scale processing mode) is selected.
Continued from the previous page: When the binary processing mode is selected.
Select item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation conditions), from the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1REGST NO.
0(0~15)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
2MATCH (MDL0) -10000~+10000 +09000
OK NO
3X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
4Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
5LIGT LVL(MDL0) 000.0~255.0
116.0
OK NO
6MATCH (MDL1) -10000~+10000 ＋09000 OK NO
7X COORD.(MDL1) 000.0~511.0
X=000.0 OK NO
8Y COORD.(MDL1) 000.0~479.0
Y=000.0 OK NO
9LIGT LVL(MDL1) 000.0~255.0
100.0
OK NO
eMAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
rUPPER MENU
These displays can be set
using the up and down keys.
(The choices are NO, Y0 to 7,
C000 to C127)
This is how the display looks
when the GRAY-IMG-PROC
(gray scale search mode) is
selected and MODEL1 MEAS.
OBJ (model 1 object to be
measured) is set to YES.
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one
separately using the ESC key.
Evaluation condition
1REGST NO.(registration number)
2MATCH (MDL0) (degree of match with
the reference image)
3X COORD.(MDL0)
(X coordinates)
4Y COORD.(MDL0)
(Y coordinates)
5LIGT LVL (MDL0)
(light level)
6MATCH (MDL1) (degree of match with
the reference image)
7X COORD.(MDL1) (X coordinates)
Setting details
Enter any number from 0 to 15.
Set the percentage of match with the reference image for model 0
that will still produce an OK decision.
Set the range of X(*) coordinates for model 0 that will produce an OK
decision.
Set the range of Y(*) coordinates for model 0 that will produce an OK
decision.
9
Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 2 to 5
above.
8Y COORD.(MDL1) (Y coordinates)
9LIGT LVL (MDL1) (light level)
0MAKE A TEST RUN
qUPPER MENU
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition, display the test results.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition).
* The X and Y coordinates come from either the point of detection in the reference image.
· Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluations that you have
set. This can be done using item 0 MAKE A TEST RUN.
· For more information about evaluation conditions see (section 9·2 [3] Evaluaation conditions).
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] and select item 8 NUMERIC CALC COND
(conditions for numerical calculations)
Continued on the following page
9·53
Degree of match inspection
From the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
1CALC. RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH [M] CORD[X Y] LEVL[G]
NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.00(0~15) MDL0(0~1) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~ +00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST (SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[M]
00M0
+00009800.0~ +00010000.0 +00009800.0
Y0
OK
N01
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE(type)
9
3FORMULA
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6RUN A TEST
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
Setting details
Set the specified output data for recording and displaying the results of
arithmetical operation to any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
The first line of the display
Coordinates [XY], the degree of match
Record 00 (0 to 15) model (0 to 1)
with the reference image [M] and the
N00 (0 to 15)
level of light [G].
ABS
TAN ATAN N00 (0 to 15)
Numerical calculations [NC]
(the second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
Constant [C]
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the output conditions for the results of calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3
as follows.
2 OBJECT TYPE
Coordinates X/Y
Degree of match M
Light level G
Numerical calculation NC
Constant C
Model 1
Model 0
00X0 to 15X0/00Y0 to 15Y0 00X1 to 15X1/00Y1 to 15Y1
00M1 to 15M1
00M0 to 15M0
00G1 to 15G1
00G0 to 15G0
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on numerical calculations see (section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations).
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS (output condition).
Continued on the follwing page
9·54
Degree of match inspection
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] 1PAGE NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
(TYPE00-MEAS.1-DEG OF MATCH)
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
MOVE
REGT.NO.00(0~15)
MATCH.M0(0~1) CRD-X0(0~1) CRD-Y0(0~1)
LVL G0(0~1)
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLYC000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGIAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
1
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows.
3INPUT SIGNAL
Degree of match M
Coordinates X/Y
Light level G
Calculation N
Auxiliary relay C
Model 0
Model 1
00M0 to 15M0
00X0 to 15X0/00Y0 to 15Y0
00G to 15G
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
00M1 to 15M1
00X1 to 15X1/00Y1 to 15Y1
00G to 15G
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on output conditions see “the PC Function”, in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9·55
9
Degree of match inspection
Continued form the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will run a check by starting a manual measurement.
Shown below is an example of how the display will look when the gray scale search mode has been
selected and both models 0 and 1 have been set to (Search YES).
[Display of the inspection
result]
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
Measurement number and
camera number
Registration number for the
measurement condition
Degree of match with the
reference image for model 0
Detected coordinates for model 0
Average light level for model 0
Degree of match for model 1
Detected coordinates for model 1
Average light level for model 1
F L C1ALL C2NO
VX.X
(TYPE00)
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH
REGST NO. 00(0~15)
MATCH.(MDL 0) +09878 OK
X COORD. (MDL 0) X=288.0 OK
Y COORD. (MDL 0) Y=190.0 OK
LIGT LVL(MDL 0) 023.0 OK
MATCH.(MDL 1) +09306 OK
X COORD. (MDL 1) X=389.0 OK
Y COORD. (MDL 1) Y=355.0 OK
LIGT LVL(MDL 1) 023.0
OK
X0~6:
Y0~7:
Model 0
Model 1
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
9
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) and pressing the up key, you can see the
measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations. This is done by
scrolling through them in the following order: Registration numbers 00→01→02,…,15,00…. These are
followed by the results of the numerical calculations N00 to N15. The measurements screen also has
this feature. Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll back through the results in the
opposite order.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers (other than those currently on display) or if no measurement has
actually been carried out, then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data.
9·56
Distance and angle measurement
9-5 Distance and angle measurement
Purpose
The distance and angle of the centers of detected points can be measured by the
center detection function and the edge detection function in a gray scale search and
the center of grevity detection function, which is a part of the labeling process.
Applications Measurement for mounting electronic components
[Measuring an IC package]
Reference image a
Search area
(reference image b)
Example
Search area
(reference
image a)
Reference image b
Reference images a and b are recorded when the crosshair cursor is placed on
the edge of the IC package.
· Measuring sequence
1 Obtain the center points of images a and b by running a 2 point gray scale
search.
2 Determine the distance between the two center points.
· For details about measuring the distance, X coordinate distance, and Y coordinate distance of
two manually designated points, see the MANL-MESR (manual measurement) section for the
crosshair cursor display (page 8·8).
9
9-57
Distance and angle measurement
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
1MEAS SELECTION
Select the GRAY&EDGE
or GRAV on the DST&AGL
MES. line
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculation
between images)
(See page 9.2 [6])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
3SELECT CAMERA
(select a camera)
4COPY,
5INITIALIZATION
(See page 9.2,
items [7], [8])
6MEAS.PROG.COND
(conditions of measurement program)
· The sequence when GRAY&EDGE are selected
Starting point number
Starting point mode
[Gray scale search]
Conditions for the
starting point
Auxiliary condition
Distance condition
Angle condition
[Edge detection]
Conditions for the
starting point
Auxiliary condition
Distance condition
Angle condition
· The sequence when GRAV (center of gravity) is selected
Conditions for the
starting point
Auxiliary condition
Distance condition
Angle condition
9
7EVALUATION
COND
(evaluation
conditions)
8NUMERIC CALC COND
(numerical
calculation condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculations)
(see page 9·2 [4])
9OUTPUT
CONDITIONS
These settings are found in the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] (object type
measurement 1 to 3) menu.
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see "PC function" in
Chapter 10)
9-58
MAIN OPS MENU
Distance and angle measurement
[2] Setting details
An explanation of item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs) from the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP], move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press SET key.
-Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, qMEASUREMENT 2 or w MEASUREMENT 3 on the
[OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions for object types) menu.
This is how the line looks when
the object type is set to 00 and
the selected measurement is 1.
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
· Set the DST&AGL MES. (measurement of distance and angle) which can be found under item
1 MEAS SELECTION (select measurements) to either GRAY&EDGE (gray scale search and
edge detection) or GRAV. (center of gravity).
· Item 2 COMPARE IMAGES (calculation between images) will be displayed unless NO is
selected in item 8 NUMERIC CALC COND(camera selection) which is in the [OBJECT TYPE
COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
This is how the display looks when GRAY&EDGE are selected
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL.MEAS)
1START POINT NO 00(0~15) REG.NO YES
2START POINT MODE GRAY-SEARCH EDGE-DETECT
3START POINT COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4AUX.CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5DISTANCE COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6ANGLE CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7UPPER MENU
If item 1 START POINT NO is set to YES (enable registration), then items 2 to 6 will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Setting details
Set the starting point number to any number from 0 to 15 and
then set REG. (registration) to YES, to save your selection.
Select either GRAY-SEARCH (gray scale search) or EDGE
DETECT (edge detection) as the starting point mode.
1START POINT NO
2START POINT MODE
(starting point mode)
3START POINT COND
(start point condition)
4AUX.CONDITIONS (auxiliary condition) These are set in the next menu.
5DISTANCE COND (distance condition)
6ANGLE CONDITIONS (angular condition)
7UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
Select item 3 START POINT COND (conditions for the starting point)
Select the GRAY-SEARCH
(gray scale search) for starting point mode
Select the EDGE DETECT
(edge detection) for starting point mode
Continued on the following page
Go to page 9·61
When the GRAV (center of gravity) is selected
Go to page 9·6
9-59
9
Distance and angle measurement
From the previous page: When the GRAY-SEARCH (gray scale search) starting point mode is selected as
the START POINT COND (starting point condition).
1MEAS WINDOW
2REF IMAGE
3SEARCH AREA
4DTECT COORD
5CONTR. PIXEL
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
This is how the display looks
when the 1MEASURE
WINDOW (measurement
window) is a RECTANGLE
(rectangle).
qDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HI-PRC
wUPPER MENU
· You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately using the
ESC key.
Menu
1MEASURE WINDOW
(measurement window)
2REFERENCE IMAGE
3SEARCH AREA
Setting details
Select the shape of the measurement window.
Record a reference image and then set the search area.
· If X-LINE (horizontal line) or Y-LINE (vertical line) are selected, then
the UP.L (upper left) and LO.R ( lower right) choices in the screen
above will be ST-PNT (starting point) and E-PNT (end point).
4DETECTED COORD
(detection coordinates)
Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window.
· If FREE is selected, then the cursor may be positioned as desired.
Set the number of pixel contractions.
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing using shared settings.
5CONTRACT PIXELS
· When either a X-LINE (horizontal) or a Y-LINE (vertical) are selected
(pixel contraction)
in item 1, the choices here will be 1 or 2.
qDETECT ACCURANCY Select the level of precision used for detection.
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing using shared setting.
(artifact processing)
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
wUPPER MENU
9
[The setting sequence of the starting point conditions in a gray scale search.]
1MEASURE WINDOW
4DETECTED COORD
3SEARCH AREA
2REFFERENCE IMAGE
5CONTRACT PIXELS
qDETECT ACCURANCY
wUPPER MENU
[Information about the recording of a reference image]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame.
The specifications for the windows are as follows.
· In the case of a rectangular window
Line type
Movement
Size
Minimum
Maximum
Reference image
Solid line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32×32 (pixels) X × Y (X × Y=65536 pixels)
Search area
Dotted line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32×32 (pixels) 512 × 480 pixels
· In the case of a horizontal line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Length
Minimum length Maximum length
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 4 pixels Units of 4
pixels
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 1 pixel
8 pixels
512 pixels
· In the case of a vertical line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 1 pixel
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 4 pixels
Length
Units of 4
pixels
Minimum length Maximum length
8 pixels
When either a horizontal or a vertical line is selected please bear the following in mind.
The reference image must be shorter than the search area.
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu and select item
4 AUX.CONDITIONS (auxiliary condition).
Go to page 9·64
9-60
480 pixels
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from page 9·59: When the EDGE-DETECT (edge detection) starting point mode is selected as
the START POINT COND (starting point conditions).
1DETECT MODE
2DETECT DIRECTION
3DETECT AREA
4THRESHOLD VALUE
CHANGE DRK→BRT BRT→DRK CNTR(BRT DRK)
HORI (→ ←) VERT (↓ ↑)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
GRYS.050(0∼255) EDGE.W (1~8)
FLAT.W04(1~16)
5PROC. PROJECTION NO YES
qUPPER MENU
· You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately
using the ESC key.
Menu
Setting details
1DETECT MODE
(detection mode)
Select the detection mode.
(Change point
or
; Dark to light ;
Center (light or dark center))
2DETECT DIRECTION
(detection direction)
Select the detection direction.
, Light to dark ;
,
Draw a dotted-line rectangle around the search area.
· In order to enhance detection performance, make dimension Y as short
as possible.
4THRESHOLD VALUE Set the width of the edge (1 to 8) and the flat (1 to 16) as well as the
difference in the light level (0 to 255).
(threshold values)
5PROC. PROJECTION Select whether to employ artifact processing or not.
-For more information about artifact processing see page 9·12, “Artifact
(artifact processing)
processing” using shared settings.
qUPPER MENU
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
3DETECT AREA
(area of detection)
· For more information about the setting for edge detection see page 9·11, “Edge detection”, in
shared settings.
[Setting sequence of the starting point conditions of edge detection]
1DETECT MODE
2DETECT DIRECTION
4THRESHOLD VALUE
5PROC. PRJECTION
3DETECT AREA
qUPPER MENU
[Information about setting the starting point conditions of edge detection]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame.
· Specifications for the area of detection.
Line type
Movement
Dotted line
Units of 1 pixel
Size
Units of 1 pixel
Minimum
0×0 pixels
Maximum
512×480 pixels
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu and
select item 4 AUX.CONDITIONS (auxiliary condition).
Go to page 9·64
9-61
9
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from page 9·59: Setting the DST & AGL MES. (measurement of distance and angle) for GRAV.
(center of gravity operations).
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1START POINT COND
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
2AUX.CONDITIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3DISTANCE CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4ANGLE CONDITIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5UPPER MENU
Select item 1 START POINT COND (starting point conditions)
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
4MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
5THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
6INVERT B/W
NO YES
7BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD
9LABEL ORDER
SACN-ORDER SIZE-ORDER
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
qBINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXP.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXP.
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR0(0~5)
eAREA FILTER
000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT
rUPPER MENU
This is how the display looks
when item 1 MEAS WINDOW
TYPE is set to RECTANGLE.
This is how the display looks
when item 3 MASK
WINDOW TYPE, is set to
RECTANGLE.
· Item 4 will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO.
9
Menu
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE
(measurement window)
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT
(measurement window
position)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE
4MASK WINDOW POSIT
(mask window position)
5THRESHOLD VALUE
6INVERT B/W
(black and white inversion)
7BINARY PROCESS
(binary conversion process)
8BOUNDARY PROCESS
(boundary processing)
9LABEL ORDER
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS
Setting details
Select measurement window type: RECTANGLE (rectangular), CIRCLE
(circular) or ELLIPSE (elliptical).
Set the size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel.
· If circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you must
set are the center and diameter.
Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type
(rectangular, round or elliptical).
· A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window
and screens out those parts of the image which are not needed for the
measurement process.
Set the size and position of the mask window (which is drawn with a dotted
line) using units of 1 pixel.
· If a circle or an ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you
must set are the center and diameter.
· The mask window can be set exceeding the measurement window.
Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion, within the range of 0 to
255.
-See page 9·7, Setting threshold values, in shared settings.
Set the inversion of black and white in the image to YES or NO.
· NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been
converted to binary values.
· YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been
converted to binary values.
Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion
processing method. (VAR-DIFF or VAR-RATE).-See methods for binary
conversion in shared settings on page 9·8.
Enable or disable boundary processing.
-See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9·7.
Select the labeling order.
-See labeling order in shared settings on page 9·8.
Select a method for pre-processing image data.
-See pre-processing in shared settings on page 9·9.
Continued on the following page
9-62
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: Setting the DST &AGL MES. (measurement of distance and angle) for
GRAV.(center of gravity operations).
qBINARY NOIS FILTR
(eliminating binary noise)
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS
(number of noise
elimination cycles)
eAREA FILTER
rUPPER MENU
Select a method for eliminating binary noise.
-See methods for eliminating noise from binary images,
expansion/contraction and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on
page 9·10.
Set the number of times that the elimination of binary noise process is
carried out (0 to 5). Set separately for expansion and contraction cycles.
After object identification, the area filter is a function used to identify small
islands whose area is less than a specified amount. It eliminates them from
the object which is being measured.
· Set the maximum number of pixels. Areas with fewer pixels will be ignored.
Enter any number from 0 to 245760.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
[Information about the window settings]
- In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame.
- First freeze the frame. Then operate the camera normally. Finally, freeze the frame again. The first
frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary
image.
The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating
steps 1 to e above.
[Example of recording]
Measurement window
Mask window
- The binary image will be the contents of the measurement window, after the portion excluded by the
mask window has been removed.
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu and select item 2 AUX
CONDITIONS (auxiliary condition).
Continued on the next page
9-63
9
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from pages 9-60, 9-61 and 9-63: GRAY & EDGE, GRAV.
[AUX. CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1AUX.NO.
2AUX.TYPE
3POINT NO.1 :
4POINT NO.2 :
5POINT NO.3 :
6UPPER MENU
00(0~15)
NO MID-PNT
ST-PNT00
ST-PNT00
ST-PNT00
PERIMETR C-GRAV LEG INTRSCT-PT
AUX.NO
AUX.NO
AUX.NO
Those settings already
established for auxiliary
points may also be used as
measurement conditions.
- Items 3 and 4 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 2.
- If either PERIMETR (center of circle) or C-GRAV (center of gravity) is selected in item ②, then
item 5 will be displayed.
Auxiliary conditions
1AUX.NO. (auxiliary number)
2AUX. TYPE (auxiliary type)
3POINT NO.1
4POINT NO.2
5POINT NO.3
6UPPER MENU
Setting details
Set this to any number from 0 to 15.
Select from NO (none), MID-PNT (set 2 points), PERIMETR (set 3
points), C-GRAV (set 3 points), LEG (set 2 points), or INTRSCT-PT
(set 2 points).
If the starting point number (either the starting point number or the
label number) is entered for points 1 to 3 (points 1 and 2 when MIDPNT, LEG, or INTRSCT-PT is selected ) then the type of auxiliary
that was selected in 2 will be displayed next to each point.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
The auxiliary when MID-PNT
has been selected
The auxiliary when PERIMETR
has been selected
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 2 (X2, Y2)
9
Center point
X1+X2 Y1+Y2
,
2
2
Center of the circle
The center point is the coordinate
half way between points 1 and 2.
The auxiliary when C-GRAV
has been selected
Point 3
The center of the circle is the central coordinate of three
points positioned on the circumference of the circle.
The auxiliary when LEG
has been selected
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
Point 2 (X2, Y2)
Point 1
Point 3 (X3, Y3)
Center of Gravity
Y1+Y2+Y3
X1+X2+X3
,
3
3
The center of gravity between points 1 to
3 is calculated as the mean of the three
Point 2
A straight line between points 1 and 2.
The auxiliary when INTRSCT-PT has been selected
Point 1
（Aux.: 2-P line）
Point 2
（Aux.: 2-P line）
Crosspoint of the two lines that were
specified in "AUX.TYPE: LEG."
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu and select item 5 DISTANCE
COND (distance conditions) if the GRAY&EDGE is selected, and select item 3 DISTANCE
CONDITIONS (distance conditions) if the GRAV (center of gravity) mode is selected.
Continued on the following page
9-64
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: GRAY&EDGE, GRAV.
[DISTANCE SETTINGS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1DISTANCE NUMBER 00(0~15)
2DISTANCE TYPE NO DIST-BETW-2PT DIST-BETW-X DIST-BETW-Y
3POINT NO.1 :
ST-PNT00
AUX.NO
4POINT NO.2 :
ST-PNT00
AUX.NO
5UPPER MENU
If auxiliary point settings have been made in the [AUX.CONDITIONS] (auxiliary
condition) menu, then they may be used for the measurement conditions here.
- Items 3 and 4 will be displayed if except NO is selected in item 2.
Distance settings
1DISTANCE NUMBER
(distance selection)
Setting details
Set this to any number from 0 to 15.
Set the distance type to be the distance between two points, distance
between X coordinates, or distance between Y coordinates.
Enter the number (either the starting point number) or the auxiliary
number for the starting point of the measurement distance between two
points, that was specified in item 2.
2DISTANCE TYPE
3POINT NO.1
4POINT NO.2
5UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
The distance type when distance between two
points has been selected
The distance between 2 points
(X2-X1)2+(Y2-Y1)2
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
Point 2 (X2, Y2)
The distance type when distance between X
coordinates has been selected
The distance between X
coordinates (｜X2-X1｜)
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
Point 2 (X2, Y2)
The distance type when distance between Y
coordinates has been selected
Point 1 (X1, Y1)
The distance between Y
coordinates (｜Y2-Y1｜)
Point 2 (X2, Y2)
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu and select item 6 ANGLE
CONDITIONS if the GRAY&EDGE is selected, and select item 4 ANGLE CONDITIONS if the GRAV
(center of gravity) mode is selected.
Continued on the following page
9-65
9
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: GRAY&EDGE, GRAV.
[ANGLE SETTINGS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1ANGLE NO.
2ANGLE TYPE
3POINT NO.1 :
4POINT NO.2 :
5POINT NO.3 :
6UPPER MENU
00(0~15)
NO 3PT-ANGL 2PT-ANGL(HORI VERT)
ST-PNT00
AUX.NO
ST-PNT00
AUX.NO
ST-PNT00
AUX.NO
If auxiliary point settings have been
made in the [AUX.CONDITIONS]
(auxiliary condition) menu, then they
may be used for the measurement
Items 3 and 4 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 2.
If 3PT-ANGL (3 point angle) is selected in item 2, then item 5 will be displayed.
Angle settings
1ANGLE NO.
Setting details
Set the angle number to any number from 0 to 15
2ANGLE TYPE
Select either a 3-point angle (3 points of data are required) or a 2-point
angle (horizontal and vertical).
3POINT NO.1
4POINT NO.2
5POINT NO.3
6UPPER MENU
Enter the starting point number for the angle type to be measured, as
specified in item 2.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Angle: When a 3 point angle is specified
Point 2
+Angle (∼+180.0¡)
Point 3
Point 1
Point 1
9
+Angle (-180.0¡∼)
Point 2
Point 3
Point 1 is the point of intersection of the two lines. Relative to the line between points 1 and 2, the
line between points 1 and 3 will be said to be at a positive angle if the angle is measured in a
counterclockwise direction, and it will be at a negative angle if it is measured in a clockwise
direction.
Angle: When a 2-point (vertical) angle is
Angle: When a 2-point (horizontal) angle
specified
is specified
Point 2
Vertical line
Point 2
+angle
+angle
Point 1
Point 1
Horizontal line
Relative to the horizontal line, the line from
point 2 that intersects point 1 will be said to
at a positive angle if the angle is measured
in a counterclockwise direction and at a
negative angle if it is measured in a
clockwise direction.
Relative to the vertical line, the line from point 2
that intersects point 1 will be said to at a
positive angle if the angle is measured in a
counterclockwise direction and at a negative
angle if it is measured in a clockwise direction.
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu and select item 7 UPPER MENU
Continued on the following page
9-66
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: GRAY&EDGE, GRAV.
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1OBJECT :
ST-PNT AUX DIST
ANGLE 2REGST NO.
00(0~15) GRAY-SEARCH
3X START PNT COORD 000.0~511.0
4Y START PNT COORD 000.0~479.0
5DEGREE OF MATCH -10000~+10000
6MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
X=285.0 OK NO
Y=250.0 OK NO
+09800 OK NO
Alternatively, EDGE DETECT (tip
of the edge) or GRAVITY (label
center of gravity) may also be
displayed here.
Use the up and down keys to
select NO, Y0 to 7, or C000
to C127.
Evaluation conditions
1OBJECT
2REGST NO.
(registration number)
Setting details
Select the object for evaluation.
Set this at any number from 0 to 15.
3
Enter the ranges that will produce an OK decision.
The titles of items 3 to 5 will change, according to the settings in item
1. The example above shows the display when 1OBJECT: ST-PNT
(starting point) has been selected. See below for the displays when
other object settings are selected.
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition, display the test
results.
4
5
6MAKE A TEST RUN
7UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
1OBJECT: When AUX (auxiliary) is selected
1OBJECT :
ST-PNT AUX DIST
ANGLE 2REGST NO.
00(0~15) CNTR-PNT
3AUX. X COORD 000.0~511.0
4AUX. Y COORD 000.0~479.0
PERIMRTER (center of a circle), C-GRAV
(center of gravity), LEG (lines on two points),
INTRSCT-PT (crosspint over two lines) or NO
(disabled) may also be displayed here.
1OBJECT: When DIST (distance) is selected
1OBJECT :
2REGST NO.
3DISTANCE
ST-PNT AUX DIST
ANGLE 00(0~15) DIST-BETW-2PT
000.0~702.0 PIXEL
DIST-BETW-X, DIST -BETW-Y, NO may also be
displayed here.
1OBJECT: When ANGLE is selected
1OBJECT :
2REGST NO.
3ANGLE
ST-PNT AUX DIST
ANGLE
00(0~15) 3PT-ANGL
-180.0~+180.0゜
2PT-ANGL(HORI) (2 point horizontal),
2PT-ANGL(VERT) (2 point vertical) or NO (disabled)
may also be displayed here.
- Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluation that you have set.
This can be done using item 6 MAKE A TEST RUN.
- For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation conditions .
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] and select item 8 NUMERIC CAL COND
(numeric calculation condition).
Continued on the following page
9-67
9
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: GRAY&EDGE, GRAV.
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1CALC.RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH[M] CORD[X Y] AUX[HX HY]
DIST[D] ANGL[B] NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.00(0~15) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~ +00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[D]
00D
+00000350.0~ +00000355.0 +00000352.0
Y0
OK
N01
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE (type)
9
Setting details
Set the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for
specified output data at any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
The first line of the display
Selection of 2
The degree of match with the reference
image [M] coordinates [XY], auxiliary
Record 00 (0 to 15) N00 (0 to 15)
[HX, HY], distance [D] and angle [B].
3FORMULA
Numerical calculations [NC]
Constant [C]
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
(upper and lower limits)
5OUTPUT
6RUN A TEST
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
ABS
TAN ATAN N0 (0 to 15) (the
second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the output conditions for the results of calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
- The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows.
2OBJECT TYPE
Degree of match [M]
Coordinates [X][Y]
Auxiliary [HX/HY]
Distance [D]
Angle [B]
Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
Number of formulas
00M to 15M
00X to 15X/00Y to 15Y
00HX to 15Hx/00HY to 15HY
00D to 15D
00B to 15B
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
- For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations .
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS (output condition)
Continued on the following page
9-68
Distance and angle measurement
Continued from the previous page: GRAY&EDGE, GRAV.
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-DST&ANGL MEAS)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
MATCH M00(0~15) AGL B00(0~15)
ST-PT S00(0~15) AUX.H00(0~15)
DST.D00(0~15)
CAL.N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
- The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows.
Selection of 3
Degree of match M
Angle B
Starting point S
Auxiliary point H
Distance D
Calculation N
Secondary relay C
Input signals
00M to 15M
00B to 15B
00S to 15S
00H to 15H
00D to 15D
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
- For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9-69
9
Distance and angle measurement
Continued form the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will run a measurement of distance and angle after manually measuring
the starting point.
Below is an example of the results display for a distance measurement.
[Display of measured results]
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
Measurement number, camera
number and measurement type
contents (gray scale or center
of gravity)
Distance number
Measurement of distance
(in pixels) and decision result
The X and Y coordinates of the
starting point numbers
(TYPE00)
OK
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 DST&AGL：GRAY
DIST00［BETWEEN 2PT］
207.0 PIXEL OK
ST-PNT 00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PNT 01(466.0, 178.0)
DIST01[BETWEEN Y］
50.0 PIXEL OK
ST-PNT 00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PNT 02(361.0, 228.0)
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
9
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) and pressing the up key, it is
possible to see the measurement results corresponding to other types of data which may be
scrolled through in this order: distance number (00 to 15), angle number (00 to 15), starting
point number (00 to 15), auxiliary point number (00 to 15) and then returning again to
distance number (which is the type of data currently on the display in the illustration above).
Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll backwards in the opposite order.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers (other than those currently on display), or if no
measurement has actually been carried out, then it will not be possible to switch back and
forth between data.
· The following are some examples of other displays.
Example of the display of angle results
Angle number [angle type]
Measurement of angle
and results of decision
Starting point number
(X and Y coordinates)
ANGL00[3PT-ANGL]
88.2゜ OK
ST-PNT00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PNT01(466.0, 178.0)
ST-PNT02(361.0, 228.0)
ANGL01[2PT-ANGL(HORI)]
03.5゜ OK
ST-PNT00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PNT02(361.0, 228.0)
9-70
Distance and angle measurement
Example of the display of starting point results
Starting point number [mode]
Coordinates for starting points
and results of decision
ST-PNT00 [GRAY SEARCH]
(132.0, 298.0)
OK
MATCH +09944 OK
Match with the reference image
(This is how the display looks
when the gray scale mode is
selected)
ST-PNT01 [GRAY SEARCH]
(360.0, 298.0)
OK
MATCH +09949 OK
Example of the display of auxiliary results
Auxiliary number
[type of auxiliary operation]
Coordinates for auxiliary
and results of decision
Starting point number
(X and Y coordinates)
AUX00 [MID-PNT]
(362.5, 178.0)
OK
ST-PT00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PT01(466.0, 178.0)
AUX01 [PERIMETER]
(362.5, 095.9)
OK
ST-PT00(259.0, 178.0)
ST-PT01(466.0, 178.0)
ST-PT02(361.0, 228.0)
9
9-71
Lead inspection
9-6 Lead inspection
Purpose
Application
Based on positional information obtained from the gray scale search function, inspect the
condition of IC leads and connector pins. (No. of detected lead pins : Max. 128 pieces)
Checks IC leads and packages for connectors.
[Check the alignment of things like IC leads and packages for connectors.]
P1
P2
P3
Line used in
checking the object
Example
K4
L4
K3
L3
K2
L2
K1
L1
Lead
[Lead inspection]
· P1 to P3: The distance
between the center of
2 adjacent leads
· K1 to K4: The center
points of leads
· L1 to L4: Length of
lead
· Number of leads
· A lead with inadequate
position
· Checking sequence
1 Determine the center points (K1 to K4) of those leads which are in a line to
inspect.
2 Check for any bending of leads that may have occurred by comparing the
shortest and longest P measurements with variations in those measurements
within the reference image.
3 Check the length of the leads, which is measured based the direction specified
before, by comparing the shortest and longest L measurements against those
within the reference image.
9
9-72
Lead inspection
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
1MEAS SELECTION
(select INSPECT-LEAD
lead inspection)
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculations
between images)
(See page 9-2 [6])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
3SELECT
CAMERA
4COPY,
5INITIALIZATION
(See section 9-2 [7], [8])
· When gray scale search for line correction is enabled (*)
6MEAS.PROG.COND
(conditions for
measurement programs)
Conditions for the
reference search
Conditions for the inspection object (length
of lead measurement: enabled/disabled)
· When gray scale search for line adjustment is disabled
Conditions for the inspection object
(length of lead measurement: enabled/disabled)
7EVALUATION COND
(evaluation conditions)
8NUMERIC CAL COND
(numerical calculation condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculations)
(See section 9-2 [4])
9OUTPUT CONDITION
(output condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
See “PC function” in Chapter 10
MAIN OPS MENU
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3]
(object type measurement 1 to 3 ) menu.
* Gray scale search for line correction/enabled means that the position of the line will be
adjusted according to positional deviation detected in a gray scale search.
9-73
9
Lead inspection
[2] Setting details
An explanation of item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (condition for measurement programs) from the
[TYPE-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
objrct type) and press SET key.
-Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1 q MEASUREMENT 2, or w MEASUREMENT 3 on the
[OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
This is how the line looks
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH when the object type is
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV) set to 00 and the selected
measurement is 1.
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
- Select INSPECT-LEAD (lead inspection) in item 1.
- Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA
IMG (camera selection) which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
9
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-INSPECT LEAD)
1REGST NO.
0(0~3) REG.NO YES
2SEARCH CRITERIA (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3OBJ NO. FOR MEAS CRT.0-0(0~7) REG.NO YES
4LEAD LENGTH MEAS NO YES
5OBJ CONDFOR MEAS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
6UPPER MENU
- If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO. (registration number), then item 2 will be displayed.
- If YES is specified in item 3 OBJ NO. FOR MEAS (object number), then items 4 and 5 will be
displayed.
Setting details
Enter number 0 to 3, and select NO or YES (disable/enable) of
1REGST NO. (registration registration
- If you want to enable the gray scale search for line correction,
number)
select YES in this line.
Set gray scale match, which will be reference search conditions, in
2SEARCH CRITERIA
the next menu
(criteria search
- This setting is enabled when YES is selected in item 1 above.
conditions)
3OBJ NO.FOR MEAS (ID Enter number 0 to 7 correspond to the object to be measured, and
select NO or YES (enable/disable) registration.
number for object to be
- If you enter 0 for CRT. (criteria number), it will correspond to
measured)
registration number (0 to 3) entered in item 1 above.
Choice
of NO/YES (disable/enable) lead length measurement.
4LEAD LENGTH MEAS
(lead length measurement)
5OBJ CONDFOR MEAS Set edge detection, which will be conditions for object to be
measured, in the next menu.
(conditions for object to
- This setting is enabled when YES is selected in item 3 above.
be measured)
This will return you to [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
6UPPER MENU
Measurement conditions
If you disabled the gray scale search for line correction, select item 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS
(conditions for object to be measured).
Go to page 9-76
If you enabled to gray scale search for line correction, select item 2 SEARCH CRITERIA
(conditions for criteria search).
Continued on the following page
9-74
Lead inspection
From the previous page: When gray scale search for line correction is enabled, then select the 2 SEARCH
CRITERIA (conditions for criteria search).
1MEASURE WINDOW
2REFERENCE IMAGE
3SEARCH AREA
4DETECTED COORD
5CONTRACT PIXELS
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271) REG. DISP
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
CNTR FREE(256,240)
1 2 3
qDETECT ACCURANCY
wUPPER MENU
This is how the display looks
when the 1 MEASURE
WINDOW (measurement
window) is RECTANGLE.
STANDARD HI-PRC
· You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately
using the ESC key.
Menu
1MEASURE WINDOW
(measurement window)
Select the shape of the measurement window.
3SEARCH AREA
Record a reference image and then set the search area.
· If X-LINE (horizontal line) or Y-LINE (vertical line) is selected, then
the UP.L (upper left) LO.R (lower right) choices in the screen above
will be ST-PNT (starting point) and E-PNT (end point).
2REFFERENCE IMAGE
Setting details
4DETECTED COORD
(detection coordinates)
Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window.
· If FREE is selected, then the cursor may be positioned as desired.
Set the number of pixel contractions.
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing, using shared settings.
5CONTRACT PIXELS
· When either a X-LINE (horizontal )or a Y-LINE (vertical) line are
(pixel contraction)
selected in item 1, the choices here will be 1 or 2.
Select the level of precision used for detection.
qDETECT ACCURACY
-See page 9·6 gray scale processing, using shared settings.
(detection accuracy)
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
wUPPER MENU
[The setting sequence of the starting point criteria in a gray scale search.]
1MEASURE WINDOW
4DETECTED COORD
2REFERENCE IMAGE
5CONTRACT PIXELS
3SEARCH AREA
qDETECT ACCURACY
wUPPER MENU
[Information about the recording of a reference image]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame.
The specifications for the windows are as follows.
· In the case of a rectangular window
Line type
Movement
Size
Minimum
Maximum
Reference image
Solid line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32×32 (pixels)
X×Y (X×Y=65536 pixels)
Search area
Dotted line
Units of 4 pixels
Units of 4 pixels
32×32 (pixels)
512×480 pixels
· In the case of a horizontal line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Length
Minimum length Maximum length
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 4 pixels Units of 4
pixels
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 1 pixel
8 pixels
512 pixels
· In the case of a vertical line
Line type
Reference image
Search area
Movement
Solid line
In a horizontal direction: units of 1 pixel
Dotted line In a vertical direction: units of 4 pixels
Length
Units of 4
pixels
Minimum length Maximum length
8 pixels
480 pixels
When either a horizontal or a vertical line is selected please bear the following in mind.
The reference image must be shorter than the search area.
[Example of recording]
Reference image
· The measurement window is set to
BOX (rectangular).
Search area
Continued on the following page
9-75
9
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
Return to the [MEASURING COND] menu and select item 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS
(conditions for objects to be measured)
Continued from page 9·74: Select OBJ CONDFOR MEAS (conditions for objects to be measured).
1DETECT MODE
CNTR(BRT DRK)
2DETECT DIRECTION HORI(→ ←) VERT(↓ ↑)
3DETECT AREA
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
4THRESHOLD VALUE GRYS.050(0~255) EDGE.W (1~8)
FLAT.W04(1~16)
5PROC. PROJECTION NO YES
6LEAD LNG MEAS DIR VERT Y=240
This is how the display looks when
YES is specified in item 4 LEAD
LENGTH MEAS (measurement of
lead length), on the [MEASURING
COND] menu.
If VERT (↓↑) (vertical) is selected in
item 2 DETECT DIRECTION
(detection direction), then the
horizontal setting, HORI X=256, will
qUPPER MENU
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one
separately using the ESC key.
9
Menu
1DETECT MODE
(detection mode)
2DETECT DIRECTION
(detection direction)
Setting details
Set the detection mode to BRT or DRK (center bright or center dark).
3DETECT AREA
(area of detection)
Draw a dotted-line rectangle around the search area.
In order to enhance detection performance, make the Y dimension as
short as possible.
Set the width of the edge (1 to 8) and the flat (1 to 16), as well as the
difference in the light level (0 to 255).
Select whether to employ artifact processing or not.
-For more information about artifact processing see page 9·12
"Artifact processing", using shared settings.
When the measurement of lead length item is set to YES, set the
direction in which the measurement will take place.
4THRESHOLD VALUE
(threshold values)
5PROC.PROJECTION
(artifact processing)
6LEAD LNG MEAS DIR
(direction of lead
length measurement)
qUPPER MENU
Select the detection direction.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
[Setting sequence of the conditions for objects to be measured of edge detection.]
1DETECT MODE
2DETECT DIRECTION
5PROC.PROJECTION
3DETECT AREA
) DIR
6LEAD LNG MEAS
qUPPER MENU
[Information about setting the conditions for objects to be measured]
In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame.
· Specifications for the area of detection.
Line type
Movement
Dotted line
Units of 1 pixel
Size
Units of 1 pixel
Minimum
0×0 pixels
Continued on the following page
9-76
4THRESHOLD VALUE
Maximum
512×480 pixels
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
[Examples of settings]
Example when 1 DETECT MODE (detection mode) is set to CNTR (BRT) (center bright) or
and 2 DETECT DIRECTION (detection direction) is set to HORI (horizontal).
A
Center point
B
Line used in
detecting the object
Edge
Edge Flat
width width
Brightness
A
Difference in
light
Direction
B
Example when 1 DETECT MODE (detection mode) is set to CNTR (DRK) (center dark)
and 2DETECT DIRECTION (detection direction) is set to HORI (horizontal).
A
Center point
B
Line used in
detecting the object
Edge
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in light
Brightness
A
Direction
9
B
Example when 6 LEAD LNG MEAS DIR (measurement direction of lead length) is set to
{)
VERT (vertical) and 2 DETECT DIRECTION (detection direction) is set to VERT ({
(vertical).
Lead length
Line used in detecting the object
- If the position of the line used in to detect the object is out of position relative to the reference
point, then it is adjusted accordingly.
- If this correction is unnecessary, then set 1 REGST NO. (registration number) to REG.NO
(disable registration) which is in the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu.
(see page 9-74).
Return to the [MEASURING COND] menu and select 6 UPPER MENU.
Continued on the following page
9-77
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
Select item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation conditions) on the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-INSPECT LEAD)
1REGST NO.
0(0~3)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
2X COORD
000.0∼=~511.0
000.0
OK NO
3Y COORD
000.0~479.0
000.0
OK NO
4MATCH
-10000~+10000
+10000
OK NO
5MEAS OBJ
CRT.0-0(0~7)
6NUMBER
000~128
003
OK NO
7DISTANCE
000.0~702.0
050.0
OK NO
048.0
8L.LNGTH
000.0~702.0
100.0
OK NO
097.0
9MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
0UPPER MENU
These displays can be set using
the up and down keys. (The
choices are NO, Y0 to 7, C000 to
C127)
Maximum distance
Minimum distance
Items 2 to 4 and 6 to 8 will not be displayed if the setting at items 1 and 5 is REG.NO
(disable registration) on the [MEASURING COND] (mesurement condition) menu.
Evaluation conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2X COORD (X coordinates)
3Y COORD (Y coordinates)
4MATCH (degree of match
with the reference Image)
5MEAS OBJ
(measurement object)
9
6NUMBER (number of
objects)
7DISTANCE (distance
between edge centers)
8L.LNGTH (lead length)
9MAKE A TEST RUN
0PRIOR MENU
Setting details
Enter 0 to 3.
· Corresponds to the registration number entered in item 1 REGST NO.
(registration number) in the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Set the range that will produce an OK evaluation for the X and Y coordinates in
the reference image. These coordinates are set in the SEARCH CRITERIA
(reference search conditions) item on the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Set the range that will produce an OK evaluation for the degree of match with
the reference image.
Enter the measurement object number for the object being evaluated.
· Corresponds to the 3 OBJ NO. FOR MEAS (measurement object number) on
the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Set the number of objects (from 0 to 128) that can exist between the edge
detection points and still produce an OK evaluation.
Set the range of distances (from 0 to 702.0) between edge detection points that
will produce an OK evaluation.
· The longest and shortest distances will be displayed in the test results.
Set the range of lead lengths (from 0 to 702.0) that will produce an OK
evaluation.
· The longest and shortest distances will be displayed in the test results.
Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test.
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluations that you have set.
This can be done using item 9 MAKE A TEST RUN.
· For more information about evaluation conditions, see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation conditions.
[Measurement example] The distance (between the center of 2 adjacent leads)
Lead length (all 5 leads)
Line used in
detecting the object
The brightness of the
part above the line used
to inspect the object.
The center point between edge detection points.
(Detection mode: center (dark))
Light
Dark
Even if only one measurement of the distance between the center points of 2 adjacent leads (as
shown above) falls outside the range of the upper and lower limits specified, it will result in an NG
evaluation.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item 8 NUMERIC CALC COND
(numerical calculation conditions).
Continued on the following page
9-78
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-INSPECT LEAD)
1CALC. RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH[M] CORD[X Y] QTY[K]
MAX.DIST[MXD] MIN.DIST[MND]
MAX-L.LENG[MXL] MIN-L.LENG[MNL]
NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.0(0~3) MES-OBJ.0(0~7) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗ / ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~ +00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00 [MXD] 0MXD0
+00000050.0~ +00000052.0 +00000051.0
N01
Y0
OK
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE
3FORMULA
Setting details
Set the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for
specified output data at any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
The degree of match with the
reference image [M] coordinates [XY]
Number of objects [K], maximum
distance [MXD], minimum distance
[MND], maximum lead length [MXL]
and minimum lead length [MNL]
Numerical calculations [NC]
Constant [C]
4UPPER&LOWER.LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6RUN A TEST
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
The first line of the display
Record 0 (0 to 3) N0 (0 to 15)
Record 0 (0 to 3) Object to be
measured 0 (0 to 7) N0 (0 to 15)
ABS
TAN ATAN N00 (0 to 15)
(the second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the output conditions for the results of calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows.
2FORMULA
Degree of match [M]/ Coordinates [X]/[Y]
Number of objects [K]/maximum distance
[MXD]/minimum distance [MND]
Maximum lead length [MXL]/minimum lead length [MNL]
Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
Number of formulas
0M to 3M/0X to 3X/0Y to 3Y
0K0 to 3K7/0MXD0 to 3MXD7/
0MND0 to 3MND7
0MXL0~3MXL7/0MNL0~3MNL7
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers. The numbers
ranging from 0 to 7 after the characters are numbers for the object to be measured.
· For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations.
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS
Continued on the following page
9-79
9
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS]
(TYPE00-MEAS.1-INSPECT LEAD)
1PAGE NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
MOVE
REGT.NO.0(0∼3)
MATCH.M CRD-X CRD-Y
DST D0(0~7) QTY K0(0~7) L-LEN L0(0~7)
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
0
1
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection at item 3 as follows.
9
Selection of 3
Degree of match M
Coordinate X
Coordinate Y
Distance D
Number of objects K
Lead length L
Calculation N
Input signals
0M to 3M
0X to 3X
0Y to 3Y
0D0 to 3C7
0K0 to 3K7
0L0 to 3L7
N00 to N15
Secondary relay C
C000 to C12
The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 after the characters are numbers for the object to be mesured.
· For more information on output conditions see the "PC Function," in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9-80
Lead inspection
Continued from the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will measure the distance and angle after manually measuring the
starting point.
Below is an example of the results displayed for a distance measurement.
[Display of the inspection results]
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
Measurement number and
camera number
Registration number for the
measurement conditions
Central coordinates of the reference
image and evaluation
Degree of match with the reference
image and evaluation results
Number for the object to be
measured
Number of leads and evaluation
results
Lead pitch and evaluation results
Lead length and evaluation
(muximum/minimum in pixels)
(TYPE00)
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 INSPECT LEAD
REGST NO. 0(0~3)
X COORD 202.0 OK
Y COORD 281.0 OK
MATCH ＋09957 OK
MEAS OBJ : 0-0(0~7)
NUMBER 005
OK
DISTANCE 040.0 OK
039.0
L-LEN
034.0 OK
032.0
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) and pressing the up key, you can
see the inspection results corresponding to the registration number (the first number) and the
number of the object to be measured (the second number), then the results of the numerical
calculations. All of these may be scrolled through in this order: 0 (0-0→0-7) 1 (1-0→1-7) 2
(2-0→2-7) 3(3-0→3-7) N00 to N15. 0-0 is the number on display in the above illustration.
Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll backwards through the results.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers (other than those currently on the display ), or if no
measurement has actually been carried out, then it will not be possible to switch back and
forth between data.
· When a distance or a lead length results in an NG evaluation, the point in the image will be
marked with a circle.
Example of the display:
Distance between the center of
Lead length NG
the leads NG (marked with a circle) (marked with a circle)
Longest lead length
Shortest lead length
Longest distance
between center points
Shortest distance
between center points
9-81
9
Area measurement by binary conversion
9-7 Area measurement by binary conversion
Purpose
This function is used to determine the existence and or size of a workpiece when
the workpiece is in one place or when it has a fixed measurement position.
- This function measures the area of the white field after the image has been
converted to binary values (i.e. black and white).
Checking for correctly inserted ball bearings, preventing foreign objects from
becoming mixed in with parts being processed, distinguishing between different
Application types of waterproof lids, checking the existence of labels on packages, checking the
printing on electric cables, checking for adequate coatings of grease and checking
the existence of frozen foods.
[Measured result]
- The area of the workpiece
Example
Workpiece
- Checking sequence
Taking an image
Convert it to binary
9
9-82
Measure (area)
Area measurement by binary conversion
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
1MEAS SELECTION
(Select the MEASR-BIN-AREA
(area measurement after
binary conversion))
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculations
between images
(See section 9-2 [6])
6MEAS.PROG.COND
(conditions for
measurement programs
9OUTPUT
CONDITIONS
BINARY AREA COND
(Conditions for binary areas)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical
calculation)
(see section 9-2 [4])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
3SELECT
CAMERA
(select a
camera
4COPY,
5INTIALIZATION
(See section 9-2 [7], [8])
7EVALUATION
COND
(evaluation
condition)
8NUMERIC CALC
COND
(numerical
calculation condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see “PC function” in
Chapter 10)
MAIN OPS MENU
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu
9
9-83
Area measurement by binary conversion
[2] Setting details
An explanation of item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs) in the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP menu] move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type and press the SET key.
-Go to item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, item q MEASUREMENT 2 or, item
w MEASUREMENT 3 on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu and press the SET key.
This is how the line looks
when the object type is set
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
to 00 and the selected
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV) measurement is 1.
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
- In item 1, select MEASR-BIN-AREA (measure the area of binary images).
- Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA
IMG (camera selection) which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
9
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
00(0~15) REG.NO YES
1REGST NO.
2BINARY AREA COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3UPPER MENU
- If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO. (registration number), then item 2 will be
displayed.
Measurement conditions
Setting details
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2BINARY AREA COND
(conditions for binary areas)
3UPPER MENU
Set this to any number from 0 to 15 and select NO or
YES to store it.
The condition for binary areas are set on the next menu.
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND (conditions for binary areas).
Continued on the following page
9-84
Area measurement by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
4MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
5THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
6INVERT B/W
NO YES
7BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
8IMAGE PRE-PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
9BINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXP.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXP.
0NUM. OF FILTR PASS EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR0(0~5)
qUPPER MENU
This is how the display looks
when item 1 MEAS WINDOW
TYPE (measuring window) is
set to RECTANGLE.
This is how the display looks
when item 3 MASK WINDOW
TYPE (shape of mask window)
is set to RECTANGLE.
· Item 4 will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO.
Menu
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE
(measuring window)
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT
3MASK WINDOW TYPE
4MASK WINOW POSIT
(mask window position)
5THRESHOLD VALUE
6INVERT B/W
(black and white inversion)
7BINARY PROCESS
(binary conversion)
8IMAGE-PRE-PROCESS
(image pre-processing)
9BINARY NOIS FILTR
(eliminating binary noise)
0NUM.OF FILTR PASS
(The number of noise
elimination cycles)
qUPPER MENU
Setting details
Select the measuring window type: RECTANGLE (rectangular), CIRCLE
(circular) or ELLPSE (elliptical).
Set the size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel.
· If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you need
to set are the center and diameter.
Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type
(rectangular/round or elliptical).
· A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window
and screens out those parts of the image which are not needed in the
measurement process.
Set the size and position of the mask window (which is drown with a dotted
line) using units of 1 pixel.
· If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you need
to set are the center and diameter.
· The mask window can be set exceeding the measurement window.
Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to
255.
-See “threshold setting” in shared settings on page 9·7.
Select whether to invert the black and white in the image: YES or NO.
· NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been
converted to binary values.
· YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been
converted to binary values.
Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion
processing method.
-See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9·8.
Select a method for pre-processing image data.
-See pre-processing in shared settings on page 9·9.
Select a method for eliminating binary noise.
-See methods for eliminating noise from binary images,
expansion/contraction and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on
page 9·10.
Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be
carried out (0 to 5). Set number of times for expansion and contraction,
separately.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
[Information about the window settings]
· In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame.
· First freeze the frame. Then operate the camera normally. Finally, freeze the frame again. The first
frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary
image.
The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating
steps 1 to 0 above
[Example of recording]
· The binary image will be the contents of
the measurement window, after the
Measurement
portion excluded by the mask window
window
has been removed.
Mask window
Return to the [MEASURING COND] menu and select item 3 UPPER MENU.
Continued on the following page
9-85
9
Area measurement by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
Select item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation condition) on the [TYPE00-MEAS 1 to 3] menu.
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
1REGST NO.
00(0~15)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
2AREA
000000~245760
002000
OK NO
3MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
4UPPER MENU
These displays can be set using
the up and down keys. (The
choices are NO, Y0 to 7, C000
to C127)
Items 2 and 3 will be displayed if the REGST NO. (registration number) is set to YES on the
[MEASURING COND] menu.
Evaluation conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
Setting details
Select any number from 0 to 15.
2AREA
3MAKE A TEST RUN
Set the range for the area that will produce an OK evaluation.
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition, display
the test results.
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
4PRIOR MENU
· Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for evaluations that you have set.
This can be done using item 3 MAKE A TEST RUN.
· For more information about evaluation conditions, see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation condition.
9
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item
8 NUMERIC CALC COND (numerical calculation conditions).
Continued on the following page
9-86
Area measurement by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
1CALC.RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO T-AREA[A] NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.00(0~15) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~ +00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[A]
00A
+00009000.0~+00010000.0 +00009500.0
Y0
OK
N01
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE
Setting details
See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for
specified output data at any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
Total area A
3FORMULA
Numerical calculations [NC]
Constant [C]
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6RUN A TEST
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
The first line of the display
Record 00 (0 to 15) N00 (0 to 15)
ABS
TAN ATAN N0 (0 to 15) (the
second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the evaluation output for the results of the calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3
as follows.
2KIND (type)
Total area [A]
Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
Number of formulas
00A to 15A
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations.
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST, before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS.
Continued on the following page
9-87
9
Area measurement by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-MEAS-BIN-AREA)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
T-AREA A00(0~15)
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows.
Selection of 3
Total area A
Calculation N
Secondary relay C
Input signals
00A to 15A
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of A are registration numbers.
9
· For more information on output condition, see the PC Function, in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9-88
Area measurement by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will display the size of the area inside the measurement window, in pixels.
(TYPE00)
OK
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 MEAS-BIN-AREA
REGST NO. 00(0~15)
AREA 001884 OK
[Display of measured results]
Final evaluation results
Measuring time
Measurement number, camera number
and measurement program title
Registration number
Area (in pixels) and evaluation results
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) and pressing the up key, you can see the
measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations. This is done by
scrolling through them in this order: registration numbers (00+0 15), numerical calculation result
(N00+0 N15), and then returns to registration numbers. The measurements screen also has this
feature.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers, other than those currently on display, or if no measurement
has actually been carried out, then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data.
9-89
9
Counting quantities by binary convension
9-8 Counting quantities by binary conversion
Purpose
Checks the number of objects (max. 3000 pcs.) when there is more than one object
in an image. Measurement of the object's position is optional.
· When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image, the white
areas are measured or identified as separate objects and counted.
Application Counting the number of food products or parts.
[Measurement result]
· Number of objects/total area
Objects
Example
· Inspection sequence
Capture an image
Convert it to a
binary image
9
9-90
Measure the number of
objects/total area
Counting quantities by binary convension
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
1MEAS SELECTION
(Select the CNT-BIN-OBJ)
(area measurement after
binary conversion))
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculations
between images)
(see section 9-2 [6])
6MEAS.PROG.COND
BINARY AREA COND
(conditions for measurement (conditions for binary areas)
programs)
9OUTPUT
CONDITIONS
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculation)
(see section 9-2 [4])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMT 1
qMEASUREMT 2
wMEASUREMT 3
3SELECT
CAMERA
(select a
camera
4COPY,
5INTIALIZATION
(see section 9-2 [7], [8])
7EVALUATION
COND
(evaluation
condition)
8NUMERIC CALC
COND
(numerical
calculation condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions )
(see “The PC function”
in Chapter 10)
MAIN OPS MENU
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
9
9-91
Counting quantities by binary convension
[2] Setting details
An explanation of 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs) from the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] (object type measurement) menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
-Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, q MEASUREMENT 2 or, w MEASUREMENT 3 on
the [OBJET TYPE COND] menu .
This is how the line looks
when the object type is set
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
to 00 and the selected
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV） measurement is 1.
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA
CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
- In item 1, select CNT-BIN-OBJ (measure the area of binary images).
- Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA
IMG (camera selection) which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
9
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-CNT-BIN-OBJ)
1REGST NO.
00(0~3) REG.NO YES
2BINARY AREA COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3UPPER MENU
- If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO. (registration number), then item 2 will be
displayed.
Measurement conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2BINARY AREA COND
(conditions for binary areas)
3UPPER MENU
Setting details
Set this to any number from 0 to 3 and select NO or YES
to store it.
The conditions for binary areas are set on the next
menu.
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND (conditions for binary areas).
Continued on the following page
9-92
Counting quantities by binary convension
Continued from the previous page
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
4MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
5THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
6INVERT B/W
NO YES
7BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD
9LABEL ORDER
SACN-ORDER SIZE-ORDER
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
qBINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXP.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXP.
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR0(0~5)
eAREA FILTER
000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT
rUPPER MENU
This is how the display looks
when item 1 MEAS WINDOW
TYPE (measurement window) is
set to RECTANGLE.
This is how the display looks
when item 3 MASK WINDOW
TYPE (mask window) is set to
RECTANGLE.
· Item 4 will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO.
Setting details
Menu
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE Select a measurement window type: RECTANGLE, CIRCLE or ELLIPSE.
(measurement window)
Set the size and position of the window, in units of 1 pixel.
2MEAS WINDOW
· If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you must set are
POSIT
the center and the diameter.
Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type (a rectangle,
circle or ellipse).
3MASK WINDOW TYPE · A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window and
screens out those parts of the image which are not needed for the measurement
process.
Set the size and position of the mask window (which is drawn with a dotted line),
using units of 1 pixel.
4MASK WINDOW
· If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you must set are
POSIT
(mask window position) the center and the diameter.
· It is possible to set the heading so that the mask window is actually bigger than
the measurement window.
5THRESHOLD VALUE Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255.
-See setting threshold values in shared settings on page 9·7.
Select whether to invert the black and white in the image: YES or NO.
· NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been converted
6INVERT B/W
to binary values.
(black and white
· YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted
Inversion)
to binary values.
Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion
7BINARY PROCESS
processing method. (VAR-DIFF or VAR-RATE).
-See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9·8.
Enable or disable boundary processing.
8BOUDARY PROCESS -See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9·7.
(boundary processing) · When this function is disabled, if a workpiece contacts with the window, this
workpiece is not measured.
Select the order for labeling objects.
9LABEL ORDER
-See order of labeling in shared settings on page 9·8.
Select a method for pre-processing image data.
0IMAGE PRE-See pre-processing in shared settings on page 9·9.
PROCESS
Select a method for eliminating binary noise.
qBINARY NOIS FILTR
-See methods for eliminating noise from binary images, expansion/contraction
(eliminating binary
and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9·10.
noise)
wNUM.OF FILTR PASS Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be carried
out (0 to 5). Set number of times for expansion and contraction, separately.
(the number of noise
elimination cycles)
After object identification and labeling, the area filter is a function used to identify
small islands whose area is less than a specified amount. It eliminates them from
the object which is being measured.
eAREA FILTER
Set the maximum number of pixels. Enter any number from 0 to 245760.
· To enter number, select e AERA FILTER using up and down keys, and press
the SET key twice. Select a required digit using the left and right keys, and select
the required figure using the up and down keys.
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
rUPPER MENU
Continued on the following page
9-93
9
Counting quantities by binary convension
Continued from the previous page
[Information about the window settings]
· In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame.
· First freeze the frame. Then operate the camera normally. Finally, freeze the frame again. The
first frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final
binary image.
The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating
steps 1 to e above.
[Example of recording]
Measurement window
(rectangular)
· The binary image will be the contents of
the measurement window, after the
portion excluded by the mask window
has been removed.
Mask window
(rectangular)
Return to the [MEASURING COND] menu and select item 3 UPPER MENU.
Select item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation condition) on the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-CNT-BIN-OBJ)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
1REGST NO.
0(0~3)
2NUMBER
0000~3000
00004
OK
NO
3TOTAL AREA
000000~245760
002000
OK
NO
4MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
5UPPER MENU
9
These displays can be set using
the up and down keys. (The
choices are NO, Y0 to 7, C000
to C127).
· Items 2 to 4 will be displayed if REGST NO. (registration number) is set to YES on the [MEASURING
COND] (mesurement condition) menu.
Evaluation conditions
1REGST NO.
(registration number)
2NUMBER
(number of objects)
3TOTAL AREA
4MAKE A TEST RUN
5UPPER MENU
Setting details
Enter any number from 0 to 3.
Set the range for the number of objects that will produce an OK
evaluation.
Set the range for the total area that will produce an OK evaluation.
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions, display the
test results.
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for evaluations that you have set.
This can be done using item 4 MAKE A TEST RUN.
· For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation conditions.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item
8 NUMERIC CALC COND (numerical calculation conditions).
Continued on the following page
9-94
Counting quantities by binary convension
Continued from the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-CNT-BIN-OBJ)
1CALC.RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO T-AREA[A] QTY[K] NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.00(0~15) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT +00000000.0~+00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
[A]
00A
+00009000.0~ +00010000.0 +00009500.0
Y0
OK
N01
N02
N03
Numerical calculation
1CALC.RESULT
(calculation result)
2OBJECT TYPE (type)
3FORMULA
Setting details
See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for
specified output data at any value from 00 to 15.
Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
Total area [A]
Number of objects [K]
Numerical calculations [NC]
Constant [C]
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT
5OUTPUT
6RUN A TEST RUN
(make a test run)
7UPPER MENU
The first line of the display
Record 00 (0 to 15) N00 (0 to 15)
ABS
TAN ATAN N00 (0 to 15)
(the second line will not be displayed)
+00000000.0 (the second line will not
be displayed)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15)
than that used for 1 CALC.RESULT N (00 to 15).
Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
Set the evaluation output for the results of the calculations.
Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test.
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3
as follows.
2OBJECT TYPE
Total area [A]
Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
Number of formulas
00A to 15A
ABS/ /TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
-99999999.9 to +99999999.9
The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations.
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS.
Continued on the following page
9-95
9
Counting quantities by binary convension
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-CNT-BIN-OBJ)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.0(0~3)
T-ARA A QTY K
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
· If item 1 PAGE NO. (registration number) is set to YES, then items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows.
9
Selection of 3
Total area A
Number of objects K
Calculation N
Secondary relay C
Input signals
0A to 3A
0K to 3K
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on output conditions, see the “PC Function,” in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU
Continued on the following page
9-96
Counting quantities by binary convension
Continued from the previous page
Pressing the TRG/BRT key will display the total area (in pixels) and the number of objects inside the
measurement window.
(TYPE00)
OK
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
[Display of measured results]
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 CNT-BIN-OBJ
Final evaluation results
Measuring time
Measurement number, camera number
and measurement program title
REGST NO. 00(0~3)
NUMBER 00006 OK
TOTAL ARA 004434 OK
Registration number
Number of objects and evaluation results
Total area (in pixels) and evaluation results
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) item and pressing the up key, you can see
the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations. This is done
by scrolling through them in this order: registration numbers (0 to 3), numerical calculation results
(N00 to ON15), and then returns to registration number. The measurements screen also has this
feature.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers (other than those currently on display) or if no measurement
9-97
9
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
9-9 Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Purpose
Application
When there are several objects and the measuring position is arbitrary, the
presence or absence of objects and the size of the objects can be determined.
· The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image. The number of objects, total
size of the white area (the objects) and the area, center of gravity, main axis angle,
fillet diameter, and circumference of each white area can be measured.
Counting the number of food products or parts, measuring the sloped angle or
center of gravity of parts, and measuring the size of food products
[Measurement of 6 objects]
No.1
No.2
No.3
Objects
No.4
No.5
No.6
Example
[Measured results]
· Object identification (labeling
and numbering), number of
objects present, total area
· Area, center of gravity, main
axis angle, fillet diameter, and
circumference of each object
(No.1 - No.6).
· Inspection sequence
Image
capture
9
Convert it to
a binary image
Object identification
(labeling and numbering)
Measure the area, center of gravity,
main axis angle, fillet diameter, and circumference
9-98
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
1 MEAS SELECTION
(measurement selection)
(Select LABEL-BIN-OBJ
(object identification by binary
conversion. ))
[SYSTEM SETUP]
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
2 OBJECT TYPE COND
2 COMPARE
IMAGES
(calculation between
images)
(see section 9-2 [6])
0 MEASUREMENT 1
q MEASUREMENT 2
w MEASUREMENT 3
3 SELECT
CAMERA
(camera
selection)
4 COPY,
5 INITIALIZATION
(initialize)
(See section 9-2 [7], [8])
6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs)
(Enabling/disabling measurement of
center-of-gravity/main axis angle/fillet
width/circumference)
BINARY AREA COND
(binary area conditions)
7 EVALUATION COND
(evaluation conditons)
8 NUMERIC CALC COND
(numerical calculation conditions)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculation)
(see section 9-2 [4])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see "PC Function" in
Chapter 10.)
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu
9-99
9 OUTPUT
CONDITIONS
MAIN OPS MENU
9
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
[2] Setting details
An explanation of the 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs) from the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] (object type measurement) menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
- Select item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, q MEASUREMENT 2 or w MEASUREMENT 3
on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu .
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
This is how the line
looks when the object type is set to
00 and the selected measurement
is 1.
- Select LABEL-BIN-OBJ (object identification by binary conversion) in
item 1.
- Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG
(camera selection) which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] (conditions of object type)
menu.
9
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
1REGST NO.
00(0~3) REG.NO YES
2BINARY AREA COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3FIND CENT/GRAVITY NO YES
4MAIN AXIS ANGLE NO YES
5FILLET DIAMETER NO YES
6PERIMETER LENGTH NO YES
7UPPER MENU
- If YES was specified in item 1 REGST NO. (registration number), then items 2 to 6 will be
displayed.
Mesurement conditions
Setting details
Set this to any number from 0 to 3 and select NO or
1 REGST NO.
YES to store it.
(registration number )
2 BINARY AREA COND
The conditions for binary areas are set on the next
(condition for binary areas) menu.
3 FIND CENT/GRAVITY
(center of gravity
Select YES/NO for each of the measurements.
measurement)
- See page 9Æ102.
4 MAIN AXIS ANGLE
5 FILLET DIAMETER
(fillet width)
6 PERIMETER LENGTH
(circumference)
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
7 UPPER MENU
Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND (conditions for binary areas).
Continued on the following page
9-100
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
1MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
3MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
4MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
5THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100(0~255)
6INVERT B/W
NO YES
7BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD
9LABEL ORDER
SACN-ORDER SIZE-ORDER
0IMAGE PRE-PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE-EMPHASIS
ALL-EDGE HORZ-EDGE VERT-EDGE
qBINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXP.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXP.
wNUM. OF FILTR PASS EXPD.0(0~5) CONTR0(0~5)
eAREA FILTER
000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT
rUPPER MENU
This is how the display looks
when item 1 MEAS WINDOW
TYPE (measurement window) is
set to RECTANGLE.
This is how the display looks
when item 3 MASK
WINDOW TYPE (mask
window) is set to
· Item 4 will be displayed unless item 3 is set to "NO."
Menu
1 MEAS WINDOW TYPE
(measurement window)
2 MEAS WINDOW POSIT
(position of measuring
window)
3 MASK WINDOW TYPE
4 MASK WINDOW POSIT
(mask window position)
5 THRESHOLD VALUE
Setting details
Select the measurement window type: RECTANGLE (rectangular), CIRCLE (circular)
or ELLIPSE (ellipse).
Set the size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel.
· If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1, then the two variables you need to
set are center and diameter.
Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type (rectangular, round or
elliptical).
· A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window and screens out
those parts of the image which are not needed in the measurement process.
Set the size and position of the mask window (which is framed with a dotted line) in units of
1 pixel.
· If a circle or ellipse was selected in item 1, then the two variables you need to set are
center and diameter.
· It is possible to enter dimensions that make the mask window bigger than the
measurement window.
Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255.
- See setting threshold values in shared settings on page 9·7
Select whether to invert the black and white in the image: YES or NO.
· NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary
6 INVERT B/W
values.
(black and white inversion)
· YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary
values.
7 BINARY PROCESS
(binary conversion)
Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion processing
method. (VAR-DIFF or VAR-RATE).
- See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9·8.
8 BOUDARY PROCESS
(boundary processing)
Enable or disable boundary processing.
- See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9·7.
· When disabled, a workpiece contacting the window will not be measured.
9 LABEL ORDER
Select the order for labeling objects.
- See order of labeling in shared settings on page 9·8.
0 IMAGE PRE-PROCESS Select a method for pre-processing image data.
(image pre-processing)
See pre-processing in shared settings on page 9·9.
Select a method for eliminating binary noise.
q BINARY NOIS FILTR
(eliminating binary noise) - See methods for eliminating noise from binary images, expansion/contraction
and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9·10.
w NUM. OF FILTR PASS
(the number of noise
elimination cycles)
Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be carried
out (0 to 5). Enter number of times for expansion and contraction, separately.
e AREA FILTER
After the labeling, the area filter is a function used to identify small islands whose area is
less than a specified amount. It eliminates them from the object which is being measured.
Set the maximum number of pixels. Enter any number from 0 to 245760.
· To enter number, select e AREA FILTER using up and down keys, and press the SET
key twice. Select a required digit using the left and right keys, and select the required
figure using the up and down keys.
r UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [MEASURING COND] menu.
Continued on the following page
9-101
9
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
[Window settings]
· In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the image.
· First freeze the image. Then operate the camera normally. Finally, freeze the image again. The first
frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary image.
The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating
steps 1 to e above.
[Example of recording an image]
Measurement window
(rectangular)
·The binary image will be the contents
of the measurement window, after the
portion excluded by the mask window
has been removed.
Mask window
(rectangular)
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
1REGST NO.
00(0~3) REG.NO YES
2BINARY AREA COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3FIND CENT/GRAVITY NO YES
4MAIN AXIS ANGLE NO YES
5FILLET DIAMETER NO YES
6PERIMETER LENGTH NO YES
7UPPER MENU
· Set measurement items 3 to 6 to NO or YES, as desired.
Center of gravity, main axis angle
（0, 0）
Center of gravity (X1, Y1)
· Calculated from the area and the position of each object.
· (X1, Y1)=(∑x/N, ∑y/N) N: Area
Main axis angle
・Angle between the longitudinal and horizontal directions
with the center of gravity treated as the base.
(511, 479)
X1
Y
Fillet width
Fillet width (horizontal)
Fillet width (vertical)
9
Peripheral
The number of pixels in the
boundary line of an object
(Inclination: √2 times)
Continued on the following page
9-102
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
Select item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation condition) on the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
1REGST NO.
0(0~3)
[TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
2NUMBER
000~128
006
OK
NO
3TOTAL AREA 000000~245760
008276
OK
NO
4LABEL NUM
000(0~ 005 )
5OBJ-AREA
000000~245760
001415
OK
NO
GRAVITY
(206.0,303.0)
AXIS-ANGL
-38.0゜
FILLT-DIA
X=042 Y=030
PERIMETER
00138.8
6MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
These displays can be set using
the up and down keys. (The
choices are NO, Y0 to 7, C000 to
C127).
After performing a MAKE A TEST
RUN at item 6, the number of
objects identified will be displayed
in item 4.
· Items 2 to 6 will be displayed if REGST NO. (registration number) is set to YES on the
[MEASURING COND] (measurement conditions) menu.
Setting details
Evaluation conditions
1 REGST NO.
Enter a number from 0 to 3.
(registration number)
2 NUMBER
Set the range for the number of objects that will produce an
(number of objects) OK evaluation.
3 TOTAL AREA
(total surface area)
Set the range for the total area that will produce an OK
evaluation.
4 LABEL NUM
After performing a MAKE A TEST RUN at item 6, and a label
number is entered, the results displayed in item 5 will change.
5 OBJ-AREA
Enter the maximum label size (area) that will produce an OK
result.
· The center of gravity/main axis angle/fillet width/perimeter will
be displayed when measurement is set to YES on the
[MEASURING COND] menu.
6 MAKE A TEST
RUN
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions, display
the test results.
7 UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00 to MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· Set the maximum number of objects/total area/area per label after checking the test results from
item 6 MAKE A TEST RUN.
· For more information about evaluation conditions, see section 9-2 [3] Evaluation conditions.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] (object type measurement) menu and select item 8 NUMERIC CALC COND
(numerical calculation conditions).
Continued on the following page
9-103
9
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
[NUMERIC CALC] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
1CALC.RESULT N00(0~15)
2OBJECT TYPE NO T-AREA[A] QTY[K] OBJ-AREA[R]
OBJ-GRAVTY[GX GY] OBJ-ANGLE[B]
OBJ-FILLET[FX FY] OBJ-PERIMETR[CR]
NUM-CALC[NC] CNST[C]
3FORMULA
REG.0(0~3) LABL000(0~127) N00(0~15)
+ - ∗/ ← → DEL. END
4UPPER&LOWER LIMIT＋00000000.0∼＋00000000.0
5OUTPUT
NO Y0(0~7) C000(0~107)
6RUN A TEST
(SET KEY)
7UPPER MENU
N00
0R000
+00001950.0~ +00002050.0 +00002000.0
[R]
Y0
OK
N01
N02
N03
Numerical
calculation
Setting details
1 CALC.RESULT
See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for specified
(calculation result)
data at any value from 00 to 15.
2 OBJECT TYPE (type) Select the type of data being calculated.
A number of formula settings are used.
The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2.
Selection of 2
9
3 FORMULA
The first line of the display
Total area [A], number of objects [K]
Area by label [R]
Center of gravity by label [GX, GY]
Main axis angle of label [B]
Fillet width by label [FX, FY]
Circumference by label [CR]
Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
Registration 0 (0 to 3), N00 (0 to 15)
Registration 0 (0 to 3), Label 000 (0 to 127),
N00 (0 to 15)
ABS √ TAN ATAN N00 (0 to 15)
(The second line is not be displayed.)
+00000000.0 (The second line is not be displayed.)
Note: Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N (00 to 15) than
that used for 1 CALC. RESULT N (00 to 15).
4 UPPER&LOWER LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions.
5 OUTPUT
Set the evaluation output for the results of the calculations.
6 RUN A TEST
Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test.
(make a test run)
7 UPPER MENU
Returns you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items ② and ③ as follows.
2 Type
Total area [A] / number of objects [K]
Area per label [R],
Center of gravity by label [GX]/[GY]
Main axis angle of each label [B],
Fillet width of each label [FX]/[FY]
Perimeter of each label [CR]
Mathematical expression
0A to 3A/0K to 3K
0R000 to 3R127, 0GX000 to 3GX127/0GY000 to 3GY127
0B000 to 3B127, 0FX000 to 0FX127/0FY000 to 0FY127
0CR000 to 3CR127
ABS/√/TAN/ATAN (00 to 15)
−99999999.9 to ＋99999999.9 Numerical calculation [NC]
Constant [C]
The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on numerical calculations see section 9-2 [4] Numerical calculations.
Note: You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST, before making any calculations.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS.
Continued on the following page
9-104
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-LABEL-BIN-OBJ)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.0(0~3)
T-ARA A QTY K OBJ-AREA R000(0~127)
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
0
1
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
· If item 1 PAGE NO. (register number) is set to YES, then items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
· The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows.
Selection of 3
Input signals
Total area A
0A to 3A
0K to 3K
0R000 to 3R127
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
Number of objects K
Area by label R
Calculation N
Auxiliary relay C
The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers.
· For more information on output conditions , see the “PC Function” in Chapter 10.
Return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page.
9-105
9
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Continued from the previous page
When the TRG/BRT key is pressed, the labeling measurements are performed manually.
[Display of measured results]
Final evaluation results
Measuring time
Measurement number, camera number,
measurement program name
Registration number
Number of labels and evaluation result
Total area (in pixels) and evaluation results
Label number
Area (in pixels) of the label number
being displayed and the evaluation result
Center of gravity, main axis angle,
fillet width, and perimeter of the label
number being displayed
(Measurements set to YES are displayed in
the [MEASURE] (measurement condition)
menu.)
9
(TYPE00)
OK
F L C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 LABEL-BIN-OBJ
REGST NO. 0(0~3)
NUMBER 004 OK
TOTAL ARA 006168 OK
LABEL NUM 000(0~003)
OBJ-AREA 001542
OK
GRAVITY (206.0, 303.0)
AXIS-ANGL +28.0゜
FILLT-DIA X=042 Y=037
PERIMETER 00138.8
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
· By moving the cursor to REG-CHNG (change registration) and pressing the up key, you can see the
measurement results for different registration numbers, labels and numerical calculations. They are displayed
as follows: Registration number 0 (label numbers 0 → 127) → ... → registration number 3
(label numbers 0 → 127) → results of numerical calculations (N00 to N15) → registration number 0 → ...
When the down key is pressed, the display can scroll through the data in reverse order. The measurements
screen also has this feature.
· Unregistered numbers will be skipped.
· When there are no recorded numbers, (other than those currently on display,) or if no measurement has actually
been carried out, then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data.
9-106
Existence inspection by point measurement
9-10 Existence inspection by point measurement
Purpose
The presence or absence of target objects is examined.
· A simple black or white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of binary
images.
· The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged, and a decision is made
whether or not it is within the specified lightness range in gray scale images.
Checking the presence or absence of packed parts, inspecting the working
Applications condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes, and sorting household
electric appliances
[Inspection at 6 points]
Number of points (max.)
: 128 points at average light levels
256 points in binary images
Point size: 2 m x 2n pixels
(m, n = 1 to 16)
Example
· Inspection sequence
Image capture
Binary image
conversion
Black/white evaluation
of points
Average light
level
Light level evaluation
of points
9
9-107
Existence inspection by point measurement
[1] Setting sequence
[MAIN OPS MENU]
SET-SCRN
[SYSTEM SETUP]
2OBJECT TYPE COND
1MEAS SELECTION
(Select the POINT MEAS
(area measurement by
binary conversion))
2COMPARE IMAGES
(comparative calculations
between images)
(see section 9-2 [6])
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
3SELECT
CAMERA
(select a
camera
4COPY,
5INTIALIZATION
(see section 9-2 [7], [8])
6MEAS.PROG.COND
(conditions for
measurement programs
Processing mode
[Binary
conversion]
Binary conversion
(Fixed/threshold values
correction)
Threshold
value (0 to 255)
[Average
lightness]
7EVALUATION COND
(evaluation condition)
9
Point setting
Point setting
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS
(output condition)
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
eFINAL CALC RESULT
(final numerical calculation)
(see section 9-2 [4])
These settings are found in the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3]
menu.
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
(final output conditions)
(see “PC Function” in Chapter 10)
9-108
MAIN OPS MENU
Existence inspection by point measurement
[2] Setting details
An explanation of the 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for each measurement program), from the
[TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) ane press SET key.
-Select to item 0 MEASUREMENT 1, q MEASUREMENT 2 or item w MEASUREMENT 3
on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
[TYPE00-MEAS1]
1MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK-DEG-OF-MATCH
DST&AGL MES. (GRAY&EDGE GRAV)
INSPECT-LEAD MEASR-BIN-AREA
CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT MEAS
2COMPARE IMAGES NO YES(CAM1)
3SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2
4COPY
EXEC←TYPE00−MEAS1−NO
5INITIALIZATION
EXEC
6MEAS.PROG. COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7EVALUATION COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
8NUMERIC CALC COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9OUTPUT CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0UPPER MENU
This is how the line looks
when the object type is
set to 00 and the selected
measurement is 1.
- Select POINT MEAS (point measurement) in item 1 MEAS SELECTION.
- Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG
which is in the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu.
Select item 6 MEAS.PROG.COND (conditions for measurement programs).
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-POINT MEAS)
1 PROCESSING MODE BIN-CONV AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
2 BINARY CONV COND FIXED THRSHOLD-ADJ (VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
3 THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM-255 L.LM-100(0∼255)
4 SET POINT
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5 UPPER MENU
[MEASURING COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-POINT MEAS)
When item 1 PROCESSING MODE
is set to BIN-CONV. (binary conversion)
When item 1 PROCESSING MODEis set to
AV-LIGHT-LEVEL (average light level)
Measurement conditions
1 PROCESSING MODE BIN-CONV AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
9
4 SET POINT
5 UPPER MENU
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Setting details
1 PROCESSING MODE Select the processing mode, BIN-CONV. (binary) or AV-LIGHTLEVEL (averabe light level).
- When the BIN-CONV (binary) processing mode is selected.
2 BINARY CONV COND Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary
(processing binary
conversion processing method. (VAR-DIFF or VAR-RATE).
images)
- See page 9Æ8 Binary processing in shared settings.
3 THRESHOLD VALUE
- When the BIN-CONV (binary) processing mode is selected.
Set the threshold values (upper and lower limits) within the
range of 0 to 255.
- See page 9Æ7 Threshold value setting in shared settings.
4 SET POINT
(point setting)
Set a point on the next menu.
5 UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00 to MEAS1 to 3] menu.
Select item 4 SET POINT (point setting).
Continued on the following page
9-109
Existence inspection by point measurement
Continued from the previous page
1 POINT SIZE :
Y-08×X-08(2 to 32)
2 STO PNT POSITIONS 000(0 to 255 )REG.NO YES
3 START POINT POS MOVE( , )
4 BLOCK LAYOUT
001×001
5 BLOCK SPACING Y-004 X-004
6 STORE BLOCK COND EXEC
7 DELETE BLOCK COND EXEC
8 UPPER MENU
This value will be 127 when AV-LIGHTLEVEL (average light level) is selected
for the processing mode.
· You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one
separately using the ESC key.
Menu
9
Setting details
1 POINT SIZE
Set the size of the point (vertical and horizontal), within the range of
2 to 32, in units of 2 pixels.
2 STO POSITIONS
Set points individually, and select NO/YES to store each.
· There are a maximum of 256 point registration locations (0 to 255)
for the BIN-CONV (binary) mode and 128 point registration locations
(0 to 127) for the AV-LIGHT-LEVEL (average light level) mode.
· The point identifying a block of pixels is the starting point.
3 START POINT POS
Set the starting point position.
· A group of pixels used as a point are treated as a single pixel.
· The point identifying a block is the starting point.
4 BLOCK LAYOUT
Set the number of vertical objects times the number of horizontal
objects that will be registered as a block.
5 BLOCK
SPACING
Set the vertical and horizontal intervals for points in the objects that
will be registered as a block, in unit of 1 pixel. (Min. 0 pixel.)
6 STORE BLOCK COND Store the settings as a block.
7 DELETE BLOCK COND Delete all of the registered points in a block.
8 PRIOR MENU
Returns you to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition)
menu.
[Example of a block registration]
Set the starting point in items 2 and 3 above.
X
X
Y
(Binary image) Enter 002 (vertical) × 003 (horizontal) in item 4 BLOCK LAYOUT,
and enter the vertital (Y) and horizontal (X) intervals in item
5 BLOCK SPACING. Then select item 6 STORE BLOCK COND
to store the settings for the block.
Return to the [MEASURING COND] (measurement condition) menu, and select item
5 UPPER MENU
Item 7 EVALUATION COND (evaluation condition) in the [TYPE00 to MEAS1 to 3] menu.
When BIN-CONV (binary) is selected
as the processing mode.
When AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
(average light level) is selected as the
processing mode.
Continued on the following page
Go to page 9·112
9-110
Existence inspection by point measurement
Continued from the previous page (when BIN-CONV (binary conversion) was selected for the processing mode)
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-POINT-MEAS)
1 CHG PAGE TEST RUN [TEST RESULT]
[OUT]
2 P000 :
WH
OK
NO
3 P001 :
WH
OK
NO
4 P002 :
WH
OK
NO
5 P003 :
WH
OK
NO
6 P004 :
WH
OK
NO
7 P005 :
8 P006 :
9 P007 :
0 MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
q UPPER MENU
Evaluation conditions
1 CHG PAGE
(page change)
2 P
·
·
9P
OK/NG judgment
White: Will be OK if a majority of the objects to
be measured is seen as white.
Black: Will be OK if a majority of the objects to
be measured is seen as black.
Example: When the object to be measured is
an 8 x 8 area (64 pixels) and white
was selected for an OK judgement,
if the amount of white in the area is
33 pixels or more, a judgment of OK
will be produced.
These displays can be set using the up
and down keys.
(The choices are NO, Y0 to 7, C000 to
C127)
Not displayed for point numbers which
have not been previously registered on
the point setting menu.
Setting details
Point numbers 2 to 9 can be displayed as groups of 8 objects,
using the up and down keys.Pressing the SET key will test the
evaluation conditions, display the test results.
The white or black judgment condition assigned to point numbers 0
to 255 is set using the up and down keys.
· The numbers of the selected points will flash.
· No color is displayed for unregistered point numbers.
0 MAKE A TEST RUN
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions, display the
test results.
q UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
· Assign an OK measurement value of white or black after checking the test results (OK/NG)
from the item 0 MAKE A TEST RUN.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu, and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS.
Go to page 9·113
9-111
9
Existence inspection by point measurement
From page 9-110: When AV-LIGHT-LEVEL (average light level) is selected for the processing mode.
Average light level of the points
[EVALUATION COND] (TYPE00-MEAS.1-POINT-MEAS)
1 CHG PAGE TEST RUN
[TEST RESULT] [OUT]
2 P000 :
000~255
100
OK
NO
3 P001 :
000~255
100
OK
NO
4 P002 :
000~255
100
OK
NO
5 P003 :
000~255
100
OK
NO
6 P004 :
000~255
100
OK
NO
7 P005 :
8 P006 :
9 P007 :
0 STORE ALL COND 000~255
q MAKE A TEST RUN (SET KEY)
w UPPER MENU
Evaluation condition
1 CHG PAGE
(page change)
OK/NG judgment
Æ OK when the average light level of a
point is within the range set. NG when
it is outside the range.
These displays can be set using the up
and down keys. (The choices are NO,
Y0 to 7, or C000 to C127.)
Not displayed for point numbers which
have not been previously registered on
the point setting menu.
Setting details
Point numbers 2 to 9 can be displayed as groups of 8 objects, using
the up and down keys. Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation
conditions, display the test. results.
2P
9P
9
Set the range of the average light level for all point numbers from 0 to
127.
- The numbers of the selected point will flash.
- No light level is displayed for unregistered point numbers.
0 STORE ALL
COND
The light level is collectively averaged for all of the point numbers that
have been registered.
q MAKE A
TEST RUN
Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions, display the test
results.
w UPPER MENU
This will return you to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu.
- Set the measurement value (range of the average light level) that will produce a result of OK
in item q MAKE A TEST RUN.
Return to the [TYPE00-MEAS1 to 3] menu, and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS.
Continued on the following page
9-112
Existence inspection by point measurement
From page 9·111: When BIN-CONV (binary) was selected for the processing mode.
Continued from the previous page: When AV-LIGHT-LEVEL (average light level) is selected
for the processing mode.
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS]
1 PAGE NO.
2 SET POSITION
3 INPUT SIGNAL
4 LOGICAL SYMBOL
(TYPE00-MEAS.1-POINT MEAS)
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
MOVE
POINT NO.000 (0~255) AUXRLY C000 (0~127)
DEL.
5 OUTPUT SIGNAL
6 UPPER MENU
AUX.RLYC000 (0~127) DEL.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
2
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
· Items 2 to 5 will be displayed when item 1 is set to YES.
· The input signals which maybe set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows:
Selection of item 3
Point number
Auxiliary rely
Input signals
P000 to P255 *
C000 to C127
* When AV-LIGHT-LEVEL (average light level) is selected for the processing mode,
the setting range is P000 to P127.
· For more information on output conditions, see the “PC Function” in Chapter 10.
Returns to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Continued on the following page
9-113
9
Existence inspection by point measurement
Form the preceding page
When the TRG/BRT key is pressed, manual measurement will start, and the points will be measured.
The following is how the display of the results will look when BIN (binary) was selected for the
processeing mode.
(TYPE00)
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
OK
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS
P000:○ OK
P002:○ OK
P004:○ OK
P006:
P008:
P010:
P012:
P014:
[Display of the measured results]
Final evaluation result
Measuring time
Evaluation of the correct black or white
color detected at registered points
P001:○ OK
P003:○ OK
P005:○ OK
P007:
P009:
P011:
P013:
P015:
Evaluation condition (OK) White Black
Object to
be measured
White (display ○)
OK NG
Black (display ●)
NG
OK
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
9
· When the cursor is moved to the REG-CHNG (change register) item and the up or down key is
pressed, the point number display will show groups of 16 objects at a time.
Up key: Next set of numbers, Down key: Previous set of numbers
· The following is an example of how the results are displayed when AV-LIGHT-LEVEL
(average light level) is selected for the processing mode.
(TYPE00)
OK
F H C1ALLC2NO
VX.X
MEAS. XXXXXXms
MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS
[Display of the measured results]
Average light level of registered points
and the OK/NG evaluation of each
P000:116 OK
P001:120 OK
P002:114 OK
P003:118 OK
P004:116
P005:115
P006:
P007:
X0~6:
Y0~7:
BUSY:
MSR-CHNG REG-CHNG PC-MONTR SET-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
9-114
System settings
9-11 System settings
[1] Illuminance (light level) monitor
(1) Purpose
1. Allows the system to monitor changes the lighting of the environment
If the light level exceeds the preset lighting range, it will be regarded as a change in the
environment and "Light level over range" will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
2. Automatic adjustment of the threshold values used for binary conversions can follow
changes in the lighting environment.
The threshold value is modified from the user's setting due to changes in the actual
brightness measured in the environment.
(2) Applications
Used when the level of illumination changed due to changes in voltage or when the influence
of sunlight in the workplace cannot be ignored.
(3) Setting procedure
The following procedure describes how to handle the settings in the [OBJECT TYPE I/O]
menu and in the [MONITOR LIGHT LVL] (check light level) menu.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(conditions of object type) and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to item t SYSTEM-IN/OUT on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu
(conditions for each object type) menu, and press the SET key.
1
2
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1(1~2) NO YES
2LIGHT LEVEL COND (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3TRIGGER CCD START REG.NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
1. Select 1 MONITOR LIGHT LVL (check light level) using the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
- After selecting the camera number (1 or 2) using the up and down keys, select YES using
the left and right keys. Then press the SET key.
2. Select item 2 LIGHT LEVEL COND. (conditions for checking light level) using the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
- The [LIGHT MONITR] (check light level) menu and the monitoring window will be
displayed.
3
[LIGHT MONITR]
4
5
7
8
1SIZE
2POSITION
3THRESHOLD VALUE
4NOTE AVG LIGHT LVL
5UPPER MENU
T C1 H
X=08(4~32)×Y=08(4~64)
(256,240)
U.LM-255 L.LM-100(0~255)
MES.AVE.GRYS=000.0
EXEC REG.AVE.GRYS=000.0
Monitoring window
3. Press the SEL key to enter the through image mode.
- T (through) will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
4. Select item 1 SIZE, and item 2 POSITION, using the up and down keys, and press the
SET key. Then, set the size and position of the monitoring window using the direction keys.
- The monitoring window should be placed in a location with medium brightness, which does
not contain any objects to be measured.
- The monitor window is a rectangle 4 to 32 pixels tall and 4 to 64 pixels wide (se in multiples
of 4 pixels). The monitor window can be moved one pixel at a time.
- The average light level in the monitoring window is displayed on MES.AVE.GRYS (average
measured light level) in item 3.
[When monitoring changes in the lighting environment] ... If not, go to item 6.
5. Select item 3 THRESHOLD VALUE, using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the upper and lower limits using the left and right keys, and set the light level range
(0 to 255) using the up and down keys. Then, press the SET key.
- When the average light level in the monitoring window is out of the preset light level
range, OVR ILLM. RANGE (light level over range) will be displayed on the MAIN OPS
MENU.
9-115
9
System settings
[When the threshold value for binary conversion is automatically modified to take into
account changes in the lighting environment] .... If not, go to item 8.
6. Press the SEL key to enter freeze frame the image.
- F (freeze) will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
- Before reading and storing the next average light level sample, it is necessary to enter the
freeze frame.
7. Select item 4 NOTE AVG LIGHT LVL (average light level registration), using the up and
down keys, and press the SET key. When the SET key is pressed again, the REG. AVE.
GRYS (average light level) will be registered.
- This average light level is required when threshold value correction is selected in the binary
conversion method.
- If the average light level has not been registered, you will see error 22: BIN MON. LIGHT
LVL NOT SET (the light level check function has not been enabled).
- The registered light level is the reference value used when threshold values are modified.
- If the current screen is not a frozen image, CHANGE TO FREEZE MODE (change to freeze)
will be displayed.
8. Select item 5 UPPER MENU, using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Press the SET key again to store the parameter settings in the IV-S20 flash memory.
After the measurement monitoring function is turned ON and images have been captured, the
lighting monitoring function set above will be active.
9
9-116
System settings
[2] Shutter speed
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND (conditions of
object type) and press the SET key.
-Move the cursor to item t SYSTEM-IN/OUT, on the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu,
and press the SET key.
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL
2LIGHT LEVEL COND
3TRIGGER CCD START
4CCD TRIGGER COND
5COMPUTER LINK OUT
&SERIAL OUTPUT
6SHUTTER SPEED
7STORE REF IMAGE
8UPPER MENU
CAM1(1~2) NO YES
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
REG.NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
BLOCK-00(MESR-O CMR01)
1/00060(1/30 to 1/10000)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R (287, 271) REG. DISP
The shutter speed can be set arbitrarily in the range of 1/30 to 1/10,000 of a second
(Initial value: 1/60, Unit: second).
[Setting procedure]
1. Select item 6 SHUTTER SPEED, using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the digit you want to set, using the left and right keys.
1/ 00060
This will move the cursor to the left and right.
3. Set the value using the up and down keys.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set each digit.
After setting all of the digits, press the SET key.
9
- Since the same shutter speed can be used for all of the object types.
- Since the shutter speed can be set continuously in the range of 1/30 to 1/10,000 of a
second, very fine adjustment is possible.
- If you want to measure moving objects and increase the image processing speed, set the
shutter speed to around 1/1000 or 1/2000 seconds. However, if you use a faster shutter
speed than you need, very bright lights will be necessary, and bright lighting is not
economical.
- For details about the relationship between the brightness of objects (objects to be measured)
and the shutter speed, see section "6-1 [2] Illumination and shutter speed."
[Example]
· When the shutter speed is slow
(1/60 of a second)
The object is blurred across the screen.
9-117
· When the shutter speed is fast
(1/1000 of a second)
The object is frozen on the screen.
PC Function
Chapter 10: PC Function
The PC function is designed to create a ladder circuit program based on the data (coordinates, distance,
degree of match, and results of numerical calculations) obtained from the measurements and calculations
made by the IV-S20. Then it outputs the results of the calculations performed by the circuit.
Use of the PC function enables the IV-S20 to output measurement results to an external equipment such
as a lamp by itself, without the need for an external PC.
10-1 Operation cycle
The operation cycle of the IV-S20 is outlined below. This flowchart contains only the operations related
to the PC function, and does not show communications with external devices.
Power ON
Power ON sequence
Input refresh
Ladder circuit calculation (final output conditions)
Ex. : X0 C000 Y00
X1
PC scan
cycle
Y01
C001
Output refresh
Has a measurement start
input signal been received?
NO
YES
Image processing for measurement 0 using camera 1
10
Ladder circuit calculation
(based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 1)
Ex. : 0M0 N01 C000
0X0
N02
C001
C000
Measurement processing for measurement 0 using camera 2
Ladder calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 2)
Measurement processing for measurement 1
Ladder calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 1)
Measurement processing for measurement 2
Ladder calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 2)
Measurement processing for measurement 3
Ladder calculation (based on output conditions for measurement 3)
10-1
Measurement
processing
cycle
PC Function
[1] Power ON sequence
The parallel output terminals (Y0 to Y7) are reset, and the data memories (input relays, output
relays, auxiliary relays, timer and counter) are cleared.
[2] PC scan cycle
In the PC scan cycle, the following three operations (1) to (3) are repeated cyclically.
(1) Input refresh
The ON/OFF data from the parallel input terminals (X0 to X6) is written into the data memory (input
relays).
(2) Ladder circuit calculation (final output conditions)
The calculations are executed by the ladder circuit program which contains the data from input
relays, output relays, auxiliary relays (incl. output which are obtained by the ladder circuit program
calculation in the measurement processing cycle), timer and counter.
(3) Output refresh
The ON/OFF data of the output relays, obtained in calculation (2), is output to the parallel output
terminals (Y0 to Y7).
- The processing time for the three steps described above is called "1PC scan time," and ranges
from 0.3 to 3.0 ms, depending on the settings.
[3] Measurement processing cycle
When the measurement start input signal is given, the measurement processing is carried out, and
the calculations of the ladder circuit program for measurements 0 to 3 are executed.
(1) Measurement processing (measurement 0 to 3)
- The coordinates, distance, and degree of match are determined by the measurement programs.
If the numerical calculation conditions have been set, calculations will be executed.
- Each measurement obtained is judged to be OK or NG, based on the criteria entered by the user.
If it is OK, 1 (ON) will be used as the input condition for the following calculation on the ladder
circuit, and if it is NG, 0 (OFF) will be used.
(2) Ladder circuit calculation (based on output conditions for measurements 0 to 3)
- The values obtained from the measurement processing are used as the input conditions for the
ladder circuit. Calculations will be executed by a ladder circuit. The output relays are the auxiliary
relays that will be used for calculation by the ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle.
10
Ë The relationship between the ladder circuit in the measurement processing cycle and the
ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle
Measurement processing cycle ladder circuit (measurement output conditions)
Measurement 0 - camera 1
Measurement 2
(Positional deviation
Measurement 1
(Point measurement)
measurement)
(Binary area)
0M0
C000
Degree Auxiliary
of match relay
PC scan cycle
ladder circuit
(final output conditions)
00A
C001
Total Auxiliary
relay
area
C000 C001
C002
P000
C002
Point
Auxiliary
relay
Y00
External
output
Notes
- 128 auxiliary relays, C000 to C127, can be set. However, identical auxiliary relay numbers
cannot be used for measurement 0 using camera 1, and measurement 0 using camera 2, or for
measurement 1, measurement 2 and measurement 3.
- The auxiliary relays C110 to C127 are special relays. The special relays are used on the PC
scan cycle ladder circuit. Do not use them for the measurement processing cycle ladder circuit.
10-2
PC Function
10-2 Ladder circuit program creation
[1] Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit
A separate ladder circuit can be created for positional deviation measurement, degree of match
inspection, distance/angle measurement, lead inspection, area measurement by binary
conversion, object counting by binary conversion, label measurement by binary conversion, and
point measurement.
The procedure for creating a ladder circuit for positional deviation measurement is given below. A
ladder circuit can be created the same way for other measurement just change the input contact
point setting.
(1) Operation to invoke the [OUTPUT CONDITIONS] menu (for positional deviation measurement)
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
(condition of object type), and press the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to item 4 MEAS.0 CAMERA1,
or item 6 MEAS.0 CAMERA2, and press the SET key.
Displayed when
[TYPE00-MEAS0]
the object type 00
1SELECT MEAS. TYPE
NO MEAS-POSITION-DEVIATE has been specified
1
2
2COPY :
3INITIALIZATION
4MEAS. PROG. COND
5EVALUATION COND
6NUMERIC CALC COND
7OUTPUT CONDITIONS
8UPPER MENU
EXEC←TYPE00−CMR1DIFF.MESURE.
EXEC
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
1
1. Move the cursor to item 1 SELECT MEAS. TYPE with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key. Then, move the cursor to MEAS-POSITION DEVIATE. with the left and right keys, and
press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to item 7 OUTPUT CONDITIONS with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key. - The [OUTPUT CONDITIONS] menu will be displayed.
3. After moving the cursor to item 1 PAGE NO. with the up and down keys and after pressing the
SET key, specify page number 0 with the up and down keys. Set the REG. item to YES with the
left and right keys, and press the SET key. - Items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
3
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.00(0~7)
MATCH M0(0~1) CRD.X0(0~1) CRD.Y0(0~1)
DEVIAT-x0(0~1) DEVIAT-y0(0~1) AGL-DV B
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
DEL.
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
Column No. 0 to 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
Ladder circuit
display area
Row No.
A ladder circuit program can be created on each page from 0 to 4 consisting of 4 rows, each of
which has 8 terminals and 1 output relay. Therefore, a ladder circuit can be created that
consists of 20 rows in all (one row contains 8 terminals and 1 output relay). Calculations will be
carried out in the order of the page numbers 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Continued on the following page
0
1
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
10-3
2
3
4
5
6
7
Output
10
PC Function
From the preceding page
(2) Ladder circuit creation 1 (setting input signals)
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
1
2
1PAGE NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
MOVE
REGT.NO.00(0~7)
MATCH M0(0~1) CRD.X0(0~1) CRD.Y0(0~1)
DEVIAT-x0(0~1) DEVIAT-y0(0~1) AGL-DV B
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
4
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
10
0
1
3
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
OUT
Ladder circuit
cursor
1. Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The ladder circuit cursor can be moved with the up, down, left and right keys. Move the cursor
to a position where an input terminal will be placed, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to item 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- In the case of the positional deviation measurement, degree of match inspection, lead
inspection, object counting by binary conversion or label measurement by binary conversion,
first move the cursor to REGT.NO. (register number) with the left and right keys, and select a
number with the up and down keys. This registration number should be the same registration
number specified on the [EVALUATION COND] menu.
Positional deviation measurement: 0 to 7 Degree of match inspection: 0 to 15
Lead inspection: 0 to 3 Object counting by binary conversion: 0 to 3
Label measurement by binary conversion: 0 to 3
3. After moving the cursor to the kind of input signal you want with the left and right keys, select a
number with the up and down keys. Then press the ESC key. (See page 10-6 for the kinds of
input signals available for each measurement program, and see page 10-7 for details about the
auxiliary relays.)
4. Move the cursor to item 4 LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
5. Move the cursor to the logic symbol to be used for the input signal selected in step 3, and press
the SET key.
- The logic symbols and the input signals will be displayed as a ladder circuit.
Display example:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 OUT
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
Logic symbol
0M0
Function
a contact on a series circuit (ON, when the evaluation result is OK)
b contact on a series circuit (OFF, when the evaluation result is OK)
Deletes a contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will not be
brought forward.)
Note: This symbol cannot be used on the first row.
Used to create an OR circuit.
Used to create an OR circuit
Deletes the contact on the cursor. (Contacts after the deleted contact will be
brought forward.)
Deletion
When a contact exists only on the first row, if the contact is deleted, also the
output relay will be deleted.
Continued on the following page
10-4
PC Function
From the preceding page
(3) Ladder circuit creation 2 (setting output signals)
1
2
[OUTPUT CONDITIONS] (TYPE00-MEAS.0-POS-DEVIATION)
1PAGE NO.
0(0~4) REG.NO YES
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
REGT.NO.00(0~7)
MATCH M0(0~1) CRD.X0(0~1) CRD.Y0(0~1)
DEVIAT-x0(0~1) DEVIAT-y0(0~1) AGL-DV B
CAL N00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
DEL.
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
6UPPER MENU
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
1. Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to a row where a ladder circuit output signal will be placed with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
An output signal can only be placed on rows where input signals have already been placed.
2. Set the cursor to item 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- Select an output auxiliary relay number (see page 10-7) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
- The output symbol and auxiliary relay number will be displayed on the row specified in step 1.
Display example:
0
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
C000
0M0
(4) Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in step (1), repeating the operations in
steps (2) and (3)
Creation example:
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
0M0 C001
6
7
OUT
10
C000
0X0
N01 N02
C001
N03 N04
Note: Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit. Change circuit a to circuit b.
Circuit b
Circuit a
C001
C010
C001
C010
C011
C001
C011
(5) Storing the circuit in the IV-S20 memory (RAM)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
1
AUX.RLYC000(0~127) DEL.
6UPPER MENU
1. Move the cursor to item 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE-MEAS] menu, and the ladder circuit creation process
will be finished.
10-5
PC Function
[Kinds of input signals in each measurement program]
Measurement function
Kind of input Positional deviation
measurement
Degree of
match
Model 0: 0M0 to 7M0
Model 1: 0M1 to 7M1
Model 0: 0X0 to 7X0
Coordinate X Model 1: 0X1 to 7X1
Model 0: 0Y0 to 7Y0
Coordinate Y Model 1: 0Y1 to 7Y1
Coordinate Model 0: 0x0 to 7x0
deviation x Model 1: 0x1 to 7x1
Coordinate Model 0: 0y0 to 7y0
deviation y Model 1: 0y1 to 7y1
Angle
(deviation) B 0B to 7B
Light level G
Distance
Lead
and angle
inspection
measurement
Model 0 (positioning): 00M0 to 15M0
[Start point]
Model 1 (measuring object): 00M1 to 15M1 00M to 15M 0M to 3M
Model 0 (positioning): 00X0 to 15X0
0X to 3X
Model 1 (measuring object): 00X1 to 15X1
Model 0 (positioning): 00Y0 to 15Y0
0Y to 3Y
Model 1 (measuring object): 00Y1 to 15Y1
Matching inspection for
shape and size
00B to 15B
Model 0 (positioning): 00G0 to 15G0
Model 1 (measuring object): 00G1 to 15G1
Start point
coordinates S
Auxiliary point
coordinates H
00S to 63S
00H to 15H
00D to 15D 0D0 to 0D7…
3D0 to 3D7
0K0 to 0K7…
3K0 to 3K7
0L0 to 0L7…
3L0 to 3L7
Distance D
Quantity K
Lead length L
10
Numerical
calculation N N00 to N15
Auxiliary relay
N00 to N15
N00 to N15
Label measurement
by binary conversion
Point
measurement
N00 to N15
C000 to C127
Measurement function
Counting quantities
Kind of input Area measurement
by binary
by binary
conversion
conversion
0A to 3A
Total area A 00A to 15A
Quantity K
0K to 3K
Area of each
label R
Point P
Numerical
N00 to N15
calculation N N00 to N15
Auxiliary relay
C000 to C127
10-6
0A to 3A
0K to 3K
0R000 to 0R127
…3R000 to 3R127
P000 to P255
N00 to N15
N00 to N15
PC Function
[Auxiliary relay C000 to C127]
The functions of the auxiliary relays (C000 to C127), which can be used for input and output signals,
are explained below.
Relay No.
(relay name)
Function
Use for input signals
Use for output signals
C000 to C109 · Relays for internal calculation
(internal
· For the final output conditions, relays also used for output in the measurement
calculation)
processing cycle can be used.
C110, C111
Reserved area (Do not use these relays.)
C112 (Final
evaluation
result)
· Turned ON when all of the evaluation items have
been judged OK, and turned OFF if any single item
has been judged NG.
· If C116 is not used, OK/NG will be displayed on the
MAIN OPS MENU which correspons to ON/OFF of
C112. *
· If an error occurs (C118 is turned ON),C112 will be
turned OFF (NG).
· When C113 is ON, continuous measurements will
be executed.
(Ex) When X0 is ON,continuous measurements
will be executed.
C113
(Continuous
measurement
start input)
C114
(CCD trigger
status output)
C115
X0
C113
Output the CCD trigger status to C114, regardless of
the Yes/No setting for the start of the measurement.
· When “binary conversion” is specified, if the white
area is 50% or more of the image, C114 will be
turned ON, and if it is less than 50 %, C114 will be
turned OFF.
· When the “average light level” is specified, C114
will be turned ON when the image is within the
specified level range, and turned OFF when it is out
of the range.
· The same signal as the BUSY/READY signal is
output internally.
· If an output signal is passed to C116, the display of
the OK/NG result on the MAIN OPS MENU will
depend on the ON/OFF state of C116.
(Ex.)“OK” is displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU
when C000 is ON, and “NG” when the C000 is
OFF.
C000
C116
C116
(programmable
output)
· If C116 relay is not used, the display of the OK/NG
result will depend on of the final evaluation result
(C112). *
· Turned OFF when the illumination exceeds the
upper or lower warning level of the illuminance
C117
monitor set on the [MONITOR LIGHT LVL] menu
(Illuminance
(page 9·115). Warning light levels can be set for
monitor error) each of the cameras 1 and 2 separately. This relay
is turned OFF when either one of them exceeds the
upper or lower level.
· Turned ON when a measurement processing error
C118
(measurement
occurs.(However, except the end code 34/35/36/3E.
operation error)
- See page 15･4.)
C119
· Turned ON upon termination of measurement
(measurement processing, and turned OFF when a measurement
termination)
start input signal is given.
· They are turned ON to reset counters CN0 to CN7.
C120 to C127 correspond to CN0 to CN7. Create a
circuit for sending an output signal to one of these
relays on the row following a row that contains a
counter instruction. (Counter instruction ⇒ See
page 10·12.)
C120 to C127 · Do not use these relays for input signals.
(counter reset)
* OK/NG displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU - See page 7·2.)
10-7
10
PC Function
[2] Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit
A ladder circuit can be created for each object type (0 to 15) using the following procedure.
(1) Operation to invoke the [FINAL OUTPUT COND.] menu
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to SET-SCRN item, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
and press the SET key.
[OBJECT TYPE COND]
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2EDIT
3TITLE REGISTRATION
4MEAS.0, CAMERA1
5POS. ADJ.CAMERA1
6MEAS.0, CAMERA2
7POS. ADJ.CAMERA2
8SELECT CAMERA IMG
1
10
0MEASUREMENT 1
qMEASUREMENT 2
wMEASUREMENT 3
eFINAL CALC RESULT
rFINAL OUTPUT COND
tSYSTEM-IN/OUT
yHALT MEAS ON NG
uUPPER MENU
00(0~15)
COPY(←OBJ TYPE00) INITIALIZE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO ADJ. [REG. 0-1PNTSXY］
NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1&2
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to item r FINAL OUTPUT COND with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [RESULTS OUTPUT] menu will be displayed.
2. After moving the cursor to item 1 PAGE NO. (register number) with the up and down keys,
and pressing the SET key, specify page number "0" with the up and down keys, set the REG.
(register) item to YES with the left and right keys, and press the SET key. - Items 2 to 5
will be displayed.
2
[RESULTS OUTPUT]
1PAGE.NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
(TYPE00)
(0~7) REG.NO YES
MOVE
AUXRLY C112(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~6)
TMR TM0(0~7) CNT CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15) OUT Y00(0~15)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUT Y00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL.
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
2
Column No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
Ladder circuit
display area
Row No.
Continued on the following page
10-8
PC Function
From the preceding page
A ladder circuit can be created on each page from 0 to 7 consisting of 4 rows, each of which has
8 terminals and 1 output relay. Therefore, a ladder circuit can be created that consist of 32 rows
in all (one row contains 8 terminals and 1 output relay).
Calculations will be carried out in the order of the page numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
0
Page 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Output
Input 0
Page 1
Input 1
Page 2
Input 2
Page 3
Input 3
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
(2) Ladder circuit creation 1 (setting input signals)
1
2
[RESULTS OUTPUT]
1PAGE.NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
(TYPE00)
(0~7) REG.NO YES
MOVE
AUXRLY C112(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~6)
TMR TM0(0~7) CNT CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15) OUT Y00(0~15)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
3
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
2
OUT Y00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL.
10
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
Ladder circuit cursor
1. Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The ladder circuit cursor can be moved with the up, down, left and right keys. Move the cursor
to the position where you want to place an input terminal, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to item 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Set the kind of input signal and its number.
- After moving the cursor to the kind of input signal you want, select a number with the up and
down keys, and press the ESC key.
Continued on the following page
10-9
PC Function
From the preceding page
Data
Kind of
Function
input signal memory No.
External input
X0 to X6 The external input terminals X0 to X6 can be assigned.
terminals
When any of the timer instructions TM0 to TM7 causes a time-out,
Timer
the corresponding terminal is turned ON. When a timer instruction
TM0
to
TM7
terminals
input is switched OFF, the terminal is turned OFF.
When any of the counter instructions CN0 to CN7 counts out, the
Counter
corresponding terminal is turned ON. When any of the counter
terminals CN0 to CN7 reset relays C120 to C127 for the respective counters is turned
ON, the corresponding terminal is turned OFF.
When the final numerical calculation results AN0 to AN15 are OK,
Final calcuAN0 to
these terminals are turned ON. If any of the results are NG, they
lation result
AN15
are turned OFF.
terminals
(See item 9-2 [4] for details about the final numerical calculation.)
Output
They can be used as auxiliary relays for the external output
terminals Y0 to Y15 terminals Y0 to Y15.
· See page 10-7 for details about the auxiliary relays C000 to C127.
3. Move the cursor to item 4 LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
4. Move the cursor to the logic symbol to be used for the input signal selected in step 3, and
press the SET key.
- The logic symbols and the input signals will be displayed as a ladder circuit.
Display example:
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
C000
Logic symbol
Function
a contact on a series circuit (ON, when the evaluation result is OK)
10
b contact on a series circuit (OFF, when the evaluation result is OK)
Deletes the contact on the cursor.
(Contacts after the deleted contact will not be brought forward.)
Note: This symbol cannot be used on the first row.
Used to create an OR circuit.
Used to create an OR circuit
Deletion
Deletes the contact on the cursor.
(Contacts after the deleted contact will be brought forward.)
When a contact exists only on the first row, if the contact is deleted, also the
output relay will also be deleted.
Continued on the following page
10-10
PC Function
From the preceding page
(3) Ladder circuit 2 (setting output signals)
1
[RESULTS OUTPUT]
1PAGE.NO.
2SET POSITION
3INPUT SIGNAL
(TYPE00)
(0~7) REG.NO YES
MOVE
AUXRLY C112(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~6)
TMR TM0(0~7) CNT CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15) OUT Y00(0~15)
DEL.
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUT Y00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL.
2
3
6UPPER MENU
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
0
C000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
1. Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the row where a ladder circuit output relay will be placed, and press the SET
key. An output relay can only be placed only on rows where input signals have already been
placed.
2. Move the cursor to item 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
3. Select the kind of output signal and the number (set value). After moving the cursor to the
desired output signal with the left and right keys, select a number (set value) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
- The output symbol and signal will be displayed on the row specified in step 1.
Display example:
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
C000
Continued on the following page
10-11
6
7
OUT
Y00
10
PC Function
From the preceding page
Kind of
output
signal
External
output
instructions
Data
memory
No.
Function
Y0 to Y7
Y8 to Y15
Output to the parallel I/F, general purpose serial I/F and computer link
Output to the general purpose serial I/F or computer link
A timer terminal will be turned ON for a set amount of time (set value
000 to 999, unit 10 ms) after the timer instruction is input.
(Decrementing type)
When the timer instruction input is turned OFF, the timer terminal will
be turned OFF.
[Ex.] C001
TM0
0250
TM0
Y00
Timer
TM0 to TM7
instructions
Timer instruction
Timer set value
(2.5 sec.)
Output instruction
(external output)
Timer terminal
C001
2.5 sec.
2.5 sec.
TM0
[Y00]
While the counter reset relay is OFF, if a counter instruction input is
cycled from OFF to ON, the number of times you set (set value 000
to 999), the counter terminal will be turned ON. (Decrementing type)
When the counter reset relay is turned ON, the counter terminal is
turned OFF.
Create a circuit to turn the counter reset relay ON and OFF on the
row following a row that containing a counter instruction.
[Ex.]
Counter
instructions CN0 to CN7
C002
CN0
0003
X5
C120
CN0
10
Y01
Counter instruction
Counter set value
Resetting the CN0
Output instruction
(external output)
Counter terminal
X5
[C120]
C002
1
2
3
4
5
CN0
[Y01]
Deletion
The output relay on the row where the cursor is located will be deleted.
· See page 10-7 for details about the auxiliary relays C000 to C127.
Continued on the following page
10-12
PC Function
From the preceding page
(4) Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in s.tep (1) repeating the
operations given in steps (2) and (3).
Creation example:
[PAGE0]
0
INPUT0
LOGIC
1
2
3
4
C000 C001
INPUT1
5
6
7
OUT
Y00
X0
LOGIC
INPUT2
C001 X1
LOGIC
INPUT3
TM0
0150
TM0
Y01
LOGIC
Note: Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit. Change circuit a to
circuit b.
Circuit b
Circuit a
C001
C010
C001
C010
C011
C001
C011
(5) Storing the circuit in the IV-S20 memory (RAM)
4LOGICAL SYMBOL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
DEL.
OUT Y00(0~15) AUXRLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
CNT CN0(0~7) SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL.
1
6UPPER MENU
1. Move the cursor to item 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, and the ladder circuit creation
process will be finished.
10-13
10
PC Function
10-3 Program examples (shape and positional deviation inspection)
Outline
The positional deviation measurement (one point search) in measurement 0
allows the degree of match and coordinates to be measured, and the result,
OK or NG, is output.
Reference image (registration No.0)
Object to be measured
＋
Reference image
registration window
Search area
＋
＋
Shape NG (degree of match NG)
Positional deviation NG
(X coordinate, Y coordinate NG)
Criteria
(acceptable
range)
10
Coordinate (model 0-X): 200.0 to 250.0
Coordinate (model 0-Y): 150.0 to 200.0
Degree of match (model 0): +09500 to +10000
Output conditions ladder circuit for measurement 0 using camera 1
When the X coordinate, Y coordinate and degree of match are within
acceptable ranges, the auxiliary relay C000 is turned ON.
0X0
0Y0
0M0
Coordinate X
Coordinate Y
Degree
of match
C000
OK
Final output conditions ladder circuit
C119
C000
Measurement OK
termination
C118
Y00
NG output
Y01
Measurement operation error
C117
Y02
Illuminance monitor error
10-14
Measurement operation
error output
Illuminance monitor
error output
PC Function
10-4 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit
(1) Circuit for keeping the external output ON until the next external trigger is received
Y00
C000
C119
NG output
Measurement
termination
OK
External trigger input
BUSY
External output
(Y00)
(2) Circuit for controlling the ON time of the external output using the timer
TM0
0010
C119
Measurement
termination
C119 C000
10ms×10＝100ms
Y00
TM0
NG output
OK
External trigger input
BUSY
100ms
10
External output
(Y00)
(3) Pipeline control
If the interval between triggers is too close to the total measuring time on a non-stop
conveyor line, the time allowed for outputting the measurement result is reduced, and the
external device will not receive the measurement results.
In this case, a pipeline control type of circuit should be created, so that the external
device can receive the measurement results in the next cycle.
Y00
C112
OK/NG output
Final evaluation result
Measurement
N
External output
Measurement
N+1
Measurement
N+2
Measurement
N+3
BUSY
C112, Y00
Evaluation
result of N
10-15
Evaluation
result of N+1
Evaluation
result of N+2
PC Function
10-5 PC monitor screen
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to PC-MONTR item, on the menu bar at the bottom of
the screen, and press the SET key. Then, the PC monitor screen will be displayed.
F L C1ALLC2NO ●
VX.X ■
C1=002.2 OK
C2=100.0 OK
(TYPE00) AREA1
OK
［C112］
MEAS. XXXXXXms
1
2
3
X00∼ 06：
Y00∼ 07：
C000∼007：
4
[TMR]
[CNT]
[FIAL NUMERIC CALC]
TM0：250
TM1：
TM2：
TM3：
TM4：
TM5：
TM6：
TM7：
CN0：060
CN1：
CN2：
CN3：
CN4：
CN5：
CN6：
CN7：
AN00=＋00008600.0
AN01=
AN02=
AN03=
AN04=
AN05=
AN06=
AN07=
5
6
7
BUSY：
Select BUSY or READY
on the [I/O SETTINGS]
menu.
OUT-CHNG AUX-CHNG NUM-CHNG RUN-SCRN MANL-TYP-CHG
1 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the input relays (X00 to X06) is displayed.
2 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the output relays (Y00 to Y15) is displayed.
3 The ON (■) or OFF (□) status of the auxiliary relays (C000 to C127) is displayed.
4 The current timer value is displayed.
5 The current counter value is displayed.
6 The results (AN00 to AN15) of the final numerical calculations are displayed.
7 Menu bar
Menu bar
10
Description
OUT-CHNG
Change the output relay address (Y00 to Y15) with the up and down keys (in units of
8 points).
AUX-CHNG
Change the auxiliary relay address (C000 to C127) with the up and down keys (in
units of 8 points).
NUMCHNG
Change the final numerical calculation address (AN00 to AN15) with the up and
down keys (in units of 8 points).
RUN-SCRN Press the SET key to return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Manually change the object type number (00 to 15) with the up and down keys.
· The object type number can be changed by setting the OBJ. NO. MANL MODE item
MANLTYP-CHG to YES. (See page 8·9.)
· The image will be cleared every time the object type is changed. (However, when
the CAPTURE AN IMAGE item has been set to “NO,” the image will not be cleared.)
The other data displayed is the same as on the MAIN OPS MENU. (See page 7·2.)
10-16
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
Chapter 11: Setting the Input/Output Conditions
11-1 Outline
This chapter explains the input/output settings on the IV-S20. The conditions are set on the [IN/OUT
CND.] menu.
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
-On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 3 I/O CONDITIONS
and press the SET key.
[I/O SETTING]
1MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
3SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT=PARALLEL)
4CHG MEAS NO.X5,X6 NO YES
5PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT-INP. REG-REF-IMG(MSR0 COMPARE IMAGES)
T-ARA EVALUATION ADJ.(00%)
6PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT-INP. CHG-IMG-OUT-CAM CAM-MEAS
7OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY
8SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0GAIN OFFSET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
q UPPER MENU
Input/output condition
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F
(measurement start input)
2
3
4 CHG MEAS NO. X5, X6
(Measurement No. switching
X5 and X6)
See the next page.
After selecting
REG-REF-IMG,
change MSR0
to MSR3 using
the up/down
keys.
Items 5 and 6
are not displayed
when item 4 has
been set to YES.
Setting details
Select an input interface for starting the measurement on the IV-S20.
The display of item 2 and 3 depends on the setting in item 1 MEAS TRIG
INP I/F. - See Item (1) on the next page.
Turn ON or OFF the input terminals (INPUT) X5 and X6 to specify the
measurement number. - See item (2) on the next page.
Select the type of input terminal (INPUT) X5.
The PC function uses the terminal as an external input signal.
(See Chapter 10.)
External input
5 PARALLEL INPUT X5*
(Parallel input X5)
Measurement
Regist- 0 to 3
er
refereCalculance
image tion
between
images
When X5 is switched from OFF to ON on the [MAIN OPS
MENU], the reference image (registration number only) for the
specified measurement program (camera 1/2) will be stored in
the IV-S20 flash memory.
When the parallel input X5 on the OBJECT TYPE COND screen
is ON, the reference image, that previously registered for
calculation between images, is stored in the IV-S20 flash
memory. (Calculation between images => See page 9-24 to 927.)
- When the parallel input X5 on the OBJECT TYPE COND
screen is ON, and if the IV-S20 measurements are any of the
followings; the upper and lower limits of the final area judgment
conditions will be corrected automatically at the specified ratio.
(Correction ratio range: 0 to 50%)
- Correction compatible measurements: Binary area
measurement, counting number of objects after binary
conversion, and object identification (labeling) after binary
conversion.
Correction of final
area judgement
Select the type of input terminal (INPUT) X6.
External input
6 PARALLEL INPUT X6*
(Parallel input X6)
The PC function uses the terminal as an external input signal. (See
Chapter 10.)
Image output
The monitor setting on the [MAIN OPS MENU] is switched. (See
camera switching item [1] Output monitor in Chapter 8.)
Camera
measurement
Runs only the measurement program for the assigned camera No.
(When X6 is OFF, camera 1, when X6 is ON, camera 2 is
selected)
* Items 5 and 6 can be selected when 4 CHG MEAS NO. X5, X6 is set to NO.
11-1
11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
Input/output condition
7 OUTPUT STATUS
(Status output)
Setting details
Select the IV-S20 output status => See page 6-15, 7-2, and 10-16.
9 COMPUTER LINK
(Computer link)
Set the conditions on the next menu when item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F has
been set to SERIAL. (general purpose serial), and when item 3 SERIAL
OUTPUT (serial output) has been set to SERIAL or PC-LINK.
Set the conditions on the next menu when item 3 SERIAL OUT has been
set to PC-LINK.
0 GAIN OFFSET (Gain/offset)
See section 11-7 Gain/offset adjustment.
q UPPER MENU
The screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS
(Serial communication
conditions)
(1) The display of items 2and 3depends on the specification in item 1MEAS TRIG INP I/F
[I/O SETTING]
1MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
3SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT=PARALLEL)
4CHG MEAS NO.X5,X6 NO YES
5PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT-INP. REG-REF-IMG(MSR0 COMPARE IMAGES)
T-ARA EVALUATION ADJ.(00%)
6PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT-INP. CHG-IMG-OUT-CAM CAM-MEAS
7OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY
8SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
0GAIN OFFSET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
q UPPER MENU
- When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F is set to SERIAL.
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
- Items 2 and 3 are
not displayed.
11
- When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F is set to CCD-TRG. and item 2
START CCD SAMPLE is set to PARALLEL. 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(CCD SAMPLING=PARALLEL)
- When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F is set to CCD-TRG. and item 2
START CCD SAMPLE is set to SERIAL.
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
- Items 3 are not
displayed.
- When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F is set to CCD-TRG. and item 2
START CCD SAMPLE is set to AUTO (EDGE/LEVL)
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 OUTPUT OBJ. TYPE PARALEL SERIAL
(CCD SAMPLING＝AUTOMATIC)
11-2
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(2) Measurement number switching terminals X5 and X6
If item 4 CHG MEAS NO. X5, X6 on the [I/O SETTINGS] menu has been set to "YES," the
measurement program numbers (in combination with measurement number 0) can be specified
from the following 4 combinations by turning ON or OFF the input terminals (INPUT) X5 and X6.
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
4 CHG MEAS NO.X5,X6 NO YES
Set to “YES.”
Measurement program
Measurement 0
Measurement 0 & 1
Measurement 0 & 2
Measurement 0 & 3
X6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
X5
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
11-2 Measurement start input and result output settings
The combinations of various settings for item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F, item 2 START CCD
SAMPLE, and item 3 SERIAL OUTPUT (OUTPUT OBJ. TYPE) on the [I/O SETTINGS] menu
(page 11-1) are explained below.
Measurement
start input IF
· Parallel
Result output
Parallel → (1)
Computer link/parallel → (2)
General purpose serial/parallel → (3)
· General purpose
General purpose serial/parallel → (4)
serial
· CCD trigger
Start sampling
Parallel
(Parallel)
General purpose
serial
Auto
Object type
change
(General purpose
serial)
Parallel
General purpose
serial
Result output
Parallel → (5)
Computer link/parallel → (6)
General purpose serial/parallel → (7)
General purpose serial/parallel → (8)
Parallel → (9)
General purpose serial/parallel → (10)
The time required to change object types is calculated differently according to the type of measurement
start input I/O, as follows:
Measurement start input I/F
Parallel I/O
General-purpose serial
CCD trigger
Time to change object type
Included in the measurement execution time
Not included in the measurement execution time
Not included in the measurement execution time
11-3
11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(1) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = parallel
· Setting order 1 (→ 3)
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
Camera 2 (image capturing)
3 SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT=PARALLEL)
Monitor
Remote keypad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Warning lamp
External output
(Y0 to Y7)
External trigger X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
Type selection switch
(X1 to X4)
- The conditions for outputting the results to the output signals Y0 to Y7 are set by the PC
function. (See Chapter 10 "PC Function.")
- Time chart
10 ms
or more
Measurement
start input
(X0)
10 ms
or more
10 ms
or more
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
11
Specified object type number
BUSY output
Measurement result is valid at the end
of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P
condition
C C C C measurement
C C C C C C C C measurement
CCCCC
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
When the object type is
changed, all Y output and
auxiliary relays turn OFF.
Parallel output is valid for PC control
after the measurement result is
determined.
Result output
11-4
Result output
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(2) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = computer
Iink/parallel
· Setting order 1 → 3 → 8 → 9
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
Camera 2 (image capturing)
3 SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT=PARALLEL)
Remote keypad
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9 COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Monitor
Data
(Computer link)
IV-S20 main
housing
Programmable
controller
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Object type change
(parallel IF)
(X1 to X4)
External trigger X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
- The data in a specified block No., set in item 5COMPUTER LINK OUT & SERIAL
OUTPUT on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu, will be output through the computer link. (See
page 11-20.)
- Time chart
10 ms
or more
Measurement
start input
(X0)
10 ms 10 ms
or more or more
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
Specified object type number
BUSY output
11
a
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
BUSY signal is turned OFF at the
conclusion of the result output.
Measurement result is valid at the end
of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P
C C C C measurement
C C C C C C C C measurement
CCCCC
condition
Parallel output is valid for
When the object type is
PC control after the
changed, all Y output and
measurement result is
auxiliary relays turn OFF.
determined.
Parallel output
Result output
Result output
(Y0 to Y7)
a
Computer link outputoutput
Result
output
Result
output
* When a Sharp PC is used, a write enable command (EWR) is transmitted from the IV-S20 to
the PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S20
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command
(WRG) is transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC)
- When the output method is changed from the serial interface to the computer link
11-5
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(3) Measurement start input = parallel, object type change = parallel, result output = general
purpose serial/parallel
· Setting order ① → ③ → ⑧
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing)
［I/O SETTINGS］
① MEAS TRIG INP I/F
PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
③ SERIAL OUTPUT
NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(INPUT=PARALLEL)
Personal computer
Data
⑧ SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
Type selection switch
(X1 to X4)
External trigger X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
- The data in a block No., set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT & SERIAL OUTPUT on the
[OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu, will be output from the IV-S20 to the personal computer.
(See page 11-20.)
- Time chart
10 ms
or more
Measurement
start input
(X0)
10 ms 10 ms
or more or more
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
Specified object type number
11
BUSY output
a
BUSY signal is turned OFF at the
conclusion of the result output.
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the end
of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P
C C C C measurement
C C C C C C C C measurement
CCCCC
condition
Parallel output is valid for
When the object type is
PC control after the
changed, all Y output and
measurement result is
auxiliary relays turn OFF.
determined.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
Result output
Result output
a
Serial output
Result
output
Result
output
Note - Result output: The data to be sent to the personal computer will be response of
general-purpose serial command (code 11(H)).
11-6
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(4) Measurement start input = general-purpose serial, object type change = general-purpose
serial, result output = general-purpose serial/parallel
· Setting order 1 → 8
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
Camera 2 (image capturing)
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Personal computer
Command, response
Monitor
Remote key pad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
- See pages 13-6 and 13-7 for details about the measurement execution commands (codes
10, 11, 12 and 13(H)).
- Time chart
5 ms
or less
Result
output
Serial
Mesurement
trigger
command
Result
output
Mesurement
BUSY signal is
turned OFF at the trigger
conclusion of the command
result output.
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is
valid at the end of a
measurement
P P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P
PC calculation C
C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C
condition
Parallel output is valid for PC
When the object type is changed,
control after the measurement
all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF.
result is determined.
Parallel output
Result output
Result output
(Y0 to Y7)
11-7
11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(5) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = parallel
· Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3)
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
［I/O SETTINGS］
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(CCD SAMPLING＝PARALLEL)
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Monitor
Remote keypad
Settings listed in Section 11-3 “CCD trigger”
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Warning lamp
External output
(Y0 to Y7)
Start sampling input
X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
Type selection switch
(X1 to X4)
Note 1: When the settings listed in section 11-3 "CCD trigger" have not been made, a CCD
TRIGGER NOT SET. (error 34) will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
1. Sampling will be performed while this terminal is ON. When it is turned OFF, the
sampling will stop.
During sampling,
will flash in the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS MENU.
2. After the measurement is terminated, the sampling will be restarted when the
X0 terminal is changed from OFF to ON.
· Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0)
11
Start accd sampling by turning ON
measurement start input (X0).
Start accd sampling
by turning OFF
measurement start
input (X0).
CCD trigger
cycle
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
Specified object type number
White
Black
Trigger
Trigger
BUSY output
Measurement result
is valid at the end
of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P
C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed,
Parallel output is valid for PC
all Y output and auxiliary relays
control after the measurement
turn OFF.
result is determined.
Parallel output
Result output
Result output
(Y0 to Y7)
11-8
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(6) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = computer link/parallel
When the start sampling input (X0) is turned ON, the CCD trigger is enabled. (Sampling starts)
· Setting order 1 → 2 → 3 → 8 → 9
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
(CCD SAMPLING＝PARALLEL)
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Remote keypad
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9 COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Monitor
Data
(Computer link)
IV-S20 main
housing
Settings listed in section 11-3 “CCD trigger”
Programmable
controller
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Object type change
(paralell I/F)
Start sampling
input X0
Note 1: When the settings listed in section 11-3 "CCD trigger" have not been made, a
CCD TRIGGER NOT SET. (error 34) will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
1. Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON. When it is turned
OFF, the sampling will stop.
During sampling,
will flash in the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS MENU.
2. After the measurement is terminated, the sampling will be restarted when the
X0 terminal is changed from OFF to ON.
· Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0)
Start accd sampling by turning ON
measurement start input (X0).
Start accd sampling
by turning OFF
measurement start
input (X0).
CCD trigger
cycle
11
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
Result
output
Computer link
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
Result
output
White
Black
Trigger
BUSY signal is turned OFF
at the clusion of
the result output.
Trigger
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
end of a measurement
P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation
C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed,
all Y output and auxiliary relays
turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
Result output
11-9
Result output
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
When a Sharp PC is used, a write enable command (EWR) is transmitted from the IV-S20
to the PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S20
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command
(WRG) is transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC)
- When the output method is changed from the serial interface to the computer link
(7) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = parallel, object type change =
parallel, result output = general purpose serial/parallel
When the start sampling input (X0) is turned ON, the CCD trigger is enabled. (Sampling starts)
· Setting order 1 → 2 → 3 → 8 → 9
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
Camera 2 (image capturing)
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
Personal computer
(CCD SAMPLING＝PARALLEL)
Monitor
Object type change,
data
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
9 COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
IV-S20 main
housing
Settings listed in section 11-3 “CCD trigger”
Power supply (24 VDC)
External trigger
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
Note 1: When the settings listed in section 11-3 "CCD trigger" have not been made, a
CCD TRIGGER NOT SET. (error 34) will occur.
Note 2: Start sampling input (X0)
11
1. Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON. When it is turned
OFF, the sampling will stop.
During sampling, will flash in the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS
MENU.
2. After the measurement is terminated, sampling will be restarted when the X0
terminal is changed from OFF to ON.
11-10
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
- Time chart
Measurement
start input
(X0)
Start accd sampling by turning ON
measurement start input .
Start accd sampling
by turning OFF
measurement start
input (X0).
CCD trigger
cycle
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
Result
output
Computer link
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
Result
output
White
Black
Trigger
Trigger
BUSY signal is turned OFF
at the clusion of
the result output.
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
end of a measurement
P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation
C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed,
all Y output and auxiliary relays
turn OFF.
Parallel output
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
Result output
Result output
Note: Result output: The data in the block No., set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT &
SERIAL OUTPUT on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu, will be transmitted to the
personal computer. (See page 11-20.)
11
11-11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(8) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling, object type change = general
purpose serial, result output = general purpose serial/parallel
The CCD trigger is enabled after a measurement execution command is entered.
· Setting order 1 → 2 → 8
· Configuration example
[I/O SETTINGS]
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO(EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
Camera 2 (image capturing)
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Personal computer
Sampling start,
object type change
Settings listed in section 11-3 “CCD trigger”
Remote key pad
Monitor
Data
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
- See pages 13-9 and 13-10 for details about the measurement execution commands (codes
18, 19, 1A and 1B(H)).
- When one of the measurement execution commands (codes 18, 19, 1A and 1B(H)) is
normally received during sampling, the sampling will stop.
Note: When the settings listed in section 11-3 "CCD trigger" have not been made, a CCD
TRIGGER NOT SET. (error 34) will occur.
· Time chart
Mesurement
trigger
command
Start CCD
sampling by
turning ON
measurement
start input .
11
Mesurement
trigger
command
Result
output
Serial
Result
output
Mesurement Mesurement
trigger
trigger
command
command
CCD trigger
cycle
Stop CCD sampling
by measurement
command.
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
White
Black
Trigger
Trigger
BUSY signal is turned OFF
at the conclusion
of the result output.
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the
end of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed,
all Y output and auxiliary relays
turn OFF.
Parallel output
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
Result output
Result output
Note: Result output: The data in the block No., set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT
&SERIAL OUTPUT on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu, will be transmitted to the
personal computer. (See page 11-20.)
11-12
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(9) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = auto, object type change, result
output = parallel
· Setting order 1 → 2 (→ 3)
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO (EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL Camera 2 (image capturing)
3 OUTPUT OBJ. TYPE PARALLEL SERIAL
Select one of
(CCD SAMPLING＝AUTOMATIC)
Remote key pad
Monitor
the following.
Settings listed in section
11-3 “CCD trigger”
IV-S20 main
housing
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Warning lamp
External output
(Y0 to Y7)
Start sampling input
X0
(photo sensor or
proximity sensor)
Type selection switch
(X1 to X4)
Measurement is started when the CCD trigger level is ON.
Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received.
Work
Black White
CCD trigger
Edge
Measurement
Level
- Time chart (when auto mode (edge) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle
11
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
White
Black
Trigger
White Black
Trigger
BUSY output
Measurement result is valid
at the end of a measurement
PC calculation P P P P
condition
CCCC
Halt PC operation
during measurement
P P P P P P P P P
CCCCCCCCC
When the object type is changed, all Y
output and auxiliary relays turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
P P P P P
CCCCC
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
Result output
11-13
Halt PC operation
during measurement
Result output
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
- Time chart (when auto mode (level) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle
Object type
number input
(X1 to X4)
Specified object type number
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
White
Trigger
Black
Trigger
White Black
Trigger
BUSY output
Measurement result
is valid at the end of
a measurement
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation
P Halt PC operation
P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P
condition
C C C C during measurement C during measurement C C C C during measurement C C C C C
When the object type is
changed, all Y output and
auxiliary relays turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
Result output
11
11-14
Result output
Result output
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(10) Measurement start input = CCD trigger, start sampling = auto, object type change =
general purpose serial, result output = general purpose serial/parallel
The general purpose serial command (code 55(H)) is used to change the object type.
· Setting order 1 → 2 → 3 → 8
· Configuration example
Camera 1 (image capturing + CCD trigger)
[I/O SETTINGS]
1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD-TRIG
2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO (EDGE LEVL) PARALEL SERIAL
3 OUTPUT OBJ. TYPE PARALLEL SERIAL
Select one of
(CCD SAMPLING＝AUTOMATIC)
the following.
8 SERIAL CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
Settings listed in section
11-3 “CCD trigger”
Camera 2 (image capturing)
Personal computer
Data
Monitor
Remote key pad
IV-S20 main housing
Power supply (24 VDC)
Measurement is started when the CCD trigger level is ON.
Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received.
Work
Black White
CCD trigger
Edge
Measurement
Level
11
11-15
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
- Time chart (when auto mode (edge) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automatically after
measurement is completed.
CCD trigger
cycle
Serial
When a trigger signal is input during
sending object type change command,
this command will be invalid.
Result
Type
output
Result
output
Type
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
White
Trigger
Black
Turn OFF
BUSY signal by
termination of result
output.
White Black
Trigger
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid at the end of
a measurement
PC calculation
condition
P P P P Halt PC operation
C C C C during measurement
P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation
C C C C C C C C C during measurement
Parallel output is valid for PC control after
the measurement result is determined.
When the object type is changed,
all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
P P P P P
CCCCC
Result output
Result output
Note: Result output; The data in the block No., set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT
&SERIAL OUTPUT on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu, will be transmitted to the
personal computer. (See page 11-20.)
- Time chart (when auto mode (level) is selected for as the CCD sampling start)
Restarts CCD sampling automaticallyafter
measurement is completed.
11
CCD trigger
cycle
Serial
When a trigger signal is input during
sending object type change command,
this command will be invalid.
Result
Type
output
Result
output
Type
CCD trigger
Black
window
(not highlighted)
White
White
Black
Trigger
Trigger
Trigger
BUSY output
Terminate
measurement
(C119)
Measurement result is valid
at the end of a measurement
P P P P P Halt PC operation
P P P P P P P P P P P P
PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation
C C C C during measurement C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C
condition
When the object type is changed,
all Y output and auxiliary relays
turn OFF.
Parallel output
(Y0 to Y7)
Parallel output is valid for
PC control after the
measurement result is
determined.
Result output
11-16
Result output
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
11-3 CCD trigger
(1) Outline
This function samples a specified part (trigger window) of an image captured by the CCD camera
at a high rate, and starts the measurement when the sampled image changes. Therefore, moving
objects can be measured without requiring an external trigger, such as a photo sensor.
To use this function, set the input/output the CCD trigger on the [I/O SETTINGS] menu (pages 111 to 11-16), and set item 3 TRIGGER CCD START and item 4 CCD TRIGGER COND on the
[OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu. - See Item (2).
- There are two methods for starting the measurement when there is a change in a sampled
image, i.e. a binary method and an average light level method.
Binary
method
When a sampled binary image changes (the white area exceeds 50%),
the measurement is started.
· A change in a binary image means a change in a binary image from
black (background) to white (workpiece) or from white (background)
to black (workpiece).
Average light When the average light level of a sampled image enters a specified
level method range, the measurement is started.
- The trigger window can be set in any position for each object type.
In the past, the position of an external sensor had to be adjusted every time the object type was
changed. However, since this function eliminates the necessity of physical position adjustments,
the changeover time can be reduced.
Object type 1
Feeding direction
Object type 2
Feeding direction
Trigger window
- The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1. (It cannot be used with camera 2.)
- An image that can be used to set the sample window conditions is obtained when the display
mode is switched from the through mode to the freeze mode.
11
(2) Setting procedure
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 2
OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to item t
SYSTEM-IN/OUT and press the SET key.
1
2
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL
2LIGHT LEVEL COND
3TRIGGER CCD START
4CCD TRIGGER COND
5COMPUTER LINK OUT
&SERIAL OUTPUT
6SHUTTER SPEED
7STORE REF IMAGE
8UPPER MENU
CAM1(1~2) NO YES
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
REG.NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
BLOCK-00(MESR-0 CMR01)
1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R (287, 271) REG. DISP
1. Move the cursor to item 3 TRIGGER CCD START with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- Move the cursor to BIN or AVG-LIT-LVL with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
11-17
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
2. Move the cursor to item 4 CCD TRIGGER COND with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [CCD TRIGGERING] menu and a CCD trigger window will be displayed. The items
displayed will vary according to the setting in item 3 TRIGGER CCD START.
· When the binary method has been selected
4
5
6
7
8
11
· When the average light level method has
been selected
[CCD TRIGGERING]
[CCD TRIGGERING]
X＝08(4~32)×Y＝08(4~64)
1 SIZE 4
2 POSITION
(256,240)
5
3 THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100（0~255)
6
4 INVERT B/W
NO YES
5 UPPER MENU
8
X＝08(4~32)×Y＝08(4~64)
1 SIZE 2 POSITION
(256,240)
3 THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM−255 L.LM−100（0~255)
MES.AVE.GRYS=000.0
5 UPPER MENU
3. Press the SEL key to change the image display mode from the through mode to the freeze
mode, and capture an image.
4. Move the cursor to item 1 SIZE with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Set the CCD trigger window size.
- Select the height or width field with the left and right keys, set the height or width (pixel count)
with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
The window size (height, width) must be 4 to 32 and 4 to 64 respectively.
- The smaller the window size, the shorter the CCD trigger sampling cycle.
When the shutter speed is 1/4000 sec. and the window size is 8 x 8 pixels, the sampling cycle
is approx. 4 ms.
5. Move the cursor to item 2 POSITION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Set the position of the CCD trigger window.
- After determining the position with the direction keys, press the SET key.
6. Move the cursor to item 3 THRESHOLD VALUE with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
- Set the threshold values for the CCD trigger window.
- Select the upper or lower limit field with the left and right keys, set the threshold value (0 to
255) with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
7. When the binary method has been selected, move the cursor to item 4 INVERT B/W with
the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- Select "YES" or "NO" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
When "NO" is selected, the CCD trigger will trip when an image changes from black to white.
When "YES" is selected, the CCD trigger will trip when an image changes from white to black.
8. Move the cursor to item 5 UPPER MENU and press the SET key.
- Press the SET key again to store the settings in the IV-S20 flash memory.
11-4 Setting for serial communications
When “SERIAL” (general purpose serial) has been specified in item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I/F on the [I/O
SETTINGS] menu (page 11·1), and when “SERIAL” or “PC-LINK” has been specified in item 3
SERIAL OUTPUT the serial communication conditions must be set on the [SERIAL COMM.] menu.
· Set the items to match the communication conditions of the other device.
On the [I/O SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 8 SERIAL CONDITIONS and press the SET key.
[SERIAL COMM.]
1 COMM. STANDARD RS232C RS422: (4-W) RS422: (2-W)
2 BAUD RATE(kbps) 9.6 19.2 38.4 57.6 115.2 4.8
3 NO. OF DATA BITS 7BITS 8BITS
4 PARITY CHECK
EVEN ODD NO
5 NO. OF STOP BITS 1BITS 2BITS
6 TERMINATOR
CR CR+LF
7 UPPER MENU
11-18
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
11-5 Computer link
When PC-LINK has been specified in item 3 SERIAL OUTPUT on the [I/O SETTINGS] menu (page
11-1), the computer link conditions must be set on the [COMPUTER LINK] menu.
On the [I/O SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 9 COMPUTER LINK and press the SET key.
[COMPUTER LINK]
1 PC MANUFACTURER SHARP(COMM.PORT LNK-MDL) MITSUBISHI OMRON
2 STATION NUMBER 01
3 WRITE TOP ADDRESS
09000
6 UPPER MENU
Item
Setting range
Station No.
· Sharp: 00 to 37(8) *
· Mitsubishi: 00 to 31
· OMRON: 00 to 31
· Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write address
(max. 512 bytes) · Mitsubishi: D0000 to D9999
· OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
* In this book, octal notation is indicated by adding(8)
♦When MITSUBISHI is selected in 1 on the [COMPUTER LINK] menu
[COMPUTER LINK]
1 PC MANUFACTURER
2 STATION NUMBER
3 WRITE TOP ADDRESS
4 CONTROL PROCEDURE
5 BLOCK WRT COMMAND
6 UPPER MENU
SHARP(COMM.PORT LNK-MDL) MITSUBISHI OMRON
00
D0000
FORM1 FORM4
WW QW
Menu
Setting details
Select either FORM 1 or 4 for the control procedure.
4 CONTROL
PROCEDURE
FORM 1
No line terminator
FORM 4
With line terminators: “CR” + “LF”
· In version 2.01, only “FORM 1” was available.
Select either WW or QW for the block write command.
5 BLOCK WRT
COMMAND
WW
Data writing address range: D0000 to D1023
QW
Data writing address range: D000000 to D008191
· In version 2.01, only “WW” was available.
If SHARP or OMRON is selected, items 4 and 5 will not be displayed.
- See Chapter 14 "Computer Link" for applicable models made by these manufacturers.
Note 1: Use an even address as the write start address.
Note 2: When 512 bytes are used for a write register on a Sharp model, select a write start
address from the following addresses.
09000, 19000, 29000, 39000, 49000, 59000, 69000, 79000, 89000 , 99000
11-19
11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
11-6 Output block assignment
(Computer link output and general purpose serial output)
When measurement is controlled by a computer link or a communication interface (general purpose
serial IF: * 1), in addition to other block 0, blocks can be specified whose measurement data will be
output from the IV-S20 to a programmable controller or a personal computer.
* 1 In the case of a communication interface (general purpose serial IF), output blocks can be
specified only when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel IF signal and
the results are set by a general purpose serial IF signal. (See page 13-2.)
Enter item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT & SERIAL OUTPUT on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu to
specify selection. (see the next page.)
[1] Data in specified blocks
(1) In the case of a computer link
Data in the specified blocks will be output after the data (block 0) from measurement numbers 0 to
3 is output by the write register of the PC. (See page 14-3.)
[Write register map]
Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON
Result top write
address (* 2)
09000
09001
・
・
・
：
：
Result top write
address
+ 512 bytes
(* 2)
11
・
・
・
：
：
・
・
・
D0000
L
H
DM0000
・
・
・
Description
L Termination code
H Appended information
・
・
・
L
：
：
H
・
・
・
・
・
・
L Output data from measurement No. 3
H
(block 0)
・
・
・
・
・
・
L
：
：
H
・
・
・
・
・
・
L Data in a specified block
・
H
・
・
・
* 2 Set the result top write address in item 3 WRITE TOP ADDRESS on the [COMPUTER
LINK] menu. (See the preceding page.)
* 3 The top address to which the data in the specified blocks will be written is obtained by
adding 512 bytes to the result top write address.
- Setting examples for various manufacturers
Sharp
Mitsubishi OMRON
Result top write
address
09000
09300
D0000
DM0000
Top address of data
in specified blocks
19000
19300
D0256
DM0256
11-20
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
(2) When the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel I/F signal and the results
are output by a general purpose serial I/F signal
When the IV-S20 responds, data in a specified block is output after the output data (block 0) from
the measurement No. 0 to 3, in response to the measurement run command 2 (processing code
11(H)).
RC RC
(H) (L)
Y0 Y1
…
Measurement 0
Y15 Camera 1 Camera 2
Data from
Data from
Data from
measurement 1 measurement 2 measurement 3
data 2
data 2
data 2
Measurement 3
1 1
Measurement 2
:
Object Output evaluation
type
results
Measurement 1
1
■ Response
Measurement 0
Camera 1 Camera 2
data 2 data 2
Data in the
specified
block
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
- See page 13·5 for details about 1 and 2.
Note: The response returned by the measurement run command 2 (processing code 11(H)) will
not contain the specified block.
[2] Setting (operating) procedure
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND
and press the SET key.
- On the [OBJECT TYPE COND] menu, move the cursor to item t SYSTEM IN/OUT
and press the SET key.
1
[OBJECT TYPE I/O]
1MONITOR LIGHT LVL
2LIGHT LEVEL COND
3TRIGGER CCD START
4CCD TRIGGER COND
5COMPUTER LINK OUT
&SERIAL OUTPUT
6SHUTTER SPEED
7STORE REF IMAGE
8UPPER MENU
CAM1(1~2) NO YES
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
REG.NO YES(BIN AVG-LIT-LVL)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
BLOCK-00(MESR-O CMR01)
2
1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R (287, 271) REG. DISP
1. Move the cursor to item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT & SERIAL OUTPUT with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Enter the program No., camera No. and block No. of the measurement data to be output,
using the left, right, up and down keys.
- Specify a block number to be returned in addition to block 0 (00).
If block 00 is specified, data from block 00 will not be returned a second time.
3. After the settings are complete, press the SET key.
11-21
11
Setting the Input/Output Conditions
11-7 Gain/offset adjustment
The gain and offset of the IV-S20 can only be adjusted by our service engineers.
Users must not try to change them.
The data which can be adjusted is shown below for reference purpose only.
Generally, an image from the CCD camera can be optimized by adjusting the optical system, such as
the lens iris. To make fine adjustments, the IV-S20 is equipped with functions to adjust the offset and
gain of image signals from cameras 1 and 2 and the contrast on an external monitor screen.
- The gain and offset are adjusted by checking the display on the screen.
- The screen is kept in the through mode.
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu, move the cursor to item 3 I/O CONDITIONS
and press the SET key.
- On the [I/O SETTINGS] menu, move the cursor to item 0 GAIN OFFSET
and press the SET key.
[ADJUST GAIN&OFFSET]
1 CAM1 OFFSET ADJ.
2 CAMERA1 GAIN
3 CAM2 OFFSET ADJ.
4 CAMERA2 GAIN
5 ADJ. MON CONTRAST
6 UPPER MENU
+(↑) −(↓) (026)
+(↑) −(↓) (245)
+(↑) −(↓) (026)
+(↑) −(↓) (245)
+(↑) −(↓) (050)
Details of adjustment (selection)
Gain and offset adjustment
11
The average values are
displayed. Different models
use different values.
1 CAM1 OFFSET ADJ.
The offset for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
· The complete signal level is shifted leaving the amplitude of
the image signals from the CCD camera unchanged. As the
offset value is increased, the whole screen will becomes
more white.
2 CAMERA1 GAIN
The gain for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
· The amplitude of the image signals from the CCD camera is
changed. As the gain value is reduced, the screen will
become lighter, and as the gain value is increased, the
screen will become darker.
3 CAM2 OFFSET ADJ.
The offset for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
· The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item ①.
4 CAMERA2 GAIN
The gain for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys.
· The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item ②.
5 ADJ. MON CONTRAST
The monitor contrast is adjusted with the up and down keys.
· The intensity of image signals sent to the monitor is adjusted.
As the contrast value is increased, the contrast on the screen
will become stronger.
6 UPPER MENU
The screen will return to the [I/O SETTINGS] menu.
11-22
Other Settings and Operations
Chapter 12: Other Settings and Operations ([SYSTEM SET UP] menu)
12-1 Settings
[1] Change the Japanese or English display mode
The language used on the screen scan be set to Japanese or English.
[Operating procedure]
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
1
[設定ﾒｲﾝ画面]
1運転画面条件
（下位ﾒﾆｭｰ）
2品種別条件
（下位ﾒﾆｭｰ）
3入出力条件
（下位ﾒﾆｭｰ）
4ｶﾒﾗ取付調整
（下位ﾒﾆｭｰ）
5表示ﾓｰﾄﾞ :
JAPANESE ENGLISH
6全パラメータ受信 : 実行
7全初期化
実行
8自己診断
実行
9ﾌﾗｯｼｭﾒﾓﾘ保存
実行
0運転
2
1. Move the cursor to item 5 DISPLAY MODE (display mode) with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to JAPANESE or ENGLISH with the left and right keys.
3. When you change to another menu, it will be displayed in the selected language.
[Display example]
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
[SYSTEM SETUP] menu shown above in the English mode.
12-1
12
Other Settings and Operations
[2] Download all parameters
The IV-S20 can download a complete set of parameters (system I/O data and data about all object
types) from an identical IV-S20.
IV-S20
([SYSTEM SETUP] menu)
All parameters (system I/O data and data
about all object types) are downloaded.
IV-S20: Opposite side
([MAIN OPS MENU])
(1) Connections
Connections between IV-S20s are shown below.
Communication connectors on the IV-S20
(RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub)
Communication connectors on the IV-S20
(RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub)
Function
Pin NO.
Signal name
FG
Frame ground
Connector shield
FG
Frame ground
RD
Received data
2
RD
Received data
3
SD
Transmitted
data
3
SD
Transmitted
data
5
SG
Signal ground
5
SG
Signal ground
Pin NO.
Signal name
Connector shield
2
1
FL1
6
FL2
Memory protection 1
Memory protection 2
1
FL1
6
FL2
Function
Memory protection 1
Memory protection 2
* (RS-232C)
* The maximum length of the communication cable depends on the communication speed.
Communication speed (k bps)
9.6, 19.2
38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Cable length
15 m max.
2 to 3 m
* Conduct a communication test before
using the moduleto transfer data.
(2) Operating procedure
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
12
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to item 6 RECEIVING PARMS (receive all parameters) with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key.
- Communication with the connected IV-S20 will be started, and the progress of communication will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
COMMUNICATING
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE DATA ■■■□□□□□□□□□□□□□
After all of the parameters have been downloaded from the connected IV-S20, the message
COMMUNICATING (sending data) will change to COMM COMPLETE (complete sending
data).
Note: Perform the operation above with the [MAIN OPS MENU] displayed on the target IVS20.
12-2
Other Settings and Operations
[3] Total initialization
When you newly set conditions, it is recommended that you first initialize the settings. The following
conditions should be initialized.
- All conditions
- Measurement conditions for each
measurement program number
This section
See Item [8], "Initialization (edit)," in section 9-2.
- Measurement conditions for each
object type number
The total initialization function initializes all of the conditions for each object type (all object types),
input/output conditions, camera position adjustment, and display mode.
- The data stored in the flash memory and the data in the monitor display memory (RAM) are initialized
(returned to their initial state).
[Operating procedure]
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to item 7 INIT ALL PARMS (initialize all parameters) with the up and down
keys, and press the SET key.
2. Press the SET key again. (Press the ESC key to abort initialization.)
-Initialization will start, and the progress of the initialization will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
INITIALIZING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■■■■■■
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE DATA ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□
When initialization is complete, the message "INITIALIZING" (initializing) will change to
"INIT COMPLETE" (complete initialization).
12-3
12
Other Settings and Operations
[4] Saving to flash memory
All the data entered on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu and sub-menus (OPS MENU SETTING, OBJECT
TYPE COND, I/O CONDITIONS, and ADJ.CAM POSITION menus) are saved in the IV-S20 flash
memory.
- If the power is disconnected from the IV-S20 main housing, or if the object type number is
changed before the data is saved in the flash memory, the data will be deleted.
[Operating procedure]
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
1
[SYSTEM SET UP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
1. Move the cursor to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM. (save data in flash memeory) with the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
2. Press the SET key.
- The data saving will start, and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMAGE ■■■□□□□□
SYSTEM I/O
□
OBJECT TYPE DATA □
12
When the data has been saved in the IV-S20 flash memmory, the display will change from
"SAVING" (saving) to "SAVING COMPLETE" (complete saving).
Note:
- If the ESC key is pressed, the set data entered will not be saved in the IV-S20 flash memory.
In this case, if the power to the IV-S20 main housing is turned OFF, or if the object type No. is
changed, the data will be deleted.
- The set data you have entered can be saved in the IV-S20 flash memory by moving the cursor to item
0 OPERATIONS on the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu and pressing the SET key.
12-4
Other Settings and Operations
12-2 Maintenance
[1] Camera position adjustment
This function facilitates adjustment of the camera position and direction with respect to the object
being measured and the lens aperture when a camera is replaced or when a camera is dislocated. By
using this function, you will need not to adjust the settings for the measurement conditions, such as the
window position, one by one.
(1) Adjusting method
Differences in size, position or brightness between two binary images, before and after a camera is
replaced or a camera is dislocated, will be displayed as a white image.
When the adjustment is complete, the image is displayed as black.
[Display examples]
Image before a camera is replaced
- When the camera conditions
are completely identical
(No white area)
- When the image position
has changed
- When the size has changed
(Position deviation: White area)
(Size difference: White area)
To make a fine adjustment, the camera position can be adjusted by comparing the fillet diameters,
centers of gravity, and average light levels before and after a camera is replaced or a camera is
dislocated.
(2) Adjustment items and methods
Item
Method
Differential image
Size
Position
Brightness
○
○
○
Fillet diameter
○
Center of gravity
Average light level
12
○: Adjustable
○
○
12-5
Other Settings and Operations
(3) Operating procedure
On the [ADJ. CAM POSITION] (camera position adjustment) menu, store the data needed for
later adjustment (before a camera is replaced or dislocated), and then adjust the camera position
(after the camera is replaced or dislocated).
Storing the data needed for adjustment (before a camera is replaced or dislocated)
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM SET UP] menu, move the cursor to item 4 ADJ. CAM POSITION (camera position
adjustment) and press the SET key.
-On the [ADJ. CAM POSITION] menu, set item 1SELECT A CAMERA to YES.
[ADJ. CAM POSITION]
1
6
2~4
7
5
12
1SELECT A CAMERA CAM1(1~2) NO YES
2WINDOW POSITION MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
3THRESHOLD VALUE U.LM-255 L.LM-100(0~255)
4INVERT B/W
NO YES
5AREA FILTER
000000 PIXEL LOWER LIMIT
6DISP DEG OF MATCH (SET KEY)
7INTIAL CAM IMG
REG.
LABL10
8IMG AFTR CAM CHNG (SET KEY)
9DISPLAY LABELS
LABL00 BER.CHG AFT.CHG
GRAVTY X 310.0
GRAVTY Y 220.0
FILLET X 040
FILLET Y 032
AV-L.LVL 100.5
0UPPER MENU
When the data has been
stored (the SET key is
pressed), the number of
labels will be displayed.
1. Set the image conditions for adjustment before replacement (window position and threshold
value after binary conversion).
- Set these conditions in items 2,3 and 4 on the [ADJ. CAM POSITION] (camera position
adjustment) menu. (Set the conditions in the freeze display mode.)
Store all of the conditions
2. Store a binary image for rough adjustment.
3. Store the characteristic parameters
by going to item 7 on
(center of gravity and fillet diameter) of a binary image
the [ADJ. CAM
for dimensional and positional adjustment.
POSITION] menu.
4. Store the average light level for brightness adjustment.
(Store them in the freeze
display mode.)
5. You can check the stored values for center of gravity, fillet diameter and average light level in
item 9.
6. If the number of labels exceeds the maximum number of labels which can be stored 32, use an
area filter.
7. You can check the centers of gravity, fillet diameters and average light levels of each label from
No. 1 up to the maximum number, using the up and down keys.
Go to the next page
12-6
Other Settings and Operations
From the preceding page
Adjusting the camera position (after the camera is replaced or dislocated)
Start
Adjusting the camera position/direction
Adjusting the lens aperture *
Rough
adjustment
Exists.
White area in the differential image
8. Press the SET key on item 6
DISP DEG OF MATCH
None
Adjusting the camera position/direction *
Mismatch
Adjustment of size
(comparison of fillet diameters)
Match
Adjusting the camera position/direction *
Detailed
adjustment
Mismatch
Adjustment of position
(comparison of the centers of gravity)
9. Compare the values before and
after the camera is replaced,
which are shown in item 9
DISPLAY LABELS
Match
Adjusting the lens aperture *
Mismatch
Adjustment of brightness
(comparison of average light level)
Match
End
* Adjust these parameters using the following procedure.
Enter the through display mode
12
Adjust each parameter (adjust the camera and lens).
Enter the freeze display mode.
10. Store the image after replacing the camera by pressing the SET key in item 8 IMG
AFTR CAM CHNG on the [ADJ. CAM POSITION] menu.
[ADJ. CAM POSITION]
8
10
9
6DISP DEG OF MATCH (SET KEY)
7INTIAL CAM IMG
REG.
LABL10
8IMG AFTR CAM CHNG (SET KEY)
9DISPLAY LABELS
LABL00 BER.CHG AFT.CHG
GRAVITY X 310.
292.0
GRAVITY Y 220.0
219.0
FILLET X
040
040
FILLET Y
040
032
AV-L.LVL
100
100.0
0UPPER MENU
12-7
Other Settings and Operations
[2] Self-diagnosis
The IV-S20 can check all of its own hardware, to ensure that it is operating normally.
(1) Diagnostic items and methods
Item
Object
Method
VRAM
Memory
Read after write
SDRAM
Measurement conditions
System program
Flash memory
Checksum
(2) Operating procedure
On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to SET-SCRN, and press the SET key.
1
[SYSTEM SETUP]
1OPS MENU SETTING
2OBJECT TYPE COND
3I/O CONDITIONS
4ADJ. CAM POSITION
5DISPLAY MODE
6RECEIVING PARMS
7INIT ALL PARMS
8SELF DIAGNOSTICS
9SAVE IN FLASH MEM
0OPERATIONS
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
JAPANESE ENGLISH
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
12
Order of diagnosis
1. Move the cursor to item 8 SELF DIAGNOSTICS with the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- The [SELF DIAGNOSITICS] menu will be displayed, and each item will be checked. If the
result of each diagnosis is normal, "OK" will be displayed. If the result is abnormal, "NG" will
be displayed. If any abnormality occurs, consult our service center.
Example of the display if
abnormalities are found
[SELF DIAGNOSTICS]
VRAM-CHECK:
SDRAM-CHECK:
FROM(TYPE)CHECK:
FROM(PROG.)CHECK:
NG
NG
NG ERROR TYPE2 *
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
[HIT ANY KEY]
2
* In the FROM(TYPE)CHECK (object type check), the conditions are
checked in the order of the object type numbers (00 _ 01_ ... _15). If
an abnormality is found, the corresponding object type number will be
displayed, and the next FROM(PROG.)CHECK (program check) will
be started without checking the conditions of the remaining object
types.
2. Press any key on the remote key pad, and the screen will return to the [SYSTEM SETUP] menu.
12-8
Communication
Chapter 13: Communication (General Purpose Serial Interface)
The IV-S20 can communicate with a personal computer that transmits commands and receives responses to
measurement execution commands.
13-1 List of processing functions
The following functions can be used for communication between the IV-S20 and a personal
computer (using the general-purpose serial interface).
Processing function
Measurement execution
*
1
Setting operation screen
Result reading
*
2
Measurement execution
function 1 (evaluation result)
Measurement execution
function 2 (evaluation result +
measurement data, fixed)
Measurement execution
function 3 (evaluation result +
measurement numerical data)
Measurement execution function
4 (evaluation result + logical
result and calculation result)
Measurement execution
function 5 (evaluation result)
Measurement execution
function 6 (evaluation result +
measurement data, fixed)
Measurement execution
function 7 (evaluation result +
measurement numerical data)
Measurement execution function
8 (evaluation result + logical
result and calculation result)
Measurement data
Processing
code
10
11
12
13
18
19
1A
1B
Reading 1
21
Reading 2
22
Reading 3
23
Illumination reading
28
Corrected light level reading
29
Operation lock status
Object type number
Output image camera
Read
50
Set
Read
51
54
Assign
55
Read
Set
58
59
Description
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result and the
measurement data in block 0.
Executes measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result and
measurement data from a specified block.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result, logical
result and calculation result.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result and
measurement data in block 0.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result and
measurement data from a specified block.
Executes a measurement for a specified object
type, and outputs the evaluation result, logical
result and calculation result.
Reads the results of the last measurement
(measurement data from block 0).
Reads the result of the last measurement
(evaluation result and measurement data from a
specified block).
Reads the result (logical result and calculation
result) of the last evaluation.
Reads the amount of illumination measured by
the lighting monitor function, and the evaluation
result.
Reads the corrected light level measured by the
lighting monitor function, evaluation result and
preset reference density.
Read lock/unlock condition of the operation
screen
Set lock/unlock for the operation screen
Read object type number to measure.
Used to assign an object type using the
general-purpose serial I/O.
Read camera number set for output.
Set camera number for output.
13-1
Ref.
page
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13
13-11
13-12
Communication
Processing function
Processing
code
Description
Ref.
page
Set all set condition to initial values (including
I/O settings, and system setting area).
Set measurement conditions of the assigned
Initialize measurement conditions
61
objec type to initial values.
Initialize reference image
62 Clear reference image data.
13-13
Set I/O conditions to inital values (including I/O
Initialize I/O conditions
63
settings, and system setting area).
Initialize system
64 Set the system conditions to the initial values.
Self diagnostic
68 Check hardware error.
Read out the coordinates for manual
Reading
70
measurement (detection point 0 and 1)
Manual measurement
13-14
coordinates
Assign the coordinates for manual
Setting
71
measurement (detection point 0 and 1)
*1 Measurement execution functions 1 to 4 can be executed when the MEAS TRIG INP I/F
(measurement start input I/F) is the SERIAL (general-purpose serial interface).
However, with the measurement execution 2, If the measurement start input I/F
has been set to CCD-TRIG (CCD trigger (camera 1)) or PARALLEL (parallel), the
IV-S20 only processes responses.
*2 Measurement execution functions 5 to 8 can be executed when the MEAS TRIG INP I/F
(measurement start input I/F) has been set to the CCD-TRIG (CCD trigger (camera 1))
and is controlled by sampled start instructions.
*3 When you want to change the object type using processing code (10 to 13, 18 to 1B), object
type change time is included in the measurement excecution time display on the monitor.
*4 Initialize both the stored data and the currently monitored data.
60
Initialization*4
Initialize all parameters
13
13-2
Communication
13-2 Data flow
The data flow between the IV-S20 and a personal computer is shown below.
[1] When the measurement execution processing code is 10, 11, 12 or 13
(1) Data flow when the measurement is started and the output of the results are controlled by
a general-purpose serial I/F signal
Measuring
(for each object type)
IV-S20
1 Receiving a command
Personal
computer
2 Transmitting a response
(measurement data and
judgment)
(2) Data flow when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel I/F signal and the
output of the evaluation results are controlled by a general purpose serial I/F signal
Measuring
(for each object type)
IV-S20
1 Inputting a trigger
CCD camera or
programmable controller
2 Transmitting a response Personal computer or
programmable controller
(measurement data and
judgment)
- A response block can be specified in the settings on the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu. (See page
11·21.)
[2] When the measurement execution processing code is 18, 19, 1A or 1B
Measuring
(for each object type)
IV-S20
1 Start sampling
2
CCD camera
3 Transmitting
a response
(measurement data and
judgment)
Personal computer
(sending a command) or
programmable controller
(parallel input)
Personal computer or
programmable controller
[3] Processing other than measurement execution processing
Any processing can be executed, irrespective of the input/output settings (measurement start input
and result output)
IV-S20
Processing
1 Receiving a command
Personal
computer
2 Transmitting a response
(results, etc.)
13-3
13
Communication
13-3 Communication format
The communication formats of the commands and responses between the IV-S20 and a personal
computer are outlined below.
Ë Command
SC CR
: ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC
Header
H L
*1
Processing
code
Terminator
*3
*1
Text
Checksum code
Ë Response
＊ ＊ RC
RC
＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
:
Header
H L
H L
*2
Termination
*1
code
Processing
code
*1
Terminator
Text
*3
Checksum code
*1 Processing code and text
- They depend on the contents of communication. (See pages 13-1 and 13-6 and after.)
- On abnormal termination, no text is provided.
*2 Termination code
The termination code is a 2-digit hexadecimal number.
- When an output is sent through the general purpose serial I/F, 00(H) is sent on normal termination.
- On abnormal termination, a code other than 00(H) is sent. (See page 15-3.)
*3 Checksum code (SCH and SCL)
To improve the reliability of the transmitted data, in addition to a parity check, error detection
by a checksum is used for error detection.
When the IV-S20 does not need to complete a checksum for error detection, use an @ (at
sign: ASCII code 40(H)) in each of the checksum codes SCH and SCL included in the command.
[Error detection using a checksum]
The ASCII code for each data byte, from the processing code to the end of text (prior to the
checksum code), is added. The final value is compared to the checksum code which is
treated the same way. If the two values are identical, the command is considered to be
valid. I/F they are not identical, an error has occurred during transmission.
Value increment range for
checksum
Ë Command
Header
:
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ............... ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
H L
Processing
Text
code
Value increment range for
checksum
Terminator
Checksum code
Ë Response
: ＊ ＊ RC
RC
＊ ＊ .............. ＊ ＊ SC SC CR
H L
Header
13
H L
Termination
code
Processing
code
13-4
Text
Terminator
Checksum code
Communication
[Method for creating a checksum code]
The ASCII code for each byte of data, from the processing code to the end of text (prior to
the checksum code) is added together. The lower 1 byte of this sum is divided into the
upper 4 bits and the low-order 4 bits. The hex character (0 to F) is converted to the ASCII
code for that character and sent as one byte. Thus the checksum code consists of two
bytes.
Ex. 1 Command for the measurement
execution function 1 (code 10(H))
:
1
0
0
1 C 2 CR
Ex. 2 Command for the measurement
execution function 7 (code 1A(H))
:
1 A 1
6
4
0
ASCLII data
Checksum
code : C2
1
6 E CR
ASCLII data
1.................31
0.................30
0.................30
1.................31
C2
Checksum
code : 6E
1.................31
A................41
1.................31
6.................36
4.................34
0.................30
1.................31
16E
Note
· This manual uses the following notation to represent addresses and set values.
Octal numberI ......................... (8)
Ex. 377(8)
Decimal number ...................... None
Hexadecimal number ............. (H)
Ex. 255
Ex. FF(H)
13
13-5
Communication
13-4 Processing functions
[1] Measurement execution functions
(1) Measurement execution function 1 (evaluation result): code 10(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the data obtained is compared
with the criteria. Then the evaluation result (OK/NG) is output.
Ë Command
Object
:
1 0 type SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Note: When the measurement start input signal is other than tha general-purpose serial I/F signal, a
command is not required.
Ë Response
:
1 0 SC SC
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Y0 Y1
…
Y15 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
(2) Measurement execution function 2 (evaluation result + measurement data, fixed): code 11(H)
The measurement for the specified object type is executed, and evaluation result (OK/NG) and
the measurement data in block 0 from each measurement program are output. See pages 13-15
to 13-25 for details about the measurement data blocks.
When the measurement start input signal is other than the general purpose serial I/F signal, a
fixed response to the code 11(H) is returned.
Ë Command
Object
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
RC RC
(H) (L)
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Camera 2
: 1 2
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Measurement 0
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
1
Ë Response
Camera 1
: 1 1
Measurement 0
Camera 1 Camera 2
data 2 data 2
Data on Data on Data on
measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 (H) (L)
13
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 1 _ Measurement programs 0 to 3
Measurement 0 ............. [0 = none, 1 = positional deviation/absolute position measurement]
(camera 1 and camera 2)
Measurement 1 to 3 ... 0 = none, 2 = shape and size comparison, 3 = distance/angle
measurement (gray/edge), 4 = distance/angle measurement (center
of gravity), 5 = lead inspection, 6 = area measurement after binary
conversion, 7 = object counting after binary conversion, 8 = label
measurement after binary conversion, 9 = existence detection with a
point measurement
- 2 _ Measurement data
The measurement programs vary in terms of the data they produce. Only the data in block 0 of
each measurement program is output. If the registration for a measurement program has been
set to "NO," there is no data for that measurement, and the data from the next measurement
number is brought forward.
[Ex.] An example of the measurement 0 of object type 01 (camera 1: positional deviation/
absolute position measurement) is given below.
Command:
1 1 0 1 C 3 CR
Object type
Processing code
13-6
Communication
Response： 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Object type
Output evaluation result
Setting for measurement
Termination code
number 0 (camera 1) =
positional deviation/absolute
Processing code
position measurement
0 6 4 0 0 6 E 0 0 D 9 8 0 6 9 0 0 0 0 0 8 E
X coordinate of
1st point
Y coordinate of 1st point
Measurement number 0
(camera 2), no setting
for measurement numbers
1 to 3
C R
Angular deviation
Y coordinate of 2nd point
X coordinate of 2nd point
The coordinates of the 1st and 2nd points are determined as follows, based on the values
contained in the response, and the angular deviation is 0°.
Values (hexadecimal)
in response
Pixel coordinates
(decimal)
X coordinate Y coordinate X coordinate Y coordinate
640
6E0
160.0
176.0
D98
690
348.0
168.0
(3) Measurement execution function 3 (evaluation result + measurement numerical data): code 12(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the evaluation result (OK/NG) of
each measurement function and data in a specified measurement block are output. See pages
13-15 to 13-25 for details about the measurement data blocks.
■ Command
· Objeact type _ Object type for which the measurement
Object
was executed: 00 to 15
Block
type
SC SC CR · Measurement _ Number of the measurement whose
: 1 2
(H) (L)
numerical data will be output: 0 to 3
· Block _ Specified block from which the data of a
■ Response
specified measurement function will be output
(except block 50).
Object Output evaluation
Specified
result
: 1 2 RC RC type Y0 Y1 … Y15 block data SC SC CR
Measurement
Coordinates of 1st point
Coordinates of 2nd point
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Camera 2
1 3 RC RC
Measurement 0
Camera 1
:
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
Measurement
· Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
· Specified block data _ Numerical data in a specified block (up to 512 bytes)
(4) Measurement execution function 4 (evaluation result + logical result and calculation result):
code 13(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed. Among the measurement results, the
evaluation results (OK/NG) of output (Y0 to 15) and the ON/OFF state of the auxiliary relays (C0
to 127) are output. Among the results of the numerical calculations for each measure- ment, the
evaluation results and the calculation results of calculations N0 to N15 are output.
· Object type _ Object type for which the measurement
■ Command
was executed: 00 to 15
Object
·
Measurement
_
Number of the measurement whose
SC SC CR
: 1 3 type
numerical
data will be output: 0 to 3
(H) (L)
· 1 _ The same as on the preceding page
1
■ Response
Auxiliary relay Data 2 of the
easurement
C0 .... C127 m
No. specified by SC SC CR
the command (H) (L)
· Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
· Auxiliary relay (C0 to C127)_ 00: OFF, 01: ON
· Data 2 for the measurement No. specified by the command (evaluation result and calculation
result of the numerical calculation)
[When measurement No. 0 is specified]
Camera 1
Camera 2
Calculation N0
Judgment Result
(2-digit) (8-digit)
Calculation N15 Calculation N0
Calculation N15
Judgment Result Judgment Result
(2-digit) (8-digit) (2-digit) (8-digit)
Judgment Result
(2-digit) (8-digit)
[When measurement No. 1, 2 or 3 is specified]
Judgment (2-digit) _ 00: NG, 01: OK
Calculation N15
Calculation N0
Result (8-digit): Hexadecimal number
Judgment Result
Judgment Result
(Data “0” is entered for unregistered calculation numbers
(2-digit) (8-digit)
(2-digit) (8-digit)
from N0 to N15.)
13-7
13
Communication
(5) Measurement execution functions 5, 6, 7 and 8: codes 18(H), 19(H), 1A(H) and 1B(H)
The measurement execution functions 5 to 8 can be processed when the measurement is started
by a CCD trigger (camera 1) and is controlled by start sampled instructions. The contents of the
commands and responses are the same as those for the measurement run functions 1 to 4, except
for the processing code.
1. Measurement execution function 5 (evaluation result): code 18(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the data obtained is compared with
the criteria, and the evaluation result (OK/NG) is output.
Ë Command
Object
type
: 1 8
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
: 1 8 RC RC
Object Output evaluation
result
type
...
Y0 Y1
Y15 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
- The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement
execution function 1 (code 10(H)).
2. Measurement execution function 6 (evaluation result + measurement data, fixed): code 19(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the evaluation result (OK/NG) and
measurement data obtained from each measurement function are output.
Ë Command
Object
: 1 9 type SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Camera 2
1 9
Camera 1
:
Object Output evaluation
result
SC SC type
... Y15
(H) (L)
Y0 Y1
Measure-\
ment 0
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
1
Ë Response
Measurement 0
Camera 1 Camera 2
data 2 data 2
Data on Data on Data on
measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 (H) (L)
- The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement
execution function 2 (code 11(H)).
3. Measurement execution function 7 (evaluation result + measurement numerical data): code 1A(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the evaluation result (OK/NG) of
each measurement function and the data from a specified measurement block are output.
Ë Command
Object
Block
type
SC SC CR
: 1 A
Measurement
13
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
1 A
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Specified
block data
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
- The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement
execution function 3 (code 12(H)).
13-8
Communication
Object
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
RC RC
(H) (L)
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Camera 2
: 1 B
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Measurement 0
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
1
Ë Response
Camera 1
: 1 B
Measurement
4. Measurement execution function 8 (evaluation result + logical result and
calculation result): code 1B(H)
The measurement for a specified object type is executed, and the evaluation result from the
measurement results, the logical results and the calculation results of each measurement are
output.
Ë Command
Auxiliary relay Data 2 of the
easurement
C0 .... C127 m
No. specified by SC SC CR
the command (H) (L)
- The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement
execution function 4 (code 13(H)).
[2] Result reading
Data from the last measurement is read. (No instruction is sent to execute an operation.)
See pages 13-15 to 13-25 for details about the measurement data blocks.
(1) Measurement data reading function 1 (fixed measurement data): code 21(H)
The final evaluation result, based on the results of the last measurement, and the data in block 0,
which comes from the measurement functions specified for measurement numbers 0 to 3, are
output.
Ë Command
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
:
2 1
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Measurement 0
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
①
Ë Response
Camera 2
2 1
Camera 1
:
Measurement 0
Camera 1 Camera 2
data ②
data ②
Data on Data on Data on
measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
ment 1 ② ment 2 ② ment 3 ② (H) (L)
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 1 _ Measurement functions 0 to 3
Measurement function 0 .... [0 = none, 1 = positional deviation/absolute position measurement]
Measurement functions 1 to 3 ... 0 = none, 2 = shape and size comparison, 3 = distance/angle
measurement (gray/edge), 4 = distance/angle measurement
(center of gravity), 5 = lead inspection, 6 = area measurement
after binary conversion, 7 = object counting after binary
conversion, 8 = label measurement after binary conversion, 9
= existence detection with a point measurement
- 2 _ Measurement data
The measurement functions vary in terms of the data they produce. Only the data in block 0 is
output from the complete output data produced by each measurement function.
13-9
13
Communication
Measurement
(2) Measurement data reading function 2 (measurement numerical data): code 22(H)
The data last output and block data from a specified measurement function are output.
Ë Command
: 2 2
Block
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
: 2 2
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Y0 Y1
Y15
…
Specified
block data
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
- Measurement _ Number of the measurement whose numerical data will be output: 0 to 3
- Block _ Specified block from which the data from a specified measurement function will be
output
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- Specified block data _ Numerical data in a specified block (up to 512 bytes)
(3) Measurement data reading function 3 (evaluation result + logical result and calculation
result): code 23(H)
The most recent final evaluation result, and the logical result and final calculation result of each
measurement are read.
Ë Command
Object
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
:
2 3
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object Output evaluation
result
type
Y0 Y1
…
Y15
Measurement 0
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
Measurement 3
1
Ë Response
Camera 2
2 3
Camera 1
:
Measurement 0
Camera 1 Camera 2
data 2 data 2
Data on Data on Data on
measure- measure- measure- SC SC CR
ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 (H) (L)
- Measurement _ Number of the measurement whose numerical data will be output: 0 to 3
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Output evaluation result (Y0 to Y15) _ 0: NG or unspecified, 1: OK
- 2 _ Logical result, calculation evaluation, calculation result
These data are output in the order of the measurement function numbers: 0 to 3.
Ë Command
:
Camera No.
2 8
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
2 8
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object
type
Result
13
(4) Illuminance level reading: code 28(H)
The illuminance level measured by the illuminance monitor function and the evaluation result are
read.
Illuminance
SC SC CR
102 101 100 10-1 (H) (L)
- Camera No. _ 1: camera 1, 2: camera 2
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Result _ 0: NG, 1: OK
- Illuminance _ 0 to 255.0
13-10
Communication
(5) Corrected light level reading: code 29(H)
The corrected light level measured by the illuminance monitor function, the evaluation result and
preset reference light level are read.
:
Camera No.
Ë Command
2 9
- Camera No. _ 1: camera 1, 2: camera 2
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
:
2 9
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object
type
Result
Ë Response
Corrected
Reference
light level
light level
SC SC CR
± 102 101 100 10-1102 101 100 10-1 (H) (L)
- Object type _ Object type for which the measurement was executed: 00 to 15
- Result _ 0: NG, 1: OK
- Corrected light level _ Corrected light level (±0 to 255.0)
- Reference light level _ Light level used as the criterion (0 to 255.0)
13
13-11
Communication
[3] Setting, initialization, self-diagnosis, and manual measurement coordinate of the operation screen
Shown below are only the instructions and responses of these processing functions.
Process function
Process
code
Communication format
Ë Command
:
Read
operation
screen lock
50
5 0
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
1_Lock operation screen
:
5 0
RC RC 1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
0: Lock
1: Unlock
Ë Command
1_Lock operation screen
Set
operation
screen lock
status
:
51
5 1
1 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
0: Lock
1: Unlock
Ë Response
:
5 1
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
:
54
Setting operation screen
Read object
type number
5 4
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
5 4
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Command
:
Assign object
type number
55
Object
type
5 5
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
5 5
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
13
:
Read out
image camera
condition
58
5 8
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
5 8
RC RC 1 2 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
(H) (L)
1_Camera 1
2_Camera 2
Ë Command
:
Set output
image camera
condition
59
5 9
1 2 SC SC CR
(H) (L)
1_Camera 1
2_Camera 2
Ë Response
:
5 9
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
13-12
0: No
1: All
2: Upper
3: Middle
4: Lower
0: No
1: All
2: Upper
3: Middle
4: Lower
Communication
Process function
Process
code
Communication format
Ë Command
:
Initialize all
parameters
60
6 0
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 0
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
:
Initialize
measurement
conditions
61
Object
type
6 1
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 1
RC RC
(H) (L)
Object
type SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Command
:
62
Setting operation screen
Initialize
reference
image
6 2
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 2
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
:
Initialize I/O
conditions
63
Object
type
6 3
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 3
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
:
Initialize
system
64
6 4
Object
type
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 4
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
Ë Command
:
Self diagnositc
68
6 8
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Ë Response
:
6 8
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
13-13
13
Communication
Process function Process
code
Communication format
Command
Reading
:
70
7 0
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
Response
:
7 0
RC RC
(H) (L)
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
X coordinate (000 to 511) for detect point 0
Y coordinate (000 to 479) for detect point 0
X coordinate (000 to 511) for detect point 1
Y coordinate (000 to 479) for detect point 1
Manually
measured
points
Command
Assignment
:
71
SC SC CR
(H) (L)
7 1
X coordinate (000 to 511) for detect point 0
Y coordinate (000 to 479) for detect point 0
X coordinate (000 to 511) for detect point 1
Y coordinate (000 to 479) for detect point 1
Response
;
7 1
RC RC SC SC CR
(H) (L) (H) (L)
- The coordinates for detect points 0 and 1 correspond to the detect coordinates 0
and 1 used in manual measurements. => See page 8-8.
13
13-14
Communication
13-5 Measurement data blocks
[1] Number of blocks
The measurement functions vary in the number of measurement data blocks they use.
Measurement function
Blocks
Positional deviation/absolute
position measurement
Size and shape comparison
Distance/angle measurement
Lead inspection
Area measurement by
binary conversion
Counting quantities by
binary conversion
Object identification (labeling)
by binary conversion
Existance detection by
point measuremet
Final numerical calculation
result
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1, 2
0, 1
0
0
0, 1, 10 to 13, 20 to 23, 30 to 33, 40 to 43, 60 to 77
Binary conversion−−−0
Average light level−−−0, 1
50,51
[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function)
(1) Positional deviation/absolute position measurement
Block
0
No. of Decimal point
(digit)
Sign (+/-) digits
X
None
4
1
1st point
(center coordinates)
Y
None
4
1
Registration 2nd point
X
None
4
1
No. 0
(center coordinates)
Y
None
4
1
Provided *
4
1
Angular deviation
Registration The registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 7 registration No. 0.
Item
* When a sign is provided, if the highest-order bit of the data is on (1), a "-" minus sign is used,
and if the bit is off (0), a "+" pulus sign is used. The value (decimal) is expressed two's complement notation. (A two's complement number is obtained by inverting the 0s and 1s in a binary
number and adding 1.)
Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
[Example of the data in block 0: Only registration No. 0]
0 8 2 0 0 5 2 8 0 F A 0 0 E B 0 F F 7 6
Angular
X
Y
X
Y
deviation
Center coordinates Center coordinates
of 1st point
of 2st point
13
Registration No. 0
- These data are in hexadecimal. They are converted to the actual decimal measurements as shown
below.
Measurement
result (value)
Data
(hexadecimal)
Decimal
number
Center coordinates X
of 1st point
Y
820
2080
208.0
528
1320
132.0
Center coordinates X
of 2nd point
Y
FA0
4000
400.0
EB0
3760
376.0
Angular deviation
FF76
−138
−13.8
13-15
Communication
Block
Sign
(+/-)
Item
Mode
None
Evaluation: Angular deviation
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
4
None
01
OK
1st point
Provided
4
None
1B18
6936
2nd point
Provided
8
None
0D55
3413
−
8
−
00000000
−
X
None
2
None
01
OK
Y
None
2
None
01
OK
X
None
2
None
01
OK
Y
None
2
None
01
OK
X Provided
4
1
0122
29.0
Y Provided
4
1
0052
13.0
X Provided
4
1
FCEA
-78.9
Y Provided
4
1
0370
88.0
Evaluation:
Degree of match
Evaluation:
X coordinate
Evaluation:
Y coordinate
1
Registration
No. 0
*
No.
Data
example
Decimal
of point (digit) HexaMeasuredigits
decimal ment result
2-point
02
None
2
search
Degree of match
Reserved area
1st point
Evaluation:
Deviation
2nd
point
1st point
Deviation
2nd
point
Registration Registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 7 registration No. 0.
* The values shown in the data example column have been converted the same way as wad
done in example of the data in block 0.
Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
13
13-16
Communication
(2) Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Block
0
No. of Decimal
Sign (+/-) digits point (digit)
Item
Registration
Degree of match (positioning)
No. 0
Provided
None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
Block
No. of Decimal
Sign (+/-) digits point (digit)
Item
Degree of match of measured
object
Registration
No. 0
Provided
4
None
Position coordinates
(positioning)
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
Position coordinates
(measuring object)
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
None
2
None
None
2
None
Positioning
Evaluation:
Degree of match Measured object
1
4
Evaluation:
Position
coordinates
Evaluation:
Light level
Light level
Positioning
X
None
2
None
Y
None
2
None
Measured
object
X
None
2
None
Y
None
2
None
Positioning
None
2
None
Measured object
None
2
None
Positioning
None
4
None
Measured object
None
4
None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
13
13-17
Communication
(3) Distance and angle measurement
Block
0
Item
No. of
Decimal
digits point (digit)
Sign (+/-)
Registration Size measurement: Distance
No. 0
Size measurement: Angle
None
8
1
Provided
4
1
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
Block
1
Item
No. of
Decimal
digits point (digit)
Sign (+/-)
Registration Measurement
start point
No. 0
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
Registration Registration No. 1 to 63 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 63 No. 0.
Block
Sign (+/-)
Item
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Distance
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Angle
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Start point
Evaluation:
Auxiliary point
2
Registration
No. 1 to 63
Registration No. 0
Registration
No. 1 to 15
X coorRegistra- dinate
tion No. 0 Y coorAuxiliary point
dinate
Registration
No. 1 to 15
13
Evaluation:
Degree of
match
Registration No. 0
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Degree of
match
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Number of labels
None
Decimal
point (digit)
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 63 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
4
1
None
4
1
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
Provided
4
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
13-18
No. of
digits
2
None
Communication
(4) Lead inspection
Block
0
Item
Reference
No. 0
Reference
No. 1 to 3
Block
Quantity at center point
Line
No. 1 to 7
Line No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No. 0.
Reference No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No. 0.
Item
Sign (+/-)
Line
No. 1 to 7
No. of Decimal
digits point (digit)
Evaluation: Quantity
None
2
None
Evaluation: Distance
None
2
None
Distance: Shortest
None
4
1
Distance: Longest
None
4
1
The lead number
with an NG distance
None
2
None
None
2
None
None
2
None
Lead length: Shortest
None
4
1
Lead length: Longest
None
4
1
None
2
None
None
2
None
Number of leads
with NG distance
Evaluation: Lead length
The lead number with
an NG length
Number of leads with
NG length
Reference
No. 0
Line No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No. 0.
Evaluation:
Reference
X coordinate
None
2
None
Y coordinate
None
2
None
Reference
detection
coordinates
X coordinate
None
4
1
Y coordinate
None
4
1
None
2
None
Provided
4
None
−
20
−
Evaluation: Degree of match
Degree of match
Reserved area (for the 2nd point)
Reference
No. 1 to 3
2
Line No. 0
Line No. 0
1
No. of digits
Reference Nos. 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No. 0.
13-19
13
Communication
(5) Area measurement by binary conversion
Block
Item
Registration No. 0
0
No. of digits
Area
8
Evaluation: Area
2
Registration Nos. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
Registration
No. 1 to 15
(6) Counting quantities by binary conversion
Block
Item
Registration No. 0
0
Registration
No. 1 to 3
No. of digits
No. of labels
4
Evaluation: Number of labels
2
Evaluation: Total area
2
Total area
8
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
(7) Object identification by binary conversion
Block
Dummy data (*)
2
No. of labels
2
Evaluation: No. of labels
2
0
Evaluation: Total area
2
*
Total area
8
Registration No. 0
Registration
No. 1 to 3
1
Registration
No. 1 to 3
Decimal
point
(digit)
None
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
Registration No. 0 Evaluation: Label area
13
No. of
digits
Item
Label 0
2
Lavel 1
2
to
to
Lavel 127
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
Continued on the following page.
* An item comparison table of block 0 is shown on page 13-22. This is in the general purpose
serial I/F used for the object identification by binary conversion in each software version.
13-20
Communication
Block
No. of
digits
Decimal
point
(digit)
8
None
X
4
1
Y
4
1
4
1
X
4
None
Y
4
None
Window label circumference
8
1
Item
Label unit area
Window label center
of gravity
10
Registration No. 0
Label 0
Window label main axis angle
Window label fillet
diamete
Label
1 to 31
11
0
32 to 63
12
0
64 to 95
13
0
96 to 127
20
Registration No. 1
0 to 31
21
1
32 to 63
22
1
64 to 95
23
1
96 to 127
30
Registration No. 2 Label
2
32 to 63
32
2
64 to 95
33
2
96 to 127
Registration No. 3 Label
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
0 to 31
31
40
Labels 1 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0.
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
0 to 31
41
3
32 to 63
42
3
64 to 95
43
3
96 to 127
60
Label unit area in registration No. 0
61
62
63
Label unit area in registration No. 1
Label unit area in registration No. 2
Label unit area in registration No. 3
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
Label 0
64
Center of gravity in registration
No. 0
Center of gravity in registration No. 1
Center of gravity in registration No. 2
Center of gravity in registration No. 3
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Continued on the following page.
13-21
None
Each label contains
the same as block 60.
X
Y
to
Label 127
65
66
67
8
to
8
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
X
Y
4
4
to
4
4
1
1
to
1
1
Each label contains
the same as block 64.
13
Communication
No. of
digits
Item
Block
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Main axis angle in registration No. 0
68
Main axis angle in registration No. 1
Main axis angle in registration No. 2
69
Main axis angle in registration No. 3
Label 0
70
Label 127
Fillet diameter in registration No. 1
Fillet diameter in registration No. 2
Fillet diameter in registration No. 3
74
Circumference in registration No. 0
75
76
77
Circumference in registration No. 1
Circumference in registration No. 2
Circumference in registration No. 3
X
Y
to
Fillet diameter in registration No. 0
71
72
73
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
4
to
4
4
X
Y
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Decimal point
(digit)
1
to
1
1
to
1
1
to
1
1
to
1
None
Each label contains
the same as block 70.
8
to
8
1
to
1
Each label contains
the same as block 74.
Reference
[Item comparison table of block 0 in each software version]
Shown below is an item comparison table of the block 0 for each software version, which is the
general-purpose serial I/F used for object identification by binary conversion.
Software version
13
Ver. 2.01 or earlier
No. of labels
Ver. 2.02
Dummy data (00)
Evaluation: No. of labels No. of labels
Registration Dummy data (00)
Contents of
No. 0
Evaluation: Total area
block No. 0
Total area
Ver. 2.03 to Ver. 2.09
Dummy data (No. of labels)
No. of labels
Evaluation: No. of labels Evaluation: No. of labels
Evaluation: Total area
Evaluation: Total area
Total area
Total area
Registration Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 3 registration No. 0.
13-22
Communication
(8) Point measurement
1. In the binary mode
Block
Item
Point No. 0 to 7
Point No. 8 to 15
0
Point No. 16 to 23
No. of digits
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
·
·
·
·
Point No. 248 to 255
·
·
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
[Data example: Only point No. 1 to 8]
Contents
E
Data
Judgment
(OK/NG)
ED FA
Judg- White/
ment black
information
E D (H)
D
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
Point No.
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
Judgment
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
0: NG, 1: OK
F
White/black
information
F A (H)
Point No.
White/black
A
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
White White White White White Black White Black
0: black, 1: white
2. In the average light level mode
Block
0
Item
Point No. 0 to 7
Evaluation: Point
2
Point No. 8 to 15
Evaluation: Point
2
Point No. 16 to 23
Evaluation: Point
2
·
·
1
No. of digits
·
·
·
·
Point No. 120 to 127
Evaluation: Point
2
Point No. 0
Average light level
4
Point No. 1
·
·
Average light level
4
·
·
Point No. 127
Average light level
·
·
4
Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
13-23
13
Communication
(9) Final numeric calculation result
Block
Sign
(+/-)
Item
No. of
digits
Decimal
point (digit)
C000
C001
Auxiliary relay
None
:
2
[00: OFF None
01:ON]
C127
Evaluation * None
2
None
Result
8
Provided
Evaluation * None
2
None
Result
Providied
8
Provided
:
:
:
:
Evaluation * None
2
None
Result
8
Provided
N00
Results of numerical
calculations (measurement 0,
camera 1)
N01
:
:
:
:
:
:
N15
50
Providied
Results of numerical
calculations (measurement 0,
camera 2)
N00
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those in the
to
item measurement 0, camera 1.
N15
Results of numerical
calculations (measurement 1)
N00
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those in the
to
item measurement 0, camera 1.
N15
Results of numerical
calculations (measurement 2)
N00
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those in the
to
item measurement 0, camera 1.
N15
Results of numerical
calculations (measurement 3)
N00
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those in the
to
item measurement 0, camera 1.
N15
Results of final numerical
calculations
13
Providied
AN00
AN00 to AN15 contain the same data as those in
to
the item measurement 0, camera 1.
AN15
*Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 (NG),
1 (OK), or 2 (no evaluation).
Note 1: All items will be output regardless of whether the registration is YES or NO.
Note 2: The data in block 50 are not output using measurement 3 (code 12H). They are output
using measurement 4 (code 13H).
=> See page 13-7.
13-24
Communication
Block
Item
Sign (+/-)
None
2
None
Result
Provided
8
Provided
Evaluation*
None
2
None
Result
Provided
8
Provided
Evaluation*
None
2
None
Result
Provided
8
Provided
N15
51
Decimal
point
(digit)
Evaluation*
N00
Results of numerical
N01
calculations
(measurement 0, camera 1)
No. of
digits
N00
Results of numerical
calculations
to
(measurement 0, camera 2)
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item measurement 0, camera 1.
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 1)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item measurement 0, camera 1.
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 2)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item measurement 0, camera 1.
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 3)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item measurement 0, camera 1.
Results of the final
numerical calculations
AN00
to
AN15
AN00 to AN15 contain the same data as those
in the N00 to N15 of item measurement 0,
camera 1.
* Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 (NG),
1 (OK), or 2 (no evaluation).
Note: Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up.
13
13-25
Computer Link
Chapter 14: Computer Link
A programmable controller (hereafter referred to as a PC) can be connected to the IV-S20, so that the
computer link can be used to have the IV-S20 execute measurements.
14-1 Compatible models
The IV-S20 is applicable with the computer links for the following models of Sharp, Mitsubishi and
OMRON.
Sharp
J-board - Host communication port in models Z-311J/312J
JW10
- Communication port and MMI port in models JW-1324K/1342K/
1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K
JW20H - Communication port in the JW-22CU
- JW-21CM (link module)
JW30H - Communication port in models JW-32CUH/H1/M1
- Communication port in models JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3
- JW-21CM (link module)
JW50H/70H/100H
- Communication port in models JW-70CUH/100CUH
- JW-10CM (link module)
Mitsubishi
OMRON
AnA, AnN (AJ71C24-Sx)
A1S (A1SJ71C24)
A0J2 (A0J72C24-S1)
C1000H (C500-LK203)
C200H RS-232C (C200H-LK201)
C200H RS-422 (C200H-LK202)
CV1000 - CV CPU link port
- CV500-LK201
CVM1 - CV CPU link port
- CV500-LK201
CS1W-SCU21
14
14-1
Computer Link
14-2 Data flow
Specify the CCD-TRIG (camera 1) or the PARALLEL (parallel interface). as the source of the MEAS TRIG
INP I/F (measurement start input) signal. (See Chapter 11 "Input/Output Conditions Settings.")
The data flow for a measurement start input (CCD trigger/parallel) signal and an object type change
command (parallel) is shown below.
Measuring
IV-S20
1 Enter measurement start signal.
(CCD trigger/parallel)
CCD camera or PC
2 Write measurement data.
PC
3 Receive a completion response.
(2), (3): Computer link
The block of measurement data to be written from the IV-S20 to the PC, in step 2, can be specified on
the [OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu. (See page 11-21.)
[When a Sharp PC is connected]
The IV-S20 sends write enable command (EWR) to the PC in the following cases.
- When the power is applied to the IV-S20.
- When a Sharp PC is selected.
- When a write mode nonconformity error (code 10(H)) occurs after a result write command (WRG) is
transmitted (when the power is disconnected from the PC).
[When a Mitsubishi or OMRON PC is connected]
The data in items 2 and 3 are divided into packets for transmission.
14
14-2
Computer Link
14-3 Register setting
Use PC register (writing: up to 512 bytes) to provide the IV-S20 with a computer link.
Setting item
Applicable range of address
* Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write register
* Mitsubishi: D0000 to D9999
(up to 512 bytes)
* OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
Enter the write start address in item 3, WRITE TOP ADDRESS, on the [COMPUTER LINK] menu (page
11-19), under the [I/O SETTINGS] menu.
Note 1: When a Sharp PC is used, specify an even address for the write start address.
Note 2: When 512 bytes are used for the write register in a Sharp PC, use one of the following write start
addresses.
09000, 19000, 29000, 39000, 49000, 59000, 69000, 79000, 89000, 99000
[Write register map]
The write register contains the following data.
Sharp
09000
Mitsubishi
D0000
L
OMRON
DM0000
L
Contents
Termination code (00(H): normal termination, codes
other than 00(H)abnormal termination - See page 15.3.)
09001
H
H Appended information (error code in an error response)
09002
L
L Object type number (0 to 15: 00 to 0F(H))
09003
09004
09005
09006
09007
09010
09011
09012
09013
09014
09015
D0001
H
DM0001
D0002
H
DM0002
L
D0003
H
DM0003
L
D0004
H
DM0004
L
D0005
H
DM0005
L
D0006
H
H
L
L
DM0006
*1
H
Result output (Y0 to Y15)
L Measurement function 0 using camera 1
H Measurement function 0 using camera 2
*2
*3
L Measurement function 1
H Measurement function 2
*4
L Measurement function 3
H
L Output data from measurement 0 (block 0)
H :
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
H
L
H
:
:
L Output data from measurement 1 (block 0)
H :
:
*5
L Output data from measurement 2 (block 0)
H :
:
:
:
:
L
H
:
14
L Output data from measurement 3 (block 0)
H :
:
19000
19001
:
D0256
:
L
H
DM0256
:
L Assigned block data
H
*6
:
:
*1 to *6 - See the next page.
The register map shown above is established when the write start addresses have been set as shown
below.
Manufacturer
Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON
Write start address 09000
D0000
DM0000
14-3
Computer Link
*1 When the termination code is 08(H) (error response received error), the error code is contained in
the appended information. (Example: 0A(H) on a Sharp PC = parity error)
*2 Result output (Y0 to Y15)
H（09005）
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
L（09004）
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y9 Y8
*3 Measurement program for measurement 0
00(H) = none, 01(H) = positional deviation/absolute position measurement
*4 Measurement programs for measurements 1 to 3
00(H) = none, 02(H) = shape and size comparison, 03(H) = distance/angle measurement (gray/edge),
04(H) = distance/angle measurement (center of gravity), 05(H) = lead inspection, 06(H) = area
measurement after binary conversion, 07(H) = object counting after binary conversion, 08(H) = label
measurement after binary conversion, 09(H) = existence detection with a point measurement
*5 Output data from measurements 0 to 3 (block 0)
The data in block 0 is output for measurement data of measurement number 0 to 3. (Max. 500
bytes).
- See pages 14-5,7 to 11-13 for details about the measurement data of block 0.
- The data (block 0) from any unselected measurement number will not be output. (Its space will be
filled by the next item.)
*6 Assigned block data
When a measurement number (camera No.) or block number is specified, the IV-S20 will output its
measurement data.
- For details about how to specify measurement, see pages 11-19 to 11-20.
- No data is output if block 0 (00) is specified.
- For details about the measurement data block, see pages 14-5 to 14-15.
- The top address where the specified block of data is written will be an address made by
adding 512 bytes to the top address for wiring results.
Sharp
Result write top
address
14
Result write top
address
+ 512 bytes
09000
09001
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19000
19001
.
.
.
Mitsubishi
D0000
L
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DM0000
.
.
.
L
H
.
.
.
D0256
OMRON
H
H Appended information
.
.
.
H
DM0256
.
.
.
L Termination code
L Output data from measurement 3 (block 0)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
L
Contents
L Assigned block data
.
H
.
.
.
14-4
Computer Link
Ë Measurement data blocks
[1] Number of blocks
The measurement functions vary in the number of measurement data blocks they use.
Measurement function
Blocks
Positional deviation/absolute
position measurement
Size and shape comparison
Distance/angle measurement
Lead inspection
Area measurement by
binary conversion
Counting quantities by
binary conversion
Object identification (labeling)
by binary conversion
Existance detection by
point measuremet
Final numerical calculation
result
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1, 2
0, 1
0
0
0, 1, 10 to 13, 20 to 23, 30 to 33, 40 to 43, 60 to 77
Binary conversion−−−0
Average light level−−−0, 1
50,51
[2] Contents of the measurement result block (for each measurement function)
(1) Positional deviation/absolute position measurement
Block
0
No. of Decimal point
(digit)
Sign (+/-) digits
X
None
4
1
1st point
(center coordinates)
Y
None
4
1
Registration 2nd point
X
None
4
1
No. 0
(center coordinates)
Y
None
4
1
Provided *
4
1
Angular deviation
Registration The registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 0 to 7 registration No. 0.
Item
* When a sign is provided, if the highest-order bit of the data is on (1), a "-" minus sign is used,
and if the bit is off (0), a "+" pulus sign is used. The value (decimal) is expressed two's complement notation. (A two's complement number is obtained by inverting the 0s and 1s in a binary
number and adding 1.)
Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
[Example of the data in block 0: Only registration No. 0]
0 8 2 0 0 5 2 8 0 F A 0 0 E B 0 F F 7 6
Angular
X
Y
X
Y
deviation
Center coordinates Center coordinates
of 1st point
of 2st point
14
Registration No. 0
- These data are in hexadecimal. They are converted to the actual decimal measurements as shown
below.
Measurement
result (value)
Data
(hexadecimal)
Decimal
number
Center coordinates X
of 1st point
Y
820
2080
208.0
528
1320
132.0
Center coordinates X
of 2nd point
Y
FA0
4000
400.0
EB0
3760
376.0
Angular deviation
FF76
–138
–13.8
14-5
Computer Link
Block
Sign
(+/-)
Item
Mode
None
Evaluation: Angular deviation
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
2
None
01
OK
1st point
None
2
None
01
OK
2nd point
None
4
None
01
OK
1st point
Provided
4
None
1B18
6936
2nd point
Provided
8
None
0D55
3413
−
00000000
−
Evaluation:
Degree of match
Evaluation:
X coordinate
Evaluation:
Y coordinate
1
Registration
No. 0
*
No.
Data example
Decimal
of point (digit) HexaMeasuredigits
decimal ment result
2-point
02
None
2
search
Degree of match
Reserved area
1st point
Evaluation:
Deviation
2nd
point
1st point
Deviation
2nd
point
−
X
None
2
None
01
OK
Y
None
2
None
01
OK
X
None
2
None
01
OK
Y
None
2
None
01
OK
X Provided
4
1
0122
29.0
Y Provided
4
1
0052
13.0
X Provided
4
1
FCEA
-78.9
Y Provided
4
1
0370
88.0
Registration Registration No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as the
No. 1 to 7 registration No. 0.
* The values shown in the "data example" column have been converted the same way as wad
done in "example of the data in block 0."
Note: If a registration number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
14
14-6
Computer Link
(2) Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Block
0
No. of Decimal
Sign (+/-) digits point (digit)
Item
Registration
Degree of match (positioning)
No. 0
Provided
None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
Block
No. of Decimal
Sign (+/-) digits point (digit)
Item
Degree of match of measured
object
Registration
No. 0
Provided
4
None
Position coordinates
(positioning)
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
Position coordinates
(measuring object)
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
None
2
None
None
2
None
Positioning
Evaluation:
Degree of match Measured object
1
4
Evaluation:
Position
coordinates
Evaluation:
Light level
Light level
Positioning
X
None
2
None
Y
None
2
None
Measured
object
X
None
2
None
Y
None
2
None
Positioning
None
2
None
Measured object
None
2
None
Positioning
None
2
None
Measured object
None
2
None
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
14
14-7
Computer Link
(3) Distance and angle measurement
Block
0
Item
No. of
Decimal
digits point (digit)
Sign (+/-)
Registration Size measurement: Distance
No. 0
Size measurement: Angle
None
8
1
Provided
4
1
Registration Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 15 No. 0.
Block
1
Item
No. of
Decimal
digits point (digit)
Sign (+/-)
Registration Measurement
start point
No. 0
X
None
4
1
Y
None
4
1
Registration Registration No. 1 to 63 contain the same data as the registration
No. 1 to 63 No. 0.
Block
Sign (+/-)
Item
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Distance*
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Angle*
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Evaluation:
Start point*
Evaluation:
Auxiliary point*
2
Registration
No. 1 to 63
Registration No. 0
Registration
No. 1 to 15
X coorRegistra- dinate
tion No. 0 Y coorAuxiliary point
dinate
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Evaluation:
Degree of
match*
14
Registration No. 0
Registration
No. 1 to 15
Registration No. 0
Degree of
match
Registration
No. 1 to 15
None
No. of
digits
Decimal
point (digit)
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 63 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
4
1
None
4
1
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
None
2
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
Provided
4
None
Registration No. 1 to 15 contain the same
data as the registration No. 0.
Number of labels
None
2
None
Dummy data
-
2
-
* (5 places) : When evaluations are specified (distance, angle, start point, auxiliary point,
degree of match), if the number of registered item is odd, two digits of dummy
data will be inserted at the end of each item.
14-8
Computer Link
(4) Lead inspection
Block
Item
Line No. 0
0
Reference
No. 0
Reference
No. 1 to 3
Block
Line
No. 1 to 7
Quantity at center point
2
Dummy data
2
Line No.1 to 7 contain the same data as line No. 0.
Reference No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No. 0.
Item
Line No. 0
1
No. of digits
Sign (+/-)
Evaluation: Quantity
None
2
None
Evaluation: Distance
None
2
None
Distance: Shortest
None
4
1
Distance: Longest
None
4
1
The lead number
with an NG distance
None
2
None
None
2
None
2
Dummy data
None
_
2
None
_
Lead length: Shortest
None
4
1
Lead length: Longest
None
4
1
None
2
None
None
2
None
Number of leads
with NG distance
Evaluation: Lead length
The lead number with
an NG length
Number of leads with
NG length
Reference
No. 0
Line
No. 1 to 7
Line No. 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No. 0.
Evaluation:
Reference
X coordinate
None
2
None
Y coordinate
None
2
None
Reference
detection
coordinates
X coordinate
None
4
1
Y coordinate
None
4
1
None
2
None
−
2
−
Provided
4
None
−
20
−
Evaluation: Degree of match
Dummy data
Degree of match
Reserved area (for the 2nd point)
Reference
No. 1 to 3
No. of Decimal
digits point (digit)
Reference No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No. 0.
14-9
14
Computer Link
(5) Area measurement by binary conversion
Block
Item
No. of digits
Window area
0
Registration No. 0 Evaluation: Area
Dummy data
Registration
No. 1 to 15
8
2
2
Registration Nos. 1 to 15 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
(6) Counting quantities by binary conversion
Block
Item
Registration No. 0
0
Registration
No.1 to 3
No. of digits
No. of labels
4
Evaluation: Number of labels
2
Evaluation: Total area
2
Total area
8
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
14
14-10
Computer Link
(7) Object identification by binary conversion
Block
No. of
digits
Item
Registration No. 0
0
No. of labels
2
Dummy data
2
Evaluation: No. of labels
2
Evaluation: Total area
2
Total area
8
Registration No. 0 Evaluation: Label area
1
Label 0
2
Lavel 1
2
to
to
Lavel 127
2
8
None
X
4
1
Y
4
1
4
1
X
4
None
Y
4
None
Window label circumference
8
1
Label unit area
Window label center
of gravity
Registration No. 0
Label 0
Window label main axis angle
Window label fillet
diameter
Label
1 to 31
11
0
32 to 63
12
0
64 to 95
13
0
96 to 127
20
Registration No. 1
0 to 31
21
1
32 to 63
22
1
64 to 95
23
1
96 to 127
Registration No. 2 Label
2
32 to 63
32
2
64 to 95
33
2
96 to 127
Registration No. 3 Label
Labels 1 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0.
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
0 to 31
31
40
None
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
Registration
No. 1 to 3
30
None
Registration No. 1 to 3 contain the same data as the
registration No. 0.
Registration
No. 1 to 3
10
Decimal
point
(digit)
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
0 to 31
41
3
32 to 63
42
3
64 to 95
43
3
96 to 127
Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as
label 0 in block 10.
Continued on the following page.
14-11
14
Computer Link
No. of
digits
Item
Block
60
Label unit area in registration No. 0
61
62
63
Label unit area in registration No. 1
Label unit area in registration No. 2
Label unit area in registration No. 3
Label 0
64
Center of gravity in registration
No. 0
Center of gravity in registration No. 1
Center of gravity in registration No. 2
Center of gravity in registration No. 3
Main axis angle in registration No. 0
68
Main axis angle in registration No. 1
Main axis angle in registration No. 2
69
Main axis angle in registration No. 3
70
14
74
Circumference in registration No. 0
75
76
77
Circumference in registration No. 1
Circumference in registration No. 2
Circumference in registration No. 3
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
14-12
4
4
to
4
4
1
1
to
1
1
Each label contains
the same as block 64.
X
Y
to
Label 127
Fillet diameter in registration No. 1
Fillet diameter in registration No. 2
Fillet diameter in registration No. 3
X
Y
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0
to
Label 127
Fillet diameter in registration No. 0
71
72
73
X
Y
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0
None
Each label contains
the same as block 60.
to
Label 127
65
66
67
8
to
8
Label 0
to
Label 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Label 0 to 127
Decimal point
(digit)
X
Y
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
to
4
4
4
to
4
4
1
to
1
1
to
1
1
to
1
1
to
1
None
Each label contains
the same as block 70.
8
to
8
1
to
1
Each label contains
the same as block 74.
Computer Link
(8) Point measurement
1. In the binary mode
Block
Item
Point No. 0 to 7
Point No. 8 to 15
0
Point No. 16 to 23
No. of digits
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
·
·
·
·
Point No. 248 to 255
·
·
Evaluation: Point
2
White/black information
2
Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
[Data example: Only point No. 1 to 8]
Contents
E
Data
Judgment
(OK/NG)
ED FA
Judg- White/
ment black
information
ED
(H)
D
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
Point No.
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
Judgment
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
0: NG, 1: OK
F
White/black
information
FA
Point No.
(H)
White/black
A
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
White White White White White Black White Black
0: black, 1: white
2. In the average light level mode
Block
Item
Point No. 0 to 7
Point No. 8 to 15
0
Point No. 16 to 23
·
·
Evaluation: Point
2
Dummy data
2
Evaluation: Point
2
Dummy data
2
Evaluation: Point
2
Dummy data
2
·
·
·
·
Evaluation: Point
2
Dummy data
2
Point No. 0
Average light level
4
Point No. 1
·
·
Average light level
4
·
·
Point No. 127
Average light level
Point No. 120 to 127
1
No. of digits
·
·
4
Note: If a point number has not been used yet, the data for the next registered number will be
brought forward.
14-13
14
Computer Link
(9) Final numeric calculation result
Item
Block
Sign (+/-)
C000
Auxiliary relay
No. of
digits
Decimal
point
(digit)
2
C001
None
00: OFF
01: ON
None
None
2
None
2
None
Provided
8
Provided
None
2
None
2
None
Provided
8
Provided
None
2
None
2
None
8
Provided
C127
Evaluation*
Dummy data
N00
Result
Evaluation*
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 0, camera 1)
Dummy data
N01
Result
Evaluation*
Dummy data
N15
Result
50
14
Provided
N00
Results of numerical
calculations
to
(measurement 0, camera 2)
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 1)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 2)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 3)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of the final
numerical calculations
AN00
to
AN15
AN00 to AN15 contain the same data as those
in the N00 to N15 of item "measurement 0,
camera 1."
* Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 (NG),
1 (OK), or 2 (no evaluation).
Note: All items will be output regardless of whether the registration is YES or NO.
14-14
Computer Link
Block
Item
Sign (+/-)
Evaluation*
N00
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 0, camera 1)
N01
N15
Dummy data
Decimal
point
(digit)
2
None
2
None
Result
Provided
8
Provided
Evaluation*
None
2
None
2
None
Dummy data
Result
Provided
8
Provided
Evaluation*
None
2
None
2
None
8
Provided
Dummy data
Result
51
None
No. of
digits
Provided
N00
Results of numerical
calculations
to
(measurement 0, camera 2)
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 1)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 2)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of numerical
calculations
(measurement 3)
N00
to
N15
N00 to N15 contain the same data as those
in the item "measurement 0, camera 1."
Results of the final
numerical calculations
AN00
to
AN15
AN00 to AN15 contain the same data as those
in the N00 to N15 of item "measurement 0,
camera 1."
* Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 (NG),
1 (OK), or 2 (no evaluation).
Note: Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up.
14
14-15
Computer Link
14-4 Interface
The interface between the IV-S20 and a programmable controller from each manufacturer is described
below.
Programmable
controller
IV-S20
Settings for the IV-S20
See item [1] below.
Sharp
[2]
Mitsubishi
[3]
OMRON
[4]
[1] Setting items for the IV-S20
Item
Setting details
Communication speed 115.2, 57.6, 38.4, 19.2, 9.6
(k bit/sec)
Data length (bit)
7, 8
Parity
None, odd, even
Stop bit
1, 2
Error check
Checksum
Station No.
Sharp: 00 to 37(8)
Mitsubishi: 00 to 31
OMRON: 00 to 31
Write address
(up to 512 bytes)
Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Mitsubishi: D000 to D9999
OMRON:DM0000 to DM9999
14
14-16
Computer Link
[2] Connection with a Sharp PC
[Applicable models]
1. Control module:
JW-22CU (can be used with ROM version 2.2 or later)
JW-70CUH/100CUH, JW-32CUH/H1/M1
JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3
2. Basic module:
JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K
3. CPU board:
Z-311J/312J
4. Link module:
JW-21CM, JW-10CM
5. Communication board: Z-331J/332J
(1) Module setting
1 When a JW-22CU or a JW-70CUH/100CUH and Z-311J/312J are used
Store the communication port conditions in system memory addresses #236 and #237.
Bits D0 to D5 are stored in memory address #236.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#236
Data
D5
Stop
D4 D3
Parity
D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
7 bits,
fixed
0
1 bit
0
0
None
0
0
1
1
2 bits
0
1
Odd
0
0
0
1
0
Even
#237
Station No.
9.6
19.2
(001 to 037(8))
Enter the station No. for the current station.
In the initial state, addresses #236 and #237 are set to 000.
2 When a JW-32CUH/H1/M1 or a JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3 is used
1. When communication port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) is used
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #234 and #235. Set bits D0 to
D5 in memory address #234. Only an RS-422 cable can be connected to the PG/COMM1 port.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#234
14
Data
D5
Stop
D4 D3
Parity
D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
7 bits,
fixed
0
1 bit
0
0
None
0
0
1
1
2 bits
0
1
Odd
0
0
0
1
0
Even
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
#235
9.6
19.2
38.4
57.6
115.2
*
* Applicable only to
the JW-32CUH1/M1 and JW-33CUH1/H2/H3
Station No.
(001 to 037(8))
Enter the station No. for the current station.
In the initial state, addresses #234 and #235 are set to 000.
14-17
Computer Link
2. When communication port 2 (PG/COMM2 port) is used.
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #222, #236 and #237. Either
RS-232 or RS-422 cable can be connected to the PG/COMM2 port.
#222 Communication method for the PG/COMM2 port
(00(H))
Set to 00(H).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#236
Set bits D0 to D5 in memory address #236.
Data
D5
Stop
D4 D3
Parity
D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
7 bits,
fixed
0
1 bit
0
0
None
0
0
1
1
2 bits
0
1
Odd
0
0
0
1
0
Even
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
9.6
19.2
38.4
57.6
115.2
*
* Applicable only to
the JW-32CUH1/M1 and JW-33CUH1/H2/H3
#237
Station No.
(001 to 037(8))
Enter the station No. for the current station.
In the initial state, addresses #222, #236 and #237 are set to 000.
3 When a JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K is used
1. When the communication port is used
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #234, #236 and #237.
#234 Communication mode for the communication port (00(H))
Set to 00(H) (computer link).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#236
14
Set bits D0 to D5 and D7 in memory address #236.
D7
Data
D5
0
7 bits
1
8 bits
#237
Stop
D4 D3
Parity
D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
0
1 bit
0
0
None
0
0
1
1
2 bits
0
1
Odd
0
0
0
1
0
Even
1
1
1
Station No.
(001 to 037(8))
Enter the station No. for the current station.
In the initial state, addresses #234, #236 and #237 are set to 000.
14-18
9.6
19.2
38.4
Computer Link
2. When the MMI port is used
Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses #226 and #227. Set bits D0 to D5
in memory address #226.
Use of the MMI port ensures a one-to-one connection between the IV-S20 and the JW10.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#226
D7
Data
D5
Stop
D4 D3
Parity
D2 D1 D0 Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
0
7 bits
1
8 bits
0
1 bit
0
0
None
0
0
1
1
2 bits
0
1
Odd
0
0
0
1
0
Even
1
1
1
1
1
Invalid
Station No.
#227
9.6
19.2
38.4
(001(8))
Set to (001(8))
In the initial state, addresses #226 and #227 are set to 000.
4 When a JW-21CM or JW-10CM is used
Set the switches (SW0 to SW4 and SW7) on the module as shown below.
Switch
Setting
SW0
Command mode
SW1
Station No. (upper bit)
SW2
Station No. (lower bit)
Set value
4
01 to 37(8)
SW3-1
Invalid
SW3-2
4-wire system
ON
SW3-3
OFF
SW4
Invalid
Odd parity (OFF), even parity (ON) OFF or
ON
Transmission speed (k bit/sec) 0 or 1
SW7
With a termination resistance
SW3-4
OFF
OFF or ON
0 or 1
ON
⑤ When a Z-331J/332J is used
Set the switches (SW0 to SW4 and SW7) on the board as shown below.
Switch
Setting
SW0
Computer link
SW1
Station No. (upper bit)
SW2
Station No. (lower bit)
Set value
4
01 to 37(8)
SW3-1
Invalid
OFF
SW3-2
Only the 2-wire system can be used.
OFF
SW3-3
Invalid
SW3-4
Odd parity (OFF), even parity (ON)
SW4
SW7
OFF
Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
19.2 (0), 9.6 (1)
With a termination resistance
OFF or ON
0 or 1
ON
(2) Using memory
To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S20, enter a result write start address in the following
range.
Memory
Range (address)
Register
09000 to 99776
14-19
14
Computer Link
(3) Connections
1 When a JW-22CU or JW-70CUH/100CUH is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Connector
shield
3
2
5
JW-22CU
JW-70CUH/100CUH
(Communication port)
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
FG
SD
RD
SG
1
3
2
7
12
14
FG
RD
SD
SG
Short-circuit
terminal
15 m or less
RS-232C
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system) JW-22CU
JW-70CUH/100CUH
Communication connector on
(Communication port)
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
4
7
8
9
TA
TB
RA
RB
FG
12
13
10
11
1
RD (+)
RD (-)
SD (+)
SD (-)
FG
Connector
shield
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422
2 When a JW-32CUH/H1/M1 or JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3 is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
JW-32CUH/H1/M1
JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3
(PG/COMM2 port)
Pin No.
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
Connector
shield
FG
SD
RD
SG
1
4
2
7
FG
RD
SD
SG
3
2
5
15 m or less
RS-232C
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
14
JW-32CUH/H1/M1
JW-33CUH/H1/H2/H3
PG/COMM1 port
PG/COMM2 port
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
4
7
8
9
TA
TB
RA
RB
FG
9
10
3
11
1
RD (+)
RD (-)
SD (+)
SD (-)
FG
Connector
shield
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422
14-20
Computer Link
3 When a JW-1324K/1342K/1424K/1442K/1624K/1642K is used
The IV-S20 can only be connected to the RS-422 port. When the communication port is used,
provide a 2-wire RS-422 system. When the MMI port is used, provide a 4-wire RS-422 system.
1. When the communication port is used
JW-1324K/1342K/1424K
/1442K/1624K/1642K
(Communication port)
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
4
8
7
9
TA
RA
TB
RB
FG
Connector
shield
Terminal name
L1
L2
SHLD
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
2. When the MMI port is used
1 km or less
RS-422 (2-wire system)
JW-1324K/1342K/1424K
/1442K/1624K/1642K
(MMI port)
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
4
7
8
9
TA
TB
RA
RB
FG
2
7
3
8
4
5
RX
／RX
TX
／TX
PG／COM
GND
Connector
shield
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422 (4-wire system)
4 When a Z-311J/312J is used
1. Communication through the RS-232C port
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Z-311J/312J
(Communication port CN3)
Pin No.
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
Connector
shield
FG
SD
RD
SG
1
3
2
7
6
8
FG
RDc
TDc
GND
3
2
5
Short-circuit
terminal
15m or less
RS-232C
14
2. Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
Z-311J/312J
(Terminal block TC1)
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
4
7
8
9
TA
TB
RA
RB
FG
Connector
shield
Pin No.
3
4
1
2
5
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422
14-21
Signal name
RD
/RD
TD
/TD
FG
Computer Link
5 When a JW-21CM or JW-10CM is used
* Communication through the RS-422 port (4-wire system)
JW-21CM
JW-10CM
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
Signal name
4
7
8
9
TA
TB
RA
RB
FG
L3
L4
L1
L2
SHIELD
GND
Connector
shield
Ground
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422 (4-wire system)
6 When a Z-331J/332J is used
* Communication through the RS-422 port (2-wire system)
Z-331J/332J
(Host communication port T1)
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Pin No.
Signal name
4
8
7
9
TA
RA
TB
RB
FG
Connector
shield
Terminal name
L1
L2
S
FG
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
1 km or less
RS-422 (2-wire system)
14
14-22
Computer Link
[3] Connection with a Mitsubishi PC
[Applicable models]
A series computer link units
1. AJ71C24-Sx (AnA or AnN)
In the case of the AnA, a computer link can be created if a CPU from the AnA series is used
and the link module version is S6 or later.
2. A1SJ71C24(A1S)
When the A1SJ71C24-R2 is used, the station number is fixed at 00 because it does not have
a station number switch.
3. A0J72C24S1(A0J2)
(1) Module setting
1 Example using an AJ71C24-Sx module
Item
Description
Transmission control procedure mode
(RS-232C)
Format 1_1
Station No.
00 to 31
Transmission speed (kbit/sec)
19.2, 9.6
Parity
None, odd, even
Transmission code
Data bit
7/8 bits (ASCII)
Stop bit
1, 2 bits
Checksum
Executed
Writing while running
Possible
[Switch setting]
Ex.: To set as shown below:
Mode: RS-232C, Station No.: 00, Transmission speed: 19.2 K bytes/sec.
Parity: Even, Data bit: 7 bits, Stop bit: 2 bits
* 3 rotary DIP switches
STATION No.
× 10
A
B C D
9
8
7
6
5 4 3
STATION No.
×1
E
F
0
1
2
A
B C D
9
8
7
6
5 4 3
E
F
0
1
2
MODE
A
B C D
9
8
7
6
5 4 3
E
F
0
1
2
14
* DIP switches
SW11 to 13
SW14 to 24
OFF
ON
14-23
Computer Link
2 Example using an A1SJ71UC24-R4 module
[Switch setting]
Ex.: To set as below:
Mode: RS-422, Transmission speed: 19.2 K bytes/sec.
Parity: Even, Stop bit: 2bits
SW ON OFF
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
STATION No.
6
5
4
6
5
4
7 8
3 2
7 8
3 2
AB
9
8
7
65
9
0
×10
1
9
0
×1
1
CD
E
F
0
1
2
43
MODE
(2) Using memory
To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S20, use a result write start address within the following
range.
Memory
Range (address)
D (data register)
0 to 999900
Note: To write data from the IV-S20 to a Mitsubishi PC, use the WW/QW write command. The range
that can be written using the write command WW/QW is D0000 to D1023/D000000 to
D008191, due to the limitation of Mitsubishi PCs. The write all address can be set within the
range of limitation for Mitsubishi PCs. (See page 11-19.)
14
14-24
Computer Link
(3) Connections
Shown below are the connections with a calculator link module.
1 Example of RS-232C connection
Calculator link module
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
In case of 25 In case of 9
pins connector pins connector
Shielded cable
Signal
name
Pin No.
Signal
name
Connector
shield FG
FG
1
2
RD
2
3
SD
3
SD
3
2
RD
4
7
RS
5
8
CS
20
4
DTR
6
6
DSR
7
5
SG
5
Pin No.
SG
Pin No.
FG
15m or less
RS-232C
Note: Jumper the RS, CS, DR and CD lines.
Do not jumper the SG.
Remarks
- For RS-232C communications, create the sequence program shown below in order to set "no
CD terminal check" for the CD terminal check setting. For details, see the instruction manual for
Mitsubishi’s calculator link module.
Xn7
TOP
n1
H10B
K1
K1
2 Example of RS-422 communication
Communication connector
on the IV-S20
(RS232C/RS422)
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
Calculator link
module
Pin No.
Signal name
Signal name
Connector
shield
FG
TA
TB
RA
RB
SG
FG
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
4
7
8
9
5
1 km max.
RS-422 (4-line system)
14-25
14
Computer Link
[4] Connection with an OMRON PC
[Applicable models]
Host link modules
1. C500-LK203 (C1000H)
2. C200-LK201 (C200H RS-232C)
3. C200-LK202 (C200H RS-422)
4. CV CPU link port (CV1000, CVM1)
5. CV500-LK201 (CV1000, CVM1)
Remarks
- Start the OMRON PC in the monitor mode when turning ON the power. If the OMRON PC
is started in any other mode, a computer link error will occur.
The operation mode is specified using the following items for each support tool: The initial
mode setting switch on the memory module, or the monitor mode rising bits of the system
setting (FUN49) instruction.
Memory module initial setting switch
Installed support tool
OFF
The bit used to set the monitor
mode in the system setting
(FUN49) instruction
0
Support tools other than the
programming console
No support tool
1
ON
*1
Program mode
Monitor mode Operation mode
Operation mode
Monitor mode Operation mode
Programming console setting mode *2
Programming console
*1 Insert the ladder program step shown below at address 000000.
AR1001
FUN49
#A302
000
000
00000
*2 When the programming console is used, set the PC to the "monitor mode
using the switch.
For details, see the user’s manual for the OMRON PLC module.
(1) Module setting
Item
14
Description
Module No.
00 to 31*
Transmission speed (k bit/sec)
19.2, 9.6
Command level
1
Parity
Odd or even
Transmission code
Databit
Databit
7 (ASCII)
Stop bit
2
1:1/1:N procedure
1:N procedure
Synchronous change-over switch
Internal synchronization
CTS change-over switch
0 V (normally ON)
5 V supply switch
OFF
* Enter the unit number of the IV-S20, as a component of CV500-LK201 system. When
communication port 1 is used, the unit number is fixed at 00, and when communication port 2 is
used, any number (00 to 31) can be used.
14-26
Computer Link
(2) Using memory
To allow the memory to be used by the IV-S20, enter a result write start address within the
following setting range.
Memory
Range (address)
D (data register)
0 to 9999
(3) Connections
1 Example of RS-232C communication
C500-LK203
C200-LK201
CV500-LK201
(Communication port 1)
CV500-LK201
(Communication port 2)
CV CPU module
Communication connector on
the IV-S20 (RS232C/RS422)
Shielded cable
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal
name
FG
1
Connector
hood
FG
2
RD
2
2
SD
3
SD
3
3
RD
4
4
RS
5
5
CS
7
9
SG
Pin No.
Signal
name
Connector
shield
5
SG
15m or less
RS-232C
2 Example of RS-422 communication
IV-S20 communication
connector
(RS232C/RS422)
Shielded, twisted-pair cable
Calculator link
module
Pin No.
Signal name
Signal name
Case
4
7
8
9
FG
TA
TB
RA
SG
FG
RDB(RD+)
RDB(RD—)
SDB(SD+)
SDA(SD—)
RS
CS
1 km max.
RS-422 (4-line system)
14-27
Pin numbers vary with
the module to be used
14
Computer link
14-5 Program examples
An example of measurements using the IV-S20 and a Sharp PC (JW70H) (2-point search for positional
deviation measurement) is explained below, using data flow, a flowchart and a timing chart.
Input terminal
IV-S20
Sharp's PC (JW70H)
INPUT
X1
Y0
Output unit
Communication
port
X0
X2
Y1
X3
Y2
X4
Y3
POWER
POWER
X5
Y4
X6
Y5
C(+)
Y6
+24V
0V
Y7 BUSY C(-)
IV-S20 main housing
(plan view)
OUTPUT
VIDEO CAMERA1
"
CAMERA2
"
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
IV-S20 main housing
(side view)
Communication connector (RS232C/RS422)
Camera 1
Camera 1 connector
(1) Data flow
Output relay
Description
00040
Start output
Write
Data (H)
register
*1 09000
00
09001
09002
01
09003
09004
01
09005
00
14
09006
01
09007
00
09010
00
09011
00
09012
00
09013
09014
09015
09016
09017
09020
09021
09022
09023
09024
09025
40
06
E0
06
98
0D
90
06
00
00
IV-S20
1 Output a start signal.
2 Write data into the register.
Description
Termination code (normal termination)
Object type No. (1)
Result output Y0 to Y15
(Only Y0 is OK.)
Measurement 0 using camera 1:
Positional deviation measurement
Measurement function of
measurement 0 using camera 2 (none)
Measurement function of
measurement 1 (none)
Measurement function of
measurement 2 (none)
Measurement function of
measurement3(none)
X
Y
X
Y
1st point
(center
coordinates) Output data
from
measurem2nd point
ent 1 using
(center
camera
coordinates) 1(block 1)
3 Transmit completion
response.
Execution of measurement
Sharp PC (JW70H)
*1 In this example, the write start
address has been set to
09000.
*2 The data in registers 09014 to
09024 are the same as those
shown in the example on page
13-6.
Angular deviation
Note 1: The PC must be write enabled. A Mitsubishi or OMRON PC will operate in the same manner,
but use different PC register and relay addresses.
Note 2: If the PC has not been connected to the object type input (parallel) on the IV-S20, the object
type No. is set to 0. To set different types, first enter the object type numbers (parallel) using
the type input terminals on the IV-S20.
14-28
Computer link
(2) Flow chart
Power ON
5 second interval
N
Y
Camera
starts operation
(00040 = ON)
N
Y
Starting the time-out detection timer
Time-out
Y
N
Y
* Transferring the result
output (Y0 to Y15)
from registers 09004
and 09005 to
addresses ]0412 and
]0413
Turning ON relay
00010
Normal termination
N
Error occurs.
Y
Turning ON relay 00013
Outputting Y0
Error recovery
(00041 = ON)
Outputting Y1
N
N
Y
14
14-29
Computer link
(3) Program
07377
TMR
000
1
0050
00000
00040
00007
T000 00000 F-044 04100 00006
[
00007
00007 04100 04101
F-008
OCT
377
TMR
001
0030
5
04107
Fc012
CMP
09000
04100
Fc012
CMP
09000
04100
04101
F-000w
XFER
09004
10
11
]0412
00010
04100 00040
8
9
377
07356
6
7
000
07357
07354 07357
3
4
09000
T001
00007
2
12
00010
00011
04120 00040
13
00011
00012
04121 00040
14
00012
00013
04101 00041
15
04107
00013
00006
04101 00041
14
16
04107
14-30
Computer link
[Explanation of the program]
The numbers 1 to 16 below correspond to the same numbers on the preceding page.
1. Turn on the power, and wait for 5 sec. (07377 is kept ON for only 1 scan after the power is
turned ON.)
2. The camera is started. (00040 enters a measurement trigger.)
3. The trigger input (00007) is self-latched when the operation start has begin (00000 = ON).
4. The termination code of the write register is cleared.
5. The time-out detection timer monitoring the computer link is started.
6. Time-out error
7. A check is made for normal termination.
8. Normal termination (09000 = 000(8))
9. A check is made for errors.
10. Occurrence of an error (09000 = 001 to 376(8))
11. The data in the result output relays Y0 to Y15 (16 points) on the IV-S20 is transferred from
registers 09004 to 09005 to addresses ]0412 and ]0413.
12. A normal termination signal is output.
13. The judgment (OK/NG) of the result output relay Y0 is output.
14. The judgment (OK/NG) of the result output relay Y1 is output.
15. When a time-out or an error occurs, it is output.
16. When a time-out or an error occurs, it is reset.
(4) Timing chart
1 scan time
Operation start 00040
Start signal input 00007
Operation of the IV-S20
through a computer link
Execution of
measurement
Data writing
IV-S20 - JW70H
Normal termination
04100
OK
Y0, Y1
Error output 00013
14
14-31
Troubleshooting
Chapter 15: Troubleshooting
Item [1] shows problems which may occur when the IV-S20 measurement system is started. If any error (the
termination code is not 00(H)) occurs during image processing on the IV-S20, take the steps described in item
[2].
Perform the recommended daily inspection following the maintenance procedures listed in item [3].
[1] Symptoms and checks
The following symptoms may not be malfunctions. Before asking us to repair your equipment, check the
recommended parts.
Phenomenon
Checks
The power is not turned ON.
(The power lamp on the IVS20 does not light.)
1. Make sure that the power cord has been connected properly
to the DC power terminal block on the IV-S20.
2. Make sure that the proper supply voltage is available and has
not dropped.
After the power is first turned
ON, no images or characters
are displayed on the monitor.
1. Make sure that the monitor cable has been connected
correctly.
After the power is first turned
ON, no characters are
displayed on the monitor.
1. Make sure that the message display and pattern display
modes are not set to the non-display mode. Make sure that
the title field is not filled with spaces.
2. Make sure that the offset and gain are adjusted properly.
1. The MAIN OPS MENU is always displayed in the freeze
mode. Change the mode to the through mode on the lower
menu section.
2. Make sure that the lens iris is not closed.
After the power is first turned
ON, no image is displayed on 3. Make sure that the shutter speed has not been increased.
4. Check the lens for contamination.
the monitor, or the image on
the display is abnormal.
5. Check the CCD light receiving surface for contamination.
6. Make sure that the lens focus has been adjusted properly.
7. Make sure that the lighting equipment is providing adequate
illumination.
The background is completely
white (or black) even after the
shutter speed is changed.
1. Make sure that the monitor screen is not too bright or dark.
(Changes in brightness cannot be sensed.)
- Adjust the lens aperture or the illumination of the light
source.
Operations cannot be carried 1. Make sure that the remote key pad cable has been correctly
out using the remote key pad.
connected to the IV-S20.
1. Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly
connected.
2. Make sure that each terminal of the communication cable is
porperly connected.
General purpose serial
communications cannot be
performed.
3. Make sure that the communication conditions (standard,
speed, and parity check) in the personal computer conform to
those of the IV-S20.
4. Check the cable for disconnection and the connectors for
contact failure.
5. Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
6.
Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the
screen.
- Continued on the following page -
15-1
15
Troubleshooting
Phenomenon
Checks
1. Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly
connected.
2. Make sure that the communication cable route does not run
near electrically noisy devices.
3. Make sure that each terminal of the camera cables is properly
connected.
Communications through a
computer link cannot be
established.
4.
Make sure that the communication conditions (standard,
speed, and parity check) in the personal computer conform to
those of the IV-S20.
5. Make sure that a compatible model, the station No. and result
write start address have been set correctly.
6. Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
7.
Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the
screen.
1. Make sure that measurement can be started by using the key
pad to send a trigger signal.
2. Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly
connected.
Measurement does not start
even when a start trigger is
given.
3.
Make sure that the device to send a trigger signal have been
properly connected to the input terminals on the IV-S20 main
housing.
4. Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
5.
Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the
screen.
1. Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly
connected.
Measurement results are not
output.
2. Make sure that the devices have been properly connected to
the input terminals on the IV-S20 main housing.
3. Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned
ON the power.
4. Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the
screen.
1. Make sure that the lighting equipment does not flicker.
2. Make sure that the lens has not fogged up.
3. Check the lens for contamination.
Measurement results are
unstable, or NG results occur
frequently.
4.
Make sure that the focus ring has not turned. (Make sure that
the camera lock screw has been secured.)
5. Check whether the camera position has changed.
6. Make sure that the illuminance monitor window has been set
to the intermediate illumination.
15
7. Make sure that the criteria have been set properly.
15-2
Troubleshooting
[2] Causes of termination codes (when an error occurs) and remedies
When an abnormal termination code (other than 00(H)) is received, take the following measures.
Termination
code
Cause
Remedy
Processing errors
Hardware errors
Computer link errors
Communication errors
(hex.)
01
The specified processing code does not
exist.
Check the processing code.
02
The wrong number of data items was
specified in the text.
Check the number of data items in the text.
03
The text data is outside the acceptable
range.
Check the text setting range.
04
The results of the check sums are not
identical.
- Check the checksoms.
- Check the communication environment
for problems such as electric noise, which
may come in on the communication line.
05
The header code (:) was not attached to
the head of the communication command.
Check whether the header code was
attached to the head of the communication
command.
06
An asynchronous error has occurred.
- Check the communication environment
for problems such as electric noise, which
may come in on the communication line.
07
The communication command contains an
improper number of data items.
Check the number of data items in the
communication command.
08
The error code is contained in the
evaluation result area, and the error code
An error response has been returned from
is displayed on the monitor. Take the
the programmable controller.
proper measures according to the error
(Communications are performed normally.)
code (different models use different
codes).
09
A time-out has occurred during
communication through the computer link.
- Make sure the power supply of the
programmable controller and check the
connections of the cables.
- Check the communication conditions and
computer link settings.
0A
Start address error (larger than the end
address)
Check the address.
10
SDRAM error
11
Flash memory error
14
VRAM error has occurred.
18
Flash ROM delete error
19
Flash ROM write error
1A
Flash ROM verify error
20
The measurement conditions for the
specified object type have not been set.
21
The setting area is larger than the screen,
due to positional correction.
22
Correction after binary conversion: The
illuminance monitor function (system) has
not been set.
23
Correction after binary conversion: The
threshold range has exceeded the
specified range.
24
No edge detection
25
A reference image has not been
registered.
Replace the IV-S20 itself.
Replace the IV-S20 itself.
15-3
15
Check the abnormal setting.
Troubleshooting
Termination
code
Cause
Remedy
Processing errors
(hex.)
Comunication
run errors
15
26
The number of labels exceeds the limit.
27
The image lines have not been set.
28
Divide by "0" (numerical calculation)
29
Overflow (numerical calculation)
2A
No numerical calculation setting
2B
No label (camera adjustment)
2C
The search area is smaller than the
reference image.
2D
Equivalent label exceeded
2E
Edge center point exceeded (lead
inspection)
30
Coordinates range exceeded
(distance/angle measurement)
31
Same inclination (intersection of two
straight lines)
32
Divide by "0" (center of circle,
perpendicular bisector, distance between
point and straight line)
33
Perpendicular inclination 0 (perpendicular
bisector)
34
The CCD trigger has not been registered.
35
The CCD trigger is not being sampled by a
serial interface signal.
36
The SIO trigger has not been set.
37
A start point has not been set.
(Distance/angle measurement)
38
The auxiliary point conditions are not
thoroughly specified. (Distance/angle
measurement)
39
The auxiliary line conditions are not
thoroughly specified. (Distance/angle
measurement)
3A
The distance conditions are not thoroughly
specified. (Distance/angle measurement)
3B
The angle conditions are not thoroughly
specified. (Distance/angle measurement)
3C
Image reading/writing is impossible.
3D
The range of calculations using two images
has exceeded the specified range.
3E
The reference image cannot be registered
from parallel input X5.
3F
Exceeded the number of reference images
registered
40
Image not captured (CCD trigger)
41
The reference images has not been set up
yet.
42
The reference image edge is not registered
yet.
43
CCD trigger disabled (through image).
50
The object type cannot be changed.
51
No corresponding block
52
The output camera cannot be changed.
Check the abnormal setting.
15-4
Troubleshooting
[3] Maintenance
Check the equipment for the following items.
(1) Operation check
- Change the measurement number on the MAIN OPS MENU, and change the monitor screen to the
freeze or through mode. Then, make sure that the image is normally displayed.
(2) Checks
- Check the illumination from the lighting equipment.
- Make sure that the monitor screen is in focus and that the aperture setting is proper.
- Check the cable insulation for breaks, and make sure that the cable connectors are not loose.
- Carefully wipe dust off the lens with a soft, dry cloth.
- If dust has landed on the CCD surfaces of this camera, wipe them with a clean cotton swab soaked
in isopropyl alcohol. Move the cotton swab lightly and slowly in one direction. Change cotton swabs
frequently. Do not clean more than one CCD surface with one cotton swab.
[Procedure for checking after cleaning]
1 Mount the lens (mirror tube) on this camera.
2 Close the lens iris all the way.
3 Point the lens toward the light source, and check the monitor screen to make sure that there are no
spots on the screen. (If the iris is open even a little, then even if spots exist, they will not be visible
on the monitor screen. Fine adjustments to the iris are required.)
CCD
section
A
Front view
(view A) of the CCD
(3) When measurement errors and/or evaluation errors occur frequently, check:
- The illumination of the lighting equipment and lamps.
- The inspection object is within the window.
- The cables for looseness or disconnection.
- The lens for dirt and dust.
- The lens focus and aperture have not changed.
- The power is being supplied normally, and
- The parameters you set have been stored.
(If the parameters have changed, reset the parameters from the beginning.)
Reference: When a camera has been replaced, or when a camera has been dislocated, use the
camera adjustment function of the IV-S20. This function facilitates adjustment of camera
position and lens aperture.
(See item 12-2 [1] Adjustment of camera.)
15-5
15
Specifications
Chapter 16: Specifications
16-1 IV-S20 main housing
[1] Image processing specifications
Item
Specifications
Image sampling system
Image memory
Operation method
Window shape
No. of assignable object types
CCD image capture time
Time
Measurement time
Calculation
between
images
Image comparision
Calculation
Image pre-processing
Rectangle, circle, ellipse, (circle and ellipse are used for size inspection in
binary image)
16 types maximum
33.3 ms for a full image
Gray search: 37 ms (when processing a search area of 256 x 256 pixcels and
measuring an area of 64 x 64 pixels)
Between camera 1 image captured and the reference image
Between camera 2 image captured and the reference image
Between camera 1 and camera 2 images captured
Absolute value of subtraction (difference)
Edge extraction (all, horizontal, vertical), edge emphasis, smoothing
Threshold value (fixed, automatic), object identification function
Positinal correction
Gray scale search, XY correction of edge positions, θ angle correction
Binary noise elimination
Light monitor function
Measurement program
M't 0
One screen per camera
Using remote key pad
-direction (up, down, left, and right), set, release, image change,
measurement start, brightness adjustmenent-
Binary conversion
Numeric calculation function
Measurement 1, 2, 3
256 level gray scale, binary conversion, edge detection
Binary conversion: With threshold value (fixed and automatic correction)
function, and object identification function
Contraction → expansion, expansion → contraction, area filter
Arithmetic operation (+, -, x, /),
, absolute value, TAN, ATAN
Automatic threshold adjustment in binary conversion processing
No. of windows
Measurement function
Positional deviation
8 x (no. of
cameras: 2)
One point search, two points search, one point on edge,
two points on edges, one point serach + one point on edge
Degree of match inspection
16
Gray search: Two points search (yes/no) + search (yes/no)
Binary matching: One point matching
Distance, angle measurement
16 (gray scale
search, edge
detection)
1 (object
identification)
Lead inspection
Binary
conversion
8 leads with gray scale search and with edge line detection
Area measurement
16
Area
Quantity count
4
Quantity (max. 3000 pieces) , total area
Object identification
4
Total area, quantity (maximum 128 objects identified in
each window), area of each object, center of gravity,
spindle angle, fillet diameter, circumuference length
1
256 points (binary), 128 points (average density)
Point
Image storage capacity
Start
measurement signal
4
Measure distance between two points from gray search
center, edge end point, center of gravity functions (three
points, horizontal, vertical)
Auxiliary point: Center, gravity center of three points,
center of circle, 2 point line, intersection
Maximum two full screens or 200 reference images
Internal
CCD trigger (using CCD camera)
External
Trigger input (parallel I/F), general-purpose serial I/F, key pad trigger (for
manual measurment)
Output
Other functions
Parallel I/F, general purpose serial I/F, computer link
Display measuring time, manual measurements (including manual assignment
of windows), PC function, crosshair cursor, display change between Japanese
and English, run screen lock function, image display change (through/freeze),
gain/offset adjustment, monitor brightness adjustment
16-1
16
Specifications
[2] PC specifications
Item
Specifications
Input relay
Output relay
Auxiliary internal relays
Timers
7 points for parallel input (X0 to X6)
8 points for parallel output (Y0 to Y7), 1 point for BUSY, 16 points
(Y0 to Y15) for general-purpose serial I/F or computer link
128 points (C0 to C127),
11 points for special area (C117 to C127)
8 points. Timer setting time; 0.01 to 9.99 sec. (count down timer)
Counters
8 points. Counter setting value; 000 to 999 (count down timer)
[3] Hardware specifications
Item
No. of cameras
Image
input
Applicable cameras
Image
output
(monitor
output)
Display standard
Interface
with
external
devices
2 (maximum)
Dedicated camera (IV-S20C1, IV-S30C1, IV-S30C2)
EIA 525 lines (2 : 1 interlace)
Image output
1.0 Vp-p
Connector
RCA pin
Parallel I/F
Input : 7 points, 12/24 VDC, approx. 7 mA (24 VDC)
Output : 9 points, 12/24 VDC, max. 20 mA, Tr output
General-purpose I/F
Computer link
Power supply
Input terminal
(7 points)
Terminal
block
Specifications
Common for input
(1 point)
Ouput terminal (9 points)
Common for output
(1 point)
RS-232C/RS-422
(9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 k bits/sec.)
Can be connected to Sharp, OMRON, Mitsubishi computers
Power consumption current : 250mA (24 VDC±10%)
LED : When the power is ON
External trigger : 1 point (fixed), type change : 4 points (fixed)
Users selectable terminals :
- One external input, for storing a reference image and
running measurement program 1
- One external input, for storing a refernece image and
running meaurement program 2
Usable as input terminal for any programmable controller
(+) common
1 point for BUSY/READY (selectable)
8 points for user assigned logical output (Y0 to 7)
(-) common
Power supply (2 points) 24 VDC : 1 point, 0V : 1 point
Storage ambient temperature
Operation ambient temperature
Operation ambient humidity
Operation atmospher
-20 to 70 ° C
0 to 45 ° C
35 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases or dust
Vibration resistance
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
- Amplitude 0.15 mm (10 to 57 Hz), 9.8m/s2 (57 to 150 Hz)
No. of sweeps : 10 (1 octave/min.), three directions (X , Y ,Z)
Shock resistance
JIS C 0912 or equivalent : 147m/s2 (each 3 times in X,Y, and
Z directions)
16
Noise immunity
Outside dimensions (mm)
Weight
1000Vp-p 1ms width impulse (by noise simulator)
130 (W) x 92(D) x 30(H) (except protuding portions)
280 g
16-2
Specifications
16-2 Camera section
[1] Camera main body: IV-S20C1
Item
Optical
system
Picture
taking
element
Specifications
Lens mount
system
System
Interline transfer system, monocrome CCD
Reading
Full pixel, stand-alone, reading type, a partial reading of selected
lines us possible
Size
Effective no.
of pixels
Element shape
Shutter
C mount
1/3 inch
512 (horizontal) x 480 (vertical)
Square
Shutter speed (s) 1/30 to 1/10000
Method
Storage ambient
temperature
Random shutter
-20 to 70˚ C
Operation ambient
temperature
0 to 45˚ C
Operation ambient
humidity
35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration resistance
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
• Amplitude 2mm (10 to 55 Hz), 147m/s2 (55 to 150HZ)
Shock resistance
Operation atmosphere
JIS C 0912 or equivalent : 980 m/s2 (each three times in X, Y,
and Z directions)
No corrosive gases or dust
Outside dimensions (mm) 30 (W) x 32 (D) x 40 (H) (except lens and protruding portions)
Weight
Camera cable
240 g (not including the lens)
Cable length: 3 m
16
16-3
Specifications
[2] Camera: IV-S30C1/C2
Specifications
Standard, IV-S30C1
Micro, IV-S30C2
Lens mount method C mount
Custom φ17 mm mount
Item
Optical system
Picture taking
element
Method
Interline transmission method, monochrome CCD
Reading system
Full pixel type, partial image scanning is available
Reading
Size
No. of effective
pixels
Pixel shape
Shutter speed (s)
Shutter
Method
Connector
Connection to IV-S20 main housing
Operation ambient temperature
Operation ambient humidity
Operation atmosphere
Outside
dimensions
(mm)
33.3 ms *
1/3 inch
512 (horizontal) × 480 (vertical)
Square
Settable between 1/30 and 1/10,000 for each object
type
Random shutter
Round, 12-pin female connector
- Using camera conversion cable (IV-S20HC3)
0 to 45oC
35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases or dust
Camera body
Head
30 (W) × 32 (H) × 40 (D)
Head cable
--50 g (not including the
lens)
- 1 camera angle bracket
- 2 securing screws
Weight
Accessories
---
30 (W) × 32 (H) × 50 (D)
φ17× 35.6 mm
1m
125 g (The head weighs
approximately 12 g)
- 1 camera angle bracket
- 1 camera head bracket
- 3 securing screws
- 1 Instruction Manual
* Variable as per with the partial image reading specified.
16
16-4
Specifications
[3] Camera lens: IV-S20L16
Item
Specifications
Focal distance
16 mm
Maximum f-stop
1.6
Aperture range
1.6 to 16, close
Focal range
50 mm to infinite
Filter installation dia.
M 25.5, P = 0.75, U1
Mount system
C mount
Applicable cameras
IV-S20C1, IV-S30C1, IV-S30C3 (cameras for IV-S30)
[4] Camera conversion cable: IV-S20HC3
Item
Specifications
Cable length
3m
Cable sheath
Polyvinyl chloride
Connector
Minimum bend radius
Main housing side: Round, 13-pin female connector
Camera side: Round, 12-pin male connector
75 mm
[5] Camera extension cable: IV-S20EC2/EC4
Item
Specifications
Cable length
2 m (IV-S20EC2), 4 m (IV-S20EC4)
Cable sheath
Polyvinyl chloride
Connector
Minimum bend radius
Main housing side: Round, 13-pin female connector
Camera side: Round, 13-pin male connector
75 mm
16
16-5
Specifications
16-3 Peripheral device
[1] Monochrome monitor IV-09MT specifications
Item
Speicfications
Power input voltage
90 to 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input capacity
25 VA
Signal voltage
1.0 Vp-p/75 ohms
Screen display resolution
900 scanning lines (center), 60 scanning lines (edge)
Scan method
EIA 525 lines (2:1 interlace)
Scan frequency
Horizontal : 15.75 kHz, vertical : 48 to 62 Hz
Image size
8% under scan
Linearity
Horizontal : 10% or less, vertical : max. 10%
Image input connector
BNC
Image input impedance
75 ohms/ High-Z
Video output connector
BNC
Front
Brightness adjustment, contrast adjustment, vertical position adjustment, horizontal position adjustment
Back
Focal adjustment, vertical width adjustment, horizontal linearity
adjustment, sub-bright adjustment (used only by our service staff)
Adjustment function
Storage ambient temperature
—20 to 60 °C
Operation ambient
0 to 45 °C
temperature
Operation ambient humidity
35 to 85%RH (non-considering)
Atmosphere
No corrosive gases
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
Vibration resistance
- Amplitude 0.15mm, (10 to 57 Hz), 9.8m/s2 57 to 150 Hz),
No. of sweeps : 10 (1 octave/min.) 3 directions (X, Y, Z)
Shock resistance
JIS C 0912 or equivalent 147m/s2 (each 3 times in X,Y, and Z
directions)
Weight
Approx. 6 kg
Dimensions (mm)
220 (W) × 238(D) × 257(H) (except protuding portions)
Dielectrical strength
AC1000V, 1 minute (between AC plug and shassis)
Insulation resistance
DC500V, 10M ohms or more (between AC plug and shassis）
Accessories
One instruction manual
Outlune dimensions drawings
252
(Unit : mm)
220
252
238
11
238
227
16
16-6
Specifications
[2] LED lighting equipment IV-60LD specifications
Item
Specifications
36 LEDs 5mm. High brightness LEDs
- Standard lighting range
LEDs used
Standard lighting range
Approx. 50mm × 50mm (work distance at 150mm)
24 VDC ± 10% , 2P terminal
Input voltage
Current consumption
Approx. 2W
Lighting level adjustment
Operation ambient
temperature
Semi-fixed volume
0 to 45 °C
Storage ambient
temperature
-10 to 60 °C
Operation ambient
humidity
35 to 90%RH (non-condensing)
Operation atmosphere
No corrosive gases or dust
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
- Amplitude 2mm (10 to 61 Hz), 147m/s2 (61 to 150Hz),
No. of sweeps : 10 (1 octave/min.), 3 directions (X,Y,Z)
Vibration resistance
JIS C 0912 or equivalent, 147m/s2 (each 3 times in directions X,
Y, and Z directions)
Shock resistance
Outside dimensions (mm) 76.9 × 73.6 × 25.0 (except camara angle bracket)
Weight
Approx. 230g (IV-60LD body : Approx. 140g + Camera angle
bracket : Approx. 90g)
Accessories
One camera angle bracket, 6 installation screws (M3 × 6mm),
one instruction manual
Outline dimensions drawings
The dimensions shown below are when an the IV-S20 camera is attached.
73.6
(Unit : mm)
17
* (2 places)
The dimensions will vary according to
the installation direction of the camera.
32.5
19.8
77.3
Camera center
32
32
77.3
19.8
Camera center
17
Camera center
32.5
25
3
3
25
90
62
*
62
34
44.8
73.6
16-7
104 ( or 98.5, 93 )
44.8
34 *
16
Glossary
Glossary
[A]
Ë Area filter
A function used to eliminate an island if it area is smaller that the specified size after each of the objects
in an image have been identified.
Ë Arrangement of the square pixels
This refers to CCD elements whose pixels are square and arranged at the same vertical and horizontal
interval.
If this type of CCD element is used, length corrections do not need to be calculated and the precision and
processing time do not deteriorate.
Rectangular grid
Square grid
1.28
1
1
1
CCD pick-up elements
One pixel
The aspect ratio is 1: 1.
Ë Artifact processing
Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of the target
object when an artifact is in the line being scanned. This process can be used during edge detection. The
real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration of the dark area in the scan
line, which is much longer for a target object than for an artifact.
[Example of detection]
- An example of light to dark averaging (DETECT MODE:BRT - DRK) while scanning horizontally (DE
TECT DIR.:HORI -), with artifact processing (enabled) (PRC. PROJECT: YES).
Duration of dark area
in the line scan
Average light (vertical)
Edge detection point
(with artifact processing: enabled)
When artifact processing is disabled in the above example, the edge detection point changes.
Edge detection point (with artifact processing off)
[B]
Ë Binary image
Pixels in images are converted to one of two values, "1" when the pixel is lighter than the specified
threshold value (level), and "0" when it is darker than the specified threshold value (level).
G-1
G
Glossary
Variation in
lighting
Ë Binary processing (fixed/threshold value correction)
By setting THESHLD. ADJ (threshold adjustment function), the IV-S20 can cope with variations in lighting.
Threshold correction value
Note: In order to use the THRESHOLDADJ (threshold adjustment
function), the monitor brightness
functions must be selected to
measure variations in lighting. If
Fixed
you don't select the monitor
brightness function, a BINARY
CORR.: LIGHT LVL NOT SET
(correcting binary value: monitor
illumination not selected) error will
occur.
Fails to convert the image
due to a variation in lighting
[C]
Ë CCD (charge capture device)
A charge capture device (CCD) converts light into electric signals. It consists of a photo-electric converter
to convert light and store it as an electric charge signal, a scanner to read the stored electric charges, and
an output section to transmit the signals as a stream of data.
Ë CCD trigger
The CCD trigger allows sampling a part of the CCD camera image at high speed. When the sampled
image changes, the camera starts the shutter operation to capture a new image. With this build in shutter
operation, an external sensor, such as a photo sensor, is not needed to trigger the shutter. A window can
be created to trigger the shutter operation. The window can be set for each item on the production line so
that adjustments to the position of an external sensor are no longer needed. This feature reduces the
down time needed to change items on production lines.
Item 1
Feed
direction
Item 2
Feed
direction
Window for triggering the shutter operation
Ë Center of gravity
The "center of gravity" is the geographical center of the image. It is determined by treating the binary
image to be measured as an object that has mass.
Ë C mount
A system for mounting lenses on a camera body. The flange back (the distance from the reference level
for mounting a lens to the focal plane surface) is defined as 17.526 mm.
Ë Computer link
Programmable controllers (PC) are equipped with communication protocols. The "computer link" is used
to transfer data between the PC and an external computer, or the like, using this communication protocol.
The IV-S20 supports the computer link protocols used by Sharp, Omron, and Mitsubishi PCs. Therefore,
the PC does not need a custom communication program in order to create a computer link with the IVS20.
G
Ë Contraction
- See "Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image."
G-2
Glossary
[E]
Ë Edge emphasis
- See "Pre-processing."
Ë Edge extruction
- See "Pre-processing."
Ë Expansion
- See "Expansion and contraction to elimiate binary noise in the image."
Ë Edge detection
The "edge" refers to the boundaries between the brighter (white) and darker (black) parts in an image.
The "edge detection" function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image.
Edge
width
A
B
Flat
width
Brightness
A
Edge
Difference
in darkness
level
Scanning direction B
[An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified criteria]
- Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from left to right)
A
Detection area
B
B
Detection direction
A
Detection area
A
B
Detection direction
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
Edge detection
point
B
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Direction
A
- Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from
bottom to top)
Detection
direction
- Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from right to left)
Detection
direction
point
Edge detection point
A
- Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from top
to bottom) Edge detection
B
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
A
Direction
B
- Center (dark), horizontal (left and right)
Edge detection point
Detection area
- Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles
A: Moving right horizontally
from light to dark
B: Moving right horizontally
from dark to light
C: Moving left horizontally
from dark to light
D: Moving left horizontally
from light to dark
G
Internal diameter (between B and C)
External diameter (between A and D)
Detection area
G-3
Glossary
Contraction
Expansion
Binary
conversion
Ë Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image
When an image is converted to black and white, a number of unwanted dots may appear in the image.
These noises can be eliminated during the preliminary processing. Dot control processing of binary values is used to eliminate this problem, as described below.
- 1Expansion
If a white area contains a single, isolated black point, the system will interrupt the black point to
white.
2Contraction
If a black area contains a single, isolated white point, the system will converts the white point to
black.
- 1Expansion _ contraction
Delete isolated black points by expansion and then restore the original image size by contraction.
Expansion
Contraction
Binary
conversion
2Contraction _ expansion
Delete isolated white points by contraction and then restore the original image size by expansion.
[F]
Fillet height
(vertical)
Ë Fillet width (shading width)
Size of a hollow rectangle which closely matches to the target object in a binary image (white part).
Horizontal direction: Length of a side parallel to the X axis. Vertical direction: Length of a side parallel to
the Y axis.
Fillet width (horizontal)
Ë Flat width
- See "Edge detection."
G
G-4
Glossary
Ë Full pixel reading (progressive scan)
A system which reads all of pixels of image information from the CCD element one after another is
referred to as "full pixel reading system." This system provides the same high resolution for moving
objects as it does for static objects.
On the other hand, conventional CCDs using the NTSC scanning technique must read an object two
times. First the odd lines are read and then the even lines. Therefore, NTSC system produces blurry
images of moving objects. In order to solve this problem, the NTSC system can read only the odd lines.
The disadvantage is that only half the resolution is available.
Conventional NTSC system
Odd line
Even line
Full pixel reading system
CCD
Odd line
Even line
Full lines
Image signal
[G]
Ë Gray scale check using the normalization correlation method
Even when the IV-S20 is looking at the same object as the object used for the reference image, the new
target image and the previously stored reference image may not match completely, due to variations in
the illumination conditions and the ambient light.
In order to check the resemblance between the two sets of image data, the normalization correlation
method can be used.
In order to check whether or not the levels match using the normalization correlation method, the system
slides the reference image one pixel at a time in the measurement objective range (measurement window), and calculates correlation value between the reference image and the target image. The position
where the maximum correlation value can be obtained is treated as the position where the target image
might exist, and the IV-S20 calculates resemblance level at this position.
The normalization correlation method also can be applied to binary images. However, gray scale images
(images with shades of light) contain large volumes of information, compared with binary images (images
with 256 levels of gray have 256 times the volume of information than in binary images). Therefore, grayscale images offer more precision and more reliable results.
However, the larger the information volume, the larger the number of calculations that must be made for
correlation values. This means that high speed processing hardware and software are required to use
the normalization correlation method on the gray scale images.
G
G-5
Glossary
Ë Gray scale search (corrected gray scale search)
The "gray scale search" function is a system for detecting a point where the input image and the reference image match, after calculating the matching levels in the input image and the reference image.
[Procedures]
1 Store the reference image as a gray scale image with 256 levels of gray.
2 Capture the workpiece image to be measured.
3 Move the captured image of the object so that the upper left corner of the captured image is right
on top of the upper left edge of the reference image. Calculates the level of matching between
the two images, based on the stored gray scale image data.
4 If the match is G, slide the reference image over one pixel width and then measure the level of
matching at that position.
5 Repeat step 4 above for the whole workpiece image until a good match is found.
(Output)
Maximum matching level value
The center coordinates where the highest
level of matching is obtained
(Application)
Shape inspection
Positional deviation measurement
Reference image
Detected image
Search range in the image
Ë Gray scale processing (gray image processing)
This is a process used to handle the unmodified captured image data, obtained from the CCD camera. In
other words, the image data is not converted to binary values.
- This process produces more precise results than binary image processing (one pixel = one bit) by using
8 bits (one pixel = 256 gray levels) to represent each pixel in a gray scale image.
[Advantage]
Theoretically, better precision and reliability can be offered because the image contains
more information about the brightness of each pixel in the image.
[Disadvantage] More processing time is required because this approach must handle a large amount of
data.
[H]
Ë Halogen lamp
Light source with halogen gas in the bulb. When a halogen lamp is lit, the halogen gas and vaporized
tungsten combine. When the filament is heated, these combined particles reattach to the tungsten, in
stead of being deposited on the glass bulb, so that the original brightness of the lamp is maintained
throughout its life span.
Ë High frequency lighting
If a fluorescent lamp is powered by commercial electricity, it will flicker at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since the CCD
scans images at 60 Hz, the brightness of the image may fluctuated due to the flickering of the fluorescent
lamp.
By increasing frequency sued to power the fluorescent lamp (employing a high frequency light), this type
interference is eliminated and a stable image can be obtained.
G
G-6
Glossary
[I]
Ë Illumination monitor alarm density setting
The "illumination (light level) monitor" is a function which automatically monitors the environmental lighting conditions when measuring objects.
If the illuminance exceeds the alarm density setting, the IV-S20 will display an alarm message.
Ë Interline transfer system
The interline transfer system is an electrical charge transfer system which consists of two separate areas: the area where the light beams are converted into electrical charges by the CCD elements, and the
area where the charges are transferred.
Ë Island
An "island" is a separate area which is created after labeling (object identification) process the binary
image.
[M]
Ë Main axis angle
The "center of gravity" is the geographical center of the image. It is determined by treating the binary
image to be measured as an object that has mass.
＋30°
−30°
Ë Mask window
The image being examined may contain an area that does not need to be processed. To eliminate such
an area, a mask window is used.
Measurement window
Object to be measured
Mask window
[N]
Ë Normalization correlation
To determine whether the levels between the reference image and the input image match, the IV-S20
uses an information processing method called "normalization correlation." This is a method used to calculate relationship between two groups of data.
- Factors determining the correlation value
If the densities of the two images have the same tendency (positive correlation), the two images are
said to resemble each other. If the densities of the two images have opposite tendencies (negative
correlation), the two images are said not to resemble each other. Therefore, areas of the reference
image and the input image which resemble each other (the areas of both images are brighter, or
darker) are positive, and areas which do not (the areas of one is brighter and the other is darker) are
negative.
- Correlation formula = { A √ B x C } x 10000
A = N∑ (I x T) – (∑I) x (∑T): Correlation between input image and reference image
B = N∑ (I x I) – (∑I) x (∑I): Correlation between input images
C = N∑ (T x T) – (∑T) x (∑T): Correlation between reference images
(N: Area of reference image, T: Density of reference image, I: Density of input image)
G-7
G
Glossary
[O]
Ë Object identification and numbering function, (labeling)
Object identification and numbering (labeling) is a process for locating separate object and assigning
serial numbers (labels) one at a time in a binary image. By this process, multiple objects in the same
binary image can be handled separately or as a group.
Binary
conversion
3
4
Object
identifi1
cation
(in order of
scanning)
3
2
Island
Object identification 4
(in order of area)
2
Island
1
[P]
Ë Partial CCD reading
The "partial CCD reading" technique reads only that part of the CCD which contains the object needed for
image processing. This can shorten the data transfer time from the CCD camera to the image memory.
To read the entire CCD image (480 horizontal lines) takes approximately 33 ms. With the partial reading
technique (e. g.: 120 horizontal lines) can take only 25 % of the time to read the entire image.
The IV-S20 can automatically determine the width of the partial image window. You can change back and
forth between reading the whole image and a partial image.
120
480
Whole image reading Partial image reading
512
512
Ë Pixel
On the CCD, the electrically charged elements are in close proximity, arranged in a matrix (480 lines in
vertical direction, 512 rows in horizontal direction). One element is equivalent to one pixel.
G
G-8
Glossary
Ë Pre-processing
Pre-processing includes various image manipulation processes that create more readable images by
removing noise and distortion in the image data. And, by extracting or emphasizing certain image features, it is easier to evaluate or identify target objects by converting the images into standard patterns.
In the IV-S20, you can select from "smoothing," "edge emphasis," and "edge extraction (whole, horizontal, vertical)" pre-processing techniques
Contents
Item
- Display smooth images decreasing the noise.
Smoothing - Use to eliminated surface flaws and unevenness in the reflected light
caused by protrusions or dents.
- Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas.
Edge
emphasis - Used to stabilize and create a binary outline of obscure objects.
- Display images after extracting and clarifying the boundaries between the
brighter and darker areas.
Edge
- Used to measure objects with low contrast.
extraction - Horizontal edge extraction: Display only the with horizontal boundaries o
an object.
- Vertical edge extraction: Display only the vertical boundaries of an object.
- See page 9-9 for descriptions about example for image.
Ë Progressive scan
- See "Full pixel reading."
[R]
Ë Random shutter function
This function allows the CCD camera shutter operation to be triggered when even an object to be measured reaches a specified position in the camera's field of view.
In order to make a partial reading of the CCD image at high speed, the IV-S20 is equipped with the
detection function described above with the works just like a proximity sensor to trigger the CCD. A
proximate sensor can also be connected to the system.
Ë Resolution
The CCD in the IV-S20 contains 512 pixels horizontally and 480 pixels vertically. If it takes a full picture,
the resolution will be X/512 and Y/480.
[S]
Ë Search area
A portion of the target image to be compared with the reference image, using the gray scale search
function.
Ë Search pixel
The relationship between detection precision and search speed, and also between pixel contraction
(reduce the number of pixels in the image that must be searched) and search speed, is shown below:
- DETECT ACCURANCY: High speed + [STANDARD-HIGH] _ Low speed
(dectection precision)
(standard) (high precision)
- CONTR. PIXEL:
(pixel contraction)
High speed + [3 - 2 - 1] _ Low speed
Search speed
G-9
G
Glossary
Ë Setting window boundaries (enable/disable)
This function enables and disables the labeling (object identification) of binary images located that cross
over the window frame boundary.
2
1
Window
Labeling
(Enable
Binary
window
conversion
boundaries)
Labeling
(Disable window
boundary)
1
2
3
4
Images 1 and 3 cross over the
window frame edges and are
measured together with the
areas outside the window frame
edges.
Condition: Labeling (in order they are scanned)
Ë Smoothing
- See "Pre-processing."
Ë Sub pixel, pixel
Refers to the pixel precision level to be used with the gray scale search function.
- A "pixel" is one picture element (DETECT ACCURACY: STANDARD (detection precision: standard) in
case of the IV-S20). "Sub pixel" refers to a unit smaller than a single pixel (DETECT ACCURACY: HIGH
(detection precision: high) for 1/10 pixel in case of the IV-S20).
(High precision)
Search coordinates use a
sub pixel level of precision
0
(Standard)
Search coordinates use
a pixel level of precision
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Degree of matching
Reference image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Degree of matching
[T]
Ë Threshold value
The criteria used for binary conversion of a gray scale image. If an area of the image is lighter than this
threshold value, it is converted to 1. If an area of the image is darker than the threshold value, it is
converted to 0.
G
G-10
Glossary
Ë Threshold value setting
The IV-S20 treats the "areas darker than the lower limit value" or "brighter than the upper limit value" as
"black." It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as "white." However, if
the white-black reverse function is enabled, conversion to white/black will be reversed. Normally, if you
want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion, set the upper limit value to "255." Then you
only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for our application.
(Threshold value)
255
White
Lower
limit A
Threshold value B
Binary conversion
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
Threshold value A
B
(Threshold value)
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
(Captured image)
(Threshold value)
255
Black
Upper
limit A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
Binary conversion
(upper limit = A,
lower limit = B)
Black
0
(Threshold value)
255
A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
( Example for adjustment )
An example of adjustment is shown below, using a white object on a black background. When
the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image, if the lower limit is set higher, the
black part in the binary image will become larger. If the lower limit is set lower, the white part
will become larger. Increase and decrease the lower limit value, find the value at which the
white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts
growing. Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points. This will ensure
reliable operation.
Black
Inspection image
The size of the white area changes
depending on the threshold value setting.
As the value increases,
the black part grows larger.
255
Lower limit threshold
White
0
Stable range *
White
As the value decreases,
the white part grows larger.
Horizontal coordinate
of the dotted line
Changing the lower limit threshold value
* If the stable range in the lower limit threshold
value is less than 20, (actual measurement)
measurement errors may occur.
[W]
Ë Window
The IV-S20 captures images using CCDs, which are the light sensitive elements in the camera. The IVS20 may capture more than one target image to be measured for image processing, and it may capture
images not required for measurement. In these cases, a window is used to pick out just the desired target
for measurement. The area inside the window will contain the object to be measured and the areas
outside the window will be ignored.
Object to be measured
Window
Objects outside the designated
measurement area
G-11
G
Appendix
Appendix 1: Support tools available on the market
Manufacturers of the support tools which can be used with the IV-S20 are listed below.
Products available from SHARP => See the next page.
(1) Lighting equipment
Supplier
Address
Postal code
Phone
Moritex Corporation
3-1-14, Jingumae, Shibuya Ku, Tokyo
150-0001
03-3401-9711
Nippon PI Co., Ltd.
1-17-1, Toranomon, Minato Ku, Tokyo
105-0001
03-3504-3321
Rawtronocs Corporation
6-1, 3 Chome, Kamifukuoka, Kamifukuoka City, Saitama
356-0004
0492-64-1391
Hayashi Watch Works Co., Ltd.
1-28-3, Kita Otsuka, Toshima Ku, Tokyo
170-0004
03-3918-5237
(2) Lens (lens-barrel)
Suplier
Address
Postal code
Phone
Seiwa Optical Corp.
12-17, 4 Chome, Yayoi Cho, Nakano Ku, Tokyo
164-0013
03-3383-6301
Asahi Precision Co., Ltd.
1-21, 1 Chome, Sirako, Wako City, Saitama
351-0101
048-466-8801
Chugai Optronics Co., Ltd.
2-15-13, Thukishima, Chuou Ku, Tokyo
104-0052
03-3536-4766
Tamron Co., Ltd.
1385, Hasunuma, Omiya City, Saitama
330-8556
048-684-9129
Canon Sales Company Inc.
Optical Lens Sales Department
2-13-29, Kounan, Minato Ku, Tokyo
108-0075
03-3740-3388
(3) Optical filter
Supplier
Sakai Glass Engneering Co., Ltd.
Address
2-3-6, Sengoku, Koutou Ku, Tokyo
Postal code
135-0015
Phone
03-3647-6031
App..
Appendix-1
Table of standard items related to the IV-S30 handled by SHARP
SHARP's
article Nbr.
Moritex's
article Nr.
Item name
Specifications
IV-1A0101
ML-0614
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 6 mm
IV-1A0102
ML-0813
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 8 mm
IV-1A0103
ML-1214
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 12 mm
IV-1A0104
ML-2514
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 25 mm
IV-1A0105
ML-3514
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 35 mm
IV-1A0106
ML-5018
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 50 mm
IV-1A0107
ML-7527
CCTV lens
C mount
f = 75 mm
IV-1A0201
ML-EXR
Close up ring
A set of 7 intermediate rings
IV-1A0301
MML1-65D
Telecentric lens
C mount
IV-1A0302
MML2-65D
Telecentric lens
C mount
2x
φ17 mm mount f = 7.5 mm
φ17 mm mount f = 15 mm
1x
IV-1A1101
ML17-07516
CCTV lens
IV-1A1102
ML17-1520
CCTV lens
IV-1A1103
ML17-2431
CCTV lens
IV-1A1301
MML1-65D-CM1
Telecentric lens
φ17 mm mount f = 24 mm
φ17 mm mount 1x
IV-1A1302
MML2-65D-CM1
Telecentric lens
φ17 mm mount 2x
IV-2A0101
MHF-H50LR
Halogen light source 50 W
IV-2A0102
MHF-D100LR
Halogen light source 100 W
IV-2A0103
MHF-150L
Halogen light source 150 W
IV-2A0201
LM-50
Halogen lamp
12 V, 50 W
IV-2A0202
LM-100
Halogen lamp
12 V, 100 W
IV-2A0203
LM-150
Halogen lamp
12 V, 150 W (high luminous)
IV-2A0204
LM-150C
Halogen lamp
12 V, 150 W (long life)
IV-2A0301
MRG31-1500S
Ring light guide
φ 31 x 1500 mm
IV-2A0302
MRG48-1500S
Ring light guide
φ 48 x 1500 mm
IV-2A0401
MSG4-1100S
Straight light guide
φ 4 mm, 1100 mm
IV-2A0701
MPP60-1500S
Surface illuminating
light guide
60 x 60 mm, 1500 mm
IV-2A0901
KA-03
Crystal adapter
Needed when the IV-2A0701
is used with an IV-2A0102
The items listed above are all Moritex products.
App
Appendix-2
Appendix 2: Software version information
Described below are the details of the upgrade of the IV-S20 system program software.
Software version 2.09
Software version 2.09 does not contain any new or improved functions, not found in the software version
2.07 and 2.08.
Additional functions in software version 2.07 (compared with version 2.06)
Item
Added function
Reference page
Distance and angle
measurement
Added "LINE-2P" and "INTERSECTION"
9-64
Serial communication
Added "4.8 kbps" communication speed
11-17
Additional functions in software version 2.06 (compared with version 2.04)
Item
Added function
A reference image used for the calculation between
images can also be registered.
Parallel input X5
Automatic correction of the upper and lower limits used
for the final area judgement condition.
Manual measurement
Automatic setting of the initial value for manual
measurement
General-purpose serial
I/F
Added reading and specifying functions for the manual
measurement coordinates (processing codes 70/71)
Reference page
11-1
8-8
13-1, 13-13
Additional function and detalis about the improved functions on software version 2.04
(compared with version 2.02)
- Additional function
Item
Additional function
Reference page
General purpose I/F
Block 51 has just been added.
13-24
Computer link
Block 51 has just been added.
14-15
[I/O SETTINGS] menu The CAM-MEAS has been added to the 6PARALLEL INPUT X6.
11-1
Distance and angle
measurement
The DIST-BETW-X and DIST-BETW-Y have been added to the
2 DISTANCE TYPE on the [DISTANCE SETTINGS] menu.
9-65
[RUN MENU
SETTINGS] menu
The MANL-MESR have been added to the 8DISPLAY + CURSOR".
- This is used to get the overall distance, X coordinate distance, and Y
coordinate distance between two points, which are manually designated.
8-8
The 0 IMAGE DISPLAY has been added.
- These measurements can also be made on the through images.
8-9
- Details about the improved functions
Item
Improved functions
Reference page
The BLOCK SPACING for block registration has been improved.
Point measurement Minimum 4 pixels _ Minimum 0 pixel. Increase/decrease spaces in units
of 4 pixels _ In units of 1 pixel.
9-110
Illuminance monitor
The monitoring window size and position can now be changed in units of
one pixel instead of four pixels.
9-115
General purpose I/F
The number of labels is also output to a dummy label in the object
identification by binary conversion operation
13-19
App..
Appendix-3
Detalis about the improved functions in software version 2.02 (compared with version 2.01)
Item
Improved functions
Lead inspection
Reference page
Increased number of leads the can be inspected (from 64 to 128 pins max.)
9-72
"Form 4" has been added to the control procedures, and a "QW" command
Computer link
has been added to the block write commands when the Mitsubishi is set.
Binary processing
VAR-RATE (variation rate) has been added to the THRSHLD-ADJ.
Blocks 60 to 77 have been added to the "Label measurement after binary
Communication
(general-purpose se- conversion" operation.
rial) computer link
Changed data order for the block 0 of "Label measurement after binary conversion ".
Computer link
Changed data order for the masurement programs
- Block 2 in distance and angle measurements, block 0 in lead
inspection, block 0 in area measurement by binary conversion, block 0
in label measurement after binary conversion.
Parallel input X5
The reference image registration function, using input terminal X5, has
been extended to make it available with camera 2.
11-18, 14-24
9-51, 9-62
9-85, 9-93
9-101, 9-109
13-20, 14-12
13-19, 14-11
14-8 to 10
11-1
Binary image displays are set to "Yes" and the [MAIN OPS MENU] , the
measuring time is reduced.
[ Example of the measuring time ]
- Measurement conditions
Area measurement
by binary conversion
Counting quantity
by binary conversion
Capture all images, registered window number = 1
Measurement window = Rectangle, upper left coordinates (0, 0),
lower right coordinates (511, 239)
Mask window = Rectangle, upper left coordinates (0, 0),
lower right coordinates (255, 119)
- Measuring time
When the shutter speed is 1/60 sec., the measuring time is reduced
from 143 ms (version 2.01) to 101 ms (version 2.02).
When the shutter speed is 1/1000 sec., the measuring time is
reduced from 127 ms (version 2.01) to 85 ms (version 2.02).
Auxiliary relay C112 Changed functions of the auxiliary relays C112 (final evaluation result)
Auxiliary relay C114 and C114 (CCD trigger status output).
10-7
Change between
the Japanese and
English display
modes
12-1
The menu display details in the English display mode have totally
changed.
Newly added functions on software version 2.01 (compared with version 2.0)
Item
Additional function
Latch the measurement results on the operation
Operation screen screen after resetting the power.
Object type
change
When the measurement start input is general-purpose
serial input, the object type can be changed using the
type number specification instruction
(processing code 55).
App
Appendix-4
Reference page
Description of
paragraph 9 on
page 7-2 to 7-3
11-7 and 13-1.
Detalis about the improved functions in software version 2.0 (compared with version 1.6)
Item
Gray search
Edge detection
Measurement of
positional
deviation
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 1.6 or earlier
High speed
- Improved processing speed (from 55ms in version 1.6 to
37ms in version 2.0), when the search area is 256 × 256,
a 64 × 64 model is used, and the reduction ratio is 3.
- Processing speed improved approximately 60%, for the
large model size.
Gray search line can be used
Rectangles only
Register a reference image from external equipment
Not available
Detection coordinates can be set at any position
Limited to the center of the
reference image
Gray search precision level can be set independently for
each reference image
Could only be set for each
emasurement
Lines and rectangles can both be detected
Rectangles only
Center point detection can both be detected
Not available
Increased number of edge detection directions to 4:
Horizontal (-, =), vertical (], [)
Two directions：
Horizontal (-), vertical (])
Artifact processing added
Not available
Ability to assign X axis correction and Y axis correction
independently for a two-point search.
Only simultaneous correction of X
and Y axes.
Rotation correction function added
Not available
Function to count quantities was added (up to 3000 items,
Up to 128 objects
including an area filter)
Increased number of object identification before area filter
Up to 128 objects
Binary conversion (3000 objects)
measurement
Only rectangle and circle
Ellipse window added
Point
measurement
Lead inspection
Binary conversion pre-processing available for each
window
Settable only for each
measurement
Verification using average density is possible
Density after binary conversion
only
Added lead length inspection function
Lead pitch only
Display maximum and minimum values
Average value only
Display NG positions
No display
Added AND STR and OR STR operation instructions
PC functions
Check for doubled use of the same instruction
No check
Added list of functions used and execution monitor
No monitor
Direct Y output and auxiliary relay for evaluation result
added, also numeric value calculations.
Needed to create a ladder program.
Added output of final evaluation result (C112) and
continuous trigger relay (C113)
Numerical
calculations
Square root, absolute value, TAN, and ATAN calculation
functions are added
Added final numerical calculation function
Only numerical calculation for each
measurement
Load and save displayed image
General-purpose
Communication function between another IV module
serial input
(for creating a clone)
Save only
Computer link
Block 0 only
Assignable output block as well as block 0
Not available
App..
To the next page
Appendix-5
Item
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 1.6 or earlier
Added calculation functions for comparison between
registered images and captured images [(balance
absolute value)/(balance value)]
No calculation functions for comparison
Added calculation function for comparison between
camera 1 image and camera 2 image [(balance absolute
value/(balance value)]
No calculation functions for comparison
Windows can be set in units of one pixel (in units of 4
pixles for a gray search)
In units of 8 pixels (in units of 32 pixels
for object identification)
Introduced pop-up menus for screen display
Others
Can display binary images
Only dark and bright image
Can display programmable OK/NG
No OK/NG display
Displays "COMMUNICATING" (indicates that the IV-S20
is currently communicating)
No display
Displays input terminals
No display
Displays numerical calculation results
No display
Measurement number selectable from X5 and X6
Not available
Select between BUSY and READY outputs
BUSY output only
Added evaluation using average density from CCD trigger Area only after binary conversion
Shutter speed can be set for each object type
One time for all types
Shutter speed can be set continuously
Fixed value only
Possible to test using the through image
Only available in version 1.6
Store monitor brightness level setting in flash memory
No storing in flash memory
Note : In version 2.0, selection numbers are counted from 0 compared with version 1.6.
(except camera numbers)
Object type numbers
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 1.6 or earlier
0 to 15
1 to 16
Measurement program numbers Measurement 0 to 3 Measurement 1 to 4
Setting numbers for each menu
(such as registration numbers,
mode numbers etc.)
Start at 0
App
Appendix-6
Start at 1
Alphabetical Index
[A]
Absolute value of difference .................................................................................................... 9-24, 9-25
Accessory ........................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Adjustment of image brightness ......................................................................................................... 7-8
Angle bracket ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Angle conditions (distance and angle measurement) ....................................................................... 9-66
Angular deviation (positional deviation measurement) ..................................................................... 9-41
Angle number (distance and angle measurement) ........................................................................... 9-66
Angle type (distance and angle measurement) ................................................................................ 9-66
Area (area measurement by binary conversion) .............................................................................. 9-86
Area filter ........................................................................................................................................... G-1
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
Area measurement by binary conversion
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-20
Computer link ........................................................................................................................ 14-10
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-5, 9-82
Operation example ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-83
Setting details .............................................................................................................................. 9-84
Area setting procedure ..................................................................................................................... 9-26
Artifact processing ............................................................................................................................ 9-12
Distance and angle measurement (edge detection) .................................................................... 9-61
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-76
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-39
Arrangement of square pixel ...................................................................................................... 1-1, G-1
Assignment of output block ............................................................................................................ 11-20
Auxiliary change (AUX-CHNG) ....................................................................................................... 10-16
Auxiliary condition setting (distance angle measurement) ............................................................... 9-64
Auxiliary point number (distance and angle measurement) ............................................................. 9-64
Auxiliary point type (distance and angle measurement) ................................................................... 9-64
Auxiliary relay (C000 to C127) .......................................................................................................... 10-7
[B]
Back plane focus ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Backlighting ........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
Binary area conditions
Area measurement by binary conversion ........................................................................... 9-84 to 85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-92
Object identification by binary conversion ....................................................................... 9-100 to102
I-1
Binary image display .......................................................................................................................... 8-6
Binary processing (fixed/threshold) ............................................................................................ 9-8, G-2
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-51
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Existence inspection by point measurement .............................................................................. 9-109
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
Block (measurement data) ............................................................................................................. 13-15
Communication general purpose I/F
Area measurement by binary conversion ............................................................................. 13-20
Counting quantities by binary conversion ............................................................................. 13-20
Degree of match inspection for shape and size .................................................................... 13-17
Distance and angle measurement ........................................................................................ 13-18
Final numeric calculation result ............................................................................................ 13-24
Lead inspection ..................................................................................................................... 13-19
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................... 13-20 to 21
Point measurement ............................................................................................................... 13-23
Positional deviation/absolute position measurement ................................................... 13-15 to 16
Computer link
Area measurement by binary conversion ............................................................................. 14-10
Counting quantities by binary conversion ............................................................................. 14-10
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ...................................................................... 14-7
Distance and angle measurement .......................................................................................... 14-8
Final numeric calculation result ............................................................................................ 14-14
Lead inspection ....................................................................................................................... 14-9
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................... 14-11 to 12
Point measurement ............................................................................................................... 14-13
Positional deviation/absolute position measurement ....................................................... 14-5 to 6
Boundary processing ......................................................................................................................... G-1
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
BUSY ......................................................................................................................................... 6-16, 7-2
[C]
C mount ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1, G-2
Camera 1 connector ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
Camera 2 connector ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
Camera angle bracket ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
Camera body ............................................................................................................................... 4-1, 5-1
Camera cable ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Camera installation distance ....................................................................................................... 6-4, 6-6
Camera lens (IV-S20L16) ................................................................................................... 4-1, 5-1, 16-3
Camera measurement (parallel input X6) ......................................................................................... 11-1
I-2
Camera position adjustment ...................................................................................................... 12-5 to 7
Camera selection (between images) ................................................................................................ 9-25
Cameras 1 and 2 ....................................................................................................................... 8-1, 9-25
CCD (charge capture device) ............................................................................................................ G-2
CCD camera (specifications) ............................................................................................................ 16-2
CCD section .............................................................................................................................. 5-1, 15-5
CCD trigger ............................................................................................................... 1-1, 4-4, 11-17, G-2
Center of gravity measurement (object identification by binary conversion) .......................... 9-102, G-2
Change the Japanese or English display mode ............................................................................... 12-1
Circle window ..................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Close-up shot ring .............................................................................................................................. 6-4
Communication (general purpose serial interface) ........................................................................... 13-1
Communication connector ......................................................................................................... 5-2, 6-16
Communication format (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-4
Communication standard ................................................................................................................ 11-18
Comparative calculations between images ..................................................................... 9-24 to 25,9-27
Compatible models (computer link) .................................................................................................. 14-1
Computer link (conditions) .................................................................................... 11-1, 11-19, 14-1, G-2
Computer link output and general purpose serial output ................................................................ 11-20
Conditions for each measurement program (measurement conditions)
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-84
Counting quantities by binary conversion ........................................................................... 9-92 to 93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Center of gravity ...................................................................................................................... 9-62
Gray and edge ........................................................................................................................ 9-59
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-57
Existence inspection by point measurement .............................................................................. 9-109
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-74
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-100
Positional deviation measurement ................................................................................................. 9-3
Conditions for objects to be measured (lead inspection) ......................................................... 9-74, 9-76
Conditions for object type (setting) ..................................................................................................... 9-1
Connection method
Connection with IV-S20 ................................................................................................................. 6-7
Connection with Mitsubishi PC .................................................................................................. 14-12
Connection with OMRON PC .................................................................................................. 14-15
Connection with Sharp PC ........................................................................................................... 14-6
Connector ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Connectors ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Contraction (binary noise elimination) .............................................................................. 9-10, G-2, G-4
Conversion connector ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Coordinates
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-53
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-41
Coordinates X/Y (lead inspection) .................................................................................................... 9-78
I-3
Copying (editing)
Copying between measurement programs ................................................................................ 9-29
Copying between object types ..................................................................................................... 9-28
Counter instructions (CN0 to CN7) ................................................................................................. 10-12
Counter terminals (CN0 to CN7) .................................................................................................... 10-10
Counting quantities by binary conversion
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-20
Computer link ........................................................................................................................ 14-10
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-6, 9-90
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-91
Setting details .............................................................................................................................. 9-92
Criteria conditions (degree of match inspection for shape and size) ................................................ 9-47
Criteria search condition (lead inspection) .............................................................................. 9-74, 9-75
Crosshair cursor display ..................................................................................................................... 8-8
[D]
Data flow (computer link) .................................................................................................................. 14-2
Data flow (general purpose serial I/F) .............................................................................................. 13-3
Data length ..................................................................................................................................... 11-18
Degree of match inspection (acceptance and rejection criteria) ....................................................... 3-14
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-53
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-67
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-78
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-41
Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-17
Computer link .......................................................................................................................... 14-7
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 3-15
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-4, 9-45
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-46
Setting details .............................................................................................................................. 9-47
Detection area, detection direction, detection mode
Distance and angle measurement (edge detection) .................................................................... 9-61
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-76
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-39
Detection precision (detection coordinate) ......................................................................................... 9-6
Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Binary processing ................................................................................................................... 9-51
Gray scale processing ............................................................................................................ 9-48
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search) ................................................................ 9-60
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-75
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-37
Deviation (positional deviation measurement) .................................................................................. 9-41
I-4
Direction key ................................................................................................................................ 5-3, 7-9
Direction of lead length measurement .............................................................................................. 9-76
Display mode .................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Distance
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-65
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-78
Distance and angle measurement
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-18
Computer link .......................................................................................................................... 14-8
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 3-22
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-4, 9-57
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-58
Setting details .............................................................................................................................. 9-59
Distance between X coordinates (distance condition) ...................................................................... 9-65
Distance between X coordinates (manual measurement) .................................................................. 8-8
Distance between Y coordinates (distance condition) ...................................................................... 9-65
Distance between Y coordinates (manual measurement) .................................................................. 8-8
Distance conditions (distance and angle measurement) .................................................................. 9-65
Distance number (distance and angle measurement) ...................................................................... 9-65
Download all parameters .................................................................................................................. 12-2
[E]
Edge detection .......................................................................................................................... 9-11, G-3
Edge detection conditions (Positional deviation measurement) ....................................................... 9-36
Editing
Copying ........................................................................................................................................ 9-28
Initialization .................................................................................................................................. 9-32
Edge extraction ........................................................................................................................... 9-9, G-3
Eliminating binary noise (the number of times)
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-51
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-62
Object identification by point measurement ............................................................................... 9-101
Elliptical window ................................................................................................................................. 9-5
Equipment connections
Connecting a power supply .......................................................................................................... 6-14
Connecting to the input/output terminal (parallel I/F) ................................................................... 6-16
Connecting a PC when using the computer link function ............................................................ 6-20
Connection for communications with personal computer (general-purpose serial I/F) ................ 6-18
ESC (cancel) key ......................................................................................................................... 5-3, 7-9
Evaluation conditions ........................................................................................................................ 9-13
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-86
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-94
I-5
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-53
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-67
Existence inspection by point measurement ................................................................. 9·111 to 112
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-78
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-103
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-41
Existence inspection by point measurement
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-23
Computer link ........................................................................................................................ 14-13
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 3-38
Outline ................................................................................................................................. 1-7, 9-107
Setting sequence ....................................................................................................................... 9-108
Setting details ............................................................................................................................ 9-109
Expansion (binary noise elimination) ................................................................................ 9-10, G-3, G-4
Extension camera cable (IV-S20EC2/4) ...................................................................................... 4-2, 6-8
External input terminals (X0 to X6) ................................................................................................. 10-10
External output instructions (Y0 to Y15) ......................................................................................... 10-12
External trigger ................................................................................................................................... 4-3
[F]
Fillet width (object identification by binary conversion) ........................................................... 9-102, G-4
Final calculation result terminals .................................................................................................... 10-10
Final evaluation result ....................................................................................................................... 3-14
Final numerical calculations ............................................................................................................. 9-18
Final numeric calculation result (measurement data block)
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) .............................................................................. 13-24
Computer link ............................................................................................................................. 14-14
Final output conditions ............................................................................................................. 10-8 to 15
Flat width ........................................................................................................................................... G-4
Focal length ........................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Focus .................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Freeze (image display mode) ............................................................................................................. 7-8
Full pixel reading ........................................................................................................................ 1-1, G-5
[G]
Gain/offset adjustment ........................................................................................................... 11-1, 11-22
Gray scale processing ................................................................................................................ 9-6, G-6
Gray scale search ....................................................................................................................... 1-2, G-6
Gray scale search conditions (positional deviation measurement) .................................................. 9-36
[H]
Halogen lamp .................................................................................................................................... G-6
Halt on NG measurement ................................................................................................................... 9-2
Hardware specifications ................................................................................................................... 16-2
High frequency lighting ...................................................................................................................... G-6
I-6
Horizontal line ..................................................................................................................................... 9-4
[I]
I/O port (ratings) ............................................................................................................................... 6-18
I/O terminal block ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Illuminance (light level) ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Illuminance (light level) monitor .............................................................................................. 9-115, G-7
Illuminance (light level) monitor condition ....................................................................................... 9-115
Image capture ..................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Image change key (SEL) ............................................................................................................. 5-3, 7-9
Image display ............................................................................................................................... 7-8,8-9
Image display area ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Image processing specifications ....................................................................................................... 16-1
Image settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-6
Initialization
Initialize “measurement conditions for each measurement program number” ............................. 9-31
Initialize “measurement condition of each type ............................................................................ 9-32
Total initialization ......................................................................................................................... 12-3
Input terminals (X0 to X6) ........................................................................................................ 6-17 to 18
Input/output conditions (settings) ...................................................................................................... 11-1
Installation condition ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Installation method
Installing the camera body .......................................................................................................... 6-12
Installing the IV-S20 main housing .............................................................................................. 6-10
Installation space ................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Interface (computer link) ................................................................................................................... 14-5
Interline transfer system .................................................................................................................... G-7
Iris ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Island ................................................................................................................................................. G-7
IV-S20 main housing ............................................................................................................ 4-1,5-1,16-1
IV-S20EC2/4 ................................................................................................................................. 4-2,6-8
IV-S20SP .................................................................................................................................... 4-2,7-14
IV-09MT ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2, 16-6
IV-60LD .............................................................................................................................. 4-2, 6-2, 16-7
[L]
Label area (objects identification by binary conversion) ................................................................. 9-103
Label number (objects identification by binary conversion) ............................................................ 9-103
Ladder circuit program creation ........................................................................................................ 10-3
Examples of a final output conditions and a ladder circuit ......................................................... 10-16
Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit ................................. 10-3
Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit ........................................... 10-8
Program examples ..................................................................................................................... 10-14
I-7
Lead inspection
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-18
Computer link .......................................................................................................................... 14-9
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 3-31
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-5, 9-72
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-73
Setting details .............................................................................................................................. 9-74
Lead length (lead inspection) ........................................................................................................... 9-78
Lead length measurement ................................................................................................................ 9-74
LED lighting equipment (IV-60LD) ........................................................................................ 4-2,6-2,16-7
Lens ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3, A-1
Lens focal length ......................................................................................................................... 6-3, 6-5
Lens holder .................................................................................................................................. 5-1, 6-3
Lighting equipment ...................................................................................................................... 6-1, A-1
Light level (degree of match inspection for shape and size) ............................................................ 9-53
Lock knob ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Lock screw .......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
[M]
Main axis angle (object identification by binary conversion) ................................................... 9-102, G-7
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 12-5, 15-5
Manual measurement (crosshair cursor display) ................................................................................ 8-8
Manual setting the object type ............................................................................................................ 8-9
Manual type change ................................................................................................................ 7-3, 10-16
Mask window ..................................................................................................................................... G-7
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-62
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
Measurement change ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
Measurement data blocks ...................................................................................................... 13-14,14-5
Measurement number switching X5, X6 .................................................................................... 11-1 to 2
Measurement object (lead inspection) .............................................................................................. 9-78
Measurement output conditions ......................................................................................................... 8-5
Measurement processing cycle ........................................................................................................ 10-2
Measurement program (outline of the settings) .................................................................................. 9-2
Measurement start input I/F ....................................................................................................... 11-1 to 2
Measurement start input settings ..................................................................................................... 11-3
Measurement start/brightness select key (TRG/BRT) ................................................................. 5-3, 7-9
Measurement window (positional)
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-48
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search) ................................................................ 9-60
I-8
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-75
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-37
Menu bar ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3
Menu configuration ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
Message display ................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Mode
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ......................................................................... 9-47
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-36
Model 0/1 (degree of match inspection for shape and size) ............................................................. 9-47
Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Monitor cable ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Monitor connector ............................................................................................................................... 5-2
Monitor output ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Monochrome monitor (IV-09MT) ................................................................................................ 4-2,16-6
[N]
Normalization correlation ............................................................................................................ 1-2, G-7
Number change .............................................................................................................................. 10-16
Number of objects
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-94
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-78
Objects identification by binary conversion ................................................................................ 9-103
Numerical calculations ...................................................................................................................... 9-14
Final numerical calculations ......................................................................................................... 9-18
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 3-45
Type and number of styles of entered for each measurement program ...................................... 9-17
Numerical calculation conditions
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-87
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-95
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-54
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-68
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-79
Object identification by binary conversion ................................................................................. 9-104
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-42
[O]
Object (distance and angle measurement) ....................................................................................... 9-67
Object conditions to be measured (lead inspection) ......................................................................... 9-76
Object identification and numbering function, (labeling) ............................................................. 9-8, G-8
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
I-9
Object identification by binary conversion
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ......................................................................... 13-20
Computer link ........................................................................................................................ 14-10
Operation example ....................................................................................................................... 9-99
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-6, 9-98
Setting details ............................................................................................................................ 9-100
Object number to be measured (lead inspection) ............................................................................. 9-74
Object type number .................................................................................................................... 9-1,9-28
Operation (run) cycle ........................................................................................................................ 10-1
Operation (run) screen ................................................................................................................. 7-2,8-9
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-89
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-97
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-56
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-70
Existence inspection by point measurement .............................................................................. 9-114
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-81
Menu bar .................................................................................................................................... 10-16
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion .................................................................. 9-106
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-44
Optical filter ......................................................................................................................................... A-1
Operation flow .................................................................................................................................. 7-10
Output change ................................................................................................................................ 10-16
Output conditions ....................................................................................................................... 10-1 to 7
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-88
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-96
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-55
Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................... 9-69
Existence inspection by point measurement .............................................................................. 9-113
Kinds of input signals in each measurement program ................................................................. 10-6
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-80
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-105
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-43
Output monitor (change) ..................................................................................................................... 8-1
Output terminals (Y0 to Y7, BUSY) .................................................................................................. 6-16
Output terminals (Y0 to Y15) .......................................................................................................... 10-10
[P]
Parallel input X5 ............................................................................................................................... 11-1
Parallel input X6 ........................................................................................................................ 8-2, 11-1
Parameter setting support software (for IV-S20) ........................................................................ 4-2,7-14
Partial image ....................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Parity .............................................................................................................................................. 11-18
Pattern display .................................................................................................................................... 8-5
PC function ....................................................................................................................................... 10-1
PC manufacturer ............................................................................................................................ 11-19
I-10
PC monitor .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
PC monitor screen .......................................................................................................................... 10-16
PC scan cycle ................................................................................................................................... 10-2
PC specifications .............................................................................................................................. 16-2
Peripheral (object identification by binary conversion) ................................................................... 9-102
Pixel ................................................................................................................................................... G-8
Pixel contraction ................................................................................................................................. 9-6
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-48
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search) ................................................................ 9-60
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-75
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-37
Point 1/2/3 (distance and angle measurement) ....................................................................... 9-64 to 66
Point position .................................................................................................................................. 9-110
Point registration ............................................................................................................................. 9-110
Point setting ......................................................................................................................... 9-109 to 110
Point size ........................................................................................................................................ 9-110
Position correction ............................................................................................................................ 9-20
Operation example ...................................................................................................................... 3-44
Positional deviation/absolute position measurement
Measurement data block
Communication (general purpose serial I/F) ................................................................ 13-14 to 15
Computer link ................................................................................................................... 14-5 to 6
Operation example ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Outline ................................................................................................................................... 1-3, 9-34
Setting procedure ......................................................................................................................... 9-35
Setting sequence ......................................................................................................................... 9-36
Power lamp ......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Power terminal block .......................................................................................................................... 5-2
Pre-processing ........................................................................................................................... 9-9, G-9
Pre-processing ................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-51
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-62
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-101
Processing code (general purpose serial I/F) ................................................................................... 13-1
Processing function (general purpose serial I/F) .............................................................................. 13-1
Processing mode (existence inspection by point measurement) ................................................... 9-109
Production configuration ..................................................................................................................... 4-2
Program examples
Computer link ............................................................................................................................. 14-17
PC function ................................................................................................................................ 10-14
Programmable output (auxiliary relay C116) ...................................................................................... 7-2
Progressive scan ........................................................................................................................ 1-1, G-9
I-11
[R]
Random shutter .......................................................................................................................... 1-1, G-9
Reading partial image ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
Rectangular window ........................................................................................................................... 9-3
Reference image
Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Binary processing ................................................................................................................... 9-51
Gray scale processing ............................................................................................................ 9-48
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search) ................................................................ 9-60
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-75
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-37
Reference image (between images) ................................................................................................. 9-26
Reflective lighting ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
Register change ................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Register setting ................................................................................................................................. 14-3
Registration number
Area measurement by binary conversion
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-86
Measurement conditions ......................................................................................................... 9-84
Counting quantities by binary conversion
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-94
Measurement conditions ......................................................................................................... 9-92
Degree of match inspection for shape and size
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-53
Measurement conditions ......................................................................................................... 9-47
Distance and angle measurement
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-67
Lead inspection
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-78
Measurement conditions ......................................................................................................... 9-74
Object identification by binary conversion
Evaluation conditions ............................................................................................................ 9-103
Measurement conditions ....................................................................................................... 9-100
Positional deviation measurement
Evaluation conditions .............................................................................................................. 9-41
Measurement conditions ......................................................................................................... 9-36
Remote key pad .......................................................................................................................... 4-1, 5-3
Remote key pad connector ................................................................................................................. 5-2
Remote key pad specifications ........................................................................................................... 7-9
Resolution ................................................................................................................................... 6-3, G-9
Result output settings ....................................................................................................................... 11-3
Run menu conditions .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
I-12
Run menu lock .................................................................................................................................... 8-9
[S]
Saving to flash memory .................................................................................................................... 12-4
Screen specifications .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Search area ....................................................................................................................................... G-9
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-48
Distance and angle measurement (gray scale search) ................................................................ 9-60
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-75
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-37
Search pixel ....................................................................................................................................... G-9
Self-diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 12-8
Serial (output) ................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Serial communication (settings) ..................................................................................................... 11-18
Serial communication conditions ...................................................................................................... 11-1
Set condition (configuration) ............................................................................................................... 7-7
Set key (SET) .............................................................................................................................. 5-3, 7-9
Setting and operating procedure ........................................................................................................ 7-1
Setting screen ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Setting window boundary ................................................................................................................... 9-7
Shared settings ................................................................................................................................... 9-3
Shutter speed .......................................................................................................................... 6-3, 9-117
Smoothing ................................................................................................................................ 9-9, G-10
Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (CCD element) ............................................................................. 6-4
Start CCD sampling input ................................................................................................. 4-5, 11-8 to 16
Starting point conditions (distance and angle measurement)
Center of gravity ........................................................................................................................... 9-62
Edge detection ............................................................................................................................. 9-61
Gray scale search ............................................................................................................... 9-59 to 60
Starting point mode (distance and angle measurement) .................................................................. 9-59
Starting point number (distance and angle measurement) ............................................................... 9-59
Starting point X/Y (distance and angle measurement) ..................................................................... 9-67
Status output .................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Station number ............................................................................................................................... 11-20
Stop ................................................................................................................................................ 11-18
Sub pixel (precision) ................................................................................................................. 1-2, G-10
Subtraction .............................................................................................................................. 9-24, 9-25
System configuration
Basic system configuration ............................................................................................................ 4-1
System configuration examples ..................................................................................................... 4-3
System I/O for each object type (calculation between images) ....................................................... 9-25
System set up menu ......................................................................................................................... 12-1
System settings .............................................................................................................................. 9-115
I-13
System, I/O setting for each item (calculation between images) ...................................................... 9-26
[T]
Termination code ..................................................................................................................... 13-4, 15-3
Threshold value (setting) ................................................................................................. 9-7, G-10 to 11
Area measurement by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-85
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-93
Degree of match inspection for shape and size ........................................................................... 9-51
Distance and angle measurement (center detection) .................................................................. 9-62
Distance and angle measurement (center of gravity) .................................................................. 9-61
Existence inspection by point measurement .............................................................................. 9-109
Lead inspection ............................................................................................................................ 9-76
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-76
Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................... 9-41
Through (image display mode) ........................................................................................................... 7-8
Timer instruction ............................................................................................................................. 10-12
Timer terminal ................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Title registration ................................................................................................................................ 9-33
Total area
Counting quantities by binary conversion .................................................................................... 9-94
Object identification by binary conversion .................................................................................. 9-103
Total initialization .............................................................................................................................. 12-3
Trigger window ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 15-1
[V]
Vertical line ......................................................................................................................................... 9-4
View ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3, 6-5
[W]
Whole image ....................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Window ............................................................................................................................................ G-11
Window shape selecting and setting .................................................................................................. 9-3
[X]
XY correction .................................................................................................................................... 9-20
[θ]
θ correction (standard, high precision) ............................................................................................. 9-20
θ correction image display .................................................................................................................. 8-7
I-14